POWER PARTS BOOK

PRECISION POWER CENTER

-
J-BOX, HI VOLTAGE
WllNPUT MONITOR
-
P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r
. --
Find

No. Description P a r t Nrmber

XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX RSP

Common P a r t s f o r A l l M o d e l s : -- --
Frame
Wheel, Caster, swivel

Leveler, Foot
Terminal S t r i p , 21 position

Screen, TOP
panel, S k i r t i n g , s i d e s and r e a r
Panel, , S k i r t i n g , Front

Transient suppression p l a t e

Terminal s t r i p , 6 p o s i t i o n
Phase R o t a t i o n m e t e r

E x t e r i o r P a n e l s Assembly ( e x c l u d e s d o o r s )
Panel, s i d e s and r e a r
E x t e r i o r D o o r s Assembly. VCMP

Trim, Aluminum. R i g h t door

Bezel, e x t e r i o r , f o r d i s p l a y
Bezel. i n t e r i o r , for display

Hinge, p a c k a g e of two

Latch, s w e l l
Panel, D o o r , Back i n s e r t , left

Panel, Ooor, Front, left

Panel. Door, Back i n s e r t , right

a
Panel, Ooor, Front, r i g h t

E x t e r i o r D o o r s Assembly, IGM

Trim, Aluminum, r i g h t door

Bezel, Interior 17,&so

Latch, swell ‘:Ff L A h
H i n g e , p a c k a g e of two
Panel, Ooor. Back i n s e r t , left

Panel, Ooor, F r o n t , left

P a n e l , Door, Back i n s e r t , right

Panel. Ooor, Front, right

C u r r e n t Transformers Assembly f o r IGM/VCMP

Current Transformer, 5015 amp

Current Transformer, 5 0 0 / 5 amp

Wire Harness, Current Transformer

I P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r

v
-. Find
No. Description P a r t Number

XXXX xxxx XXXX XXXX xxxx XXXX RSP

Suppressoi, Spike/Surge.
3 pole, 4 wire
Thermostat. 180°c, white

Thermostat, 200°c, red

Harness Assembly

Panelboards:

GE P l u g i n , 42 p o l e . A s s e m b l y
P a n e l b o a r d . 42 p o l e . GE p l u g
w1225A m a i n b k r

B r a c k e t , p a n e l b o a r d mount, GE

GE b o l t i n . 42 p o l e , Assembly

P a n e l b o a r d . 42 p o l e , GE b o l t
w/225A m a i n b k r .
Bracket, p a n e l b o a r d mount, GE

Square 0 P l u g - i n . 42 p o l e . A s s e m b l y

P a n e l b o a r d , 42 p o l e , sq. 0 plug,

w1225A m a i n b k r

B r a c k e t . P a n e l b o a r d Mount. Square 0

G r o u n d / N e u t r a l Bus B a r A s s e m b l y
L O WV o l t a g e C o n t r o l C a b l e s :
LOW v o l t a g e c o n t r o l c a b l e (wlno m o n i t o r )

Low v o l t a g e c o n t r o l c a b l e ( u / l G M , VCMP)
Floorstands:

4 inch floorstand, PPC

6 inch floorstand. PPC

7 inch floorstand, PPC

8 inch floorstand. PPC

9 inch floorstand. PPC

10 inch floorstand, PPC

12 inch floorstand, PPC

14 inch floorstand, PPC

15 i n c h f l o o r s t a n d . PPC

16 i n c h f l o o r s t a n d , PPC
18 inch floorstand, PPC

24 i n c h f l o o r s t a n d , PPC

Ground f a u l t i n t e r r u p t assembly
 P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r

Ffnd

'3
\ -
No. Description
XXXX XXXX
P a r t Number
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX RSP

Relay, ground break

Sensor, ground break
Wire harness, ground f a u l t t o 18 p i n s t r i p

Subfeed B r e a k e r Assembly, 225A

Emergency Power o f f B e z e i A s s e m b l y

(Used w/IGM o n l y )
Switch, guarded, push-button, epo

Lamp c l e a r , 28Y. wedge base, epo

Button, r e d w/black. emergency p o w e r o f f

Lens, p l a s t i c , alarm present

Guard, s w i t c h , push-button, epo

Bezel, b l a c k , p l a s t i c ifoam)
Harness a s s e m b l y , epo b e z e l

Wire harness, a l a r m epo

Accent Panels:
Panel, lower accent / ~ 1 5 5 > 3 P l- 3 ?n\bk
Panel, accent f r o n t , GE

Accent, f r o n t panel. bypass

Accent, f r o n t panel, square D

Accent, f r o n t panel, blank

Accent f r o n t panel, s q u a r e 0, 3 panel

Accent f r o n t panel, small breaker, output

A c c e n t f r o n t p a n e l , medium b r e a k e r , output

Accent, t a p panel, small breaker, input

Accent, t o p p a n e l , medium b r e a k e r , input

Accent, top panel, l a r g e breaker, input

Accent, t o p panel, small i n p u t breaker, pwrbst

Accent, t o p p a n e l , medium i n p u t b r e a k e r , pwrbst

Accent, t o p panel, l a r g e i n p u t breaker, pwrbst

Accent, t o p panel, blank

Accent Panel, Cover S n g l . Brkr. 10/30KVA

Accent Panel, Center knockout cover

Remote Emergency Power O f f A s s e m b l i e s :

Repo, c o m p l e t e 5 0 ' w i r e w/o r a c e w a y

Repo, c o m p l e t e 1 5 0 ' w i r e w l o r a c e w a y

Repo, c o m p l e t e 2 0 0 ' w i r e w/o r a c e w a y

Repo, c o m p l e t e 3 0 0 ' w i r e w/o r a c e w a y

Repo, w / 5 D Z w i r e w/o r a c e w a y L e l e c . b o x
I P r e c i s i o n Power Center

1 Find

NO. Description P a r t Number

XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX RSP

Repo, w/lOO1 w i r e . v / o raceway & e l e c box

Repo, c o m p l e t e w l o w i r e and r a c e w a y s
Switch, guarded. push-button, rep0

Lamp, clear, Z B V , wedge b a s e , r e p o

3-27 Button, red w/black, Emergency Power O f f

Guard, Switch, push-button, rep0

3-26 Coverplate, repo

3-29 E l e c t r i c Box, r e p 0

3-28 E l e c t r i c a l Cable, rep0

REP0 r a c e w a y

Raceway, repo, front

Raceway. repo, rear

P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 1 5 KVA

Find
No. Description P a r t Number
208V 240V 480V 575V 380V 415'4 RSP

-
PPCOISC-I PPOOISC-1 PPAOISC-1 PPBOISC-1 PPFOlSF-1 PFGOl5G-1

Iso. Transf. copper E12-6340 E12-6330 E12-6320 E12-7770 E12-7350 E12-8510

I s o . Transf. Alum. E12-6550 -- E12-0670 -- -- --
Main I n p u t B r e a k e r 210-0408 210-0407 210-0402 210-0401 210-0403 210-0403 X

I n p u t Power C a b l e 210-0242 210-0241

Power B l o c k , 2 pole(J-Box) E12-1140
Power B l o c k , 3 pole(J-Box) E12-1200
S p i k e S u p p r e s s o r Assembly 200-0012
C a p a c i t o r , 370V. 60 MF E12-2430
W i r e Harness, Spike Suppressor 200-0281
Wire Harness, Spike Suppressor 200-2434
Varistor. Mov E12-2420
J u n c t i o n Box. VCMPINo m o n i t o r 210-3903
J u n c t i o n Box I G M 210-3902 '

Fuse, 600V. 10 amp, K T K R E12-329A

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, s c r e w cap 4A10033Pl
Power B o o s t a s s y , k e y o p e r . 200-0916 200-0915 200-0913
Power B o o s t A s s y , w/o k e y 200-0927 200-0926 200-0924
Power B o o s t C o n t a c t o r E12-5110 E12-5050 E12-5060
Power B o o s t T r a n s f o r m e r E12-5210
Power B o o s t s w > t c h . k e y o p e r . E12-2920
Power B o o s t s w i t c h , w l o k e y E12-2520
Phase R o t a t i o n / L o s s A s s y 200-0190 200-0189 200-0191

R e l a y , Phase m o n i t o r E12-3000 E12-2990 El2-3010

w i r e harness, Ph. r o t l l o s s 210-0624

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, srew cap 4A10033P1
I s o l a t o r , v i b r a t i o n pad 512-0570
Precision Power C e n t e r 30 KVA

-
Find

No. Description P a r t Number

208V 240V 480V 575V 380V 415V RSP

PPC030C-1 PPOO3OC-1 PPA030C-1 PPB030C-1 PPF030F-1 PPG030G-1

150. Tramsf. Copper €12-6370 E12-7940 E12-6360 €12-0780 E12-7715 E12-6520

Iso. Transf. Alum. €12-0700 E12-8930 €12-0690 E12-8960 -- --
Main I n p u t Breaker 210-0413 210-0412 210-0407 210-0405 210-0408 X
I n p u t Power C a b l e 210-0236 210-0235 210-0242

Power B l o c k , 2 pole(J-Box) E12-1140

Power B l o c k , 3 pole(J-Box) €12-1200

S p i k e Suppressor Assy 200-0012 200-0011

Capacitor, 370'4, 60 MF €12-2430

Wire harness, Spike suppressor 200-0281

Wire harness. Spike suppressor 200-2434

Varistor. Mov E12-2420 1C13814PZ

J u n c t i o n Box, VCMP/no m o n i t o r 210-3903

J u n c t i o n Box, IGM 210-3902

Fuse, 600V. 10 amp, KTKR €12-329A

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, s c r e w cap 4A10033P1

Power B o o s t Assy, key operated 200-0918 200-0915 200-0914 -- --

Power B o o s t Assy, w/o key 200-0929 200-0926 200-0925 -- --
Power B o o s t c o n t a c t o r €12-5130 €12-5050 E12-5080 -- --
Power B o o s t T r a n s f o r m e r €12-5210 -- --
Power B o o s t s w i t c h , key o p e r a t e d €12-2920 -- --
Power a o o s t s w i t c h , w/o k e y €12-2510 -- --
Phase r o t a t i o n l l o s s a s s y 200-0190 200-0189 200-0191 200-0354

Relay, phase m o n i t o r €12-3000 E12-2990 E12-3010 E12-9720

w i r e harness, Ph. r o t / l o s s 210-0624

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, s c r e w cap 4A10033Pl

Isolator, vibration 512-0570

 P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 50 KVA

Find
(7 NO. Description P a r t Number
208V 240V 480V 575V 380V 415V RSP

PPC050C-1 PPO050C-1 PPAOSOC-1 PPB050C-1 PPFOSOF-1 PPG050G-1

2-15 I s o . T r a n s f . Copper €12-8580 €12-7950 E12-6380 E12-6510 E12-9590 E12-8900

2-15 I s o . Transf. Alum. E12-9030 -- E12-0710 -- -- --
3-33 Main i n p u t Breaker 210-0417 210-0416 210-0410 210-0409 210-0412

I n p u t Power C a b l e 210-0244 210-0242 210-0236

3-32 Power B l o c k , 2 p o l e ( J - ~ o x ) E17-0060 €12-1140

3-31 Power B l o c k , 3 pole(J-Box) €17-0070 E12-1200

2-12 Spike suppressor assy 200-0012 200-0011

2-13 Capacitor, 370V, 60 Mf E12-2430 X

2-14 Wire Harness, Spike Suppressor 200-0281

, 2-14 Wire Harness, Spike Suppressor 200-2434

V a r i s t o r , Mov E12-2420 1C13814P2 X
I
3--- J u n c t i o n Box, VCMP/na m o n i t o r 210-3901 210-3903

I 3-30 J u n t i o n Box 1GM

Fuse, 600V, 1 0 amp, KTKR
210-3900 210-3902
E12-329A X
I
'
I
T'
1-11 Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, s c r e w cap

Powerboost assy, k e y o p e r a t e d
P o w e r b o o s t a s s y , w/o k e y
200-0920
200-0931
200-0917

200-0928
4A10033Pl
200-0916

200-0927
--
--
--
--
Powerboost c o n t a c t o r El2-5160 €12-5070 €12-5110 -- --
Powerboost Transformer E05-4260 €12-5210 -- --
Powerboost switch, k e y operated €12-2920 -- --
Powerboost switch, w l o key E12-2510 -- --
I
M a ~ n t e n a n c eB y p a s s A s s y 210-0467 -- 210-0461 -- -- --
I n p u t Cable,Maint. Bypass 210-0231 -- 210-0238 -- -- -- X
I
2-17 Phase R o t a t i o n / L o s s A s s y 200-0190 200-0189 200-0191 200-0354
2-17 Relay, Phase m o n i t o r E12-3000 E12-2990 €12-3010 €12-9720

w i r e harness, P h l r o t l l o s s 210-0624
1-11 Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap 4A10033Pf

1 2-16 Isolator, vibration p a d 512-0570

P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 75 KVA

Find

NO. Oescription P a r t Number

208V 240V 480V 575V 380V 415V RSP

PPC075C-1 PPOO7SC-1 PPA075C-1 PPB075C-1 PPF075F-1 PPGO7G-1

Iso. Transf. Copper E12-6410 -- E12-6390 E12-7330 E12-7700 €12-7970

150. Transf, Alum. E12-0740 -- E12-0730 --

Main I n p u t Breaker 210-0420 210-0419 210-0414 210-0412
I n p u t Power C a b l e

Power B l o c k , 2 p o l e ( J - B o x )

Power B l o c k , 3 p o l e ( J - B o x )

S p i k e Suppressor Assy

Capacitor, 370V. 60 Mf

Y i r e Harness, Spike Suppressor

W i r e Harness, Spike Suppressor

Varistor, Mov

J u n c t i o n Box, VCMPfno m o n i t o r

J u n c t i o n Box, IGM

Fuse, SOOV, 10 amp, K T K R

Fuseholder , pnl-mnt, s c r e w cap

Powerboost Assy, key operated

Powerboost Assy, wfo k e y

Powerboost c o n t a c t o r

Powerboost t r a n s f o r m e r

Powerboost s w i t c h , key operated

Powerboost s w i t c h , wfo k e y

Maintenance Bypass Assy 210-0469 --

I n p u t Cable, Maint. Bypass 210-0231 --
C i r c u i t E k r , M a i n t . Bypass 210-0440 --
Phase r o t a t i o n f L o s s A s s y 200-0190

R e l a y Phase M o n i t o r E12-3000

w i r e harness, Ph. rotfloss

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap

Isolator. v i b r a t i o n pad
p r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 100 KVA

Find
Description P a r t Number
208V 240V 480V 575V 380V 415V RSP

PPC100C-1 PPOIOOC-1 PPA100C-1 PPB100C-1 PPF100F-1 PPG100G-1

I s o . T r a n s f . Copper E12-6440 E12-6430 E12-6420 E12-7310 E12-9690 E12-7690

I s o . T r a n s f . Alum. E12-0760 -- E12-0750 -- -- --
Main I n p u t Breaker 210-0422 210-0421 210-0416 210-0415 210-0417 X

I n p u t Power C a b l e 210-0245 210-0227 210-0232 210-0243 210-0244 200-0255

Power B l o c k , 2 p o l e ( J - B o x ) E17-0060

Power B l o c k , 3 pole(J-Box) El74070

S p i k e S u p p r e s s o r Assy 200-0014 200E0013

C a p a c i t o r , 370V. 60 Mf €12-2430 X

Wire Harness, Spike Suppressor 200-0282

Wire Harness, Spike Suppressor 200-2434

Varistor, Mov E12-2420 1C13814P2 X

J u n c t i o n Box, VCMPlno m o n i t o r 210-3901

J u n c t i o n Box IGM 210-3900

Fuse, 600V. 1 0 amp, KTKR E12-329A X

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, s c r e w cap 4A10033P1

P o w e r b o o s t Assy, k e y o p e r a t e d 200-0923 200-0922 200-0920
-- --
P o w e r b o o s t Assy. W/O key 200-0934 200-0933 200-0931
-- --
Powerboost c o n t a c t o r -- E12-5150 El2-5160
-- --
Powerboost Transformer E05-4260
-- --
Powerboost switch, key operated E12-2920
-- --
Powerboost switch, wlo key E12-2510
-- --
M a i n t e n a n c e Bypass A s s y -- -- 210-0466 . -- -- --
I n p u t Cable, Maintenance Bypass -- -- 210-0466
-- -- --
Crkt. B r k r , H a i n t . Bypass -- -- 210-0437 -- -- -- x
P h a s e R o t a t i o n l L o s s ASSy 200-0190 200-0189 200-0191 200-0354

R e l a y . Phase M o n i t o r E12-3000 E12-2990 El2-3010 E12-9720

w i r e harness, Ph. ~ O ~ / ~ O S S 210-0624

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap 4A10033P1
I s o l a t o r , v i b r a t i o n pad 1C14607P1
I P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 112XVA

Find

NO. Description P a r t Number

208V 240V 480V 575V 380V 415V RSP

PPC112C-1 P P O l l Z C - 1 PPA112C-1 P P F I I Z F - 1 PPF112F-1 PPF112G-1

I s o . Transf. Copper E12-6470 E12-6460 E12-6450 E12-8180 €12-8600 --

I s o . Transf. Alum. €12-7720 -- €12-7450 -- -- --
Main I n p u t Breaker 210-0423 210-0422 210-0417 210-0415 210-0418 X

I n p u t Power C a b l e 210-0245 210-0227 210-0231 210-0243 210-0244 210-0231

Power B l o c k , 2 p o l e ( J - B o x ) El74060

Power B l o c k , 3 pole(J-Box) Ell-0070

S p i k e Suppressor Assy 200-0014 200-0013

Capacitor, 370V, 60 M f E12-2430 X

Wire Harness. S p ~ k eS u p p r e s s o r 200-0282

M i r e Harness, Spike Suppressor 200-2434

V a r i s t o r , Mov E12-2420 1C13814P2 X

J u n c t i o n Box, VCMPIno m o n i t o r 210-3901

J u n c t i o n Box, IGM 210-3900 .

F u s e 600V. 1 0 amp, KTKR €12-329A

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt. screw cap 4A10033P1

Powerboost Assy, key operated 200-0923 200-0920 -- --

P o w e r b o o s t A s s y , w/o k e y 200-0934 200-0931 -- --
Powerboost c o n t a c t o r -- -- E12-5160 -- --
Powerboost Transformer E05-4260 -- --
Powerboost s w i t c h , key operated €12-2920 -- --
Powerboost s w i t c h , w/o k e y €12-2510 -- --
Maintenance Bypass Assy -- -- 210-0467 -- -- --
I n p u t Cable, Maint. Bypass -- -- 210-0231 -- -- --
Crkt. Brkr Maint. Bypass -- -- 210-0438 -- -- --
Phase R o t a t i o n I L o s s Assy 200-0190 200-0189 200-0191 200-0354

Relay. Phase M o n i t a r €12-3000 E12-2990 €12-3010 €12-9720

w i r e harness, Ph. rot/loss 210-0624

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap 4A10033Pl

Isolator. v i b r a t i o n pad lC14607Pl

P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 12SKVA

Find
NO. Description P a r t Number
20BV 240Y 480V 575V 380V 415V RSP

Iso. Transf. Copper E12-6570 E12-6490 E12-6480 E12-8130

Iso. Transf. Alum. E12-7750 -- E12-0790 --
Main I n p u t Breaker 210-0424 210-0422 210-0417 E12-0416
I n p u t Power C a b l e 210-0229 210-0245 210-0231 210-0232
Power B l o c k . 2 p o l e ( J - B o x ) E12-0060
Power B l o c k , 3 pole(J-Box) Ell-0070
S p i k e Suppressor Assy 200-0014
Capacitor, 370V. 60 M f El2-2430
Wire Harness, S p i k e S U P P ~ ~ S S ~ ~ 200-0282
Wire Harness, S p i k e Suppressor 200-2434
Varistor, MOV E12-2420
J u n c t i o n Box, VCMP n o l m o n i t o r 210-3901
J u n c t i o n Box, 1GM 210-3900
Fuse, 600V. 1 0 amp, KTKR 512-329A

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap 4A10033P1

Powerboost Assy, key operated 200-0923 200-0920

Powerboost Assy, w l o key 200-0934 200-0931

Powerboost c o n t a c t o r -- -- E12-5160

Powerboost t r a n s f o r m e r E05-4260
Powerboost s w i t c h , key operated E12-2920
Powerboost switch. w/O key E12-2510
Maintenance bypass assy -- -- 210-0467
--
I n p u t Cable, m a i n t e n a n c e Bypass -- -- 210-0231 --
C r k t . B r k r , M a i n t . Bypass -- -- 210-0438 --
Phase r o t a t i o n / l o s s assy 200-0190 200-0189 200-0191
Relay, phase m o n i t o r E12-3000 E12-2990 E12-3010
w i r e harness, Ph. r o t / l o s s . 210-0624
4A10033P1
Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap
1C14607P1
Isolator, v i b r a t i o n pad
P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 150 K V A

Find

NO. Description P a r t Number

208V 240V 480Y 575V 38OY 415V RSP

2-L5 [so. Traosf. Alum. €12-7760

3-33 Main i n p u t b r e a k e r 210-0425

I n p u t power c a b l e --
3-32 Power b l o c k , 2 pole(J-Box) --
3-31 Power b l o c k , 3 pole(J-Box) --
2-12 Spike suppressor assy

2-13 Capacitor, 370V. 60 Mf

2-14 Wire harness. spike suppressor

2-14 Wire harness, s p i k e suppressor 200-2434

Varistor, Mov
1
3--- J u n c t i o n Box VCMP/no m o n i t o r

3-30 J u n c t i o n Box, IGM

Fuse, 600V. 10 amp, KTKR

1-11 Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, s c r e w cap

Powerboost assy, key operated

Powerboost assy, w/o k e y

Powerboost c o n t a c t o r

Powerboost t r a n s f o r m e r

Powerboost s w i t c h , key operated

. Powerboost s w i t c h , w/o k e y

2-17 Phase r o t a t i o n / l o s s assy

2-17 R e l a y , phase m o n i t o r

w i r e harness, Ph. rot/loss

1-11 Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap

2-16 Isolator, v i b r a t i o n pad

 P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 200 K V A

-Find
' \,
P a r t Number
\\ NO. Description
208V 240V 480V 575V 380V 415V RSP

I s o . Transf. Copper
I r o . T r a n s f . Alum.

Main i n p u t breaker
I n p u t power c a b l e
power b l o c k , 2 pole(J-BOX)
Power b l o c k , 3 pole(J-80x1

S p i k e suppressor assy
Capacitor, 370V, 60 Mf

Wire harness, splke suppressor

W i r e h a r n e s s , s p i k e SUpPreSSOr
Varistor, MOV

J u n c t i o n b o x , VCMPlno m o n i t o r
J u n c t i o n box, IGM

Fuse, 600V, 10 amp, KTKR

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, s c r e w cap
Powerboost assy, key o p e r a t e d

P o w e r b o o s t assy, w l o k e y
Powerboost c o n t a c t o r

Powerboost transformer
Powerboost switch, k e y operated

Powerboost switch, w l o key

Maintenance bypass a s s y
I n p u t cable, maintenance bypass

C r k t . B r k r , M a i n t . Bypass
Phase r o t a t i o n / l o s s asSY
Relay, phase m o n i t o r
w i r e h a r n e s s . Ph. r o t / l o s s
Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap

I s o l a t o r , v i b r a t i o n pad
I P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r 225 KVA

Find

No. Description P a r t Number

208V 240'4 480V 575V 380V 415V RSP

PPC225C-1 PP0225C-1 PPA225C-1 PP8225C-1 PPF225F-1 PPG225G-1

Iso. Transf. Copper

I s o . Transf. Alum.

Main i n p u t breaker

l n p u t power c a b l e

Power b l a c k . 2 pole(J-8ox)

Power b l o c k , 3 pole(J-lox)
S p i k e suppressor assy

Capacitor, 370V. 60 Hf

Wire harness, spike suppressor

Wire harness, spike suppressor

Varistor. Hov

J u n c t i o n box. VCMP/no m o n i t o r

J u n c t i o n box, IGM

Fuse. 600V. 1 0 amp, KTKR

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap

Powerboost assy. key operated

Powerboost assy, w/o k e y

Powerboost c o n t a c t o r

Powerboost t r a n s f o r m e r

Powerboost s w i t c h . key operated

Powerboost switch, w/o k e y

Phase r o t a t i o n / l o s s a s s y

Relay, phase m o n i t o r

w i r e harness, Ph. r o t / l o s s

Fuseholder, pnl-mnt, screw cap

Isolator, v i b r a t i o n pad ' 1C14607Pl

 Branch Circuit B r e a k e r I n d e x

Oescriptian P a r t Number
General Electric Square 0
Plug-in Bolt-in Plug-in Bolt-in

1 p o l e 1 5 amp E12-0120 E12-2610 E12-012A E12-261A

1 p o l e 20 amp €12-0130 E12-2620 El2-013A €12-262A

1 p o l e 3 0 amp E12-0140 E12-2630 E12-O14A E12-263A

1 p o l e 4 0 amp E12-2550 E12-3370 E12-255A E12-337A

1 p a l e 5 0 amp E12-0150 E12-3380 E12-015A E12-33BA

1 p o l e 6 0 amp E12-3400 €12-3390 €12-340A E12-339A

2 p o l e 1 5 amp

2 p a l e 20 amp
2 p o l e 3 0 amp

2 p o l e 40 amp
2 p o l e 5 0 amp
2 p o l e 6 0 amp

2 p o l e 7 0 amp

2 p o l e 8 0 amp

3 p o l e 1 5 amp
I -\
3 p o l e 20 amp
L* 3 p o l e 25 amp
3 p o l e 3 0 amp

3 p o l e 35 amp

3 p o l e 40 amp

3 p o l e 45 amp

3 p o l e 5 0 amp

3 p o l e 60 amp
3 p o l e 70 amp

3 p o l e 8 0 amp

3 p o l e 90 amp
3 p o l e 1 0 0 amp
C a b l e Connection Index

- _ I _ _ _ _

Conduit
Receptacle Box Coverplate Adapter

C a b l e T y p e (Nema C o n f i g . )

IBMA

IBMO-1

IBMA-2

IBMA-6

IBMB
IBMC

I BMD
I8ME

IBMF

515R-1

515R-2

515R-4 (21

520R-1

520R-2

52013-4 (2)

53OP-1

530R-2 (2)

550R-1

615R-1

615R-2

62OR-1

620R-2

630R-1

650R-1

142OR-1

1430R-1

1430R-1

1520R-1

L515R-1
Cable Connection I n d e x

Receptacle Box Coverplate

L515R-2

L520R-1

L520R-2

L530R-1

L615R-1

L615R-1

L615R-2

L620R-1

L63OR-1

L1420R-1

L1430R-1

L143OR-2

L1520R-1

L1530R-1

L2120R-1

L2130R-1

L715R-2

L22ZOR-1

H o n e y w e l l 25403

IG515R-1

IG515R-2

IG520R-2

IG615R-1

IG630R-1

IGL15R-2

IGL520R-1

IGL530R-1

IGL615R-1

IGL1420R-1

IGL1430R-1

IGL2120R-1

IGL2130R-1
 bLiebert
Power
Conditioning
Systems

SITE PREPARATION AND

INSTALLATION MANUAL
RECEIVING AND INSTALLATION
Initial Procedures
Unpacking and Preliminary Inspection
Handling Considerations
Moving Procedure
Location Considerations
Junction Box Installation
Input Power Connections
Grounding Electrode Conductor
Output Power Connections
Control Wiring Connections
EQUIPMENTINSPECTIONAND START-UP
lntemal Inspection ....~
., .
9.;' .\

start-up
CHECK LIST, INSPECTION AND START-UP
Inspection
start-up
MonitoringSystem Check-Out
Equipment Connection Check-Out
MAINTENANCE INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Cleaning
ElectricalConnections

Typical Cabinet Data Mini-Center

Typical Roar Cutout, Mini-Center
Recommended Minimum Clearances. Mini-Center
Typical Junction Box Connections
Typical Control Wiring Diagram, Units With No Monitoring
Typical Control Wiring Diagram, Units With VCMP
TABLES
I
Typical Junction Box Dimensions
Suggested Minimum Wire Size Data
Torque Specifications
 Receiving and Installation

This section contains instructions for inspec-
tion, unpacking, handling, moving and setting
up the MiniCenter power conditioning unit.
INITIAL PROCEDURES
Upon receipt o f a Mini-Center p o w e r con.
ditioning unit, the installer should perform
t h e following steps t o assure a quality
installation.
UNPACKING AND PRELIMINARY
INSPECTION
~ l n s p ~the c tshipping crate(s) for oamage
are adequate to suppon the we~ght.(1.e. Are the
doorways, eievators, ramps, etc. adequate? Are
there any non-negotiable corners or offsets in the
hallways?)
IMove w i t h care. In order to prevent panel
damage, it is recommended that the exterior side
panels be removed before the unit is moved, and
that they not be replaced until the unit is in its final
installed position.
MOVING PROCEDURE
Easily moved. The Mini-Center is of such a
size and weight that it may be easily removed from

the ;nit($
-
or sons of m~snanolinaoetore anem~tina
, - to unpacK the shipping pallet and installed by customer per-
sonnel. A typical procedure is as follows: .-
2. Open the shipping c r a t e s by carefully 1. Set the palletized assembly in a level area, where
removing the sides, ends, and top. (Use care to there is enough room to roll the unit and entire cable
avoid puncturing the container with sharp objects assembly off the pallet onto the floor. ..
that would damage the contents.) 2. Cut the shipping bands.
3. R e m o v e the packingand v a p o r bamem
.:
a n d mspect the equipment for any obvious
sh~ppingdamages. The shipping bands may be under tension. Use
NOTE appropriate eye, face, and hand protection to
The units should not be loosened from the shipping pallet safeguard against iniury from band backlash.
until after all handling by lork lift or pallet jack is completed.
Complete internal inspeclionshould be accomplished only 3. Remove the Factoryprovided ramp from its ship-
I atter eauipment Wsltlonin~.Dnor to electrical hWkUD. ping position (either on top of the cable reel(s) or on
the end of the pallet in front of the reel(s) ), and
4. If any damag. as a result o f shipping is locate the ramp on the floor adjacent to the pallet to
/- observed, immediately file a claim with the ship- provide a smooth path from pallet to floor.
pmg agency and forward a copy of this claim to: 4. Remove the bolts holding the unit to the shipping
Lieberi Corporation pallet. (Located in each of the four bottom comers.)
1050 Dearborn Drive 5. If cables are on wheeled cable reel@), remove
P.O.Box 29186 bolts holding reel@)to pallet.
Columbus. Ohio 43229 6. Remove shipping blocks from under unit and-.
Attn: Customer Service cable assembly, then remove . ... chocks from all': ''1
HANDLINQ CONSIDERATIONS casters. . n-' ,
.I
.,..-.; ,,. - .
.& ,
The Mini-Center module (and cables, if furnished) is 7. Roll unit off pallet onto fl&r, caiefully guiding -. ..
bolted to a wooden pallet to allow handling by fork- cable reels after it. . ..! , . . .. . . . ,. . .-
lift equipment. Also, the MiniCenter module and 8. Roll unit and cable package to location of ---
cable reels are furnished with casters to allow the installation.
.... .- --- - .
. .. . .,,. . . ........,.-,. .. . ~
. .
..
. -. . ..-......
. . A&
,~
..

unit to be rolled into olace after it has been unbolted

- ~~

b
from the pallet.
IC h e c k size and w&ht. Refer to the cabinet Belore maneuveringthe unit into its final position. read and
drawinas for size and weight intonation. Typical fnllnw all advisories
tions" paragraphs.
- "Locallon Consadera-
-- - - in the follow~na ~ ~

.--..
1 cab~nerdataIS shown in Figure 1.
I Plan the route. The route that the Mini-Center .

,..---.-IIPwdl fnllow to
rnnh .- its installation area should be
- -~
~ ~ ~

planned to ensure that all passages are large

enough to accommodate the unit, and that the floors
Figure I.
Typical Cabinet Data Mini Center

(=ioet@ .3
'
VCMP NO MON

POWER MONITOR DISPLAY DATA

@) SEE DISPLAY DATA

FRONTVIEW SIDEVIEW

ITEM NOTES:
1. LEVELERS ADD APPROXIMATELY 2.1508mm1TO UNIT
TOTAL HEIGHT. LEVELERS ARE MOUNTED ON B O l 7 O M
CORNERS OF FRAME AND ARE USED ONLY TO STABILIZE
UNIT.

--

3. SIDE AND REAR PANELS HAVE TRANSFORMER COOLING

AIR VENTS.

. ~-~
CONNECTIONS. FOR UNITS WITH TRANSFORMER. 6 '
(152mm) MINIMUM CLEARANCE IS REQUIRED ON ALL
SIDES FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING.
 (
~-
7 LOCATION CONSIDERATIONS
W Environment. The Mini-Center is designed for
operation in ambient temperatures of OcCto 40°C
with a reiative humidity of 0% to 95% (nOn-COn-
densmg).
W Bottom Clearance. The unit is suitable for
non-raised-floorapplications, since transformer
cooling and cable exit can be accomplished using
the lower screens in the side and rear panels.
For raised floor a~~lications, a minimum of a
6-lnch (15-cm) h e ~ i hISi recommended for bottom
cable exlt. Fiaure 2 shows a recommended floor
cutout to facibte -
former cooling.
cable
..*, exit
. -and trans-
Service Clearances. The Mini-Center is
designed to allow all service and maintenance to be
,oerformed from the front and one side. As shown in
-
Figure 3, the recommendedminimum clearance is
42 inches (107 cm)on the front and one other side
(or rear), in accordance with the National Electrical
Code, article 110-6. The left side of the unit is
recommended to be accessible for installation and
maintenance of the input connections.
Clearance of at least 6 inches (15 cm) on the rear
of the unit and 26 inches (66 cm) above the unit is
required for opening the hingedtop. For units with a
transformer, all sides (excluding front) must have at
least 6 inches (15 cm) clearance for transformer
cooling air flow. (This is in addition to the 42-in&
(107 cm) service clearances required on one side
and front.)
Figum 2.
Typical ~ai&- lo or Cut-Out, Mini-Contmr.
FRONT OF UNIT
/ ~ -
L) NOTES.
1 USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN POSITIONING THE
I UNIT. AS CASTERS ARE NEAR FLOOR CUTOUT
HOLES FAILURE TO EXERCISE CAUTION MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE UNIT AND AND.OR
THE FLOOR
2. AN ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE MAY BE NEEDED
I FOR EXTRA-LARGE CABLES.
JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION (if used)
A High Voltage and a Low Voltage Junct~onBox
are optlonal features for Mini-Center Power
- - . .-...- . .- ..
Conditioner
Shipping Arrangements. The junction
boxes, if used, can either be shipped with the
system or can be advanceshipped for installation
during the roughing-in stage of new construction.
Installation Location. The flexible cables
supplied by the factory for connecting the junction
boxes to the unit are 12 feet (3.6 metres) long. The
junction boxes should be installed a maximum of
10 feet (3 metres) from the feeder entrance of the
Mini-Center unit. --i.:
1. ':,.
%
.
J u n c t i o n Box Connections must be-'.:
installed in compliance with the NEC and all other
applicable codes.
Verify that lncomin hlgbvoltage (power) and
7
low-voltage (contro ) clrcults are de-energlzed
and locked out betom lnstalllng cables or
maklng any connections In the junction box.
Specific junction box connections are shown on the
individual installation drawings for the unit Typical
connections are shown in Figure 4 and described
inthe Main Input Power Wiring Connection and
Control Wiring Connection paragraphs. 2-
Dlmonrions. Dimensions are given on the
drawings furnished with the unit. Typical exterior
dimensions of the junction boxes are as shown in
Table I.
.-L a * WM
Y -
F l g u n 3. 4
Rocommondod Minimum Clearances,
Mlni-Contu. ,-.
 -

Figure 4. INPUT POWER

Typical Junction Box Connections. CONNECTIONS
s*01r .wIOLO~W
eU
O
CE91RI r
:i.srau.arawuar*ocso.*scnc*r Connection locations. If the M~I-Center
system IS furnished wlth an lnuut fh~oh-voltam)
- --=-,
junctlon box, input power connectiork are made
within this junction box. If a junction box is not
furnished, the input power feeder 1s connected to
the input power blocks located on the left side - - of
.
the unrt.
Refer to the power installation drawings for
the unit.

Verify that all incoming high-voltage (power)

and low-voltage (control) circuits are de-
energized and locked out before installing
cables ormaking any connections, whether in
the junction box or in the unit.
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX

W The 3-phase power input to the Mini-Center

is normally supplied directly from the service
t
a
entrance. m
0
W Typical conductor size data is shown m
in Table II.All connections must comply with the 2

-"
- /
,DO-
,u.cDIsm
.I.&
.WI-I
>n*
'\
.,
.
., L;.=!
9l6
.=f .... -
g%zMm
y&!j!j&"
NEC and all other applicable codes. Suggested
minimum wire sizes are given on the installation
drawings furnished with.the unit.
W Inputfeeder configurations. The power in-
stallation drawing describes the input power feeder
configurations required.
z.

9F
.-F===::.. !
.=. -.
. . For Mini-Centers furnished with a trao&rmer,
, ...
,
j
the input feeder cable should consist of three
phase conductors and one (safety) ground-.conduc-
HIGH VOLTAGE INPUTJUNCTION BOX tor (3W .+ G). .- ...
For Mini-Centers furnished without a trans-
former, the input power feeder should consist of
-
30
Z
three phase conductors, one neutral conductor,
and one ground conductor (4W + G).
Table I.TVpical Junctlon
B o x Dlmensions.
Low Voltage Control Junction Box:
Inches Mllllmettes
Width 8 203
Length 10 254
Hetght 4 102

Main Input Junction Box:

INPUT VOLTAGE
2081240 3801415 4801575
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
 50 52 IU
..
.... . ,
FLA = Full Load Amps of Mini-Center. NOTES:
1) Main input power feeder should be dedicated feeder direct
OPD = Overcurrent Protection Device inside Mini-Center.
from service entrance if possible. Ground conducton are
Wire Sizes based on NEC 1984Table 310-16, using 75'C recommendedto be parity sized with power conductors for
copper conductor. increased system pertormame. Ground conductor mini-
mum size per NEC Table 250-95. Input power feeder mn-
duit may be used as safety ground (customer opbn). If
conduit is used, adequate electrical continuity must be
maintained at all conduit connections to enclosures and
throughout the conduit run. . , .
2) lnput feeder wire size listed in Table IIis the minimum
feeder size recommended. Larger wire size may be
:' required becauseof witage drop or .supply 0verriid
. -..9 . 3 m i . h c , q
. .
, meetion. "' ..
-'.
... . .,
: . ,.. . -
.. . .. . 7 ;
GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR
R e a u i r e d bv code-7P.e hatlcnal E ecrrlc
Code (NEC 250y26) requires a groundrng electrode
conductor for Mini-Center unrts equlpped wrth
?ansformers 3ecause tne M no-Centerw tn a
:ransformer s an so la ti no oevice (no oirect electrl-
cal connection betkeen ihe primah and secondary
windings), a local grounding electrode conductor
should be installed in addition to the equipment
safety ground which is normally nm with the input
power conductors.
1 Sizing of the qroundin~electrode conductor is
oaseo o i t h e seconoary 6rcu1tconductors. Accord-
~ng to tne NEC (Table 250-94), the minimum
recommended AWG size is as follows:
KVA 15 30 50
AWG 8 8 4 eneraired and locked out before installina
Assuming 75'C copper conductors.
H Unit connection. A power termmal block IS
furnished rnsde the unit for fieidconnecting the
grounding electrode conductor to the secondary
neutral conductor. (See the power installation
drawing for the unit.)
1 E l e c t r o d e connection. The grounding elec-
trode conductor is required to be run from the
secondary grounded circuit conductor (neutral) to
the nearest effectively grounded: (In order of
preference.)
1) Building steel.
2) Metal water pipe.
3) Other made aroundino electrode.
1 decornrnendh metiiods for running the
grounding electrode conductor: (Arranged
in order of preference for system performance>
(As acceptable by local and other applicable
codes.)
1) Outside of conduit.
2) Inside non-metallic conduit.
3) lnside non-ferrous donduit.
4) lnside ferrous conduit, bonded'to the ferrous
conduit at both ends, as acceptable by local
and other applicable codes.
OUTPUT POWER CONNECTIONS
Verify that incoming high voltage circuits are
deenergized and locked-out before making
any output power connections.
--
H O u t p u t circuit b r e a k e r ( ~ andla:
) p~ael.
boards with ground and neutral provisions are
provided inside the Mini-Center for connection to
the load@)as required. See installation and
cabinet drawings for the unit for details.
Output distribution cables are optlonal
and may be factory supplred
H Code compliance. All output cables and
connecttons must comply w~ththe NEC and all
other applicable codes.
H A l l flexible output cable routes should
follow r~ght-anglepaths rather than d~agonalor
dlrect paths. The flex~blecables should be run in a
parallel path, lying flat on the floor, to prevent the
restnctlon of a~r-Howunder the floor
CONTROL WIRING CONNECTIONS
Verify that all incoming high-voltage (power)
and low-voltage (control) circuits are d e
cables or making any connections, whit& in
the junction box or in the unit.
1 E x t e r n a l control wiring connections
for remote shutdown, andlor alarms are made
to the low-voltagejunction box (if used) or to the
low-voltage control section located inside the
Mini-Center.
W C o d e compliance. Control wiring connec-
tions must comply with the NEC and ail other
applicable codes.
Control wiring connections vary with the type of
monitoring system furnished with the Mini-Center.
Refer to the Control Installation Drawings for the
unit. Typical control wiring connections as shown in
Figures 5 and 6.
SITEMASTER COMMUNICATION
CONNECTIONS 5
~- z
Mini-Centers with VCMP monitoring are fur-
nished with a separate low voltage terminal strip
inside the unl for connecting the two-wire,
twisted pair communication cable to the Sitemaster
Centralized Monitor Console (optional). Refer to
the Sitemaster Owners Manual for Sitemaster
communication cable installation instructions.
Building
Interfacn Relay
\
Electronics Section
 Figure No. 5.
, Twical Control Wiring Diagram For Units
\* - W-ithout Monitoring -
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX IF SUPPLIED
OR
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SECTION 1NS10E UNlT

-
OPTIONAL
m U R
SOURCE TO BE
0 YIVDC OR AC
M

M U INDICATOR LOAD
TOBEOSWP 1 O W
[SEE NOTE 4
W 7 N.C. OVERTEMP ALARM
\
$

OPTIONAL

LOW CURRENT 24-

U H P L O M TO BE 24VDC. I *UP
, W TOTAL (SEE NOTE 21

F N.C. R E F 0
S USED

OPTIONAL
-TE EMERGENCY
SWITCH SUITABLE FOR SWlTCHlW
LOW CURRENT 24VDC.
U H P L O M TO BE 24'4% I *UP
W.TOTAL I Y E NOTE 21.

NOTES
-- -- .. .- INTERFACE
, . RI 111 nlNG . - RELAY CAN BE USED FOR 3. ALL AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES AND CABLING
REMOTE SHUTDOWNOR ALARM. RELAY IS TO BE FIEW SUPPLIED EXCEPT AS NOTED. FIELD
ENERGIZED DURING NORMAL OPERATION OF SUPPLIED CONTROL WIRING RECOMMENDEDTO
POWER CENTER. DPDT CONTACTS RATED '1. HP AT BE #I8 AWQ MIN. STRANDED COPPER WITH 300
12OVAC. 10A AT 28VDC OR 240VAC MAX. VOLT MIN. INSULATION.
2. OTHER N.O. REMOTE EMERGENCY POWER OFF 4. OVERTEMP INDICATOR IS DE-ENERGIZED WHEN
DEVICES MAY BE WIRED IN PARALLEL TO N.O. UNlT OVERTEMPERATURE IS SENSED.
REPO CONTACTS. OTHER N.C. REMOTE
EMERGENCY POWER OFF DEVICES MAY BE WIRED
IN SERIES TO THE N.C. REPO CONTACTS. MULTIPLE
REPO LAMPS AND OTHER 24VDC LOADS MAY BE
WIRED IN PARALLELTO REPO LAMP. MAX. 24VDC
SUPPLY AVAILABLE IS 1 AMP TOTAL (BOTH N.O. 8
N.C. REPO SWITCHES ARE POWERED FROM THE
SAME SUPPLY).
 Figure No. 6.
Typical Control Wiring Diagram For Units
With VCMP.
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION a o x NF~ U P P L ~ E O
OR
- LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SECTION !NSIOG UNIT

SOURCE

)z
e
~5
2:
%
>u
6%
ts
zg
L

i
SWITCH SUITABLE FOR SWTCHINCI
L W CURRENT 24VOC.
U M P LO*D TO BE 24VDC. 1 * U P
MAX. TOTAL ISEE NOTE It.

LOW CURRENT ZIVOC.

UlHP LOAD TO BE 2 4 M C . IAMP
M U . TOTAL ISEE NOTE 2).

NOTES
1. BUILDING INTERFACE RELAY CAN BE USED FOR
REMOTE SHUTDOWN OR ALARM. RELAY IS
ENERGIZED DURING NORMAL OPERATION OF
3. ALL AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES AND CABLING
TO BE FIELD SUPPLIED EXCEPT AS NOTED. FIELD
SUPPLIED CONTROL .-WIRING RECOMMENDED TO
~~

POWER CENTER. DPDT CONTACTS RATED % HP AT BE # I 6 AWGMIN. STRANnEll M O O C c l W l T L

120VAC. 10A AT 28VDC OR 240VAC MAX.
2. OTHER N.O. REMOTE EMERGENCY POWER OFF
DEVICES MAY BE WIRED IN PARALLEL TO N.O.
REPO CONTACTS. OTHER N.C. REMOTE
- - -
EMERGENCY POWER OFF DEVICES MAY BE WIRED
IN SERnES TO THE Fc C. REPO CONTACTS. MULTlPlF
REPO LAMPS AND OTHER 24VDC LOADS MAY BE
~
VOLT MIN. INSUlATlOl
4. REMOTE ALARM INDICATOR NO 1 IS ENERGIZED
WHEN POWER CENTER IS Otj AND NO ALARMS ARE
PRESENT. REMOTE ALARM INDICATOR NO 2 IS
ENERGIZED WHEN ANY ALARM IS PRESENT
REMOTE ALARM CONTACTS ARE RESET WITH

POWER CENTER SILENCE BUnON

WIRED IN PARALLEL TO REPO LAMP. MAX. 24VDC
SUPPLY AVAILABLE IS 1 AMP TOTAL (BOTH N.O. &
N.C. REPO SWITCHES ARE POWERED FROM THE
SAME SUPPLY).
 Equipment lnspection and Start-up

INTERNAL INSPECTION START-UP

(7
A detailed i n t e r n a l inspection should be
performed after the unit is in place and before it is
energized, to ensure trouble-freestart-up. The
same internal inspection should be carried out when
nerformino oreventive
-. - -
2 7
maintenance.
Verify that all incoming power and control cir-
cuits are deeneraized and locked out before
performing the isernal inspection.
Checklists. Each step in the following
detailed step-by-step checklists should be per-
formed by the installing personnel when installing
and starting up any Mini-Center System.
H Warranty effectivity. A copy of the
appropriate checklist tfurnlsnea wltn tne equip-
ment) must be completed, signeo. dated, ana
returnea to the Factory.
Warranty coverage of the equipment i s not
effective unless the Check List i s received by
the Factory.

--extenor panels. -
Equipment inspection and start-up should be
Visually inspect. Be sure w m g and compo- performed only by trained personnel.
nents are not damaged. Hazardous voltages are present during start-up
C h e c k power connections. Check 4 procedures.

rn power connecbons for t~ghtness.Refer to Table Ill

for torque requlrernents of all electn~alCOnneCtlonS.
- .Perform
- ~ f o r-m a l detailed insmction. Fol-
~
-~~~
Electrical safety precautions must be followed
throughout inspection and start-up.
low Equipment InspectionAnd Start--UpCheck List
when performing detailed inspection.

Table Ill. Torque Specifications. C. Panelboard . ..--

CI w
A. Nut & Bolt Combinations:
Connections
(Ib.ln) (kgm)

shaft Slzm
BOI~ Busbar-to-Breaker 90 1.04
Compress~onLug 250 2.88

Blsrken:
(1b.h) (kwm)
Up to 30 Amp 35 0.40
9. M a i n Input C i r c u i t Breakm
Bmak*rslu . Bolt-On
(1b.h)
Conmctlon Compmsmion Lug
(kgm) (Ib4n) (kgm)
E
-. Terminal Block
Up to 100 Amp 30 0.35 30 0.35 ~ o m ~ r e s s i Lug:
on
110to225Amp 90 1.04 90 1.04
AWQ W l m -0 (IbW (kpm)
250 to 600 Amp 190 2.19 60 0.69
#14-#lo 35 0.40
dm M OAJ?
 Equipment Inspection and Start-up rn
Check List for the Mini-Center 0

Date:
-
C
7

START-UP

Unlt Serlal Number.

Unit Model Number, Hazardous voltages are present in the equip- Z

U)
rnent throughout the malority of the start-up u
INSPECTION procedure. m
Proceed with caution.

-10. Make certaln that all clrcult breakers are in

-
C)
i
V
2
All equipment inspection procedures are to be the OFF oos~t~on. .-
performed with power to the unit turned off and
locked out.
NOTE
Sleps 17 through 15 apply to the Input Junction Box. Ifihis
z0
installation is not providedwlth an lnput Junction Box. U)

EXTERIOR INSPECTION
proceed directly to Step 16.
s
- 1. Exterior of unit undama ed (including
?
cables and receptades, if urn~shed).
-11. Remove the cover of the input junction
box.
a
9
-12. Turn ON the building power to the ju'nct~on C
-
- 2. Serv~ceclearances are adequate. box. Check the phase rotatlon at the box.
U
INTERIOR INSPECTION
NOTE -
Phase rotation should be A. 6. C, as
indicated.
13. Check and record the input voltages at the
Em
n
-
I
W When rernovlng exterlor oanels, disconnect panel
ground wires by separating the "easy disconnect" ter-
junction box: -
w
rn
minals located on the frame.
Volts, phase A to phase B =_. ii
Volts, phase B to phase C = -. X
U When replacing exten& panels, reconnect all panel
qround wlres. Volts, phase C to phase A = -. .. C
-3. Inspectall wire and conductor insulat~onfor - 14. Turn OFF and iock out the bullding
U)

damage. . .iunction box.

to the inout
-4. Check all transformer tenn~nalconnections - 15. Replace the junaon box cover.
for tightness. Re-torque if necessary.' - 16. Turn ON the bu~ldlng lnput power-- io the
4)
u
m
- 5. Check all breaker connections fo; tightness.
-
un~t.
17. Check the phase rotat~on at the lnput 0
-
-
Re-toraueif necessarv:
6. Check all termlnal block connections for
hghtness. Re-toque if necessary.'
7. Check transformer mounting bolts for t~ght- -
breaker. Phase rotaoon should be A. 0, C.
bottom-to-too.
18. check &d record the lnput voltages at the
a-
L
p~
ness. To avoid distorting the isolation input breaker: in
pads, do not exceed 250 Ibin (2.8 kgm) of
torque on mounting bob.
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
.
- s+
Z
- 8. Remove any foreign objects from the com-
Volts, phase C to phase A = . '
ponents or the interior area of the unit. Make
sure air passageson transformers are
clear and free of debris! W All loads should be disconnectedo i turned off before
- 9. Replace side panels. (Leave access to proceedingwith the following steps.
breakers for start-up procedure.) W For units with output distribution cables. be sure that there
are NO oulput receptacles c0nnected:to load equipment
'See Torque SpeaficahanTable Ill plugs, and that the receptacles are not in contact w ~ t hlore~gn
obiects.
W Pay speclai anenflonl o !hose OL:PL! cao es ntenoeo tcr
alrect-wng connectmn: me expose0 conox:or enas of
these cao es mLst rot oe n contact v. In eacn o!ner or n ~ t n
any foreignobjecls.

-19. Turn ON the tnput breaker: Walt one

rnlnute. (If breaker trlps OFF check for wirlng
errors, then contact local Factory
representatwe).
-20. Turn on output circuit breaker(s).Check -28.Sitemaster: if the unit is connected to a
the phase rotation at the terminals of each Sitemaster system:
panelboard. The rotation should be A, 8, C. a. Turn the unit and then the Siternaster
ieft-to-r~ght. console ON. Verify monitor system operation
-21. Check and record the voltages at the as described in the Sitemaster Owner's
terminals of the panelboard: Manual.
b. Check to ensure that the voltage values
Volts, phase A to phase B =- indicated by the Sitemaster correspond to the
Volts, phase B to phase C =-. output voltage values measured previously.
Volts, phase C to phase A = . -29. Control Voltage: ,7u:~.:.vt
Volts, phase A to neutral = . a. Obtain access to the low voltage terminals
Volts, phase B to neutral = . in the Low Voltage Junction Box (if used), or
Volts, phase C to neutal = . in the low voltage control section insideaqit.
b. Tum the unit ON. Measure and recoKtthe
NOTE control voltage on terminals 1 ( + ) and3 . . ,
The Mlni-Center transformer has 7 full-capacityinput voltage . . . -;s ,&<> ..
taps for each input phase. The taps are arranged in ?.%% in- (corn). . .
.,.-. ~.- .
crements lrom - 10% to +5%of nommal. Th~sperm~tsthe
transformer to provide the proper output voltage for a range
. - 30. ~ u s t o m & ~ ~ l a r mlfscustomeral&s
.. are provided:
: ... ,
..-,.'M t;n
of input voltages. Should it be necessary,the wiring arrange-
ment may be changed to match the input voltge: a. Turn the unit ON and simulate alarm'?::
1. Turn OFF and lock out building power to the unit. operation by jumpering the appropriateTow
2. Select tap arrangement to match input voltage (Refer to , . , voltage control terminals. (Refer to themntrol
transformer nameplate lor tap information.) wiring installationdrawing for the unW' s : !
3. Secure each line to its proper tap.
4. Repeat Stem 19-21. .., . b. Verify correct alarm annundation.w,tRe
VCMP andor by the Sitemaster cons&
- 22. Depress the local EMERGENCY POWER
OFF switch and verify system shutdown. Turn EQUIPMENT CONNECTION C H E .C -.L.~ ? ~ ~
the unit back on.
- 23.Repeat step 22 for each REMOTE
EMERGENCY POWER OFF switch with .
which thesystem is equipped. H All toads should be disconnected or turned off bet&
- 24. Turn off all circuit breakers. proceedingwith the followin%steps. .-
8 For units with output distn ubon cables, be sure that there
MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK OUT are NO output receptacles connected to load equipment
plugs, and that Me receptacles are not In contact WitJforeign
- 25. Basic Indicators
a. Turn the building power to the main unit.
ob'ects.
b a y special anention to those wtput cables in&&for
direct-wuingconnection:the exposed conductor erdsot
b. Check that the local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF button is illuminatedand that any foreign objects. --or)with
these cables must not be in contact with each otherU ..

the second indicator (TRANSFORMER

OVERTEMP) is off. -31. For Unlts With Distribution C a b b .
c. Return all breakers to OFF. a. After verifying mat there is power to the
-26. Manual Restadcheck: input of the unit,'tum the Main input breaker
AL!..

Check ~ositionof manuallauto restart selector ON.

switch ior desired operation. b. Individuallyturn ON each branch circuit
If unit is to be equipped with Manual Restart: breaker and check the output voltage (also
-. . -. on
a. Turn -. buildina Dower to tne nit.
-- -
phase rotation, if a 3-phase circuit) at the
-. Tum
b. .- Main lnouibreaker ON. receptacle or cable end.
c. Turn all branch circuit breakers and the
.
~

c. Turn OFF bdlding power to unit. main input circuit breaker OFF. . +
d. Obsewe that Main lnput breaker automati-
cally trips open upon power loss. - 32.Connect the load equipment per
equipment manufacturer'sspecifications and
e. Restore main input building power and re-
turn Main lnput breaker to ON. recommendations.
-27.Local VCMP: If unit is equipped with - 33.Turn ON the main input circuit breaker.
local Volt-Current Monitor Panel, turn the unit - 34. Tum ON branch circuit breakers to the
load equipment. Observe the powsr-Up
ON, and check to ensure that the voltage
values indicated by the Monitor Panel sequence recommended by the equipment
correspond to the voltage values measured at manufacturer.
the load side of the output circuit breaker. -35.Verify that all load equipment operates
properly. :..:
.- -
...
7.
. ..
-:-~.
....
._....'
Mamtenance Inspection Schedule
All voltage to the system must be disconnected
before working within the cabinet.
CLEANING
Because alr IS belng circulated through the power
center cabinet, dust may accumulate on mternal
components.
Cleaning Schedule. It is difficult to establish a
schedule for penodic cleanlngs, but the interior of
the cabmet should be checked after 24 hours, 30
days, and 6 months of operation. This should help
determine a pattern for the maintenance schedule.
The oower center should be insoected at least even/
6 months thereafter, and cleaned as necessary.
Special Checks. Durmg each penodlc
Inspection, speclal care should be taken to perform
the following checks:
Make sure a r passages on transformers are
clear and free of debris.
Make sure all external ventilation openlngs and
grilles are dear.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Inspection. lns~dethe MI~I-Center- .~. cabmet.
inspect all electrical wirlng for cuts. abrasions, and
other damage. All electrical connections should be
tight. (Refer to Table Ill for torque specifications.)
Inspect electrical components for deterioration or
damage.
Mounting. All components should be securely
mounted to the cabinet frame. Circuit breakers
should be securely mounted. Check for secure
electrical and ground connections.
NOTE
Under no circumstancesshould circuit breakers or fusesbe
b passed or safely switches belurnpered. ..
dlnspectlon Schedule. Electrical connections and cornpo-
nent mountings should be inspected after 24 hours. 30 days.
and 6 months of operalion. with periodic inspectionsevery 6
m t h s therealter.
 hLiebert

PRECISION POWER CENTER

(15 kVA THROUGH 225 kVA)
 Computer
& Liebert Support
Systems

POWER CENTER

Optlond devlcea. (Refer to the specmcatlon sheet fw optlons suppled.)

Figure 1. Typical Precision Power Center Equipment Arrangement.

Site Prep, Installation

and Operation Manual
- ii - Precision Power Center
 bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

SITE PREPARATION. INSTALLATION. AND

OPERATION MANUAL
FOR THE PRECISION POWER CENTER
(15 kVA THROUGH 225 kVA)
CONTENTS
.
1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ...............................................
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION ...........................................................
.........................................................
Unpacking And Prelirnlnaty inspection
Handling Considerations....................................................................
Unit Preparation...........................................................................
Location Considerations....................................................................
...................................................................
Floor Pedestal lnstallatlon
DISTRIBUTION SIDESECTION MOUNTING & WIRING .........................................
Sidesection Mounting.......................................................................
...........................................................
Sidesection Electrical Connectlons
POWER AND CONTROL WIRING ............................................................
input Power Connections ...................................................................
............................................................
Junctlon Box lnstallatlon (If used)
System Grounding ..........................................................................
Grounding ElectrodeConductor .............................................................
Output Power Connections ..................................................................
Control Wring Connections .................................................................
.
2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND START-UP ................................... 20
INTERNALINSPECTION ....................................................................20
START-UP .................................................................................20
3 . INSPECTION a n d START-UP CHECK LIST ......................................22
INSPECTION ................................................................................22
C..) START- UP ................................................................................23
MONITORING SYSTEM CHECKOUT .........................................................25
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION CHECK OUT (tor Units with Distribution Cables) .................. 26
.
4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................27
5.MAINTENANCE ...............................................................
............ 30
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (REPAIR) .....................................................30
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (INSPECTION 6 CLEANING) ...................................31
FIGURES
Typical Equipment Arrangement ............................................................ Ii
... Typloal
1
2 Cabinet a n d Floor Planning Dimension Data. Single Panelboard Unit ................... 2
3 Typical Cabinet and Floor Plannlng Dlmenslon Data. Two or Three Panelboard Unit ............ 3
4 . Recommended M l n l m u m Service and Ventilation Clearances ................................. 5
48 . Floor Pedestal Detalls ...................................................................... 6
5 . Electrical Connection Locatlons. Single Panelboard Unlt ...................................... 8
6 . Electrical Connection Locations. Two Panelboard Unlt ........................................ 9
7 . Electrical Connection Locations. Three Panelboard Unlt ...................................... 10
8 . Typical Junction B o x Connections ...........................................................13
9 . Typical Grounding Arrangements ...........................................................15
10 . Simpillled Shutdown Circuit .................................................................16
11 . Typical Control Wlrlng for Units Without Monitoring..........................................18
12 . Typical Control Wirlng for Unlts With Power Monitoring ...................................... 19
TABLES
..
1 Heat Output ...............................................................................
2 Suggested M i n i m u m Wire Size Data
5
........................................................11
. .......................................................................
C 1 3 Torque Specifications 21

Site P r e p . Installation .jii . Precision P o w e r C e n t e r

and O p e r a t i o n M a n u a l (5190)
 support
Systems

THE SHIPPING BANDS MAY BE UNDER TENSION. USE APPROPRIATE EYE, FACE, AND
HAND PROTECTION TO SAFEGUARD AGAINST INJURY FROM BAND BACKLASH.

VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW VOLTAGE (CONTROL)
CIRCUITS ARE DE-ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BEFORE INSTALLING CABLES OR MAK-
ING CONNECTIONS, WHETHER IN THE JUNCTION BOX OR IN THE UNIT.

EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND START-UP SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY TRAINED

PERSONNEL. LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT DURING START-UP PROCEDURES. ELEC-

START-UP. -
TRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED THROUGHOUT INSPECTION AND
+ p

ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON THE PRE-

CISION POWER CENTER SYSTEM. ALL VOLTAGE SOURCES TO THE UNIT MUST BE.DIS-
CONNECTED BEFORE INSPECTING OR CLEANING WITHIN THE CABINET.

LETHAL VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THE EQUIPMENT DURING OPERATION. OBSERVE ALL
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS IN THlS MANUAL. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN SE-
RIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. OBTAIN QUALIFIED SERVICE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT AS IN-
STRUCTED.

Site Prep, Installation

and Operation Manual (5190)
- iv'- Precision Power Center
 bLiebert
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: Read t h e entire manual before Installing and operatlng the system. Upon recelpt of a Precl-
sion Power Center, t h e installer should perform the following steps to assure a quality lnstallatlon.
Unpacking And Preliminary Inspection
A quality installation begins on the receiving dock.
1. Inspect the shipping crate(s) for damage or
signs of mishandling before unpacking the
unit(s). Check Shock-Watch" indicator.
2. Open the shipping crates carefully. (Use
care to avoid puncturing the container with
sharp objects that would damage the con-
tents.)
3. Remove the packing a n d vapor barriers
and inspect the equipment for any obvious
shipping damages.
L'
The units should not b e loosened
from the shipping pallet until after all
handling by fork lift or pallet jack is
completed. Complete internal in-
spection should b e accomplished
only after equipment positioning and
prior to electrical hookup.
4. If any damage a s a result of shipping is
observed, file a damage claim with the ship-.
ping agency within 24 hours and contact
Liebert Customer Service and Support at
1-800-543-2378 to inform them of the dam-
age claim and the condition of the equip-
ment.
Site Prep, Installation
and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
-- -
Handling Considerations
The Precision Power Center (and cables, If fur-
nished) is bolted to a wooden pallet to allow han-
dling by fork-llft equipment.
Easily moved - T h e Precision Power Center and
cable reels are furnished with casters to allow
the unit to be rolled into place after it has
been unbolted from the pallet.
Check size and weight - Refer to the cabinet
drawings furnished with the unit for size and
weight information. Typical cabinet dimen-
sions and weights are shown in Figures 2 and
3.
Plan the route -
The route that the unit will fol-
low to its installation area should be planned
to ensure that all passages are large enough
to accommodate the unit, and that the floors
are adequate to support the weight. (i.e. Are
the doorways, elevators, ramps, etc. ade-
quate? Are there any non - negotiable cor-
ners or offsets in the hallways?)
Move with care -
In order to prevent panel
damage, it is recommended that the exterior
panels be removed before the unit is moved.
When replacing panels, remember to recon-
nect all panel ground wires.
-1- Precision Power Center
 bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

CABINET DIMENSIONAL DATA

CUTOUTAREAFOR
CABLE EXlTAND
COOLlNG AIR
FLOW

FOOTPRINT AND FLOOR CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

AVAILABLE FROM
6'jli2mml TO 19'i

OPTIONAL FLOOR PEDESTALS

Figure 2. Typical Cabinet and Floor Planning Dimension Data, Single Panelboard Unit,
15-30kVA.

Site Prep, Installation - 2 -

and Operation Manual Precision Power Center
 bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

ACLEARANCEOF

FOR COOLING AIR FLOW A N 0

CABLE ENTRYlEXlT

SHADEDAREAS
INOICATE A RECOMMENDED
CLEARANCE OF 4 2 omlmmi
BE PROVIDED AT FRONT AND ONE
OTHER SIDE FOR SERVICE
ACCESS

<."TOUTAREA FOR COOLING

ilR FLOW

< UTOUTARE(IFORCA8LE
!NTRYiEXl,

,102mmi

FOOTPRINT AND FLOOR CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

-
OPTIONAL FLOOR PEDESTALS

-
Figure 3. Typical Cabinet and Floor Planning Dimension Data, Two or Three Panelboard Unit.
/ -,
L
Site Prep, Installation - 3 - Precision Power Center
and Operation Manual

&,iLiebert
Unit Preparation
The Preclslon Power Center may be easily removed from the shlpplng pallet and installed by customer personnel. A
typical procedure Is as follows:
1) Set the palletized assembly in a level area,
where there is enough room to roll the unit
and entire cable assembly off the ~ a l l e onto
t bottom corners.)
the floor.
2) Cut the shipping bands.
THE SHIPPING BANDS MAY BE UN-
DER TENSION. USE APPROPRIATE
EYE, FACE. AND HAND PROTECTION
TO SAFEGUARD AGAINST INJURY
FROM BAND BACKLASH.
3) Remove the Factory-provided ramp from its
shipping position. (One ramp is provided per
order. ~ a c k e deither in front of. or on to^. of.~
a set 2 cable reel(s).) ~ l a c e ~ t hramp
~
e
cent to the. pallet to provide a smooth path
adja-
from pallet to floor.
4) Remove side and rear panels from the mod-
ule. (Carefully disconnect panel ground wires
by pulling the easy-disconnect terminals at
the unit frame.)
Location Considerations
The Preclslon Power Center should be located within the computer room, andlor close to the load(s) which It is
supplying.
Equipment Location should employ the shortest
output distribution cable tuns consistent with
loeical eauiument arrangement and allow-
alces for-&ure addition;.
Operating Environment - Ambient tempera-
tures of 0°C to 40°C with a relative humidity
of 0% to 95% (non-condensing).
Bottom Clearance is required for exit of cables1
conduit and/or for cooling air flow. This
clearance is automatically provided by a
raised floor (6 inches 1 150 mm. minimum
height). Figures 2 and 3 show the typical
raised-floor cutout dimensions.
When units are not located on a raised floor
( or if the raised floor is not adequate to sup-
Site Prep, Installation -4-
and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Svsterns
5 ) Remove the bolts holding the unit to the
shipping pallet. (Located in each of the four
6) If cables are on wheeled cable reel(s), re-
move bolts holding reel(s) to pallet.
7) Remove shipping blocks from under unit and
cable assembly, then remove chocks from all
casters.
8) Roll unit off pallet onto floor, carefully guid-
ing cable reel(s) after it.
9) Roll unit and cable package to location of in-
stallation. For units located on a raised floor,
use care when positioning unit over the floor
cutout to avoid castors falling through the
cutout.
~ .
Before maneuvering t h e unit into its
final position, read and follow all advi-
sories in the following "Location Con-
siderations" paragraphs.
port the unit ), optional floor pedestals may
be used. (Non-raised floor applications are
..
not CSA a ~ ~ r o v e. d )
Recommended Minimum Service Clearances
are shown in Figure 4. The indicated clear-
ances at the front and one other side or rear
of the unit are required for service access by
the National Electrical Code (NEC) (Article
110-16). Clearance above the unit is re-
quired for cooling air flow (exhaust).
-
Heat Output As all electrical devices, the Pre-
cision Power Center produces heat under
normal operation. (See Table 1.) This heat
output should be included when calculating
the environmental conditions of the room.
Precision Power Center
 bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

C Table 1. H e a t Output

FULL LOAD HEAT OUTPUT - BTUIHr (KcslIHr)

KVA BTUIHr (KcallHr) KVA BTU/Hr (KcaVHr)

ACCESS
LOCATIONS
and
CLEARANCE
DIMENSIONS
All dlrnenslons in
Inches (rnrn)

1. Required s e ~ l c access
e locations are FRONT, plus ONE OTHER SIDE OR REAR.
2. S e ~ l c Access
e Clearance Dlrnenslons:
361n (914rnm) for unlts up to 160 volts to ground.
421n (1067rnrnJ for unlts over 150 volts to ground.

/
1
Figure 4. Recommended Minimum Service and Ventilation Clearances.
'
L ,

Site Prep, Installation -5- Precision Power Canter

and Operation Manual
 Computer
Support
U W #b
- - Systems

Floor Pedestal lnstallation

Floor pedestals are optional equipment Intended to provide clearance for bottom cable entry without relying on a
raised floor to support the unlt. The pedestals are adlustable over a llmlted range (approximately 3 11, inches) to
allow levellng the unit and minor adjustments in the unit's installed height.

Floor pedestals are reverse assem--

bled for shipping. Before installation,
t h e pedestals should b e reassembled
as shown in Figure 4a. When the ped-
estal is properly assembled, the washer
on top of the welded nut provides a
bearing surface for the unit weight.

1 Insert the pedestal threaded shaft into

the inside comer tubing of the cabinet
base as shown in Figures 2 and 3.)

2 Adjust the pedestal height by turning

the welded nutlshaft assembly into or
out of the pedestal base as required.

3 Lock the height by tightening the jam

nut against the pedestal base

The pedestal may be mounted to the floor by Figure 4a. Floor Pedestal Details.
means of the four holes in the base. Loca-
tions of floor pedestals relative to the unit
base outline are shown in Figures 2 and 3.

DISTRIBUTION SIDESECTION MOUNTING & WIRING

Fcr Precision Power Csnters with more lhan three panelboards, the edditlonai panelboards are fur-
nished in sldeseellon enclosures which are shipped separate from the main unit.

Sidesection Mounting
The additional dlstribution sidesection has the same base dimensions as the single panelboard unit (18" x 30").and
can be mounted on either the left or right side of the maln unit, with left side mounting recommended.

Provide a floor cutout for exit of output cables,
as shown in Figure 2.
Remove the side panel and the lower panel
hooks from the main unit.
Align the distribution sidesection with the main
unit and bolt the two frames together using
the four bolts and spacers provided.
If floor pedestals are used for the main unit,
two additional floor pedestals are required
for the outside comers of the sidesection.
See Figure 2.
Install the lower panel hooks on the sidesection
enclosure.
After electrical connections are completed, in-
stall the unit side panel on the sidesectlon en-
closure.

Site Prep, Installation -6- Precision Power Center

and O ~ e r a t i o nManual
bLiebert Computer
Support
Svstems

Sidesection Electrical Connections

Flve conductors ( 3 phase conductors, neutral and ground) are furnlshed wlth the dlstrlbutlon sldesectlon for connec-
tion to the maln unlt In the fleld.

For Precision Power Centers transform-
ers, the sidesection phase conductors are
connected directly to the transformer termi-
nals:
Phase A (wire 412) to X i
Phase B (wire 422) to X2
Phase C (wire 432) to X3
The sidesection neutral (wire 442) and
ground (wire 452) conductors are connected
to the Precision Power Center main ground
busbar (see unit wiring diagram).
For Precision Power Centers w i t h o u trans-
formers, the sidesection phase and neutral
conductors are connected to the correspond-
ing output power distribution terminal blocks
inside the main unit. The sidesection ground
conductor is connected to the main ground
busbar.
For a l l Precision Power Centers with current
monitoring, route each sidesection conduc-
tor through the appropriate current trans-
former (CT) in the main unit.
Sidesection conductors must pass
through the current transformers in
the same direction as the main unit
panelboard conductors. Use the ex-
isting main unit panelboard wiring for
reference.

POWER AND CONTROL WIRING

Power and control wlrlng should be Installed by lloensed electrlclans. All power and control Wiring
must comply wlth the NEC and applicable local codes.

lnput Power Connections

If the unlt is furnished wlth Junctlonboxes, lnput power connections are made as detalled In the Junctlon Box Installa-
tlon sectlon.
If Junctlonboxes are not furnlshed, the lnput power feeder Is connected t o the lnput power lugs or blocks located
lnslde the unlt. (See Figures 5, 6, and 7.)

safely carry the system's full load current, in-

cluding losses.
Input feeder conductors should be sized for no
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING LINE more than 2% voltage drop. If operation at
VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW VOLT- under-voltage conditions for extended peri-
AGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE DE- ods of time is desired, the input feeders must
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BE- be oversized.
FORE INSTALLING CABLES OR MAK-
ING CONNECTIONS, WHETHER IN
THE JUNCTION BOX OR IN THE UNIT.
- Typical conductor size data is shown in Table 2.
All connections must comply with the NEC
and all other applicable codes.

To minimize disturbances caused by other loads
in the building, the 3-phase power input to
the unit should be supplied directly from the
service entrance, if possible (a dedicated
power feeder).
The input feeder circuit should be sized in ac-
cordance with the NEC and any local build-
ing codes to assure the feeder's ability to
For units with a transformer, the main input
feeder should consist of three phase conduc-
tors and one (safety) ground conductor (3W
t G).
For units without a transformer, the main input
feeder must consist of three uhase conduc-
tors, one neutral, and one (safety) ground
conductor (4W + G).

Site Prep, Installation Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual

- - -- - -~ ~
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems
I

Ma.n mpul power connecltnn irr .n~snsc.1

rra i np.1 .nct on ox: :onoresr n: L ~ are S
v o . OPO at ne s oe ' E m "2 s 01 rra n imo,'
CI~CUI~breaker for cuslomer connecion o i 3
phase power

Nedran connecrlonr C sr u.' I n rao 2

re.(.? s c:iiecleg to cs'r c.r:i
panelboard neulral bus bar

Panelboard man clrcull breaker p actor^.^

wlred.
round connsctions. ~ist~ibullon cahle
yroUnd(s) connected fo disfribuflon
panelboard ground bus bar.

O~str~bultoo
panelboard

FRONT VIEW WlTH PANELS REMOVED

I
I
I
I

REAR VIEW WlTH PANELS REMOVED

Figure 5 . Electrical Connection Locations. Single Panelboard Unit

Site Prep, Installation -8- Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
 Computer

bLiebert Support
Systems

Main input power connection. For units wlthout

maln input )unction box, compression lugs are
provided at line side terminais 01 maln input
circu~tbreaker lor customer connection of 3

Sublaod Circuit breakar. See vlew below

for power connections.

Building Intarlacs and alarms connacllons.

For units without low voltage luncticn box.
a terrnlnai strip is provided for customer
connection of building interlace and alarm
circuits.
Neutral connections. Distribution cable
neutraljs) connected to distributon Sitamaster connacllon. Termlnal strip lor
panelboard neutral bus bar. customer connection oi a 2 wire, twisted
pair communications cabie (available from
Liebert or others) to optional Sitemaster.
Paneibcard maln circuit breakerjs). Factow
wired. Building intarface ralay canactlon. Double
pole, double throw [DPDT) relay with
Ground connactions. Distribution cable terminals ior customer connection to
groundp) connected to distributlon indicate unit status.
panelboard ground bus bar.

DIstribuRm cable condul connection. Cable

Distribution paneiboards. tray with 1 3/32" (27.8mm) holes lor 314"
conduit finings and 718" j22.2mm) holes
lor 112" conduit linings provided for
securing optional distribution cables.

FRONT VlEW WlTH PANELS REMOVED

REAR VlEW WlTH PANELS REMOVED

C,
Figure 6 . Electrical Connection Locations. Two Panelboard Unit

Site Prep, Installation -9- Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
 Main input power oonnectian. Fw unib without
maln input lunction box, compress!on lugs are
PrOvlded at line slde terminals oi main input
circuit breaker for customer connection 01 3

Subfeed circul breaker. See vlew heiw

for power connections.

Building interface and alarms connecfmns.

For unlts without iow voltage junction box,
a terminal strip is provided lor customer
connection of butiding interlace and alarm
circu~ts.
Neutral connectlans D~slributloncable Sitemaster connection. Term~nalstrlp ior
neutrai(s) connected to disirlbutlon customer connection of a 2 wire, twisted
panelboard neutral bus bar pall communicalions cable (avaliable from
L'lebelt a others) to optional S~temasler.
Panelboard main c\rcu\t breakeris). Factory
wired. Building interface relay connection. Double
poi& double throw IDPOT) relay iwith
Grwnd conmtions. Distribution cable terminals for customer connection%
ground(s1 connected fa dlslrlbullon Indicate unit status.
paneiboard ground bus Dar.
MsWibulion cable conduil connection. Cable
O~stribullonpanelboards tray with 1 3/32" (27.8mm) holes lor 314''
conduit fittings and 718" (222mm) holes
lor 112" conduit litlings provided for
securing optional distribution:caBies.
3..

FRONT VlEW WITH PANELS REMOVED

REAR VlEW WITH PANELS REMOVED

Figure 7. Electrical Connection Locations, Three Panelboard Unit

Site Prep, Installation - 10 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

Table 2. Suggested Minimum Wire Size Data

FLA = Full Load Amps of Power Center.

OPD = Overcurrent Protectlon Devlce lnslde POW; Center.
Wire Sizes based on NEC 1990 Table 310-16, uslng 75% copper conductor
NOTES:
1) Main input power feeder should be a dedicated feeder direct from servlce entrance If posslble.
Ground conductors recommended to be parity slzed wlth power conductors for Increased system performance.
Ground conductor mlnlmum slze per NEC Table 250-95. lnput power feeder condult may be used as the safety
ground conductor. When condult Is used, adequate eleotrlcal contlnulty must be malntalned at condult connec-
tlons to enclosures and throughout condult run.
2) lnput feeder wire size listed In Table 2 Is the mlnlmum feeder slze recommended. Larger wlre slze may be
requlred because of voltage drop or supply Overcurrent protection devlce.
3) For transformerless units wlth 3-phase 4W+G lnput feeder, larger wlre slze may be requlred because of exces-
slve neutral current (see NEC Table 310-16 notes 8 and 10). For best performance. the unit should be located
as close to the load as practical.

Site Prep, installation - 11 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
 Computer
Liebert Support
Systems

Junction Box Installation (if used)

Lhe voltage {power) and low Voltage (control) lunotlon boxes are available for the Preclslon Power Center to slmpll~,
customer connections.

Shipping Arrangements - The junction boxes, if Dimensions - Dimensions are given on the draw-
used, can either be shipped with the system ings furnished with the unit. Typical dirnen-
or can be advance-shipped for installation sions of the junction boxes are as follows:
during the roughing-in stage of new construc-
tion.
Low Voltage (Control) Junction Box:
Installation Location - 10 foot (3 meters) long Width 8 in. (203 rnm)
flexible cables are supplied for connecting Length 10 in. (254 mrn)
the junction boxes to the unit. The junction
boxes should be installed a maximum of 8 Height 4 in. (102 mrn)
feet (2.4 meters) from the feeder entrance of
the unit.
It is recommended that the junction boxes be Line Voltage (Power) Junction Box:
centered under an easily removable floor tile.
Junction Box Connections must be installed in
compliance with the NEC and all other appli-
cable codes.

Width 14 (356) 14 (356) 14 (356)

Length 16 (406) 16 (406) 16 (406)
Height 6 (152) 6 (152) 6 (152)

I 1 1 1
VERIFY THAT INCOMING LINE VOLT-
Width 16 (406) 14 (356) 14 (356)-
AGE (POWER) AND LOW VOLTAGE
(CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE DE-ENER-
GIZED AND LOCKED OUT BEFORE IN-
STALLING CABLES OR MAKING ANY
t
30 (762)
6 (152)
16 (406)
6 (152)
16 (406)
6 (152) 1
CONNECTIONS IN THE JUNCTION
BOX.

Typical junction box connections are shown in

Figure 8 and described in the Input Power
and Control Wiring Connection sections.
I Width
Length
Height
16 (406)
30 (762)
6 (152)
16 (406)
30 (762)
6 (152)

Junction box wire ranges are as follows:

14" x 16" x 6" J-Box - #14 to #2/0 AWG
16" x 30" x 6" J-Box - (2) #4 to 500 kcrnil
I Width
Length
Height
16 (406) 16 (406)
30 (762) ' 30 (762)
6 (152)
-

Dimensions in Inches (rnm).

6 (152)
16 (406)
30 (762)
6 (152)

Site Prep, Installation - 12 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
 Computer

bLiebert
I
Support
Systems

Recommended lo-
cation for customer
connection.
(3-phase 3WtG for
unlts wlth trans-
former. 3-phase Location
4 W t G for unlts for facto
supp~ieT
w~thouttrans- line voltage
cable
assembly.
(Parallel
cables
supplied
on larger
unlts.)

", __
.,l.,,, ~....,.....,,..,..,~.,........,...,...,,...~.......,.,...*,.~.,.~~
,,

MAIN INPUT JUNCTION BOX

....................... .,.,...,.,.,. "..,.....v,,. ..%.."..,,.~.,e".."..,,

C Figure 8. Typical Junction B o x Connections.

Site Prep, Installation - 13 - Precision Power Center

a n d Operation Manual
bLiebert
System Grounding
Tne performance and safety cf any Dower conor 3nlng system depenas -pan proper grounanc. F gLre 9 snoas tne
t(ptca y c m a n g arransemer's 'or me Precson Power Centers
Equipment grounding - Grounding is primarily
for safety. Correct implementation of
grounding also enhances equipment perform-
ance. All power feeders must include equip-
ment grounding means as required by the
NEC and local codes.
An insulated ground conductor is recom-
mended to be run 'in each feeder conduit.
Although ground conductors can be the
minimum size per NEC Table 250-95, they
are recommended to be parity-sized with
power conductors for increased system per-
formance.
If the input
. . power feeder conduit is used as a
grounding conductor, adequate electrical
Grounding Electrode Conductor (Units With Transformer)
-
Required by code The Precision Power Center
with transformer should be grounded
according to the safety practices of NEC
250-26. A local grounding electrode
conductor is recommended in addition to the
equipment safety ground which is normally
run with the input power conductors.
Unit connection - A terminal is Furnished inside
the unit for field-connection of the ground-
ing electrode conductor. (See Figures 5, 6,
and 7.)
Electrode connection - As shown in Figure 9 ,
the grounding electrode conductor is run
from the unit to the nearest effectively
grounded (in order of preference):
1) Building steel
2) ,Metal water pipe
3) Other made grounding electrode
Sizing of the grounding electrode conductor is
based on the secondary circuit conductors.
According to the NEC ( Table 250-94 ), the
minimum ~ecommendedgrounding electrode
conductor is as follows:
Site Prep, Installation
and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Svstems
continuity must be maintained at all conduit
connections.
Using isolating bushings in a metal conduit
run can be a safety hazard and is not rec-
ommended.
-
Signal reference grid If the unit is used to sup-
ply power to a computer room or area which
is equipped with a signal reference grid or a
grounded raised-floor stringer system, a
grounding conductor should be connected
from the system ground bus to the grid or
floor system. This conductor should he
stranded or braided # 8 AWG or larger, and
as short as oractical. Less than 3 feet
~.. ~
( 1 me-
~- - ~
%~
ter) is recoinmended.
i.:
150 00 2 2
200 00 0 0
225 00 0 0
AWG wlre slze based on 75'C copper conductors.
Recommended methods for running the
grounding electrode conductor: (Arranged
by preference for system performance.) (As
acceptable by local and other applicable
codes.)
i
1) Outside of conduit (where not suscepti-
ble to damage). .
2) Inside non-metallic conduit.
j) Inside non-ferrous conduit.
4) Inside ferrous conduit, bonded t o the
ferrous conduit at both ends, as accept-
able by local and other applicable
codes.
- 14 - Precision Power Center
 hLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Figure 9. Typical Grounding Arrangements.

Site Prep, Installation - 15 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
bLiebert
Output Power Connections
Output circuit breaker@) andlor panelboards
with ground and neutral provisions are pro-
vided inside the unit for connecting load(s)
as required. (See Figures 5 . 6 . and 7).
Flexible output distribution cables for use in
data processing areas under a raised floor are
optional and may be factory supplied. Cable
lengths and layout should be well-planned:
Cable access - Cable routes should follow
aisles between equipment. This will facilitate
access to cables for installation, routine in-
spection, and future changes.
Cable length - Measure the distance to the
load equipment following right-angle paths,
rather than diagonally or directly. Always
measure to the extreme far side of the equip-
ment with respect to the unit to insure ade-
quate cable length.
Air circulation - Prevent restriction of air-
flow under the raised floor by running the
flexible conduits flat on the sub-floor, in par-
allel paths.
For best performance, the Precision Power Cen-
ter should be located as close to the load as
practical.
Initial system output loading should be between
50% and 75% of rated capacity. This allows
the addition of future loads without immedi-
ately investing in another power conditioner.
Site Prep, Installation
and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
The high partial-load efficiency of the unit
permits such sizing without imposing an en-
ergy-use penalty during initial operation.
For additional information on calculating the
required system capacity, see Liebert Power-
line PLT-09, Power Calculations (System
Sizing).
Keep the load balanced. Balancing of loads is
good design practice on any 3-phase system.
Accordingly, each distribution panel is load-
balanced at the factory, based on output
branch circuit breaker sizes. All additions to
*
the system should be arranged so as to pre-
serve this balance.
WARNING
VERIFY THAT lNCOMlNG HIGH VOLT-,,
AGE CIRCUITS ARE DE-ENERGIZED ''
AND LOCKED-OUT BEFORE INSTALL-
ING OUTPUT BREAKERS AND CA-
BLES.
Code compliance - All output cables and con-
nections must comply with the NEC and all
other applicable codes.
- -
Precision Power Center
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

- Connections
Control Wiring
A ~ . e o e npower conalt.onlng systems nave provls on for external snddown contro~from Remote Emergency Power
011 (REPOI stat ons F'gure 10 Is a slmplflea olagrarn of the snutdown clrcutry of the Preclslon Power Center.

Low-voltage control circuit. As shown in
Figure 10, the control circuit operates on
24Vdc. The shutdown device (represented
by the REPO switch) activates a low-current
24Vdc relay which in turn operates the shunt
trip mechanism. The shunt-trip solenoid
opens the Main Input breaker, which de-en-
ergizes the power center.
Code compliance - Control wiring connections
Multiple-unit shutdown. When more than one
power center is installed by the user, a typical
requirement is that actuation of a single de-
vice (REPO for example) must shut down all.
power centers. The low-voltage control cir-
cuits of all standard Lieben Precision Power
Center systems are designed to meet this re-
quirement.
Detailed diagrams and descriptions of the shut-
down schemes for multiple-system installa-
tions are contained in the Liebert Power Line
PLT-35, "Multiple Power Center Control
Schemes", (revision 03/85 or later).
External control wiring connections for Remote
Shutdown, alarm, and/or monitoring are
made to the low-voltage junction box (if.
used) or to the low-voltage control terminal
strip located inside the unit.
Control wiring connections vary with the type
of monitoring system furnished with the unit.
Three typical control wiring configurations
are shown in Figures 11 and 12.
must comply with the NEC and all other ap-
plicable codes.
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING LINE
VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW VOLT-
AGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE DE-
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BE-
FORE INSTALLING CABLES OR MAK-
ING CONNECTIONS, WHETHER IN
THE JUNCTION BOX OR IN THE UNIT.

SHUTDOWN DEVICES

INTERFACE
POWER CENTER

Figure 10. Simplified Shutdown Circuit.

Site Prep, Installation - 17 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
kh Liebert Computer
Support
Systems
I

REMOTE A L A R M INDICATORS
( optional connections )

BUILDING
INTERFACE
RELAY
(See Note 1.1

R E P O S W I T C H (N.O.)
( optional connections )

1
I
-
Contacts should be ~ ~ l t a bfor
switching IOW-CYII~~~ 24VdC.
Lamp load to be 24 Vdc, 1 amp
max load.
( See Note 4. ]
Contact closure trips open unlt
main Input breaker.
le
1. BUILDING INTERFACE RELAY can be used tor remote
shutdown cf alarm. Relay is energlrd durlw normal
operation.
DWT contacts rated 114 np at IZOV~O, I ~ Aat 28VdC
or 240 Vac max.
2. OTHER N.O. REPO DEVICES may by wlred In parallel
to N.O. REPO sontacts.
Other N.C. REPO devices may be *Ired In serles to
N.C. REPO oontactr.
Multl le REPO lamps and other 2 4 ~ &loads may be
w l r J i n parallel to REPO lamp.
Max 24Vdc SUP ly available is lAmp total (Both N.O.
are
and N.C. ~ E ~ 8 s w l t c h e
SYPPlY.)
s p e r & troth the same
3. ALL AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES AND CABLING
TO BE FIELD SUPPUEO EXCEPT AS NOTED.
Contacts should be suitable tor Field rupplled ~ontrolwiring recommended to be X16
Ewltchlng IOw-~Yrrent24Vdc. AWG mln, stranded copper wlth 300-volt mlnlmum
insulation.
Lamp load to be 24 Vdc. 1 amp
max load. 4. OVERTEMP ALARM contacts change state when unit
ouertemprature lo sensed.
I See Note 2 1
Contact opnmg trips o p n unit
main m ~ u breaker
t

Figure 11. Typical Control Wiring for Units Without Monitoring.

Site Prep, Installation Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
hLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Two-wire twlrted Pair

SITESCAN
0R
.,
cable gelden No. 6442 or equivalent
equivalent.
cable seldsn NO. 8441 or LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX IF SUPPLIED
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SECTION INSIDE UNIT
o
SITEMASTER

SYSTEM
r
I--
-

\
-
-
-

--
CUSTOMER ALA'RM CONTACT (N.o.) -
I o ~ t l o n a conneotlons.
l 4 max.)
For alarm annunciation at unit
and Sitema~terISIteScan.
--
(Contact should be sultabls tor -
swlt~hlnglow curlent 24 Vdc.1

--
7

REMOVE JUMPER
IF N.C. REPO
IS USED. BUILDING
INTERFACE
RELAY
(See Note 1. I

R E P O S W I T C H (N.O.)
I ontlonal connections I

Contacts should be sultable to

~witohlngl o w ~ u r r e n 24Vdc.
t GTES
Lamp load to be 24 Vdo, 1 am , BUILDING INTERFACE RELAY can be us& for remote
m a load. shutdown or alarm. Relay IS energized during normal
owration.
I M I 1 S m Note 2. 1 DPDT contacts rated 114 hp at tzovac, 10A at 26Vdl
contact closure trlps o w n mi. or 240 VDC m a .
?. OTHER N.O. REPO DEVICES may by wired In paralls
R F P-
D S.W
. . I.~T C
- .H. f,.N~-
. C-. I ~ , input breaker' t o N.O. REPO contacts.
( optional connections I other N.O. REPO devices may be G ~ r e dIn series t o
I 1 N.O. REPO oontacts.
Mull1 la REPO lamp9 and other 24Vdc loads may be
w l r J i n parallel t o REPO lamp.
Max 24Vd0 sup ly available is l A m p total. (30th N.C
Contacts should be suitable for and N.C. ~EPC?switchesare powered from the same
s w l t ~ h l n glow-xrrent 24Vd0. I-PPIY I
Lamp load t o be 24 Vds, 1 amp 3 A-- A S . ARY COhTRO- 3EVICES A h 0 CAB- h G
TO BE F E.0 SUPP-ED EXCEPT AS hOTE0
max load. F em 1-p3 ,ma conlro N ' nq .acorrlrsnaea :o oe R16
( See Note 2. I AWG r~n ~ t r a n l e dC o w e r u th 300-ro 1 m r mum
I I contact opening trips open unit
main input breaker.
insulation.
4 . REMOTE ALARM N.C. CONTACT Is energized when
power center Is on and no alarms are present.
REMOTE ALARM N.O. CONTACT Is energized when
any alarm is present.
Remots alarm contacts are reset with power center
SllenSe button.

Figure 12. Typical C o n t r o l Wiring for Units With Power Monitoring.

Site Prep, Installation - 19 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
bLiebert
-2-
EQUIPMENT INSPECTTON AND START-UP
INTERNAL INSPECTION
A detailed internal inspection should be per-
formed after the unit is m place and before it
is energized, to ensure trouble free start-up.
The same internal inspection should be car-
ried out when performing preventive mainte-
nance.
I -
- --- - - - - -
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING POWER
AND CONTROL CIRCUITS ARE DE-
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BE-
FORE PERFORMING THE INTERNAL
INSPECTION.
START-UP
Checklists - Each step in the following detailed
step-by-step checklists (Section 3) should be
performed by the installing personnel when
installing and starting up any Precision Power
Center.
Initial system start-up - A qualified electrician
should be employed to perform the equip-
ment inspection and start-up. Liebert system
start-up may be arranged by calling your local
Liebert sales representative or Liebert cus-
tomer service and support.
Call 1-800-543-2378.
Warranty effectivity - A copy of the appropriate
checklist (furnished with the equipment)
must be completed, signed, dated. and re-
turned to the Factory. Warranty coverage
--- - - - - -
Site Prep, Installation
and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
Open the unit - Gain access to the internal com-
ponents of the Precision Power Center unit
by removing the exterior panels.
Visually inspect - Be sure wiring and compo-
nents are nor damaged.
Check power connections - Check all power
connections for tightness. Refer to Table.,3
for torque requirements of all electrical con-
nections.
Perform formal detailed inspection - Follow
the Inspection And Start-up Check List
(Section 3) when performing detailed inspec-
tion. 39 ,,
of the equipment is not effective unless the
Check List is received by the Factory. --
EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND
START-UP SHOULD BE PERFORMED
ONLY BY TRAINED PERSONNEL.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE 'PRE-
SENT DURING START-UP PROCE-
DURES.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE FOLLOWED THROUGHOUT
INSPECTION AND START-UP.
- - - - - -
Precision Power Center
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Table 3. Torque Specifications.

Unless otherwise labeled:

Site Prep, Installation - 21 - Precision Power Center

and O ~ e r a t i o nManual
@hLiebert Computer
Support
Svsterns

-3-
INSPECTION and START-UP CHECK LIST
for the
PRECISION POWER CENTER
U n ~ tSerlal Number: Date:
Unit Model Number.

Inspection

ALL EQUIPMENT INSPECTION PROCEDURES ARE TO BE PER-

FORMED WITH POWER TO THE UNIT TURNED OFF AND LOCKED
OUT.

( EXTERIOR INSPECTION ) - 6. Check all breaker connections,,.~ .for, tight-

~

- 1. Confirm that the exterior of unit is un- ness. ~ e t o r ~ if

u enecessary.
damaged (including cables and recepta-
cles, if furnished). - 7. Check all terminal block connections
for tightness. Retorque if necessary.
- 2. Confirm that service and ventilation
- 8. Check transformer mounting bolts for
clearances are adequate. (See Installa-
tightness. Retorque if necessary.
tion Manual Figure 4.)

( INTERIOR INSPECTION )
- 9. Remove any
- 3. Remove accessible exterior panels.
When removing exterior panels. DIS-
CONNECT PANEL GROUND WIRES BY
SEPARATING THE EASY-DISCONNECT
TERMINALS LOCATED ON THE
FRAME. When re~lacinoexterior oan-
els, reconnect all paneiground wires.
foreign objects from the
components or the interior area of the
unit. Make sure air passages on trans-
formers are clear and free of debris!
Check that the intake and exhaust air
screens are clean and free of obstruc-
tions.
Replace side panels, leaving access to
circuit breakers for the following start-
up procedure.

- 4. Inspect all wire and conductor insulation

for damage.
- 5. Check all transformer terminal connec- When replacing the side'panels, be
tions for tightness. Retorque if neces- sure to reconnect the panel ground
sary. wires.

-~ ~p~

Site Prep, Installation - 22 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
 bLiebert
r
Start - Up
START-UP PROCEDURES SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY QUALI-
FIED PERSONNEL. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE
EQUIPMENT THROUGHOUT THE MAJORITY OF THE START-UP
PROCEDURE. PROCEED WITH CAUTION.
-12. Make certain that all circuit breakers
are in the O F F position.
Steps 13 through 17 apply to the Main
Input Junction Box. If this installation
is not ~ r o v i d e d with a Main InDut
unction Box, proceed directly' to
Step 18.
-13. Remove the cover of the Main Input
c.
I-,
Junction Box. Verify proper input power
connections to unit, including equip-
ment grounding conductor.
-14. Turn ON the building power to the junc-
tion Box. Check the phase rotation at
the Junction box. Phase rotation should
be A. B, C, as indicated.
-15. Check and record the input voltages at
the junction box:
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
Volts, phase C to phase A =
-16. Turn OFF and lock out the building
power to the input junction box.
-17. Replace the junction box cover.
Site Prep, Installation
and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
-18. Verify proper input power connections
to unit, including equipment grounding
conductor and local grounding electrode
conductor.
19. Turn ON the building input power to the
unit.
2 0 . Check the phase rotation at the main in-
put breaker. Phase rotation should be
A, B, C, left-to-right.
-21. Check and record the input voltages at
the main input breaker. Measured volt-
ages should correspond to the unit's
nameplate input voltage.
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
Volts, phase C to phase A =
-22. Turn ON the main input breaker; wait
one minute. (If breaker trips OFF,
check for wiring errors. Contact Lieben
customer service and support or the lo-
cal factory representative for assis-
tance).
-23. Check the phase rotation at the line side
terminals (top) of the panelboard main
breaker(s) and any subfeed output cir-
cuit breaker(s). The rotation should be
A, B, C, left-to-right.
- 23 - Precision Power Center
bLiebert
Start - Up Cont.
-24. Check and record the voltages at the
line-side terminals of the output circuit
breaker. Measured voltages should cor-
respond to the un~t'snameplate output
voltage (within +4%, -0%).
Volts, phase A to phase B =
volts, phase B to phase C =
Volts, phase C to phase A =
Volts, phase A to neutral =
Volts, phase B to neutral =
Volts, phase C to neutral =
If output voltage is incorrect, check for
wiring errors, incorrect input voltage, or
improper transformer tap. Contact
Liebert CS&S at 1-800-543-2378 or
the local factory representative for assis-
tance.
Site Prep, Installation
and Operation Manual
- 24 -
Computer
Support
Systems
The Precision Power Center trans-
former has input voltage taps for
each input phase. The taps a r e ar-
ranged in 2X36 or 5% intervals rang-
ing from -10% to nominal to +5%.
This permits the transformer to pro-
vide the proper output voltage for a
range of input voltages. Should it b e
necessary, the wiring arrangement
may be changed to match the input
voltage:
a . Open main input circuit
breaker.
b. Select tap arrangement to
match input voltage. (Refer
to transformer nameplate for
tap information.)
C. Secure each line to its proper
tap.
d. Repeat Steps 22 to 24.
Depress the local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF switch and verify system
shutdown. Turn the unit back on.
Repeat step 25 for each remote EMER-
GENCY POWER OFF switch with which
the system is equipped.
Precision Power Center
bLiebert
Monitoring System Check Out
27. BASIC INDICATORS:
a. Turn ON the building power to the
unit, then turn the main input break-
er ON.
b. Check that the local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF button is illuminated
and that the second indicator
(TRANSFORMER OVERTEMP or
ALARM PRESENT) is off.
2 MANUAL RESTART CHECK. If unit
is equipped with Manual Restart:
- a. Turn on building power to the unit.
Turn Main Input breaker ON.
b. Turn off all building power to unit.
c. Observe that Main Input breaker
automatically trips open upon power
loss.
d . Restore building power to the unit
and return Main Input breaker to
ON.
29. POWER MONITOR PANEL. Ir unit is
equipped with a Power Monitor Panel:
Turn the unit ON. Ensure that the volt-
age values indicated by the Monitor
Panel correspond to the voltage values
measured at the line side of the output
circuit breaker (Step 24).
Site Prep,' installation
and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
-30. CENTRALIZED MONITOR. l f the
unit is c o n n e c t e d to a Centralized Moni-
toring System: Turn the unit and Cen-
tralized Monitoring System ON. Verify
monitor system operation as described
in the Centralized Monitoring System
User's Manual.
-31. CONTROL VOLTAGE:
-a. Obtain access to the low voltage ter-
minals in the Low Voltage Junction
Box (if used), or in the low voltage
control section inside unit.
-b. With the unit ON. Measure and re-
cord the DC control voltage on ter-
minals 1 (t) and 3 (corn).
- c. ~ o n t k o lvoltage = (Voltage
should be between 20 and 28 Vdc.)
-32. CUSTOMER ALARMS. I f c u s t o m e r
alarms are provided:
-a. With the unit ON and simulate alarm
operation by jumpering the appropri-
ate low voltage control terminals.
(Refer to the control wiring installa-
tion drawing furnished with the unit.)
-b. Verify correct alarm annunciation by
the Power Monitor Panel and/or by
the Centralized Monitoring System.
- 25 - Precision Power Center
kh Liebert Computer
Support
Systems

Equipment Connection Check Out (for Units with Distribution Cables)

(also phase rotation, if a 3-phase cir-

cuit) at the receptacle or cable end.

All loads should be disconnected or

turned off before proceeding with the -35. Turn
following steps.
For units with output distribution ca-
bles, be sure that there are NO output
receptacles connected to load equip- -36.
ment plugs, and that the receptacles
a r e not in contact with foreign ob-
jects.
Pay special attention to those output -37.
cables intended for direct-wiring
connection; t h e exposed conductor
e n d s of these cables must not b e in -38.
contact with each other or with any
foreign objects.
-33. Turn on main input power to unit, then
turn on the panelboard main output
breaker(s). -39.
-34. Individually turn on each branch circuit
breaker and check the output voltage -40.
OFF all branch circuit breakers
and the panelboard main output circuit
breaker(s).
Connect the load equipment per equip-
ment manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations.
Turn on the panelboard main output
breaker(s).
Turn on branch circuit break&s to the
load equipment.
Observe the power-up sequence rec-
ommended by the equipment manu-
facturer. ..
Verify that all load equipment operates
properly.
Replace all unit panels.

After Inspection and Start-up procedure is complete, the completed Start-up & In-
spection form furnished with the unit should be signed and returned to:
Liebert Corporation
Customer Service Department
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O. Box 29186 WARRANTY IS NOT IN EFFECT UN-
Columbus, Ohio 43229 LESS INSPECTION AND START-UP
FORM IS RECEIVED BY THE FAC-
TORY.

Site Prep, Installation - 26 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
 bLiebert Computer
Support
Svstems

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
B e f o r e unit is placed Into service after initial Installation, after equipment relocation, or after equipment
has been de-energized for an extended period of time, perform equipment inspection and start-up procedures
-.detailed In Sections 2
as ~~ ~ - and 3 .
~

A f t e r Initial system start-up, the following guidelines can be used for standard equipment operation. These
guidelines should be reviewed for any special eqUlpment modiflcatlons, special site considerations, or company
policies which may require changes to the standard equipment operation.

put breakers, then turn O F F the unit's main

Emergency Shutdown
To perform an immediate system shutdown
during emergency conditions, lift the protec-
tive clear cover and push the "Emergency
Power Off" (EPO) switch located on the unit
front door.
DEPENDING ON THE PARTICULAR
CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING. OPERA-
T I O N OF THE UNIT EPO SWITCH MAY
CAUSEOTHEREQUIPMENTTO ALSO
SHUTDOWN.
If site is equipped with a Remote Emergency
Power Off (REPO) switch (such as is re-
quired by NEC Article 645 at the principal
exit doors), to perform an immediate room
shutdown, activate one of the REPO
switches.
input circuit breaker. T o remove all power
from the unit, turn O F F the building power
to the unit's input breaker or junction box.
Normal System Turn ON
Make certain all unit circuit breakers a r e in
the O F F position. All unit circuit breakers
are located behind the front doors. Turn ON
building power to the unit. Turn ON the
unit's main input circuit breaker. If the cir-
cuit breaker has been tripped OFF (instead
of being turned O F F ) , the circuit breaker
handle must be moved to the OFF position
before being turned ON. If the unit has a
voltage monitoring panel, verify proper out-
put voltages before turning ON output circuit
breakers. Turn ON the panelboard main
breakers. Individually turn ON each output
circuit breaker follo'ying the load equipment
manufacturer's start-up sequence.

Normal System Shutdown Manual Restart

-- --

To perform a normal system shutdown, per-
form an orderly load equipment (computer
system) shutdown according to the load
equipment manufacturer's recommended
shutdown sequence. The load equipment cfn
be turned OFF at each piece of load equip-
ment or at the power center's output distribu-
tion (circuit breaker) panels located behind
the unit's front door. Turn OFF all unit out-
If unit's manual restart feature has been selected,
the unit's main input circuit breaker will be
tripped upon a power outage, preventing re-
petitive application of unstable voltage and
allowing for an orderly system restart. If rhe
main input circuit breaker is tripped upon a
power outage, after power is restored, follow
the Normal System Turn ON outlined
above.

Site Prep, Installation - 27 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual

~ ~ -~ ~~
~ ~ .~~
~ - p ~~~
~ ~

-
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Basic Monitor Panel (Units Without Monitoring)

I bLiebert

XFORMER OVER TEMPISILENCE - Upon ventilation, high or low input voltage, or

occurrence of a transformer overtemperature monitoring malfunction. Failure to correct
condition, the "Xformer Over TempISi-
~ the overtemperamre condition may result in
lence" switch will become illuminated and a n automatic system shutdown due to the
the audible alarm will be activated. Pushing second stage of overtemperature sensing.
the "Xformer Over TempfSilence" switch After correction of the alarm condition, the
will silence the audible alarm. The cause of alarm will automatically reset. ::,:,..
the overtemperature condition should be
investigated and corrected. Possible causes
include transformer overload, inadequate

Power Monitor Panel

I bLiebert

Monitored Parameters - A 4 x 20 character monitored parameters are sequentially dis-

LCD display is provided to indicate the input
voltages (line-to-line), output voltages (line-
to-line and line-to-neutral) , output currents
(each phase, neutral and ground), output
kVA, KW, power factor, percent load, and
output frequency. Pressing the "Scan" switch
will activate the "Autoscan" mode where all
played automatically. Momentarily pressing
the "HoldlSequence" switch interrupts the
"Autoscan" mode. Pressing the "HoldlSe-
quence" switch allows manual selection of
the sequentially displayed parameters.

Site Prep, Installation Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
bLiebert
Alarms - Upon occurrence of any of the follow-
ing alarms, the alarm message appears on the
LCD display, the "Alarm Present/Siience"
switch is illuminated, and the audible alarm is
activated. Pressing the "Alarm PresentISi-
lence" switch silences the audible alarm. Af-
ter the alarm condition is corrected, the
alarm can be reset by pressing the "Alarm
Present/SilenceU switch when prompted by
the LCD display or by way of the Centralized
Monitoring System (if used).
Output Overvoltage - Indicates one or
more of the output phase voltages has ex-
ceeded the preset limit (normally t 6 % of
nominal). The high output voltage should be
verified and corrective action taken. In the
absence of other procedures, a normal (or-
derly) system shutdown should be performed
to prevent load equipment damage.
Output Undervoltage - Indicates one or
more of the output phase voltages has ex-
ceeded the preset limit (normally -13% of
nominal). The low output voltage should be
verified and corrective action taken. In the
absence of other procedures, a normal (or-
derly) system shutdown should be performed
to prevent load equipment damage.
Transformer Overtemp - Indicates a unit
transformer overtemperature condition. The
cause of the overtemperature condition
should be investigated and corrected. Possi-
ble causes include unit overload, inadequate
ventilation, high or low input voltage, or
monitoring malfunction. Failure to correct
the overtemperature condition may result in
an automatic system shutdown due to the
second stage of overtemperature sensing.
Output Overcurrent -
Indicates one or
more of the output phase currents has ex-
ceeded the preset limit (normally 95% of the
unit's full load amp rating). The overcurrent
condition should be verified and corrective
action taken. In the absence of other proce-
dures, some of the output loads should be
turned off to reduce unit loading. If unbal-
Site Prep, Installation
and Operation Manual
~~- ~ ~ ~~~
~ ~~
Computer
Support
Systems
anced phase currents exist, some of the loads
should be shifted from the higher loaded
phase(s) to the lower loaded phase(s).
Neutral Overcurrent -Indicates that the
neutral current has exceeded the preset limit
(normally 95% of the unit's full load amp rat-
ing). The overcurrent condition should be
verified and investigated to see if corrective
action is required. In some cases, high neu-
tral current indicates phase current unbal-
ance which should be corrected. Where high
neutral currents are the result of harmonic
load currents, all affected components (in-
cluding output wiring) should be verified to
be suitable for the current.
Frequency Deviation - Indicates that the
output frequency has exceeded preset l i m h
(normally f0.5 Hz). The frequency devia-
tion should be verified and the cause investi-
gated and corrected.
Phase Sequence Error -
Indicates that the
output phase sequence is not A. B, C. The
phase sequence should be verified and cor-
rective action taken. Three-phase loads sen-
sitive to phase sequence should not be oper-
ated without proper phase sequence.
Phase Loss - Indicates that one or more of
the phase voltages is low or missing. The low
voltage condition should be verified and cor-
rective action taken. In the absence of other
procedures, a normal (orderly) shutdown
should be performed to prevent equipment
damage.
Ground Overcurrent - Indicates the system
ground current has exceeded the preset limit
(normally 2 amps). The overcurrent condi-
tion should be verified and corrective action
taken. Possible causes are wiring errors,
ground faults, or excessive leakage current.
-
Customer Alarms ( 5 ) Indicates customer-
designated alarms. The cause and corrective
action depend on the nature of the alarm.
See the control wiring section for contact clo-
sure connection information.
- 29 - Precision Power Center
-. ~ ~ -~
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

MAINTENANCE
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (REPAIR)
Even the most rellable equipment may fall. Llebert Customer Service and Support (CSkS) is at your
sewlce to assure fast repair of your unlt and rnlnlmurn downtime of your lnstallatlon.

ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM MAINTE-

NANCE ON THE PREClSiON POWER CENTER SYSTEM.

Standard electrical troubleshooting procedures handled by qualified electricians or referred

should be used to isolate problems in the
unit. If there are questions, don't hesitate to
contact Liebert CSdrS.
Repair o r replacement of standard items, such
as circuit breakers, fuses, transformers, ca-
pacitors, and indicator lights can be either
to Liebert CS&S. Refer to the Parts Manual.
Repairs related to the monitoring system should
be referred to Lieben CS&S.
TOContact Liebert CS&S for information o r re-
pair service, call 1-800-543-2378.

Site Prep, Installation - 30 - Precision Power Center

and Operation Manual
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (INSPECTION & CLEANING)

AIr clrculatlon through the cabinet m a y cause dust to accumulate on Internal components. Cleaning
should be done as necessary during electrlcal lnspectlons.
Annual general system lnspectlons, cleaning, and operatlon checks are recommended to ensure
system performance and long service life.

ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM

MAINTENANCE ON THE PRECISION POWER CENTER SYSTEM. ALL
VnLTAGE SOURCES TO THE UNIT MUST BE DISCONNECTED
BEFORE INSPECTING O R CLEANING WITHIN THE CABINET.

.
Inspection Schedule -
It is difficult to establish a schedule for
periodic cleanings since conditions vary from
.. Ventilation openings and grilles should be
inspected and cleaned every six months to
one year.
A complete inspection and operational
site to site. Inspections after the first 24

.
hours, 30 days and 6 months of operation
should help determine a pattern for the in-
spection schedule.
Electrical connections and component
mountings should be inspected after the first
24 hours. 30 days, and 6 months of opera-
tion. Inspections should be conducted annu-
.
checkout should be performed annually. This
is best done by performing the inspection and
stan-up procedure as detailed in Section 3.
Lieben Customer Service and Suppon of-
fers a complete range of preventive mainte-
nance services. These include thorough
equipment performance checks, and calibra-
ally thereafter. tion of electronics. Contact Liebert CS&S
(1-800-543-2378) for details.

Site Prep, Installation - 31 - Precision Power Canter

and Operation Manual
 Liebert
Power
Condition~ng
Systems

SITE PREPARATION and

INSTALLATION MANUAL
 Original Printing
Revised
.....
..... October, 1983
October, 1985

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION -1

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page ii Rev. 10/85
 CONTENTS
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION ................................................ 1
Unpacking and Preliminary Inspection ....................................... 1
Handling Considerations ........................................................... 1
Unit Preparation ..................................................................... 4
Location Considerations ........................................................ 4
Additional Distribution Sidesection Mounting & Wiring ............... 6
Input Power Connections ....................................................... 7
Main Power Input .................................................................... 7
Junction Box Installation ......................................................... 9
System Grounding ................................................................. 11
Grounding Electrode Conductor .............................................. 11
Output Power Connections ..................................................... 13
Control Wiring Connections .................................................... 13
Input Voltage Sense Connections ............................................. 18
EQUIPlrdENT INSPECTION AND START-UP .................................. 20
Internal Inspection ............................................................ 20
start-up ............................................................................. 20
CHECK LIST. INSPECTION k START-UP ..................................... 22
Inspection ...............................................................................
Start-up ......
....................................................................23
................................................24
Monitoring System Check-Out
Equipment Connection Check-Out .......................................... 26
MAINTENANCE INSPECTION SCHEDULE .................................... 27
T-.,

Cleaning ............................................................................... 27
/' '.
L
Electrical Connections ........................................................... 27

FIGURES
. Cabinet and Floor Planning Dimensions. PPC ............................. 2
1
. Cabinet and Floor Planning Dimensions. Sidesection ................... 3
2
Recommended Minimum Clearances .........................................5
... Typical
3
4
5
Junction Box Connections ........................................... 10
Simplified Grounding. PPC Without Transformer ...................... 12
. Simplified Grounding. PPC With Transformer .......................... I 2
6
.. Simplified
7
8
Diagram. Power Center Shutdown Circuit ................ 14
Typical Control Wiring. Units Without Monitoring .................... 15
9 . Typical Control Wiring. Units TNith VCMP ............................... 16
10. Typical Control Wiring. Units W i t h IGM .................................. 17
11. Remote Input Voltage Monitoring Connections ......................... 19

TABLES
I Suggested Minimum Wire Size D a t a .......................................... 8
II Torque Specifications ............................................................ 21

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATTON

Rev . 10185 PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page iii
 TYPICAL GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DIAGRAM
PRECISION POWER CENTER

Remote emergency power off

Switch (REP0.)

'.

Maln Input power to unit. 3 p

wlre plus ground for units wlth
transformer and 3 phase. 4 wlre plus
ground for units wlthout transformer, Bullding Interface and alarm
not by Lleben connections, not by Llebert ,
-Translent suppression plat
LOWvoltage junction box and cable

customer speclflcatlons

Optlonai devices, refer to the speclflcatlon sheet for optlons supplied.

SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page iv Rev. 10185
 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
\

The installer of a Precision Power Center should p'&rform the following steps to assure a
quality installation.

UNPACKING AND HANDLING CONSIDERATIONS

PRELTMINARY INSPECTION
1. 6upect the shipping a a t e k ) for dam-
age or signs of mishandling before
unpacking the unit (s).
2. Opem the s w i n g crates by carefully
removing the sides, ends, and top.
(Use care to avoid puncturing the
container with sharp objects that
would damage the contents.)
3. Remove the packing and vapor b a r r i m
and impect the equipment for any
obvious shipping dam ages.
- NOTE -
The units should not be loosened
from the shipping pallet until after
/-,
all handling by fork lift or pallet
L, jack is completed. Complete in-
ternal inspection should be made
after equipment positioning and
prior to electrical hookup.
4. If any damage as a result of shipping is
observed, immediately file a claim
with the shipping agency and forward a
copy of this claim to:
The Precision Power Center is bolted to a
wooden pallet to allow handling by fork-
lift equipment. The Power Center and
cable reels are furnished with casters to
allow them to be rolled into place after
they have been unbolted from the pallet.
r Check size and weight - Refer to the
cabinet submittal information furnished
for the unit. m i c a 1 size and weight
information is shown in Figures 1 and 2.
r Plan the route - The route that the
Power Center will follow to its installa-
tion area should be planned to ensure that
all passages are large enough to accom-
modate the unit, and that the floors will
support the weight. (i.e. Are the door-
ways, elevators, ramps, etc. adequate?
Are there any non - negotiable corners or
offsets in the hallways? )
r Mwe with care - To prevent panel
damage, it is recommended that the
exterior side panels be removed before the
unit is moved, and that they not be re-
placed until the unit is in its final installed
position.

Liebert Corporation
Customer Service Department
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O. Box 29186
Columbus, Ohio 43229

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10/85 Page 1
 CABINET AND FLOOR PLANNING DIMENSIONAL DATA
PRECISION POWER CENTER

FOOTPRINT AND FLOOR CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

Y*" IUSE W N l l E
FLOOm PEDESTALS

OPTIONAL FLOOR PEDESTALS

Figure 1. m i c a 1 Cabinet and Floor Planuixig Dimension Data, Precision Power Center.

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 2 Rev. 10/85
 ADDITIONAL PANELBOARD ENCLOSURE DATA

CABINET DIMENSIONAL DATA

C V l O I l l AREb FOR
CABLE UIT.

. - .
,,-m,
FOOTPRINT AND FLOOR CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

OPTIONAL FLOOR PEDESTALS

C'- Figure 2. Typical Cabinet and Flmr P l d i Dimension Data, Distribution Sidesection.

SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185 Page 3
U r n PREPARATION
r Easily moved - The Precision Power
Center may be easily removed from the
shipping pallet and installed by customer
personnel. A typical procedure is as
follows:
1. Set the palletized assembly in a level
area, where there is enough room to
roll the unit and entire cable assembly
off the pallet onto the floor.
2. Cut the shipping bands.
rt WARNING * The shorter the runs of distribution cables
THE SHIPPING BANDS M A Y BE
UNDER TENSION. USE APPRO-
PRIATE EYE, FACE, AND HAND
PROTECTION TO SAFEGUARD
AGAINST INJURY FROM BAND
BACKLASH.
3. Remove the Factory-provided ramp
from its shipping position. (One ramp is
provided per order, packed either in
front of, or on top of, a set of cable
reel(s).) Locate the ramp on the floor
adjacent to the pallet to provide a
smooth path from pallet to floor.
4. Remove the side and rear panels from
the Precision Power Center module.
(Carefully disconnect the panel ground
wires by pulling the "easy-disconnect"
terminals attached to the frame of the
unit .)
5. Remove the bolts holding the unit to
the shipping pallet. (Located in each
of the four bottom corners.)
6. If cables are on wheeled cable reel(s),
remove bolts holding reel(s) to pallet.
7. Remove shipping blocks from under
unit and cable assembly, then remove
chocks from all casters.
8. Roll unit off pallet onto floor, care-
fully guiding cable reel(sl a f t e r it.
9. Roll unit and cable package to location
of installation.
SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 4
-
- CAUTION =
Before maneuvering the unit into its
final position, read and follow all
advisories in the following 'Location
Considerations" paragraphs.
LOCATION CONSIDERATIONS
The Precision Power Center should be lo-
cated within the computer room, and/or
next to the load(s) which it is supplying.
to the equipment loads, the better.
Logical equipment arrangement and al-
lowances for future equipment additions
or rearrangements must also be considered
in determining the optimum location.
r Fmvironment - The Precision Power
Center is designed for operation in ambi-
ent temperatures of OOC to 40°C with a
relative humidity of 0% to 95% (non-
condensing).
r Bottom Clearauce - The Precision
Power Center requires bottom clearance
for exit of cables / conduit and for cooling
air flow. This clearance is automatically
provided by a raised floor (6 inches /
15 centimeters minimum height).
When the unit is not located on a raised
floor ( or if the raised floor is not ade-
quate to support the unit 1, the optional
floor pedestals of the appropriate height
should be used. (Non-raised floor
applications are not CSA approved).
Figures 1 and 2 show the raised-floor
cutout dimensions for Precision Power
Center modules.
r Service Clearances - Figure 3 shows
the recommended minimum service clear-
ances for all Precision Power Centers.
The indicated clearances at the front and
one side or the rear of the unit are re-
quired for service access by the National
Electrical Code (Article 110-16).
Clearance above the unit is required for
cooling air flow.
Rev. 10/85
 . ~

and cable exit

Access required: Front, plus one other side or rear.

Figure 3. Recommended Minimum Service Clearances; Precisicm Power Center.

i
V

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185
DISTRIBUTION SIDESECTION MOUNTING & WIRING
For Precision Power Centen with more than three panelboards, the additional
panelboards are furnished in sidesection enclosures which are shipped separate from the
main unit.
SIDESECTION MOUNTING
The additional distribution sidesection can
he mounted on either the left or right side
of the main unit.
r Provide a floor cutout for exit of
output cables, as shown in Figure 2.
r Remove the side panel and the lower
panel hooks from the main unit.
o Align the distribution sidesection with
the main unit and bolt the two frames
topether using the four bolts and spacers
providei.
If floor pedestals axe used for the main
unit, two additional floor pedestals are
required for the sidesection. See Figure 2.
r Install the lower panel hooks on the
sidesection enclosure.
r After electrical connections are
c o ~ p l e t e d ,install the unit side panel on
t h iidesection enclosure.
SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 6
SIDESECTION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Five conductors ,(3 phase conductors,
neutral, and ground) are furnished with the
distribution sidesection for connection to
the main unit in the field.
r For Recision Power Centers
i r a n s f o r m e ~ , the sidesection phase
conductors are connected directly to the
transf ormer terminals:
Phase A to X 1
Phase B to X 2
Phase C to X3
The sidesection neutral and ground
conductors are connected to the Precision
Power Center main ground busbar.
o For Recision Power Centers without
bansformers, the sidesection phase and
neutral conductors are connected to the
corresponding output power distribution
terminal blocks inside the main unit. The
sidesection ground conductor is connected
to the main ground busbar.
r For & h c e s i o n Power Centem with
current monitoring, route each sidesection
conductor through the appropriate current
transformer (CTI in the main unit.
- NOTE -
Sidesection conductors must pass
through the current transformers in
the same direction as the main unit
panelboard conductors. Use the
existing main unit panelhoard wiring
for reference.
Rev. 10/85
INPUT POWER CONNECTIONS
If the Precision Power Center is furnished with junction boxes, input power connections
are made as detailed in the Junction Box Installation paragraphs (next section). If
junction boxes a r e not furnished, the input power feeders are connected t o the input
power lugs or blocks located inside the unit.

VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING HIGH-VOLTAGE (POWER)

AND LOW - VOLTAGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE DE -
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BEFORE INSTALLING
CABLES OR MAKING ANY CONNECTIONS, WHETHER IN
THE JUNCTION BOX OR IN THE UNIT.

MAIN POWER INPUT

The 3-phase power input t o t h e Precision
Power Center is normally supplied directly
- For units a transformer, the main
feeder cable consists of t h r e e phase
conductors and one (safety) ground
conductor (3W + G).
from the service entrance to minimize
disturbances caused by other loads i n the r For units without a transformer, the
building. main feeder cable consists of t h r e e phase
The input feeder circuit should b e sized conductors, one neutral, and one (safety)
in accordance with the NEC and any local ground conductor (4W + GI.
building codes t o assure the feeder's r Typical conductor s i z e d a t a is shown in
ability to safely carry t h e system's full- Table L All connections must comply with
load current, including losses. the NEC and all other applicable codes.
The input feeder conductors should b e
sized for no more than 2% voltage drop.
If operation a t under-voltage conditions
for extended periods of time is desired,
the input feeders must b e oversized.

SrrE PREPARATION and INSTALLAmON

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185 Page 7
 Table I. Suggested Minimum W
ire Size Data

................................................
U N I T S WITH IRANSFORMERS
/ INPUT i
i VOLTS / KVA f sugge$tcd :
nput Input j feeder j
FlA O P D jloirc sire j
i j
: ........................... ........ .....................................
A

j 208V j 145
j 75 217
j 100 289 350 f(2) 00 *
. . j 125 361 450 j(21 0000 f
i 150 43 3 600 !l2)350-MtM *f
= Full Load Amps
i 200 NIA NIA i' NIA i i
of Precision Power
...............,............ ........ ...........!.........................!;
~

i 225 NIA NIA 1

,.....................
............ NIA
/
Center.
i 240V 50
125 175 j 00 f OPD = Overcurrent R o -
! 75 188 250 j 250-MCM
j 100
j 125
j 150
251
313
376
350
400
500
j121
jl2)
00
000
j i 2 1 2 5 0 - ~
. j tection Device 'inside
Recision Power Cen-
ter.
i 200 j
NIA NIA j NIA
: ..............:............ ......... ....-......,......................
! 225 N/ A N/A ! NIA
-..-.,. ! ".-................! Wue Sizes based on NEC
j 380V i 79 I00 i 3
i
j
1984 Table 310-10,
using 7S°C copper
! j 75 119 150 j 0
! conductor.
i I00 158 200 !i 000 i
i
j
i 125 198 250 250-MtM j
! i. 1200
50 23 7 300 f 350-MCM j
I ! 225 317 roo j r 2 1 ooo i i * Parallel Feed-
!........................... ......... ................................... .................................
...
356 450 !(2) 0000 !
: per NEC 300-20 and
j 415V I
, 50 72 ,o I 3
i! 310-4.
!
i : 75 109
i
! : loo 145 zoo j 000
i : 125 181 250 j 250-MCM
! : 150 217
* j j ZOO 290
: .....-. ......
..............:..._.
! 225 326
"
j 4sov j; 50 63
j i 75 94
j i 100 125
NOTES:
j I25 156
!
i: 210500 188
251
1) Inplt feeder wire size listed in Table I is the
I minimum feeder size recommended. Larger
j.." ..........:............ ........
! 225 281
wire may be required because of voltage drop
j 575v i, 50 52 or supply overcurrent protection device size.
j j 75 78
j !j I125
00 104
2) For taPsformerless units with 3-phase,
! 130 4-wire-plus-ground input feeder, larger wire
j i 150 156 size may be required due to harmonic neutral
j zoo 208 currents. Refer to NEC Table 310-16, Notes
............................
! 225
........
234
8, 10, and 11.

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 8 Rev. 10185

JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
(if used)
Main input and low voltage junction boxes
can be provided for the Precision Power
Center.
r Shipping Arrangements - The junction
r Dimensions -
Dimensions a r e given in
the submittal inform ation furnished for
t h e unit. Typical exterior dimensions of
the junction boxes a r e as follows:
..............................................................
Low Voltage Control Jlmction Box:

boxes, if used, can either be shipped with i Inches iMillimetersi

the system or can be advanceshipped for ............................................................. :
installation during the roughing-in stage of i Width i 8 203
new construction. i Length i 10 254
-
r Installation Location The flexible ca-
i Height i 4 102
bles supplied by the factory for connecting
the junction boxes to the unit a r e 10 feet Main Inplt Junction Box.
(3 meters) long.
Each junction box should be centered
under easily-accessible removable floor
tiles, and bolted to the sub-floor. The
junction boxes should be installed a
maximum of 8 f e e t (2.4 meters) from the
feeder entrance of the Precision Power
Center.

r Jlmction Box Connections must be

installed in compliance with t h e NEC and

-
all other applicable codes.

WARNING ir

VERIFY THAT INCOMING HIGH-

VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW-
VOLTAGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS
ARE DE -
ENERGIZED AND
LOCKED OUT BEFORE IN-
STALLING CABLES OR MAKING
ANY CONNECTIONS THE
JUNCTION BOX.

Junction box connections a r e shown in the

submittal information furnished for the
unit. Typical connections a r e shown in
Figure 4 and described in t h e Control
Wiring and Input Power Connection
paragraphs.

SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185 Page 9
 RECOMMENDED LOC,I 'ION
FOR CUSTOMER
HIGH VOLTAGE
CONNECT~ON
I3 PHASE 3W IG
FOR UNiTS WITH
TRANSFORMER
( 3 PHASE I W * G
FOR UNITS WITHOUT
TRANSFORMER I

RECOMMENDED LOCATION
FOR CUSTOMER LOCliTlON FOR
HIGH VOLTAGE FACTORY SUPPLIED
CONNECTIOP~. HIGH VOLTAGE
13 PHASE 3 W + G CABLE ASSEMBLY
FOR UNITS WITH IPARALLELCABLEs
TRANSFORMER.)
13 PHASE d W i G
-- - SUPPLIED ON
LARGER UNlTSi
FOR UNITS WITHOUT
TRANSFORMER1

--_
HIGH VOLTAGE JUNCTION BOX (UNITS WITHOUT IGM MONITORING)
RECOMMENDED LOCATIONS
CUSTOMER LOW VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS

I I

RECOMMENDED LOCATION FOR

FACTORY SUPPLIED LOW VOLTAGE
CABLE ASSEMBLY

LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX

Figure 4. 'Ippical Junction Box Connections.

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 10 Rev. 1 0 / 8 5
SYSTEM GROUNDING
The performance and safety of anv power
conditioning system depends upon a proper
ground installation. Figures 5 and 6 show
recommended grounding arrangements.
The input feeder must include equip-
ment grounding means as required by the
NEC and local codes. An insulated ground
conductor is recommended to be run in the
feeder conduit. Although ground conduc-
tors can be t h e minimum size per NEC
Table 250-95, they are recommended to be
parity-sized with polwer conductors for in-
creased system performance.
If the input power feeder conduit is used
a s the ground conductor, adequate
GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR
r Required by code -Precision Power
Centers equipped with transformers a r e
defined by t h e National Electrical Code as
"separately derived systems". Therefore,
according to NEC 250-26, all Recision
Power Centers equipped with transformers
require a local grounding electrode cond-
uctor in addition to the equipment safety
ground which is normally run with the
input power conductors.
r Unit collpecticm - A terminal is
furnished inside the unit for field-
connecting t h e grounding electrode con-
ductor t o t h e secondary neutral conductor.
-
See the submittal information furnished
for the unit.
Electrode cormectiom -
The grounding
electrode conductor is required t o be run
from the secondary grounded circuit con-
ductor (neutral) to the nearest effectively
grounded: (In order of preference.)
1) Building steel.
2) Metal water pipe.
3) Other made grounding electrode.
SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185
electrical continuity must b e maintained
at all conduit connections throughout the
conduit run. For optimum performance, it
is recommended that t h e t o t a l ground
system impedance b e 3 ohms o r les.
If the Precision Power Center is used to
supply power t o a computer room or area
which is equipped with a grounding grid or
a grounded raised-floor stringer system, a
grounding conductor should also be run
from t h e Precision Power Center ground
bus t o t h e grid or floor system.
Sizing of the grounding electrode con-
ductor is based on t h e secondary circuit
conductors.
According to the NEC Table 250-94, the
minimum recommended grounding elec-
trode conductor AWG size is as follows:
1.............11...................................*
ii OUTPUT VOLTAGE i
IKVA
..ii 2 0 8 i. 3 8 0 i 4 1 5 i
....................................................
.. i 4 8 i 8 i
i s 0
....
i
....................................................
:
i 7 5
..E.... 2 j 6 i 6 ;
....................................................
: l o o i..j 0 i 4 : 4 i
:
....................................................
1125
..ii 0 i 2 i 2 i
....
....................................................
i150 ii.. 00 i 2 i 2 i
....................................................
..ii 00 i 0 i 0 i
i200
....
....................................................
i 225 ii.. 00 i 0 i 0 i
....................................................
(Assuming 7 5 O ~
copper conductors.)
Page 11
r Recommended methods f o r running the 1) Outside of conduit.
grounding electrode conductor: (Arranged
2) Inside non-metallic conduit.
in order of preference f o r system per-
Formance.) (As acceptable by local and 3) Inside non-ferrous conduit.
other applicable codes:)
4) Inside ferrous conduit, bonded to the
ferrous conduit a t hoth ends, as
acceptable by local and other ap-
plicable codes.

PRECISION POWER CENTER

WITHOUT TRANSFORMER

Figure 5. Simplified Grounding Diagram, Recision Power Center Without Transformer.

PRECISION POWER CENTER

WITH TRANSFORMER
I
OlSlRlBVnON

5 WIRE
OUTPUT

--- GROUND
<INSULATED
UIIN GROYIIO

INPUT P A R m 21zEC1
POWER WITH POWER
FEEDER CONOUCIOIISI

GROUNDING ELECTROOE CONDUCTOR

PER NEC 250.26
RUN OUTSIDE OF CONDUIT OR
IN NOWFERROUS CONDUIT

Figure 6. Simplified Grounding Diagram, Precision Power Center With Transformer.

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 12 Rev. 10185
,r
? OUTPUT POWER CONNECTIONS
When equipped with integral distribution, the Precision Power Center provides the
flexibility of custom output power distribution configurations.
r O u t p t circuit b r e a k d s ) and/or panel-
boards with ground and neutral provisions
are provided inside the Precision Power
Center for connection to t h e load(s) as
required. For details, r e f e r to the
submittal information furnished for the
unit
r Flexiile o u t p l t distribution cables a r e
optional and may be factory supplied. In
determining cable lengths, measure the
distance to t h e load equipment items
following right-angle paths, rather than
diagonally or directly. Allowances should
be made for routing of cables beneath the
floor system along aisles between
equipment. This will facilitate access t o
cables for installation, routine inspection,
and future changes.
Allowances should also b e made for t h e
flexible conduits to be run in a uarallel
P path, lying flat on the sub-floor, to
c> prevent t h e restriction of air-flow under
the raised floor.
If the exact location of t h e Dower
connection on the peripheral equipment is
not known, always extend t h e cables t o
t h e extreme f a r side of t h e equipment
with respect to the Precision Power
Center t o insure adequate cable length.
CONTROL WIRING CONNECTIONS
All Liebert power conditioning systems
have provision for external shutdown con-
trol from Remote Emergency Power Off
(REPO) stations. Figure 7 is a simplified
diagram of t h e shutdown circuitry of a
Precision Power Center.
The control voltage is Z4Vdc. 4 s shown
in the figure, the shutdown device (repre-
sented by t h e REPO switch) activates a
low-current 24Vdc relay which in turn
operates t h e shunt trip mechanism. The
shunt-trip solenoid trips t h e Main Input
1'
'4
SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185
r Initial system output loading should be
between 50% and 75% o f r a t e d capacity.
This allows t h e addition of future loads
without immediately investing in another
power conditioner. The high partial-load
efficiency o f t h e Precision Power Center
permits such sizing without imposing an
energy-use penalty during initial
operation.
r Balancing of loads is good design
practice on any 3-phase system.
Accordingly, each Precision Power Center
distribution panel is load-balanced a t t h e
factory, based on output branch circuit
breaker sizes. All arlditions t o t h e system
should b e arranged so a s to preserve this
balance.
r Code compliance -
All output cables
and connections must coFply with the
NEC md all other applicable codes.
rr WARNING r+
VERIFY THAT INCOMING HIGH
VOLTAGE CIRCUITS ARE DE -
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED - OUT
BEFORE INSTALLING' OUTPUT
BREAKERS AND CABLES.
breaker, which de-energizes the power
center.
When more than one power center i s in-
stalled by t h e user, it is typically a re-
quirement that actuation of a single de-
vice (REPO f o r example) shut down
power centers. ?he low-voltage control
circuits of all modules of any standard
Liebert Precision Power Center a r e de-
signed to meet this requirement. Circuits
can b e arranged such t h a t each building
i n t e r f a c e relay is individually controlled
Page 13
bv its associated power center, or such
t h a t all building interface relays are ener-
gized whenever one or more indiv~dual
power centers in any combination is oper-
ating.
Detailed diagrams and descriptions of
t h e s h t d o m schemes f o r multiplesgstem
installations a r e contained in t h e Liebert
Power Line PLT-35, 'Power Center Shut-
down Control Schemesg, (revision 04/83 o r
later).
0 External control wiring connectians for
Remote Shutdown, alarm, and/or monitor-
ing a r e made to t h e low-voltage junction
box (if used) or to t h e low-voltage control
section located inside the Precision Power
Center.
Control wiring connections vary with
t h e type of monitoring system furnished
with t h e Precision Power Center. Control
installation diagrams are included in the
submittal information furnished for the
unit. Typical control wiring connections
a r e shown in Figures 8, 9, and 10.
r Code compliance - Control wiring
connections must comply With the NEC
and all other applicable codes.
+r WARNING *
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOUMG
HIGH-VOLTAGE (POWER) AND
LOW - VOLTAGE (CONTROL)
CIRCUITS ARE DE - ENERGIZED
AND LOCKED OUT BEFORE IN-
STALLING CABLES OR VAKING
ANY CONNECTIONS, WHETHER IN
THE JUNCTION BOX OR IN THE
UNIT.

SHUTDOWN DEVICES

----

POWER CENTER

Figure 7. Simplified Diagram of Power C e n t e r Shutdown Circuit.

SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 14 Rev. 10185
 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX I F SUPPLIED
OR
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SECTION INSIDE UNIT

OPTIONAL
REMOTE ALARM
INDICATORS
SOURCE TO BE
O.PYDC OR *C
U U IHOlWTOA LOAD
TO BE 0.5 AMP.
lo W M U
(SEE NOTE 4

OPTIONAL
N.C. REMOTE EMERGENCY
POWER O F F SWITCH
SWITCH SUITABLE FOR SWITCHING
LOW UIRRENT 24VDC.
U Y P LOAO TO BE 24VDC. 1 AMP
M U TOTAL W E NOTE a.

NOTES

Figure 8. Typical Control wring for Units Without Mcmitoring.

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER Page 15
Rev. 10185
 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX IF SUPPLIED
OR
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SECTION INSIDE UNIT

lEr-
OPTIONAL
REMOTE ALARM
INDICATORS
SOURCE 10 8 E
03DVDC OR AC
M 1 I INDICATOR LOAD
I 0 BE I AMP MAX
10 W M A X
(SEE NOTE 4)
CONNECT
I
DESIRED
10UOR
A --
RTO
R MiVt 1ECUSTOM
UINA

OPTIONAL I2 MAX)
N O . CUSTOMER AUIRM
CONTACT
CONTAC? SUITABLE FOR
SWITCHING LOW CURRENT 24VDC
I l-I F==

OPTIONAL
N.0. REMOTE EMERGENCY
POWER O F F SWITCH
SWITCH SUITABLE FOR SWITCWNQ
LOW CURRENT 24YDC.
U H P LOAD TO BE 2IYDC. t AMP
MbX. TOTAL ISEE NOTE 9.

OPTIONAL
N.C. REMOTE EMERGENCY
POWER O F F SWITCH
SWITCH SUITABLE FOR SWITCHING
LOW CURRENT 2 W D C
!AMP LOAD TO BE 24VOC. 1 AMP
MAX. TOTALISEE NOTE 9

NOTES

Figure 9. m i c a 1 Control Wiring for Units With Volt / Current Monitor Panel (VCMP).

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 16 Rev. 10185
 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX IF SUPPLIED
OR
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SECTION INSIDE UNIT

FIELOSUPPLIED
ORDUNO lNTEGRlTY
SENSE LW.0 TO
OESlREDGROUND
REFERENCE

OPTIONAL
N.C. CUSTOMER ALARM
CONTACT
FOR DISPUI AT s n E M N T E R w
c o t m n SUITABLE FOR
SWITCHING LOW CURRENT Z 4 V X
- 7 Wll 2ndCUSTOMERAURM ' '
CONNECT TO
DESIRED CUSTOMER - '
AURMVERYINAL
IO.I~.~ZORin - WIP

WZOP
< s f CUSTOMER h U R M

CUSTOMER A U R M COMMOH
OmlONAL I4 MAX)
N.O. CUSTOMER ALARM
CONTACT
FOR DlSPUY AT \ISITMISTERN
CONTACT SUITABLE FOR
SWITCHING LOW OJRRENT24VOC

BLK T
- W205 N O REP0

wln W2DI +21VX

OFTlONAL GRN
N.O. REMOTE EMERGENCY on,,
POWER OFF SWITCH / SLK

wln
R E W E JUUPU12
IFNKREFU
IS USED

OPTIONAL
N.C. REMOTE EMERGENCY IrnRFACE
W W E R OFF SWITCH REUV
5 w m SUnABLE
~ FOn SWmHlM GEE NOTE 0
L M I CURRENT U V O C
ULlP LDAO TO BE 24VDZ 1 AMP
M U TOTAL ,SEE H O E9

NOTES I

Figure 10. Typical Control Wiring for Units Withhformation Gathering Modules (IGM).
r
ii SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185 Page 17
INPUT VOLTAGE SENSE CONNECTIONS ( Units With IGM
Precision Power Center systems equipped with Information Gathering Modules (IGM'S)
include input-voltage-monitor sense lines. These sense lines a r e connected t o the system
input power conductors as described in t h e following paragraphs.
r Precision Power Center Only - The
input-voltage-monitor sense lines should
be connected t o t h e input power feeders
of t h e conditioner. If t h e Precision Power
Center serves as both conditioner and dis-
tribution system of t h e installation, t h e
sense lines a r e connected as follows:
In installatias using junction boxes, the
five sense lines contained within t h e
flexible main input cable should be
connected to t h e six-position input-
voltage-sense terminal block located
inside t h e high-voltage junction box. The
3-position sense terminal block is
connected to t h e main input-voltage
terminal block. See the unit wiring
diagram furnished with t h e unit.
In installaticats without jlmcticm boxes,
t h e sense lines are connected from t h e
i n p u t v o l t a g e sense terminal block to t h e
main input-voltage terminal lugs located
inside t h e unit.
r Precision h w e r Center With Other
Conditioning Units - Besides being a
stand-alone conditioning system, t h e
Precision Power Center may be used as a
distribution module with either a Liebert
Programmed Power Center UPS, a Liebert
Datawave magnetic synthesizer (in a
Remote Distribution o r a Remote Step-
Down configuration), or other conditioning
device. In any of these multiple-module
system installations, t h e Precision Power
Center input-voltage-monitor sense lines
can be extended to t h e input power
feeders of the entire system to monitor
t h e system input voltage.
M e n d i n g the sense lines can b e easily
accomplished.
If t h e unit has a J-box:
1. Connect the five sense lines to the 6-
position input-voltage-sense terminal
block a s detailed above in t h e
SITE PREPARATTON and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 18
"Precision Power Center Only" para-
graphs.
2. Remove all connections between the
3 - position input - voltage - sense
terminal block and the main input-
voltage terminal block.
3. Connect three wires from the 3-
position input-voltage-sense terminal
block to t h e input voltage source to
be monitored (phases A, B, C).
If the unit does not have a J-box:
1. Remove any connections between the
3 - position -
input - voltage sense
terminal block and the main input-
voltage terminal block.
2. Connect three wires from t h e 3-
position input-voltage-sense terminal
block t o t h e input voltage source to
be monitored (phases A, B, C).
r The t h r e e remote sense lines
must be fused a t t h e source for 10A
maximum, 0.1A minimum.
m The three remote sense lines can
b e run i n t h e same high voltage con-
duit as t h e conductors supplying
input power to the Precision Power
Center, provided t h a t the insulation
voltage rating of all conductors is
g r e a t e r than the highest voltage
present i n t h e conduit.
-The source voltage to be
monitored by the input voltage
sense circuit must be a grounded
source less than 600Vac.
r Connection Diagram - Figure 11
shows typical remote input voltage
monitoring connections.
Rev. 10/85
 CONDITIONING UNIT
4TAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER, UPS. ETC.1

30 GROUNDED
SOURCE

I
PHASE B
C PHASE A

PHASE B PRECISION
POWER

I-
600 VOLT
MAX. CENTER
PHASEC
PHASEC
TO FUSES
F11 F12 F l l

BE SURETHERE IS
NOTE: FUSE ' NO CONNECTION
SENSE WIRES BETWEEN THE 3
FOR 10A MAX.. PHASE B POSITION INPUT
l l l O A MIN. VOLTAGE SENSE
TERMINAL BLOCK

REMOTE INPUT
VOLTAGE SENSE
WIRING
-I L INPUT VOLTAGE SENSE WIRES CAN BE RUN IN THE
SAME CONDUIT AS THE PRECISION POWER CENTER
INPIIT POWER FEEDER PROVIDED THAT INSULATION
CIUTION: WlRlNO I S AT
INPUT VOLTAGE POTENTIAL

Figure 11. Remote Input Voltage Monitoring Connectims.

 EOUIPMENT INSPECTION AND START-UP

INTERNAL INSPECTION START - U P

r A detailed internal inspection should be
performed a f t e r t h e unit is in place and
before i t is energized, to ensure trouble-
f r e e start-up. The same internal inspec-
tion should be carried out when perform-
ing preventive maintenance.
Ire WARNING Irr
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING
POWER AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
ARE DE-ENERGIZED AND
LOCKED OUT BEFORE PERFORV-
ING THE INTERNAL INSPECTION.
r Checklists - Each s t e p in the follow-
ing detailed step-by-step checklists should
be performed by the installing personnel
when installing and starting up any
Precision Power Center.
-
r Warranty e f f e c t i d t y A copy of the
appropriate checklist ( furnished with the
equipment ) must be completed, signed,
dated, and returned to t h e Factory.
Warranty coverage of t h e equipment is
not effective unless t h e Check Lit is re-
ceived by the Factory.
rr WARNING ;n*

r EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND

Open t h e unit - Gain access to t h e in- START - UP SHOULD BE PER-
ternal components of t h e Precision Power FORMED ONLY BY TRAINED
Center by removing t h e exterior panels. PERSONNEL.

-
r Viually inspect - Be sure wiring and
components a r e not dam aged.
Check power cormections - Check all
power connections f o r tightness. ~ e f e r G
Table II for torque requirements of all
r HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT DURING START - UP
PROCEDURES.
r ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRE-
CAUTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED
electrical connections not otherwise THROUGHOUT WSPECTION AND
specified on t h e component. -
START UP.
r Perform formal detailed impection -
Follow Equipment Inspection And Start-up
Check L i t when performiong detailed in-
spection.

SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 20 Rev. 10/85
 Table IL Torque Specifications.

...........................................................................................................
A. Nut & Bolt Combinations:
Grade 2 Grade 5
I Bolt Shaft Size i (Standard) ; (Electrical Connections) i
i (1b*in) ; (kg'm) i (lb'in) ; (kg0rn) i

..........................................................................................................
B. Main Inplt and Subfeed Bypass Circuit Breakers:
i Bolt-On Connection i Compression Lug i
Breaker Size i (lb.in) i (kg.m) i (lb-in) i (kg'm) :
i
..........................................................................................................
Up t o 100 Amp i
:
30 0.35 i 30 i 0.35 i
110 t o 225 Amp i 90 i 1.04 i 90 i 1.04 ;
250to600Ampi 190 i 2.19 i 6o j 0.69 i
..........................................................................................................
............................................................
C. Panelboard o r Main C i i t Breaker:: .............................................................
D. Branch Circuit . Breakers:
.
i (lb'in) i (kg-m) i i (lb'in) i (kg'm) i

:
i Compression i : i40to100Amp i 45 i 0.52 i
i Lug i 250 i 2.88;
i .........................:................:................: .............................................................

~i
I
.............................................................
E. Terminal Block Compression Lug.
i AWG Wire Size i (lb'in) i &gem) i
..............................................................
',
i #14-#lo i 35 i 0.40 i
1 i #8 i 40 i 0.46;
i #6 - #4 i 45 i 0.52:
i i #3 - 900 i 50 i 0.58:
A .............................................................
; i_i:
SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185 Page 21
 -

EQUTPMENT INSPECTION AND START - U P CHECK LIST

for the
PRECISION POWER CENTER

Date:

Unit Serial Number:

Unit Model Number:

INSPECTION

1* WARNING 1+

ALL EQUIPMENT INSPECTION PROCEDURES ARE TO BE

PERFORMED WlTH POWER TO THE UNIT TURNED OFF
AND LOCKED OUT.

( EXTERIOR INSPECTION ) - 4. Check all transformer terminal

connections for tightness. Re-
- 1. Exterior of w i t undamaged torque if necessary.
(including cables and receptacles,
if furnished). - 5. Check all breaker connections for
tightness. Re-torque if necessary.
- 2. Service clearances a r e adequate.
- 6. Check all terminal block
connections for tightness. Re-
torque if necessary.
( INTERIOR INSPECTION
- 7. Check transformer mounting
bolts for tightness. To avoid
- NOTE - distorting the isolatioli pads, do
not exceed 600 lb'i (6.9 e r n ) of
When removing exterior torque on mounting bolts.
panels, DISCONNECT PANEL - 8. Remove any foreign objects from
GROUND WIRES BY SEPA- the components or the interior
RATING THE "EASY DISCON- area of the unit. Make sure air
NECT" TERMINALS LOCATED passages on transformer are clear
ON THE FRAME. and f r e e of debris! Make sure
r When replacing exterior adequate openings in floor tile
panels, reconnect all panel exist for ventilation.
ground wires.
9. Replace side panels. (Leave
access to breakers for start-up
procedure.)
- 3. Inspect all wire and conductor
insulation for damage.

SITE PREPARATTON and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 22 Rev. 10185
 -
START UP

* WARNING Ir+

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE EQUIPMENT

THROUGHOUT THE MAJORITY OF THE START-UP PROCEDURE.
PROCEED CAUTION.

-10. Make certain that all circuit
breakers are in the OFF position.
- NOTE -
Steps 11 through 15 apply to the
Input Junction Box. If this
installation is not provided with
a n Input Junction Box, proceed
directly to Step 16.
-11. Remove the cover of the Input
Junction Box.
-12. the
Turn ON the building power to
junction Box. Check the
phase rotation at the box. Phase
rotation should be A, B, I=, as
indicated.
-13. Check and record the input volt-
ages at the junction box:
Volts, phase A to phase B =- -
Volts, phase B to phase C =
.-
-18. Check and record the input volt-
ages a t the input breaker:
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B t o phase C =
Volts, phase C to phase A =
.-
-19. Turn 0,N the input breaker; wait
one minute. (If breaker. trips
OFF, check for wiring e r r o k then
contact local factoy represen-
tative).
- CAUTION =
m All loads should be discon-
nected or turned off before pro-
ceeding with the following steps.
m For units with output distri-
bution cables, be sure that there
are NO output receptacles con-
nected to load equipment plugs,
. -
and that the receitHcles are not
in contact with foreign objects.

Volts, phase C to phase A .=

- m Pay special attention to those
output cables which are intended
fordirect-wiring connection; the
-14. Turn OFF and lock out the build-
ing power to the input junction exposed conductor ends of these
box. cables must not be in contact
with each other or with any for-
-15. Replace the junction box cover. eign objects.
-16. Turn ON the building input power
to the unit.
20. Turn on panelboard main circuit
-17. Check the phase rotation at the - breakelk) (if furnished). Check
input breaker. Phase rotation the phase rotation at the load-
should be A, B, C, left-to-right. side terminals of each panel-
board. The rotation should be
A, B, C, left-to-right.

C
SiTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185 Page 23
-21. Check and record the vortages a t
the load-side terminals of the
panelboard main circuit breaker:
Volts, phase A t o phase B .=-
Volts, phase B t o phase C .=-
Volts, phase C t o phase A =
.-
Volts, phase A t o neutral .=
- information.)
Volts, phase B t o neutral =
Volts, phase C to neulzal =
- NOTE -
The Precision Power Center
transformer has 7 input voltage
taps for each input phase. The
taps a r e arranged in 2%% inter-
vals ranging from -10% t o nomi-
nal (4 taps) to+5% (2 taps). This
permits t h e transformer to pro-
vide the proper output voltage
for a range of input voltages.
Should it necessary, the
MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK OUT
-25. BASIC INDICATORS
(Main Iuplt):
- Tun t h e building power to
a.r
the main input ON, then turn t h e
main input breaker ON.
- Check t h a t the local EVER-
b.r
GENCY POWER OFF button is il-
luminated and t h a t t h e second in-
dicator (TRANSFORMER OVER-
TEMP or ALARM PRESENTI is
off.
c . r Return all breakers to OFF.
- the unit ON, and check to ensure
-26. MANUAL RESTART CHECK:
Be sure Restart selector switch is
in t h e "Manual" position.
a . r Turn on building power to
- t h e load side of the output circuit
the Main input.
-. r Turn Main Input breakerk)
b
ON.
SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLAnON
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 24
wiring arrangement may be
changed to match the input
voltage:
1.- Open main input circuit
breaker.
2 . 0 Select tap arrangement to
match input voltage (Refer to
transformer nameplate for tap
3 . 0 Secure each line to its
proper tap.
4. r Repeat Steps 19 - 21.
-22. Depress t h e local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF switch and verify
system shutdown. Turn the unit
back on.
-23. Repeat s t e p 22 for each remote
EMERGENCY POWER OFF
switch with which t h e system is
equipped .
-24. Turn off all circuit breakers.
-
c.r Turn OFF building power t o
unit.
-
d.m Observe that Main Input
breaker automatically trips open
upon power loss.
-
e.o Restore main input building
power and return Main input
breaker to ON.
-27. LOCAL VCMP:
I£ unit is equipped with local
Volt-Current Monitor Panel, turn
that the voltage values indicated
by the Monitor Panel correspond
to t h e voltage values measured a t
breaker.
Rev. 10/85
-28. S-MASTER: -31.
If the unit is connected to a
Sitemaster system:
a . 0 Turn the unit and Sitemaster
Ensole ON. Verify monitor sys-
tem operation a s described in the
Sitemaster Owner's Manual.
b . r Check to ensure that the
voltage values indicated by the
Sitemaster correspond to the in-
put and output voltage values
measured previously.
-32.
For units with IGM and remote
input voltage monitoring, verify
Sitemaster or Service Terminal
input voltage values correspond
to the measured remote input
voltages.
CONTROL VOLTAGE:
a.r Obtain access to the low
- Terminal.
voltage terminals in the Low
'
~ o l t a i eJunction Box (if used), or
in the-low voltage control section
inside unit.
b . r Turn the unit ON. Measure
- r e c t IGM operation.
and record the control voltage on
terminals 1 ( 4 and 3 (corn).
-
c.r Cmtml voltage =
(Voltage should be between 20
and 26 Vdc.)
SlTE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION
PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185
CUSTOMER ALARMS:
If customer alarms are provided:
a . r Turn the unit O N and simu-
-
late alarm operation by jumper-
ing the appropriate low voltage
control terminals. (Refer to the
control wiring installation draw-
ing furnished with the unit.)
b . r Verify correct alarm annun-
-
ciation by the VCMP and/or by
the Sitemaster console.
SERVICE TERMINAL.:
If a Service Terminal is furnished
with the system:
-
a.m lhrn the unit ON and con-
nett the Service Terminal t o the
service terminal port of t h e unit.
b.m Refer t o the Service Termi-
nal Operator's Manual and verify
correct operation of the Service
-c.m Using the Diagnostic func-
tion of the Service Terminal (de-
scribed in the Service Terminal
Operator's Manual), verify cor-
Page 25
EOUIPMENT CONNECTION CHECK OUT

Connect the load equipment per

r All loads should be discon-
nected or turned OFF before
proceeding with the following
-35.
steps.
r For units with output distri-
bution cables, be sure that there
-36.
are NO output receptacles con-
nected to load equipment plugs,
and that the receptacles are not
in contact with foreign objects.
r Pay special attention to those
-37.
equipment manufacturer's speci-
fications and recommendations.
Turn on the main input circuit
breaker and the panelboard main
breakeds) (if furnished).
Turn on branch circuit breakers
to the load equipment.
Observe the power-up sequence
recommended by tbe equipment
manufacturer.
Verify output voltage
acceptable under loaded con-
is

output cables intended for dition. If adjustment is needed,

direct-wiring connection; the ex- refer to tap changing instructions
posed conductor ends of these in Step 21.
cables must not be in contact
with each other or with any for- -38. Verify that all load equipment
operates properly.
eign objects.

FOR UNlTS WITH

DISTRIBUTION CABLES:
a . r After verifying that there is
G w e r to the main input of the
unit and that the Main input
breaker is ON, then turn on the
panelboard main circuit
breaker(s) (if furnished).
-
b . r Individually turn on each
branch circuit breaker and check
the output voltage (also phase ro-
tation, i f a 3-phase circuit) at the
receptacle or cable end.
-
c . r Turn all branch
breakers, the output circuit
circuit

break&), and the main input

circuit breaker OFF.

SITE PREPARATION and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Page 26 Rev. 10/85
 MAINTENANCE INSPECTION SCHEDULE
T-

*P WARNING *
ALL VOLTAGE TO THE PRECISION POWER CENTER MUST
BE DISCONNECTED BEFORE WORKING WITHIN THE
CABINET.

CLEANING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Because air is being circulated through the
power center cabinet, dust may accumu-
late on internal components.
Cleaning Schedule - It is difficult to
establish a schedule for periodic cleanings,
but the interior of the cabinet should be
checked after 24 hours, 30 days, and 6
months of operation. This should help
determine a pattern for the maintenance
schedule. The power center should be
inspected at least every 6 months there-
after, and cleaned as necessary.
o lnspecticm - Inside the power center
cabinet, inspect all electrical wiring for
cuts, abrasions, or other damage. All
electrical connections should be tight.
(Refer to Table II for torque specifica-
tions.) Inspect electrical components for
deterioration or damage.
r Mamting - All components should be
securely mounted to the cabinet frame.
Circuit breakers should be securely
mounted. Check for secure electrical and
ground connections.

p
-, o Special Cbedrs - During each periodic - NOTE -
inspection, special care should be taken to
perform the following checks: Under no circumstances should
circuit breakers be bypassed or
o Make sure air passages on transformer safety switches be jumpered.
are clear and free of debris. . .
<.

o Make sure all external ventilation o hqection Schedule - Electrical con-

openings and grilles are clear.
nections and component mountings should
be inspected after 24 hours, 30 days, and 6
months of operation, with periodic inspec-
tions every 6 months thereafter.
>z
-.

SITE PREPARATTON and INSTALLATION

PRECISION POWER CENTER
Rev. 10185 Page 27
 bLiebert.
World Headquarters
.
A World Leader in Computer Support Systems
Environmental Control Power Protection. Site MonitoringIControl Liebert Corporation
1050 Dearborn Drive
L~ebertCorporat~ondesigns, manufactures The Liebert commitment is to offer the
and markets systems for improvement of highest quallty products and servlces for Po. BOX29186
computer up-t~meand performance. This appikations requlrmg computer support. Columbus. OH 43229
equipment results in a higher return on 6141888-0246
investment. Improved business operatlons.
hiaher
- .oroductivltv and lower util~tycasts. Telex: 246-655 LlEBERT WOGN
Lieben systems provide dependable European Headquarters
environmental contml and electrical power Liebert International B.V.
protedion combined with centralized All specifications subject to change
monitormg and control, representing single- without notice. Model Farm Road
source, mtegrated computer support net- 01985 Liebert Corporation Cork, Ireland
works. They Incarparate nearly two decades printed in the United States of America (021) 41633
of experience based on more than 80.000
instaiiations worldwide. SL.20140 (10185 50160) Telex: 75023 LBRT El
 bLiebert
Site Preparation
(' and Installation Manual Datawave
15-30 kVA
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer

Typical Equipment Arrangement

Optional devlces. (Refer to the spectfication sheet tor options supplied.)

Figure 1. Typical Dalawave Magnetic Synlhesizer Equipment Arrangement.

Installation M a n u a l Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

 bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

SITE PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION MANUAL

FOR THE
DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER
( 15 kVA THROUGH 30 kVA )

CONTENTS

.
1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ............................................... 4
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION ........................................................... 4
Unpacking And heNminarylnspectlon ......................................................... 4
HandllngConslderatlons ..................................................................... 4
Unit preparation ...........................................................................6
LocationC~nsideratlons ....................................................................6
POWER AND CONTROL WIRING ............................................................ 8
Input power Conneotlons ...................................................................8
............................................................ 12
Junction Box Instailation (if used)
System Grounding .........................................................................14
Grounding ElectrodeConductor .............................................................14
Output Power Connections ..................................................................16
Control Wlrlng Connections ......................................................... ..:....
:
. . .
17
.
2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND START-UP ................................... 21
INTERNALINSPECTION......................................................................21
.................................................................................21
START-UP

.<-') 3 . INSPECTION a n d START-UP CHECK LIST ...................................... 23

INSPECTION ............................................................................... 23
START-UP ................................................................................
\.J
24
MONITORINGSYSTEM CHECKOUT .........................................................26
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION CHECK OUT (lor Unlts w l t h Dislrlbutlon Cables) .................. 27

4 . MAINTENANCE ............................................................... 28
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (REPAIR) .....................................................28
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (INSPECTION & CLEANING) ...................................29
FIGURES
. Typical Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer Equipment Arrangement ............................. 2
1
2. Typical Cablnet and Floor Planning Olmenslon Data.......................................... 5
. Recommended M l n l m u m Service and Ventilation Clearances ................................. 7
3
. Electrical Connection Locations ............................................................. 9
4
. Datawave Bypass Conflguratlons (15-30
5 k V A ) ............................................... 10
. Typlcal Junction Bow Connections ...........................................................
6
..................................................
13
. Typical Datawave Groundlng.................................................................
7 Arrangement 15
. Output Power Connections .................................................................
8 16
.. Slmplilled
9
10
Shutdown Clrcuit
Typical Control Wlring f o r Unlls Wlthout Monitoring ..........................................
17
18
. Typical Control Wlrlng f o r Unlts Wlth Volt / Current Monltor Panel (VCMP) ...................
11 19
. Typlcal Control Wlrlng l o r Unlts With information Gathering Modules (IGM)...................
12 20

TABLES
1 . Heat Output. Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer ............................................... 7
2. Suggested Mlnlmum Wlre Size Data ........................................................ 11
3 . Torque Specifications. ...................................................................... 22
r:
c:

Installation M a n u a l Datawave S y s t e m . 15-30 kVA

bLiebert
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: Read t h e entire manual before installing and operating t h e system. Upon receipt of a Data-
wave Magnetic Synthesizer, t h e installer shouid Perform the following steps lo assure a quality in-
stallation.
Unpacking And Preliminary Inspection
A quality installatlon begins on the receiving dock.
1. Inspect the shipping crate(s) for damage or
signs of mishandling before unpacking the
unit(s). Check Shock-Watch" indicator.
2. Open the shipping crates by carefully re-
moving the sides, ends, and top. (Use care to
avoid puncturing the container with sharp ob-
jects that would damage the contents.)
3. Remove the packing and vapor barriers
and inspect t h e equipment for any obvious
shipping damages.
The units shouid not b e loosened
from the shipping pallet until after all
handling by fork lift or pallet jack is
completed. Complete internal in-
spection should b e accomplished
only after equipment positioning and
prior to electrical hookup.
If any damage a s a result of shipping is
observed, immediately file a claim with the
shipping agency and forward a copy of this
clatm to:
Liebert Corporation
Customer Service Depanment
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O.Box 29186
Columbus. Ohio 43229
Installation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
p p ~ ~
Handling Considerations
The Datawave module land cables. ~f furnished)
is bolted to a wooden pallet to allow handling by
fork-lift eauipment.
Easily moved - The Datawave module and cable
reels are furntshed w ~ t hcasters to allow the
unlt to be rolled lnto d a c e after it has been
unbolted from the palie[.
Check size and weight - Refer to the cabinet
drawings furn~shedwith the unit for size and
weight information. Typical cabinet dimen-
-
sions and weiehts are shown in Figure 2.-
Plan the route - The route that the Datawave
module will follow to its installation area
should be planned to ensure that all passages
are large enough to accommodate the unit.
and that the floors are adequate to support
the weight. (i.e. Are the doorways, elevators,
ramps, etc. adequate? Are there any non -
negotiable corners or offsets in the hallways?)
Move with care - In order to prevent panel
damage. i t IS recommended that the exterlor
panels be removed before the untt 1s moved.
When replac~ngpanels. remember to recon-
nect all panel ground wires.
Close quarters? -
Removal of the side panels w~ll
aid in maneuvering the unit through close
quarters. Removal of the side panels and
brackets reduces the unit dimensions to
34 inches (864 mm) wide, 33.6 inches
(854 mm) deep, and 64 inches (1626 mm)
high.
Datawave System. 15-30 kVA
 computer

k Liebert Support
Systems

I ~ C I U ~ Bprolecflon
S
Typical Cabinet
01 dlrolay oezel.
t.625 in 116rnmll 1 and Floor Planning
\ 34.625 1 Dimension Data

CABINET
DIMENSIONAL

( u&ed Floor
Wlthout
Floorstand

Figure 2. Typical Cabinet and Floor Planning Dimension Data.

Installation Manual
&hi Liebert
Unit Preparation
The Datawave Module may b e easlly removed from the ShIDplng pailet and Installed by customer personnel
proceaure is as follows:
1) Set the palletzed assembly in a level area.
where there is enough room to roll the unit
and entlre cable assembly off the pallet onto
the floor.
2) Cut the shipping bands.
THE SHIPPING BANDS MAY BE UN-
DER TENSION. USE APPROPRIATE
EYE. FACE. AND HAND PROTECTION
TO SAFEGUARD AGAINST INJURY
FROM BAND BACKLASH.
3) Remove the Factory-pronded ramp from its
shlpplng position. (One ramp IS pronded per
order, packed exher In front of, or o n top of.
a set of cable reel(s).) Place the ramp adja-
cent to the pallet to pronde a smooth path
from pallet to floor.
4) Remove side and rear panels from the mod-
ule. (Carefully disconnect panel ground wires
by pulling the easy-disconnect terminals at
the unit frame.)
Location Considerations
The Oatawave Magnetic Synthesizer should be located within the computer room, andlor close to the load(s)which
It IS S U D D I Y ~ W .
Equipment Location should employ the shortest
output distribution cable runs consistent with
logical equipment arrangement and allow-
ances for future additions.
Operating Environment -
Ambient tempera-
tures of O°C to 40°C with a relative humidity
of 0% to 95% (non-condensing).
Bottom Clearance is required for exit of cables1
conduit andlor for cooling air flow. This
clearance is automatically provided by a
raised floor (6 inches 1 150 mm. minimum
height). Figure 2 shows the typical raised-
floor cutout dimensions.
When units are not located on a raised floor
( or if the raised floor is not adequate to sup-
pon the unit ) , an optional floorstand may be
used. (Non-raised floor applications are not
CSA approved).
Installation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
A typical
5 ) Remove the bolts holding the unlt to the
shipping pallet. (Located in each of the four
bottom corners.)
6) If cables are on wheeled cable reel(s). re-
move bolts holding reel(s) to pallet.
Remove shipplng blocks from under unit and
cable assembly, then remove chocks from all
casters.
8) Roll unit off pallet onto floor, carefully guid-
ing cable reel(s) after it.
91 Roll unit and cable package to location of in-
stallation. For units located on a raised floor.
use care when positioning unit over the floor
cutout to avoid castors falling through the
cutout.
Before maneuvering t h e unit into its
final position, read a n d follow all advi-
s o r i e s in t h e following "Location Con-
siderations" paragraphs.
Recommended Minimum Service Clearances
are shown in Figure 3. The indicated clear-
ances at the front and one other side or rear
of the unit are required for service access by
the National Electrical Code (Article
110-16). Clearance above the unit is re-
quired for cooling air flow (exhaust).
Audible Noise -T h e average sound level output
of the Datawave is 55 dBA at five feet (1.6
meters) which should be considered when
determining unit location:-The low audible
noise level allows comfortable placement of
the unit in almost any location.
H e a t Output - As ail electrical devices, the
Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer produces
heat under normal operation. (See Table 1.)
This heat output should be included when
calculating the environmental conditions of
the room.
Datawave System. 15-30 kVA
 bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

Table 1. Heat Output, Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer.

HEAT OUTPUT - BTUlHr (KcalIHr)

KVAIKW Full Load 314 Load 112 load

15 5075 (1280) 4275 (1080) 3825 (965)

20 6550 (1650) 5700 (1435) 5075 (1280)
30 6550 (1650) 5800 (1460) 5075 (1280)

locations are FRONT, plus ONE OTHER SIDE OR REAR.

r\
Figure 3. Recommended Minimum Service and Ventilalion Clearances.

Installation Manual Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

bLiebert
POWER AND CONTROL WIRING
Power and control wiring should be!nstalled by licensed electricians.
m u s t comply witn t h e NEC and appilcable local codes.,
Input Power Connections
ifthe Oatawave Magnetic Synthesizer is furnished with IunCtiCn boxes, input power connecttons are made as detailed
in t h e Junction Box lnstallation section.
*
If junction boxes are not furnished, the Input Power feeder is connected to the input power lugs or blocks located
inside the unlt. (See Figure 4 . )
WARNING
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING HIGH-
VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW-VOLT-
AGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE DE-
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BE-
FORE INSTALLING CABLES OR MAK-
ING CONNECTIONS. WHETHER IN
THE JUNCTION BOX OR IN THE UNIT.
T o minimize disturbances caused by other loads
in the building, the 3-phase power input to
the Datawave should be supplied directly
from the service entrance. However, if this is
not possible. the Datawave's ability to isolate
the sensitive load from power disturbances
allows the system to work even without a
dedicated power feeder.
The input feeder circuit should be sized in ac-
cordance with the NEC and any local build-
ing codes to assure the feeder's ability to
safely carry the system's full load current, in-
cluding losses.
Input feeder conductors should be sized for no
more than 2% voltage drop. If operation at
under-voltage conditions for extended peri-
oas of time 1s desired, the input feeders must
be oversized.
Typical conductor size data is shown in Table 2 .
,411 connections must complv w ~ t hthe S E C
and all orher applicable codes.
The main input feeder should consist of three
phase conductors and one (safe:?) round
conductor (3W + G ) unless the unit is
Installation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
All power a n d control wiring
equipped with a bypass option. (See Bypass
Configurations. Figure 5 . )
F o r units with a bypass option without a bypass
transformer, the bypass input feeder must
consist of three phase conductors, one neu-
tral, and one (safety) ground conductor
(4W + G).
Bypass option - Typical configuration diagrams
for the Bypass option are shown in-;Figure 5.
An external bypass transformer may be re-
quired if Datawave input voltage is different
from the output voltage. Power terminals are
provided inside the unit for connections to
the bypass transformer.
When the input voltage level matches the
rated output voltage level and a bypass trans-
former is not used, jumpers must be added to
the bypass transformer terminal block input
to output. Be sure to observe proper phase
rotation.
Bypass Transformer Connections - Input con-
nections co the bypass transformer should be
3-phase. 3-wire plus ground (3W + G). sized
the same as the Datawave input wiring. Out-
put connections from the transformer should
be 3-phase. $-wire plus ground ( l W + G ) .
sized for the full load output of the Data-
wave. If the bypass transformer is located
fanher than 10 feet (3 meters) from the
Datawave, additional overcurrent protection
for the output wiring from the transformer
may be required to meet electrical codes.
Any alternate energy source, such as a diesel-
generator, powering the Datawave should be
equipped with ;In isochronous governor to
ensure proper regulation of rhe frequency.
range of *
Typical cornpurer loads specrfy a frequency
0 . 5 Hertz.
Datawave System. 15-30 kVA
 Computer

bLiebert Support
Systems

Electrical Connection
Locations

Front View
(with panels removed) / I
Panelboard I

I
BYPASS T R A ~ S F O R M E R
C O ~ O LT CONhECT O h PLATE

Figure 4. Electrical Connection Locations.

Installation Manual Dalawave System. 15-30 kVA

-~ ~
 Computer
Support
Svstems

- - OUTPUT
3-Pha0e
4W*G

NOTE: For input and Output OPD. See T

Bypass configuration when n o m i vel matches rated Data-

wave output voltage and bypa

MAGNETIC
INPUT SYNTHESIZER
3-as.
3w+G

BWarr transformer recomary overcurrent

Protaction may be required by local cmes
unlass transformer is losatm w t n m 10 leet
I3 metars) of the Oatawave module.
NOTE: For input and Output OPD. See Table 2

Bypass configuration when nominal input voltage level does NOT match
rated Datawave output voltage o r when bypass transformer is used.

Figure 5 . Datawave Bypass Configurations (15-30 kVA).

Installation Manual - 10 - Oatawave System. 15-30 kVA

 bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

T a b l e 2. Suggested M i n i m u m \$'ire Size D a t a

r',
\
*

M A I N INPUT '
VOLTAGE KVA Suggested
feeder
wire size2
FLA OPD (AWG)

15 47 60 6
208V 20 62 80 4
30 90 125 1

15 41 60 6
240V 20 54 70 4
30 78 100 2

15 26 40 8
380V 20 34 45 8
30 49 70 4

15 23 30 10
415V 20 31 40 8
30 45 60 6

FLA = Fun Load Amps of Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer.

OPD = Overcurrent Protection Device inside Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer
W i r e Sizes based on NEC 1987 Table 310-16. usmg 7 5 T copper conductor.

NOTES:
1) M a i n input p o w e r f e e d e r should be a dedicated feeder direct from service entrance if possible.
Ground conductors recommended to be parity sized with power conductors for increased system performance.
Ground conductor minimum size per NEC Tabie 250-95. input power feeder conduit may be used as the safety
ground conductor. When conduit is used. adequate electrical continuity must be maintained at conduit connec-
tions to enclosures and throughout conduit run.
2) Input f e e d e r w i r e size listed in Table 2 is the minimum feeder size recommended. Larger wire size may be
required because of voltage drop or suppiy overcurrent protection device.
3) O u t p u t f e e d e r w i r e size listed in Tabie 2 is the minimum feeder size recommended. Larger wire size may be
required because of voltage drop or excessive neutral current (see NEC Table 310-16 notes 8 and 10). For
best performance. Synthesizer should be located as close to the load as practical.
4) O u t p u t OPD'S listed in Table 2 are the standard sizes for Model CA only. See the unit's specification sheet.

Installation M a n u a l - 11 - Datawave System. 15-30 k V A

 Computer
&iLiebert Support
Systems

Junction Box Installation (if used)

Hcgh voltage and low voltage iunctlon boxes are avaliab~efor the 15 through 30 kVA Datawave Magnettc Syntheslzer
to slmpllfy customer connections

Shipping Arrangements - T h e junction boxes, i f Typical junction box connections are shown in
used. can eirher be shipped wlth the system Flgure 6 and descr~bed in the Input Power
or can be advance-shipped for installation and Conrrol Wiring Connecnon sections.
during the roughing-in stage of new consrruc-
tion. Dimensions - Dimensions are given on the draw-
Installation ~ o c a t i o n- 10 foot (3 meters) long ings furnished with the unit. Typical dimen-
sions of the junction boxes are as follows:
flexible cables are supplied by the factory for
connecting the junction boxes to the unit.
The junction boxes should be installed a
maximum of 8 feet (2.4 meters) from the
feeder entrance of the Datawave. Low Voltage (Control) Junction Box:
It is recommended that the junction boxes be
centered under an easily removable floor rile. Width 8 in. (203 mm)
Length 10 in. (254 mm)
Junction Box Connections must be installed in
compliance with the NEC and all other appii- Height , 4 in. (102 mm)
cable codes.
- -
High Voltage Junction Box:

7
Width 14 in. (356 mm)
Length 16 in. (406 mm)
VERIFY THAT INCOMING HIGH-
VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW-
Height 6 in. (152 mm)
VOLTAGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE
DE-ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT
BEFORE INSTALLING CABLES OR
MAKING ANY CONNECTIONS IN THE
JUNCTION BOX.

Installation Manual Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

 Computer

bLiebert Support
Systems

Recommended lo-
cation for customer
connection.

.......................... \
MAIN INPUT JUNCTION BOX

w
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX

Figure 6. Typical Junction BOX Connections.

Datawave System, 15-30 kVA

installation Manual
bLiebert
System Grounding
The performance and Safety of any Power condltlonlng system depends upon proper qrounamg Ftgure 7 shows a
typ~calgroundlnq arrangement for t h e Datawave system
Equipment grounding - Grounding is primarily
for safety. Correct implementation of
grounding also enhances equipment perform-
ance. All power feeders must include equip-
ment grounding means as required by the
NEC and local codes.
An insulated ground conductor is recom-
mended to be run in each feeder conduit.
Signal reference grid
Although ground conductors can be the
minimum size per NEC Table 250-95, they
are recommended to be parity-sized with
power conductors for increased system per-
formance.
If the input power feeder conduit is used as a
grounding conductor. adequate electrical
continuity must be maintained at all conduit
Grounding Electrode Conductor
Required by code -The Datawave Magneuc
Synthesizer is considered to be a "separately
derived system". Therefore. according to the
safety practices of NEC 250-26, a local
grounding electrode conductor is required in
addition to the equipment safety ground
w h ~ his normally run with the input power
conductors.
Unit connection - A terminal is furnished inslde
the unl'. for field-connection of the ground-
ing electrode conductor. (See Figure 4, page
9.)
Electrode connection -
As shown in Figure 7.
the grounding electrode conductor is re-
quired to be run from the Datawave to the
nearest effect~vely grounded: (In order of
preference.)
1) Building steel.
2) >$eta1 water pipe.
3) Other made grounding electrode.
Installation Manual
Computer
support
Systems
For optimum performance, it
connections.
is recommended that the total ground sys-
tem impedance be 3 ohms or less.
Using isolating bushings in a metal conduit
run is a safety hazard a s well a s a n NEC
violation, a n d is not recommended.
-If the Datawave 1s used
to supply power to a computer room or area
which is equipped w t h a s g a l reference g r ~ d
or a grounded raued-floor strlnger system, a
grounding conductor should be connected
from the Datawave system ground bus to the
grid or floor system. This conductor should
be stranded or bralded #8 AWG or larger.
and as short as practical. Less than 3 feet
(1 meter) is recommended.
Sizing of the grounding electrode conductor is
based on the secondary circuit conductors.
According to the NEC ( Table 250-94 ), the
minimum recommended grounding electrode
conductor is #8 AWG copper.
Recommended methods for running the
grounding electrode conductor: (Arranged
in order of preference for system perform-
ance.) (As acceptable by local and other ap-
plicable codes.)
1) Outside of condux (where nor suscepti-
ble to damage).
2 ) Inside non-metallic conduit.
3) Inside non-ferrous conduit.
4) Inside ferrous conduit, bonded to the
ferrous conduit at both ends, as accept-
able by local and other applicable
codes.
Datawave System. 14-30 kVA
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Figure 7. Typical Datawave Grounding Arrangement.

Installation Manual - 15 - Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

- .- - - . .-
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Output Power Connections

When equipped with integral distribution. the Datawave pravldes the flexibility of custom output power distrib~ti~~
configurations

Output circuit breaker(s) andlor panelboards Keep the load balanced. .Althou_eh the Data-
with ground and neutral provisions are pro- wave Ma~neticSynthesizer can rolerate up to
vided inside the Datawave unit for connect- a 100% load imbalance, balancing of loads is
ing load@) as required. (See Figure 8). good design practice on any 3-phase system.
Accordingly, each Datawave distribution
Flexible output distribution cables for use in panel is load-balanced at the factory, based
data processing areas under a raised floor are o n output branch circuit breaker sizes. All
optional and may be factory supplied. Cable additions to the system should be arranged so
lengths and layout should be well-planned: as t o preserve this balance.
Cable access - Cable routes should follow
aisles between equipment. This will facilitate
access to - cables for installation. routine in-
spection, and future changes.
Cable length - Measure the distance to the
load equipment following right-angle paths, VERIFY THAT INCOMING HIGH VOLT-
rather than diagonally or directly. Always AGE CIRCUITS ARE DE-ENERGIZED
measure to the extreme far side of the equip- AND LOCKED-OUT BEFORE INSTALL-
ment with respect to the Datawave unit to in- ING OUTPUT BREAKERS AND CA-
sure adequate cable length. BLES.
Air circulation -hevent restriction of air-
flow under the raised floor by running the
Code compliance -
All output cables and con-
nectrons must comply with the NEC and all
flexible conduits flat on the sub-floor, in par- other applrcable codes.
allel paths.
T h e main output feeder for Conditioning Alone Front Vlew
units should be sized for no more than 2% (with panels removed)
voltage drop. Typical conductor-size data is
shown in Table 2 (page ll), however, larger
wire size may be required because of voltage
drop or excessive neutral harmonic currents.
(See the NEC, table 310-16, notes 8 aild
I unit., I
10.) For best performance. the Datawave
should be located as close to the load as
practical.
Initial system output loading should be between
50% and 75% of rated capacity. This allows
the addition of future loads without immedi-
ately investing in another power conditioner. PANELBOARD
The high panial-load efficiency of the Data- fOI CMn-tiOn
1 0 OUlPUl
wave Magnetic Synthesizer permits such siz- branch clrsuil
ing without imposing an energy-use penalty
during initial operation.
For additional information on calculating the
required system capacity. see Liebert Power-
line PLT-09. Power Calculations (System
Sizing). Figure 8. Output Power Connections.

Installation Manual Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

 Computer
@Liebert
i Support
Systems

Control Wiring Connections

All Liebert power conditioning systems have provlsion for external shutdown control from Remote Emergency Power
Off (REPO) stations. Figure 9 Is a simplified diagram of the shutdown cirouitnl of the Oatawave Magnetic Synthe-
sizer.

Low-voltage control circuit. As shown in
Fi~ure9 , the control circuit operates on
24Vdc. The shutdown device (represented
by the REPO switch) activates a low-current
24Vdc relay which in turn operates the shunt
trip mechanism. The shunt-trip solenoid
opens the Main Input breaker, which de-en-
ergizes the power center.
Multiple-unit shutdown. When more than one
power,center is installed by the user, a typical
requirement is that actuation of a single de-
vice (REPO for example) must shut down all
power centers. The low-voltage control cir-
cuits of all modules of any standard Lieben
Datawave system are designed to meet this
requirement.
Detailed diagrams and descriptions of the shut-
down schemes for multiple-system instal-
lations are contained in the Liebert Power
Line PLT-35. "Power Center Shutdown
Control Schemes". (revision 04/83 or
later).
External control wiring connections for Remote
Shutdown, alarm, andlor monitoring are
made to the low-voltage junction box (if
used) or to the low-voitage control terminal
strip located inside the Datawave Unit.
Control wiring connections vary with the type
of monitoring system furnished with the unit.
Three typical control wiring configurations
are shown in Figure 10, Figure 11, and
Figure 12.
Code compliance -Control wiring connections
must comply with the NEC and all other ap-
plicable codes.
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING HIGH-
VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW-
VOLTAGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE
DE-ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT
BEFORE INSTALLING CABLES OR
MAKING CONNECTIONS. WHETHER
IN THE JUNCTION BOX OR IN THE
UNIT.

SHUTDOWN DEVICES

DATAWAVE

Figure 9. Simplified Shutdown Circuit.

Installation Manual - 17 - Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

R E M O T E B Y P A S S INDICATORS
I 3Pttonal Connections I

Source should be OJOVdo

or O - I ~ O V ~ C .
Load should not exceed
0.5 amp. 10 watts.
i See Note 4 . I

R E M O T E ALARM I N D I C A T O R S
I o p t i o n a l connections )
I
/
Soume shwld be 0-30 IEMOVE
: ~UMPER
Wltl. 4C or .5. N.C. REPO
Load shcruld not e x s a d 3 USED.
0.5 amp. I 0 watts. BUILDING
( See Note 5. 1 INTERFACE
Can be wrrsd to another RELAY
Llebert monttorlng system (See Not. I.)
Customer Alarm for r s
m t e alarm annunaatlon.

REPO S W I T C H (N.O.)
I optional c o n n e c t l o n s )
I

NOTFS
BUILDING INTERFACE RELAY e m b. ~ t a fw d remat.
ShutdOWn m alarm. Relay is ensrp!zad durmq normal

I
Lamp load to b 24 vdc. 1 amp
max ioad.
II
R E P O S W I T C H (N.C.)
( optlonal c o n n e c t l o n s )
M ( See Note 2. 1
CO"I.SI ODenlog t,lpS OOen Data-
wave main mput breaker.
narrtlm.
DPDT cmtacts rated 114ho at l2OVac: IOA r128Vds
01 240 Vas max.
OTHER N.O. REPO D M C E S may by wirad In oarall.1
to N.O. REP0 M1.Etf.
Other N.C. REPO dsvicas may b. wtrad In series to
N.C. REPO contacts. ;'
Multl le REPO Iamos a M othar 24Vds loads may b.
w i r J i n para11.1 to REPO lamp.
Max 24Vdc sumly available is lAmp total. (80th N.O.
and N.C. REPO switches are wwsrea f r m !he r a m
SUDDIY. I
3. ALL AU?XILIARY CONTROL DEVICES AND CABLING
TO BE FIELD SUPPLIED EXCEPT AS NOTED.
Field ruo~lleacontrol wiring rscwnmeridad to be # l a
AWG mtn. stranded copper with 300-volt mmmum
inrulat~on.
4 . BYPASS MODE INDICATOR is energ82Bd when un6t Is
tn bypass mma.
5. OVERTEMP ALARM contact$ change stale when unlt
overtempemlure is sensad.

I
I
Figure 10. Typical Control Wiring f o r Units IVithout Monitoring.

Installation Manual - 18 - Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

 Computer

bLiebert Support
Systems

LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX IF SUPPLIED 01

LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SECTION INSIDE UNIT

CUSTOMER A L A R M CONTACT (N.0.) E

1 optional c o n n e c t l o n s , 2 rnax.) 0
2nd customer arm '1 1 L
o
-10 1st C u r t m s r *[arm 11 b. M
C u r t o m a Alarm Common
v
C
L
8 8 R-te .warm N.O. contact T

REMOTE S U M M A R Y A L A R M INDICATORS
( opt~onalc o n n e c t i o n s ) h
blk REP0 IN.O.l 1
F
C

O-jjT
SOUrC. l h l d m OJOVdC 1
0, ac.
mad r h l d M eIx s d
SOURCE 0.5 amp. 10 watlr.
( S I MI. 4. I
Can b. w1r.d l o rmlka
m.,"ltollnQ I y l l e m tw
.1arm .Nun;lsllon.
REMOVE JUMPER
IF N.C. REP0
IS USED.
BUILDING
INTERFACE
RELAY
--
( s r MI. I . )

I
Figure 11. Typical Control Wiring for Units With Volt / Current Monitor Panel (VCMP).

installation Manual Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems
DATAWAVE
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCTION BOX IF SUPPLIED OR
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SECTION lNSlOE UNIT
I

I FIELD-SUPPLIED I
GROUND INTEGRITY i
S E N S E LEAD 0
R
IREOUIREO CONNECTION) Y
MYSIbe c o n n e t - to ae-
r l r W ground refereme tor S
U
F
customer
:
E
alarm. 0
(Terminal
CUSTOMER ALARM CONTACT (N.C.) 10, I t , L
I opllonal connections ) 12. or 1 3 . ) 0
W
F w alarm a n n m l a t l o n at v
S l I m l ~ f e r .(Contact should 0
be sultabls fw rwltchlng low
current 24 Vdc.) k A
G
.., , E
C
0
N
T
CUSTOMER A L A R M CONTACT (N.O.) R
I aotionai c o n n e c t i o n s . 4 max.1 0
L
FOI alarm a n m ~ m t ~ o atn W
S i t m a r t s r . (Contact should
be rurtable fa sw~tchmglow
current 24 vdc.)
AI
N
G

IF N . C. REPO
IS USED.
R E P O S W I T C H (N.O.)
I optional c o n n e c t i o n s )
II INTERFACE

IP blk

Lamp load l o be 24 Vds. 1 amp

m u load.
I S w Note 2. 1
I

REPO SWITCH (N.C.)

Contact clarure trips open Oata-
wave maon input Weaker.
II NOTES
( optional cunnections ) 1. BUILDING INTERFACE RELAY can be used for remot.
I ~huldmn w alarm. Relay IS enargued during ~ m a l

I+ t.lk f h
Contacts r h w l d be rultable for
8 wra~ion.
O W T contacts rated 114 hp at 120vae. IOA at 28Vdc
w 240 Vat max.
2. OTHER N.O. REPO DEVICES may bywired in parall.1
rwttshlc-g lo-unent 24Vdc. to N.O. REPO contacts.
Lamp load to be 24 Vdc. I am. O t b r N.C. REPO devises may be wired In series to
max load. N.C. REPO contmtr.
Multipie REPO lamps and other 24Vds loads may be
( See Note 2. ) WilW in parallel to REPO lamp.
Conlact Ownlng traps open Data- Max 24Vdc s u ~ p l yavailable 1. lAmp total. 100th N.O.
wave maln input breaker and N.C. REPO rwllshas ore power* lrom the same
----
B U O O~, ,
I Y. I
3. A-L AJXILIARV CONTROL DEVICES A h 0 CABL h G
-0 BE FELD SLPPLED EXCEPT A S NOTED.
elo r-00. ed c=n!rm r r ng recornrsnced to w " 1 6
ANG nn r:,ancea CoDrnr n in 300-.o i mintmum
"LL 2' cn

Figure 12. Typical Control Wiring for Units With Information Gathering Modules (IGM).

Installation Manual - 20 - Datawave System. 15-30 WA

 &hLiebert
EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND START-UP
INTERNAL INSPECTION
A detailed internal inspection should be per-
formed after the unit is in place and before it
is enereized, to ensure trouble free start-up.
The s a k e internal inspection should be car-
ried out when performing preventive mainte-
nance.
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING POWER
AND CONTROL CIRCUITS ARE DE-
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BE-
FORE PERFORMING THE INTERNAL
INSPECTION.
6' START-UP
Checklists - Each step in the following detailed
step-by-step checklists (Section 3) should be
performed by the installing personnel when
installing and staning up any Datawave Mag-
netic Synthesizer.
Initial system start-up -A qualified electrician
should be employed to perform the equip-
ment inspection and stan-up. Liebert system
start-up may be arranged by calling your local
Liebert sales representative or Lieben cus-
tomer service and support.
Call 1-800-LIEBERT.
-
Warranty effectivity A copy of the appropriate
checklist (furnished with the equipment)
must be completed. signed. dated, and re-
turned to the Factory. Warranty coverage
lnstallatlon Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
Open the unit - Gain access to the internal com-
ponents of the Datawave unit by removing
the exterior panels.
Visually inspect - B~ sure wiring and cornPo-
nents are not damaged. Check capacitors for
oil leaks or bulging.
Check power connections - Check all power
connections for tightness. Refer to Table 3
for torque requiremenu of all electrical con-
nections.
Perform formal detailed inspection - Follow
the Inspection And Stan-Up Check List
(Section 3) when performing detailed inspec-
tion.
of the equipment is not effective unless the
Check List is received by the Factory.
EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND
START-UP SHOULD BE PERFORMED
ONLY BY TRAINED PERSONNEL.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRE-
SENT DURING START-UP PROCE-
DURES.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE FOLLOWED THROUGHOUT
INSPECTION AND START-UP.
- 21 - Datawave System. 15-30 kVA
bLiebert Computer
support
Systems

Table 3. Torque Specifications.

Bolt Shaft Size

Installation Manual Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

 Computer

Liebert Support
Systems

-3-
INSPECTION and START-UP CHECK LIST
for the
1 5 , 2 0 , OR 30 kVA DATAWAVE MAGNETIC
SYNTHESIZER
Unit Serial Number: Date:
Unit Model Number:

Inspection

ALL EQUIPMENT INSPECTION PROCEDURES ARE TO BE PER-

FORMED WITH POWER TO THE UNIT TURNED OFF AND LOCKED
OUT.
( EXTERIOR INSPECTION 1 - 7. Check all breaker connections for tight-
- 1. Confirm that the exterior of unit is un-
damaged (including cables and recepta-
ness. Retorque if necessary.

cles. if furnished). - 8. Check -

all terminal block connections
\ /' - 2. Confirm that service and ventilation
for tiehtness. Retoroue if necessarv.

clearances are adequate. (See Installa-

tion Manual Figure 3).
- 9. Check transformer mounting bolts for
tightness. Retorque if necessary.

( INTERIOR INSPECTION 1 -10. Remove any foreign objects from the

3. Remove accessible exterior panels. components or the interior area of the
unit. M a k e s u r e air passages on trans-
formers a r e clear a n d free of debris!

Check that the cooling fan blades move

FRAME. When replacing exterior pan-
els, reconnect all panel ground wires.
- 4. Inspect all wire and conductor insulation
for damage.
- 5 . lnspect all wiring connections to the ca-
pacitor banks. Re-secure the connec-
tions if necessary.
- 6. Check all transformer terminal connec-
tions for tightness. Retorque i f neces-
freely, and that the intake and exhaust
air screens are clean and free of ob-
structions.
Replace side panels, leaving access to
circuit breakers for the following stan-
up procedure.
When replacing the side panels, be
Sure to reconnect the panel ground

C sary. wires.

Installation Manual - 23 - Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

kiLiebert
Start - UD
START-UP PROCEDURES SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY QUALI-
FIED PERSONNEL. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE
EQUIPMENT THROUGHOUT THE MAJORITY OF THE START-UP
PROCEDURE. PROCEED WITH CAUTION.
-13. ,Make cenain that all clrcult breakers
are in the O F F posmon.
1 . Place BYPASS Switch (if provided) in
the "NORMAL" posluon.
S t e p s 15 through 19 apply to the Main
Input Junction Box. If this installation
is not ~ r o v i d e d with a Main lnout
unction Box, proceed directly ' to
S t e 20.~
-15. Remove the cover of the Main Input
Junction Box. Verify proper input power
connections to unit. including equtp-
ment grounding conductor.
-16. Turn ON the building power to the junc-
tion Box. Check the phase rotation as
the Junction box. Phase rotation should
be A. B. C. as indicated.
-17. Check and record the input voltages at
the junction box:
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts. phase B to phase C =
Volts, phase C to phase A =
-18. Turn OFF and lock out the bu~ldtns
power to the input junction box.
Installation Manual
Computer
support
Systems
.. .- PRFSENT
. .
~
IN THE
1 9 . Replace the junction box cover.
-20. Verify proper input power connections
to unit, including equipment grounding
conductor and local grounding electrode
conductor.
-21. Turn ON the building input power to the
unit.
-22. Check the phase rotation at the main In-
put breaker. Phase rotatlon should be
A. B, C. left-to-right.
-23. Check and record the input voltages at
the main input breaker. Measured volt-
ages should correspond to the unit's
nameplate input voltage.
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
Volts. phase C to phase A =
-24. Turn ON the main input breaker; wait
one minute. (If breaker trips OFF.
check for wiring errors.,: Contact Lieben
customer service and support or rhe lo-
cal factory representative for assis-
tance).
-25. Check the phase rotation at the line side
terminals (top) of the output circuit
breaker(s). The rotation should be A ,
0. C, left-to- right.
Datawave System. 15-30 kVA
 &hLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

C Start - Up Cont.

-26. Check and record the voitages at the

line-side terminals of the output circuit
breaker. Measured voltages should cor-
respond to the unit's nameplate Output
-32.
voltage (within +4%. -0%).
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
Volts, phase C to phase A =
Volts, phase A to neutral =
Volts, phase B to neutral =
Volts. phase C to neutral =.
If output voltage is incorrect, check for
- errors. Contact Lieben customer
wiring
service and suppon or the local factory
representative for assistance.
-27. Verify that all internal cooling fans are
(,',
,\ , j operating.
-28. Depress the local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF switch and verify system
shutdown. Turn the unit back on.
-29. Repeat step 28 for each remote EMER-
GENCY POWER OFF switch with which
the system is equipped.
Steps30 through 34 apply to the op-
tional Bypass Switch. If the system is
not equipped with a bypass switch, -35.
proceed directly to Step 35.
unit, including neutral and equipment
grounding conductor. (See Installation
Manual Figure 5.)
Turn ON the unit main input breaker.
33. Check the phase rotation at the line side
terminals of the output breaker(s). T h e
rotation should be A, B, C. left-to right.
34. Check and record the voltages at the
line - side terminals of the output circuit
breaker:
Volts, phase A t o phase B =
volts, phase B t o phase C =
Volts. phase C to phase A =
Volts. phase A t o neutral =
Volts, phase B t o neutral =
Volts, phase C t o neutral =
The voltages in S t e p 34 should not
differ significantly from those re-
corded in S t e p 26. If there is more
than a 3% variation, turn OFF t h e
building power to t h e unit, then verify
proper t a p settings of the bypass
transformer (or t h e building distribu-
tion transformer if there is no bypass
transformer). Then repeat S t e p s 32
through 34.
Turn o f f all breakers. Return Bypass
switch to "NORMAL" position.

-30. Turn the bypass switch to "AUXIL-

IARY" pos~tion.

-31. I f bypass transformer IS requ~red.ver~f).

proper bypass power connections to

Installation Manual - 25 - Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

bLiebert
Monitoring System Check Out
3 6 . BASIC INDICATORS. hlain Input:
- a. With the bypass switch in XORhlAL
position, turn the building power to
the main input ON, then turn the
main input'bieaker ON.
. -b. Check that the local EMERGESCY
POWER O F F button is illuminated
and that the second indicator
(TRANSFORMER OVERTEMP or
ALARM PRESENT) is off.
-c. Return all breakers to OFF.
-37. BASIC INDICATORS. Bypass Input.
I f unil has Bypass option:
-a. With the bypass switch in AUXIL-
IARY position, turn the building in-
put power ON, then turn the main
input breaker ON.
-b. Check that the local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF button is on, and that
the second indicator (TRANS-
FORMER OVERTEMP or ALARM
PRESENT) is off. ( If "UNIT IN
BY- PASS MODE" is alarmed, the
ALARM PRESENT indicator
should b e ON.)
-c. Return all breakers to O F F and by-
pass switch to the NORMAL posi-
tion.
38. MANUAL RESTART CHECK. If
is equipped wilh Manual Restart:
-a. Turn on building power to the Main
input. Turn Main Input breaker ON.
-b. Turn off all building power to unit.
- C. Observe that blain Input breaker
z~tomaticallytrips open upon power
Icss.
-d. Restore main input building ?ewer
and return .Main Input breaker to
ON.
Installation 1Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
-39. LOCAL VCMP. I C u n i t is equipped
local Voll-Currenl Monitor Panel:
wilh
Turn the unit ON. Ensure that the volt-
age values indicated by the Monitor
Panel correspond to the voltage values
measured at the line side of the output
circuit breaker (Step 26).
-40. SITEMASTER. rr the unit
to a Sltemaster system:
IS connected
-a. Turn the unit and Sitemaster console
ON. Verify monitor system operation
as described in the Sitemaster Own-
er's Manual.
-b. Check to ensure that the voltage val-
ues indicated by the Sitemaster cor-
respond to the input and output volt-
age values measured previously.
41. CONTROL VOLTAGE:
7
-a. Obtain access to the low voltage ter-
minals in the Low Voltage Junction
Box (if used), or in the low voltage
control section inside unit.
-b. Turn the unit ON. Measure and re-
cord the control voltage on terminals
1 (+) and 3 (corn):
-c. Control voltage = (Voltage
unit should be between ~ 2 0and 26 Vdc.)
-42. CUSTOMER ALARMS. If customer
alarms are provided:
-a. Turn the unit ON and simulate alarm
operation by jumpering the appropri-
ate low voltage control terminals.
(Refer to the control wiring installa-
tion drawing furnished with the unit.)
-b. Verify correct alarm annunciation by
the VCMP andlor by the Sitemaster
console.
Datawave System. 15-30 kVA
 k Liebert
burnpurer
Support
Systems

Monitoring System Check Out Cont.

f-
-4 3 . SERVICE TERMINAL. l r a Service -b. Refer to the Service Terminal Opera-
T e r m i n a l is l u r n i s h e d w i t h the s y s t e m : tor's Manual and verify correct op-
eration of the Service Terminal.

- a. Turn the unit ON and connect the - c. Using the Diagnostic function oi the
Service Terminal (described in the
Service Terminal to the service ter-
Service Terminal Operator's Man-
minal pon of the unit.
ual). verify correct IGM operation.

Equipment Connection Check Out (for Units with Distribution Cables)

(also phase rotation. if a 3-phase cir-

cuit) at the receptacle or cable end.

All loads should be disconnected O r

turned off before proceeding with the -46. Turn OFF all branch circuit breakers
following steps. and the panelboard main output circuit
breaker(s) .
For units with output distribution ca-
bles, be s u r e that there a r e NO output
receptacles connected t o load equip- -47. Connect the load equipment per equip-
ment plugs, and that t h e receptacles ment manufacturer's specifications and
are not in contact with foreign Ob- recommendations.
jects.
Pay special attention t o those Output
cables intended f o r direct-wiring
-48. Turn on the panelboard main output
breaker(s).
connection; t h e exposed conductor
ends of these cables must not be in
contact with each other or with any -49. Turn on branch circuit breakers to the
foreign objects. load equipment.
Observe the power-up sequence rec-
-4 4 . With Bypass switch in the SORMAL po- ommended by the equipment manu-
facturer.
sition, turn on main input power to unit.
then turn on the panelboard main out-
;lut breaker(s). -50. Verify that all load equipment operates
properly.
-45. Individually turn on each branch circuit
breaker and check the output voltage -5 1. Replace all exterior panels.
After Inspection and Start-up procedure is complete, the completed Start-up & In-
spection form furnished with the unit should be signed and returned to:
Liebert Corporation
Customer Service Department
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O. Box 29186 WARRANTY IS NOT IN EFFECT UN-
Columbus. Ohio 13229 LESS INSPECTION AND START-UP
FORM IS RECEIVED BY THE FAC-
TORY.

Installation Manual - 27 - Datawave System, 15-30 kVA

& Liebert Computer
Support
Systems

-4 -
MAINTENANCE

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (REPAIR)

Even the most rellable aqulprnent may fall. Liebert Customer S e r v ~ c eand Support ( C S a S ) I S at your
servlce to assure fast repalr of Your DataWave and rnlnlmum d o w n t m e of your installation.

ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM MAINTENANCE

ON THE DATAWAVE SYSTEM.

Standard electrical troubleshooting procedures
should be used to isolate problems in the
Datawave power conditioner. I/ there are
questions, don't hesitate to contact Liebert
CS&s.
Repair or replacement of standard items, such
as circuit breakers and indicator lights can be
either handled by qualified electricians or re-
..
ferred to Liebert CSkS. ~ i f e r lo the
Datawave Parts Manual.
Repairs related to the Datawave conditioning
elements should be referred to Lieben
CS&S.
TO contact Liebert CS&S for information or re-
pair service, call 1-800-LIEBERT.

Installation Manual Datawave System. 15-30 kVA

kiLiebert support
Systems

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (INSPECTION & CLEANING)

Air circuiatlon through the Datawave cabinet may cause dust to accumulate on internal components.
Cleaning should b e done as necessary during electrical lnspeotlons.
Annual general system lnspectlons. cleaning, and operation checks are recommended to ensure
system performance and long service life.

ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM MAINTENANCE

ON THE DATAWAVE SYSTEM. ALL VOLTAGE SOURCES TO THE

.
DATAWAVE MUST BE DISCONNECTED BEFORE INSPECTING OR
CLEANING WITHIN THE CABINET.

Inspection Schedule - A complete inspection and operauonal

checkout should be performed annually. This
It is difficult to establish a schedule for is best done by performing the inspection and
periodic cleaning5 since conditions vary from start-up procedure as detailed in Section 3.
site to site. Inspecrions after the first 24

.
hours, 30 days and 6 months of operation
should help determine a pattern for the in-
spection schedule.
Electrical connections and component
mountings should be inspected after the first
24 hours. 30 days, and 6 months of opera-
tion. Inspections should be conducted annu-
Liebert customer service and support of-
fers a complete range of preventive mainte-
nance services. These include thorough
equipment performance checks. and calibra-
tion of electronics. Contact Liebert customer
service and support for details.

ally thereafter.
.Ventilation openings and grilles should be
inspected and cleaned every six months.

Installation Manual - 29 - Datawave System, 15-30 kVA

bLiebert Computer
support
Systems

Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer

Typical Equipment Arrangement

IUeOtSCIOS P H CUSt0m.r S P ~ I t I ~ a l b n s
Ifor sol1 containmi units only)
Building intwfrss and alarm i
connections, not by ~ i s t m
,.:

Figure 1. Typical Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer Equipment Arrangement.

Installation Manual - 2 - Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

SITE PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION MANUAL

FOR THE
DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER
( 50 kVA THROUGH 150 kVA )
CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ................................................4
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION ........................................................... 4
Unpacking And Prellmlnary Inspection......................................................... 4
HandllngConslderatlons ....................................................................4
Unk Preparation ...........................................................................7
Locatlon Conslderatlons ....................................................................7
FloorPedestalIlnstallation ...................................................................8
POWER A N D CONTROL WIRING ............................................................ 9
Input Power Connections ................................................................... 9
............................................................16
Junction Box lnstallatlon (If used)
SystemGroundlng .........................................................................
18
Grounding Electrode Conductor .............................................................18
100-150 kVA Inter Module Wrlng Connections .................................................20
Output PoWerCOnnectlonS .................................................................. 22
ControlWrlnpConnectlons ................................................................. 23
.
2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND START-UP ................................... 27
INTERNAL INSPECTION .................................................................... 27
START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
.
3 INSPECTION and START-UP CHECK LIST ......................................29
4.MAINTENANCE ............................................................... 35
.....................................................
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (REPAIR)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (INSPECTION & CLEANING) ................................... 35
35

FIGURES
. .............................
1 Typlcal Datawave Magnetlc Synthesizer Equlpment Arrangement
.
2 Typlcal Cablnet and floor Plannlng Dlmenslon Data 50-75 k V A ............................... 25
.
3 Typloal Cablnet and floor Planning Dlrnenslon Data 100-150 k V A ............................. 6
.
4 Floor Pedestal Datall ....................................................................... 8
.................................. 10
.
5 Electrical meld Connections Sell Contained (SC) 50-75 k V A
.............................11
.
6 Electrloal meld Connectlona Condltlonlng Alone (CA) 50-75 k V A
..
7 EIectrlcaI meld Connections Self Contained (SC) 100-150 k V A ................................ 12
...........................
8 Electrical Fleld Connections Condltlonlng Alone (CA) 100-150 k V A
.
9 Datawave Bypass Conflguratlons ........................................................... 13
14
.
10 Typlcal Junctlon Box Connectlons ........................................................... 17
.
11 Typlcal Datawave Groundlng Arrangement .................................................. 19
.
12 Inter Module Wiring. 100-150kVA ........................................................... 21
................................................................. 23
..
13 Slmplifled Shutdown Clrcult
.......................................... 24
14 Typical Control Wlrlng for Unlts Wlthout Monltorlng
.
15 Typical Control Wlrlng l o r Unlls W l t h Volt I Current Monltor Panel (VCMP) ................... 25
.
16 Typical Control Wlrlng for Unlts W l t h lnforrnatlon Gatherlng Modules (IGM) ................... 26

TABLES
.
1 Heat Output. Datawave Magnetlc Synthesizer ............................................... 7
.
2 Suggested M l n l m u m Wlre Slze Data ........................................................ 15
.
3 Torque Speciflcatlons ........................................................................ 28

Installation M a n u a l -3- .
Datawave System 50-150 kVA
&hi Liebert
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: Read the entire manual betore lnstalllng and operating t h e system. Upon recelpt of a Data-
wave Magnetlc Synthesizer, t h e Installer should perform t h e followmg steps to assure a qual~ty1"-
stallation.
Unpacking And Preliminary Inspection
A quallty lnstallatlon begins on the receiving dock.
1. Inspect the shipping crate($ for damage or
slgns of mishandling before unpacking the
un~t(s).Check Shock-Watch" indicator.
2. Open the shipping crates by carefully re-
moving the sides. ends, and top. (Use care to
avoid puncturing the container with sharp ob-
jects that would damage the contents.)
3. Remove the packing and vapor barriers
and inspect the equipment for any obvious
shipping damages.
The units should not b e loosened
from the shipping pallet until after all
handling by fork lift or pallet jack is
completed. Complete internal in-
spection should be accomplished
only after equipment positioning and
prior to electrical hookup.
4. If any damage as a result of shipping is
observed, immediately file a claim with the
shipping agency and forward a copy of this
claim to:
Lieben Corporation
Customer Service Department
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O. Box 29186
Columbus. Ohio 43229
!nstallation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
Handling Considerations
The Datawave module (and cables. ~f furnished)
IS bolted to a wooden pallet to allow handhng by
fork-lift equipment. Also. the base of the unlt Is
constr~ctedto allow handllng by fork-llft equlp-
ment after the unit has been unbolted from the
pallet.
Check size and weight -
Refer to the cabinet
drawings furnished with the unit for size and
weight information. Typical cabinet dimen-
sions and weights are shown in Figures 2 and
3. , i
Plan the route - The route that the Datawave
module will follow to its installation area
should be planned to ensure that all oassaees
are large enough to accommodate [he ";it.
and that the floors are adequate to support
the weight. (i.e. Are the doorways, elevators,
ramps, etc. adequate? Are there any non
negotiable comers or offsets in the hallways?)
-
Move with care - In order to prevent panel
damage, it is recommended that the exterior
panels be removed before the unit is moved.
When replacing panels, remember to recon-
nect all panel ground wires.
-
Close quarters? Removal of the side panels will
aid in maneuvering the unit through close
quarters. Removal of the side panels and
brackets reduces the unit dimensions to
34 inches (864 mm) wide.
When lifting the Datawave unit by
fork-lift, b e certain that the forks ex-
tend under frame members of both
sides of the unit, otherwise severe
damage to the unit may result.
Datawave System, 50-150 kVA
 Computer

bLiebert Support
Systems

Typical Cabinet
and Floor Planning
Dimension Data
A CLEARANCE OF
18. 1'51mmI l 0 O V

A CLEARANCE

ACCE6S IN FRONT &NO RIOYT

SIDES. FOR REWMMEIlDED
UlHlYUY CLEARANCE REFER TO
THE I M S I I L U T I O N MANUAL

CABINET DIMENSIONAL DATA

C U T W T LOCATION FOR
CABLE ENTRV.

CUTOUT LOCATION FOR

CABLE EXIT.

M. >
lMml

FOOTPRINT AND FLOOR CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

OPTIONAL FLOOR PEDESTALS

Figure 2. Typical Cabinet and Floor Planning Dimensional Data. 50-75 kVA

Datawave System, 50-150 kVA

Installation Manual - 5 -
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

OPTIONAL FLOOR PEDESTALS

Figure 3. Typical Cabinet and Floor Planning Dimensional Data. 100-150 kVA

Installation Manual -6- Datawave System, 50-150 kVA

 Computer

[Y1Liebert Support
Systems

F
I Unit Preparation
,'
Set the palletized assembly in a level area, where
there is enough room to lift the unit off the pallet
onto the floor.

Remove bolts holding the unit to the shipping pal- Before maneuvering t h e unit into its
let. (Located in each of the four comers.) After final position, read and follow all advi-
removing these bolts, the unit may be removed sories in the following "Location Con-
from the pallet. siderations" paragraphs.

Location Considerations
The Datawave Magnetlc Synthesizer should be located wlthln the computer room, andlor ClOSe to the load(s) which
~t 1s suoolvlna.

Equipment Location should employ the shortest
output distribution cable runs consistent with
logical equipment arrangement and allow-
ances
-..... for
- - future additions.
Operating Environment -
Ambient tempera-
tures of 0°C to 40°C with a relative humidity
of 0% to 95% (non-condensing) .
Bottom Clearance is required on all SC Models
('-',i for exit of cableslconduit. This clearance is
automatically provided by a raised floor (6
.. inches I 150 mm. minimum height). Figures
2 and 3 show the typical raised-floor cutout
dimensions.
When units are not located on a raised floor
( or if the raised floor is not adequate to sup-
port the unit ). optional floor pedestals may
be used. (Non-raised floor applications are
not CSA approved).
CA Models with top conduit entry do not re-
quire any bottom clearance.
Recommended Minimum Service Clearances
are shown in Figures 2 and 3. The indicated
clearances at the front and right side of the
unit are reouired for service access bv the
National ~lkcvicalCode (Article 110-16).
Clearance above the unit is required for cool-
ing air flow (exhaust).
Audible Noise -
The average sound level output
of the Datawave is 50 to 58 dBA at five feet
(1.6 meten) which should be considered
when determining unit location. The low
audible noise level allows comfortable place-
ment of the unit in almost any location.
Heat Output -
As all electrical devices. the
Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer produces
heat under normal operation. (See
NO TAG.) This heat output should be in-
cluded when calculating the environmental
conditions of the room.

Table 1. Heat Output. Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer.

HEAT OUTPUT - BTUIHr (KcallHr)

KVAIKW Full Load 314 Load 112 load
50 10900 (2750) 9650 (2430) 8450 (2130)
75 16350 (4120) 14450 (3640) 12650 (3190)
100 21800 (5500) 19275 (4860) 16900 (4260)
125 27250 (6870) 24100 (6075) 21100 (5320)
150 32700 (8250) 28900 (7295) 25325 (6390)

Installation Manual Datawave System, 50-150 kVA

kh Liebert Computer
Support
Systems

Floor Pedestal Installation

Floor pedestals are opt~onalequipment Intended to provide clearance for bottom cable entry wlthaut relying on a
r a k e d floor to support the unlt The pedestals are adjustable over a llmtted range (apprcxmately 3 '1, inches) to
allow levellng the unlt and minor adjustments in the unlt's Installed helght.

Floor pedestals are reverse assern- -

bled for shipping. Before installation,
the ~ e d e s t a l sshould be reassembled
a s shown in Figure 4. When the pedes-
tal is DroDerly assembled, the washer
on top of the welded nut provides a
bearing surface for the unit weight.

1 Insert the pedestal threaded shaft into

the inside comer tubing of the cabinet
base as shown in Figures 2 and 3.)

2 Adjust the pedestal height by turntng

the welded nuushaft assembly into or
out of the pedestal base.as requ~red.

3 Lock the height by tightening the jam

nut against the pedestal base

The pedestal may be mounted to the floor by

means of the four holes in the base. Loca-
tions of floor pedestals relative to the Data-
wave base outline are shown in Figures 2 and
3. Figure 4. Floor Pedestal Details.

Installation Manual Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

bLiebert
POWER AND CONTROL WIRING
Power and control wiring should b e Installed b y licensed ?lectricians. All power a n d control wlrlng
must comply with the NEC and applicable local codes.
lnput Power Connections
If the Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer is furnished with junction boxes, input power connections are made as detailed
in the Junction Box installation section.
If Iunctlon boxes are not furnished, the input power feeder is connected to the input power lugs or blocks located
-
Inside the unit. (See Flgurss 5 8.1
V E R l P l THAT ALL INCOMING HIGH-
VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW-VOLT-
AGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE DE-
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BE-
FORE INSTALLING CABLES OR MAK-
ING CONNECTIONS, WHETHER IN
THE JUNCTION BOX OR IN THE UNIT.
To minimize disturbances caused by other loads
in the building, the 3-phase power input to
the Datawave should be supplied directly
from the service entrance. However, if this is
not possible, the Datawave's ability to isolate
the sensitive load from power disturbances
allows the system to work even without a
dedicated power feeder.
The input feeder circuit should be sized in ac-
cordance with the NEC and any local build-
ing codes to assure the feeder's ability to
safely carry the system's full load current, in-
cluding losses.
Input feeder conductors ~ h o u l dbe sized for no
more than 2% voltage drop. If operation at
under-voltage conditions for extended peri-
ods of time is desired, the input feeders must
be oversized.
Typical conductor size data is shown in Table 2.
All connections must comply with the NEC
and all other applicable codes.
Installation Manual
- -- -
Computer
Support
Systems
The main input feeder should consist of three
phase conductors and one (safety) ground
conductor (3W t G).
For units with a bypass option, the bypass input
feeder must consist of three phase conduc-
tors, one neutral, and one (safety) ground
conductor (4W t G).
Bypass option -
Typical configuration diagrams
for the Bypass option are shown in Figure 9.
An external bypass transformer may be re-
quired if Datawave input voltage is different
from the output voltage. Power tenpinals are
provided inside the unit for connections to
the bypass input.
Bypass Transformer Connections -
Input con-
nections to the bypass transformer should be
3-phase, 3-wire plus ground (3W t G), sized
the same as the Datawave input wiring. Out-
put connections from the transformer should
be 3-phase. 4-wire plus ground (4W t G).
sized for the full load output of the Data-
wave. If the bypass. transformer is located
farther than 10 feet (3 meters) from the
Datawave. additional overcurrent protection
for the output wiring from the, transformer
may be required to meet electrical codes.
Any alternate energy source, such as a diesel-
generator, powering the Datawave should be
equipped with an isochronous governor to
ensure proper regulation of the frequency.
Typical computer loads specify a frequency
range of f 0.5 Hertz.
Datawave System, 50-150 kVA
&b Liebert Computer
Support
Systems

Reserve input power connaclion. Customer connects 3 phase

pawn directly to line termtnais of reserve Input c~rcuitbreaker on
units wllh bypass option.

Main input pwu COnMnion. Customer connects 3 phase. 3 wire

w e r directly l o line terminals ol main ~nputcircuit breaker.

Optional subfeed circuit breaker. For lield connecmn of a remote

leed or optional expansion cabinet.

Naubal connections. Distribution cabie neurrai(s) connected to

distribution panelDoard neutral bus bar.

Ground coninctma. Distribulion cabie ground(s) Connected to

distrlbulion panelboard ground bus bar.

Panelboard maln circult breaker@). Factory wired.

:.. '.<,-*.a,
:.&.
Distribution paneiboard A.

I
O i s t r i b u ~ npanelboard 8.
For connaction al
output branch circuits
as required.

MshibuliOl) u M a m d u i l conincIIOn. Cable tray with holes provided

10: seiuiing OptiOMi distribution Cables.

RIGHT SIDE WITH PANELS R E M O V E D

Ground aMTode mnducbr connacHon. Terminal for customer

wnnedm of continuous ground electrode conductor per NEC
250-26.
Salaly ground connse(ion. Terminal provided for cuslomer
connection of main input salety ground.
ti
Rmm input M u V l l and u h t y ground connaction. Terminal b i a k
p w i d e d lor customer connection of neutral conductor and safely
ground on unlts with bypass optton.
Building i n b r l a u and alarms connection. Low,voitaQe conlroi
terminal strip provlded tor connection ot building interlace and alarm
circuits.
Silamnia conmelion. Termmais lor connectloo ol a 2 w w rw~sted
pair COmmunlCatlonS cable (available tram Lieben or others, .>
uplionat Sltemasrer .
Building InhIIace relay connection. Double pole, double toggle
FRONT VIEW WITH PANELS REMOVED '(DPDTI relay wllh term~nalslor customer connect~onto lndlwle untt
status.
I

F i g u r e 5. Electrical F i e l d C o n n e c t i o n s - Self C o n t a i n e d (SC) D a t a w a v e 50 - 75 kVA.

Installation Manual - 10 - Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

 Computer

&iLiebert
Support
Systems

ELECTRICAL FIELD CONNECTIONS

A CONDITIONING ALONE UNITS

Raaarva inpul powar connaction. Cuslomer connecls 3 phase power

directly lo llne terminals 01 reserve mput clrcult breaker on unlts
wilh bypass optlon.

Main input powar connactlon. Cuslwner connects 3 phase, 3 wire

power direclly lo line lermlnals 01 maln Input clrcult breaker.

Main oulput nautral and ground connactiona. Termlnal black

prwided lor customer connecllon.

Main oulput circuit braahsf connaclion. Cuslomer connecls dlrectly

10 lmd IermmaIs al circult breaker.

DlstrlbuU~ncable conduil connactbn. Cable lray lor securing oulput

cables.

RIGHT SIDE WITH PANELS REMOVED

-
i Figure 6. Electrical Field Connections - Conditioning Alone (CA) Datawave 50 - 75 kVA.

Installation Manual - 11 - Datawave System, 50-150 kVA

 Computer
&iLiebert Support
Systems

ELECTRICAL FIELD CONNECTIONS

DATAWAVE 100.150 KVA SELF CONTAINED UNITS

Ground connsctions. O~striou!loncable grauna(s)

connected lo ais!rlOu!lon Panelboard ground our bar.

Nautral ConnacUOnr. Olslribut~ancaole neusal(s)

connected la dlsmbutlon oanelboara neutral bus bar.

Panelboard A.

Panelboard 8.

Optional subfeed clrcult Oieaxer(sl.

Subfaad output connections. Customer connects

directly to load lermlnals 01 subteed clrcult orealteris)

Subfeed output ground and nauval connsclons.

Termlnal blocks suoplled lor customer connecl~onof
subfeed neutral and ground conductors.

Olsblbutian cabla condun connaction. Cable tray with

1 3/32" i278mml dlameter holes far 3 4 " cocduil
linings and 718" (22.2mml diameter holes for 112"
conduit linings provlded tor securmg optional output
distribulion cables.

'Customer connecllon not requlred Shawn lor

RIGHT SIDE WlTH PANELS REMOVED orlentation and ciaritlcatlon only.

. ..,. . --- -
L m m D( mmrr) 10 DP~IYYI
Smnasm

FRONT VIEW WlTH PANELS REMOVED

(MODULE A) ~,~~~~ ~ ~ ~ & m ~ ~ $ V ~ ~
IMUI~Y ~ SUNS.
U

Figure 7. Electrical Field Connections - Self Contained (SC) Datawave 100 - 150 kVA.

Installation Manual Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

 Computer

bLiebert Support
Systems

ELECTRICAL FIELD CONNECTIONS

DATAWAVE 100-150 KVA CONDITIONING ALONE UNITS

Figure 8. Electrical Field Connections - Conditioning Alone (CA) Datawave 100 - 150 kVA.

installation Manual - 13 - Datawave System, 50-150 kVA

&hLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

NOTE: For Input and

Bypass configureti el matches rated Data-

wave output voltage.

OUTPUT

Figure 9. Datawave Bypass Configurations (50 - 150 kVA).

Installation Manual - 14 - Datawave System. 50-150 ~ V A

bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Table 2. Suggested M i n i m u m W i r e Size Data

I I M A I N INPUT
1 I OUTPUT A N D B Y P A S S
INPUT
Suggested
feeder
wire size3

FLA = Full Load Amps of Datawave Magnetlc Synthesizer.

OPD = Overcurrent Protection Device inside Datawave Magnetic Syntheslzer
Wire Sizes based on NEC 1987 Table 310-16. using 75'C copper conductor.
* Parallel Feeders per NEC 300-20 and 310-4.

.- . - -.
.NOTES:
1) Main input power feeder should be a dedlcated feeder direct from service entrance If posslbie.
Ground conductors recommended to be partty sized with power conductors for Increased system performance.
Ground conductor minimum slze per NEC Table 250-95. Input power feeder conduit may be used aa the safety
ground conductor. When conduit Is used, adequate electrical contlnulty must be maintained at conduit connec-
tions to enclosures and throughout conduit run.
2) lnput feeder wire size listed in NO TAG Is the minimum feeder size recommended. Larger wlre slze may be
required because of voltage drop or supply overcurrent protectlon device.
3) Output and bypass input feeder wire size llsted In NO TAG is the minimum feeder slze recommended.
Larger wire size may be required because of voltage drop or excessive neutral current (see NEC Table 310-16
notes 8 and 10). For best performance. Syntheslzer should be located as close t o the load as practical.
4) Output OPD's llsted In NO TAG are the standard slzes for Model CA only. See the unlt's speclflcatlon sheet.

Installation Manual - 15 - Datawave System. 50-150 k V A

 Computer
&Liebert
i Support
Systems

Junction Box installation (if used)

Main Input, bypass input and low voltage Control junction boxes are optional for the 50 through 150 kVA Datawave
Magnetic Synthesizer to slmpllfy customer connections.

-
Shipping Arrangements The junction boxes. ~f Dimensions - Dimensions are given on the draw-
used, can either be shipped with the system ings furnished with the unit. Typical dimen-
or can be advance-shipped for installation sions of the junction boxes are as follows:
during the roughing-in stage of new construc-
tion.
Installation Location - 10 foot (3 meters) long
Low Voltage (Control) Junction Box:
flexible cables are supplied by the factory for
connecting the junction boxes to the unit.
The junction boxes should be installed a Width 8 in. (203 mm)
maximum of 8 feet (2.4 meters) from the Length 10 in. (254 mm)
feeder entrance of the Datawave. Height 4 in. (102 rnm)
It is recommended that the junction boxes be
centered under an easily removable floor tile.
Junction Box Connections must be installed in Main Input and Bypass Input Junction Box
compliance with the NEC and all other appli- 50 kVA, 380V and Higher
cable codes. 7 5 kVA, 480V and Higher

Width 14 in. (35.6 mm)

Length 16 in. (406 mm)
Height 6 in. (152 mm)
VERIFY THAT INCOMING HIGH-
VOLTAGE [POWER) AND LOW-
VOLTAGE ICONTROLl CIRCUITS ARE
DE-ENERG~ZED AND. LOCKED OUT Width 16 in. (406 rnm)
BEFORE INSTALLING CABLES OR Length 30 in. (762 mm)
MAKING ANY CONNECTIONS IN THE Height 6 in. (152 mm)
JUNCTION BOX.
Typical junction box connections are showi~in
Figure 10 and described in the Input Power
and Control Wiring Connection sections.

lnstallation Manual Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

 Support
k Liebert Systems

Location
ecommended for factory
location for
+,' - - supplied
high voltage
cable
assembly.
.
+
. '---
e x
. \:

BYPASS INPUT JUNCTION BOX (Optional for units with bypass option)

Location
Recommended for factory
location tor supplled
customer
connection
hlgh voltage
cable .
3 phase 3W+G)
\-
r-
assernbiy.

. .

Hlgher ampaclty cable

a~sembllesconsln of
p a r d e l conduits.

Installation Manual - 17 - Datawave System. 50-150 kVA


W Liebert
System Grounding
The performance and safety of any power condltlonlng system depends upon proper groundlng. Flgure 9 shows a
typlcal groundlng arrangement for t h e Datawave system.
Equipment grounding -
Grounding 1s pnmarily
for safety. Correct ~mplementatlon of
grounding also enhances equipment perform-
ance. All power feeders must include equip-
ment grounding means as required by the
NEC and local codes.
An insulated ground conductor is recom-
mended to be run in each feeder conduit.
Although ground conductors can be the
minimum size per NEC Table 250-95, they
are recommended to be parity-sized with
power conductors for increased system per-
formance.
If the input power feeder conduit is used as a
grounding conductor, adequate electrical
continuity must be maintamed at all conduit
Grounding Electrode Conductor
Required by code -The Datawave Magnetic
Synthesizer is considered by the National
Electrical Code to be a "separately derived
system". Therefore, according to NEC
250-26, a local grounding electrode conduc-
tor is required in addition to the equipment
safety ground which is normally run with the
input power conductors.
Unit connection - A terminal is furnished inside
the unit for field-connection of the ground-
ing electrode conductor. (See Figures 5 - 8.)
Electrode connection -
As shown in Figure 9.
the grounding electrode conductor is re-
quired to be run from the Datawave to the
nearest effectively grounded: (In order of
preference.)
1) Building steel.
2) Metal water pipe.
3) Other made grounding electrode
Sizing of the grounding electrode conductor is
based on the secondary circuit conductors.
According to the NEC ( Table 250-94 ), the
minimum recommended AWG grounding
electrode conductor is:
Installation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
connecuons. For optimum performance, it
is recommended that the total ground sys-
tem impedance be 3 ohms o r less.
Using isolating bushings in a metal conduit
run is a safety hazard as well as an NEC
violation, and is not recommended.
Signal reference grid - If the Datawave is used
to supply power to a computer room or area
which is equipped vnth a signal reference grid
or a grounded raised-floor stnnger system, a
grounding conductor should be connected
from the Datawave system ground bus to the
gtid or floor system. This conductor should
be #8 AWG or larger, and as short as practi-
cal. Less than 3 feet ( I meter) is recom-
mended.
MINIMUM GROUNDING
ELECTRODE CQNDUCTOR
(7S°C Copper Conductors AWG)
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
208V I 380V I 415V 1 480V 1 575V
Recommended methods for running the
grounding electrode conductor: (Arranged
in order of preference for system perform-
ance.) (As acceptable by local and other ap-
plicable codes.)
1) Outside of conduit (where not suscepti-
ble to damage).
2) Inside non-metallic conduit.
3) Inside non-ferrous conduit.
4) Inside ferrous conduit, bonded to the
ferrous conduit at both ends, as accept-
able by local andlother applicable
codes.
1
Datawave System, 50-150 kVA
 k Liebert supporr
Systems

Figure 11. Typical Datawave Grounding Arrangement.

C
Installation Manual Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

LW Liebert
100 - 150 kVA Units - Inter-Module
Each
Identify Modules A and B and determine their
Wiring Connections
required orientation in the installed position.
(Refer to Figure 3.)
Move Module B to its final-installed position.
100. 125 or 150 kVA Datawave System Is supplied In two modules for shipping purposes which must be located
end-to-end, then treated (for wiring purposes) as a single unit.
Move Module A into alignment with (but a few
inches/centimeters away from) Module B.
If the system is to be located nen to
(a) wall(@, all panels on the side(s)
facing the wall(s) should b e installed
before moving the modules into the
installed position.
Level and align both modules. Level each mod-
ule, both side-to-side and front-to-rear.
Align the modules horizontally, vertically,
and axially. (On uneven floors, the use of
shims andlor optional floor pedestalsflevelers
will be necessary.)
Bring the modules together. O b S e ~ e :
(1) That the inter-module coupling bushings
attached to Module B align with, and slip
into, the corresponding holes in Module A.
(2) That the rubber gasket around the pe-
rimeter of Module A meets and seals with
the mating perimeter of Module B.
Identify the interconnecting power conductors
and control wires located in Module B.
(Refer to Figure 12 for wire numbers and
color codes.)
Locate the three primary conductors (W104,
W105 and W106). Feed these three con-
Installation Manual
Lornpurer
Support
Systems
inter-module coupling bushing.
Match the primary conductors to the corre-
sponding color-coded terminals (red, blue,
yellow, as shown in Figure 12). Connect the
-
ductors into Module A through the
conductors. Support the transformer termi-
nals when tightening. Refer to Table 111 for
terminal torque requirements.
Locate the secondary conductors (W129, W130,
W131, and W93 (and W140 if required).
Feed these conductors into Module A
through the f~ inter-module coupling bush-
ing.
Match the secondary conductors to the corre-
sponding color-coded terminals (orange.
pink, manila, white, green, as shown in Fig-
ure 12). Connect the conductors. Refer to
Table I11 for terminal torque requirements.
Locate the fan power connector (wires color-
coded white and green). Feed the connec-
tor and wires into Module A through the $QQ
coupling bushing.
Losnka tAe temperature sznsor comecior
(wires color-coded white and yellow).
Feed the connector and wires into Module A
through the rpp inter-module coupling bush-
ing.
Match the fan and temperature sensor connec-
tors to the corresponding color-coded con-
nectors in Module A. Plug the correspond-
ing connector sets together. then check to
make certain that both connector sets are
locked.
Datawave System, 50-150 kVA
 computer

bLiebert Support
Systems

MODULE B MODULE A
II

NOTE:
1. WIRE W140 IS PRESENT ONLY ON UNITS WITH 380V OUTPUT OR HIGHER.

/ s
Figure 12. Inter-Module Wiring: Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer, 100 through 150 kVA
C

Installation Manual Datawave System, 50-190 kVA

kh Liebert
Outout Power Connections
&en equipped with Integral distrlbutlon. the Datawave provides the flexibility of custom output power dlstrlbutlon
conflguratlons.
Output circuit breakere) andlor panelboards
wth ground and neutral provisions are pro-
vided m i d e the Datawave unit for connect-
ing load(s) as required. (See Figures 5 8). -
Flexible output distribution cables for use in
data processing areas under a raised floor are
optional and may be factory supplied. Cable
lengths and layout should be well-planned:
Cable access - Cable routes should follow
aisles between equipment. This will facilitate
access to cables for installation, routine In-
spection, and future changes.
Cable length - Measure the distance to the
load equipment following right-angle paths.
rather than diagonally or directly. Always
measure to the extreme far side of the equip-
ment with respect to the Datawave unit to In-
sure adequate cable length.
Air circulation - Prevent restriction of air-
flow under the raised floor by running the
flexible conduits flat on the sub-floor, in par-
allel paths.
The main output feeder for Conditioning Alone
units should be sized for no more than 2%
voltage drop. Typical conductor-size data is
shown in Ta.ble 2; however, larger wire size
may be required because of voltage drop or
excessive neutral harmonic currents. (See
the NEC. table 310-16. notes 8 and 10.) For
best performance. the Datawave should be
located as close to the load as practical.
Initial system output loading should be between
50% and 75% of rated capacity. This allows
Installation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
- -
the addition of future loads without immedi-
ately investing in another power conditioner.
The high partial-load efficiency of the Data-
wave Magnetic Synthesizer permits such siz-
ing without imposing an energy-use penalty
during initial operation.
For additional information an calculating
the required system capacity, see Liebert
Powerline PLT-09, Power Calculations
(System Sizing).
Keep the load balanced. Although the Data-
wave Magnetic Synthesizer can tolerate up to
a 100% load imbalance, balancing of loads is
good design practice on any 3-phase system.
Accordingly, each Datawave distribution
panel is load-balanced at the factory, based
on output branch circuit breaker sizes. All
additions to the system should be arranged so
as to preserve this balance.
VERIFY THAT INCOMING HIGH VOLT-
AGE CIRCUITS ARE DE-ENERGIZED
AND LOCKED-OUT BEFORE INSTALL-
ING OUTPUT BREAKERS AND CA-
BLES.
Code compliance -
All output cables and con-
nections must comply with the NEC and all
other applicable codes.
Datawave System, 50-150 kVA
kh Liebert
Computer
Support
Systems

Control Wiring Connections

All Uebert power conditioning systems have provlslon for external shutdown control from Remote Emergency Power
Off (REPO)stations. Figure 11 is a simpllfled diagram of the shutdown circuitry of the Datawave Magnetic Synthe-
slzer.

Low-voltage control circuit. As shown in Figure
13, the control circuit operates on 24Vdc.
The shutdown device (represented by the
REP0 switch) activates a low-current 24Vdc
relay which in nun operates the shunt trip
mechanism. The shunt-trip solenoid opens
the Main Input breaker, which de-energizes
the power center.
made to the low-voltage junction box (if
used) or to the low-voltage control terminal
strip located inside the Datawave Unit.
Control wiring connections vary with the type
of monitoring system furnished with the unit.
Three typical control wiring configurations
are shown in Figure 14, Figure 15, and Fig-
ure 16. 'I '

Multiple-unit shutdo-. When more than one Code compliance - Control wiring connections
~ o w e center
r is installed by the user, a typical must comply with the NEC and all other ap-
;equirement is that actuation of a single de- plicable codes. . .
vice (REPO for example) must shut down all
power centers. The low-voltage control cir-
cuits of all modules of any standard Liebert
Datawave system are designed to meet this
requirement. - . -,,.. . -*.-.n 1
VERIFY 7%; ALL INCOMING HIGH-
Detailed diagrams and descriptions of the shut- VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW-
down schemes for multiple-system instal- - -.VOLTAGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE !
lations are wntained in the Liebert Power DE-ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT '
Line PLT-35, 'Power Center Shutdown BEFORE INSTALLING CABLES OR
Control Schemes". (revision 04/83 or -'MAKING CONNECTIONS, WHETHER '
later). IN THE JUNCIION BOX OR IN THE
External control wiring connections for Remote :UNIT. .I t i
..... ' . -. .I-:$,.III..
.. ; j,
. . . and/or monitoring are
Shutdown, .alarm, ....
3 .
. , ,...
%. '
;

._ . _. .--.,. i

i .: r i

Figure 13. Simplified Shutdown Circuit. , .

Installation Manual ,... - 23 - D a t m v . System, 60-160 kVA

. --
bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

I DATAWAVE
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL JUNCllON BOX IF SUPFUED OF
LOW VOLTAGE CONlROL SECllON INSIDE UNIT
I

3 desired

l o w 17.)
CUSTOMER ALARM CONTACT (N.O.)
( optlonal connectlons, 2 max.1
Contact ruttable lor rw~tchlwlow-cur- 2nd Customer Alarm L
mt 24VaS.
m r c t c l o w n pmr1d.r alarm a n m
1st CUStWT A l r n -; g
dat~enen oatmwavr m i t c d w r y r t m .
- C l n t a a Alarm Common - 0
8 g RMarm
. N.O. contact C
R a t e Alarm N.C.
REMOTE SUMMARY ALARM INDICATORS R M . Alarm Common
f ootlonal c o ~ e c t l o n sI

*
Q SOURCE

:1

REPO SWITCH (N.0.)

I o~tlonalconneotlona I

Contacts -Id b. sultabl. lol

tw~tsklnpI -m ZIV~O.
I d to b. 24 VdO. 1 m w
m uI d .
(srNvt.2. I
C M a c t dosun trlp. mn Data-
wavr maln I n W utodw.
. . .. .
~.:
I
, . .
REP0 SWITCH (N.C.1 ' .- . .
( optional comectlons 1 . . . .x .
I i %- ,

I 1
Figure 15. Typical Control Wiring for Units With Volt 1 Current Monitor Panel (VCMP).

lnrtallatlon Manual ..- - 25 - Datawave System, 50-1.50 kVA

 *
REP0 SWITCH (N.C.)
( optlonal conneotlons )
I
Gntacts skeuM b. sultabl. f u
I w l t m l w ~ou-cvnnt 24vdc.
L M p load 10 b. 24 VdC, 1 amp
m ~ load.(
I S I Not* 2. 1
Contaot
Waw w nInput
maln i n g trlps open Data-
breaker,
NOTES

DPDT mntasts rat& 114 hp st 1zoVa~.10A at

u 240 Vas m a .
2. OTHER N.O. REW DEVICES may by w1r.d In w a l w
to N.O. REW -tact..
0 t h N.C. REW
N.C. REFQmmasts.
avd.

may b. wked In s n b O
Multl .I REW lamps and other 24VdC loads msy b.
w d ~ ~n. I I . I to REW lamp.
M u 24Vdc s u p availabl. I. I m p total. ( m h N.O.
fl-k?
--.,., REP
swltshs am -red
3. ALL AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVlCES AND CABW
TO 8E FELD S U P 4 ED EXCEPT AS hOTE0.
frmt hs u n

F eld r w m od sontro! w r l w racommmded to b. # t e

AWG m n rttamea soDcer woth 300-roll rnlntrnwn
m*.,,at.on.

Figure 16. Typical Control Wiring for Units With Information Gathering Modules (IGM).

Installation Manual - 26 - Datawave System, 50-150 kVA

bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND START-UP

INTERNAL INSPECTION
. ...-
Open the unit - Gain access to ;he internal com-
A detailed internal inspection should be per-
formed
- - after the unit is in dace and before it ponents of the Datawave unit by removing
- -
-
is energized, to ensure vouble free start-up. ihe exterior panels. - -k_
wq?e&.
. . I ,

The same internal inspection should be car-

ried out when performing preventive mainte-
Visually inspect - Be sure wiring and compo-
.

nance. oil leaks or bulging. ~&*&;

nents are not damaged. Check capab&is for

Check power connections - ~ h e c k ' a l ipower

. connections for tightness. Refer to N.0 TAG
for torque requirements of aU electrical con-
. .,. .. ... nections. ,.. A <.
.,.,-L*
..,..~.-..
VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING POWER :;;t :
AND CONTROL CIRCUITS ARE DE- Perform formal detailed inspection -:Pollow
ENERGIZED AND LOCKED OUT BE- the Inspection And Start-up Check List
FORE PERFORMING THE INTERNAL
INSPECTION.
' ' ' '

tion. :*-
(Section 3) when performingdetailed @spec-

. . .
tomer service and suppon. .
Call 1-800-LIEBERT.

Installallon Manual
 Computer
Liebert Support
Systems

Table 3. Torque Specifications.

lnstallatlon Manual - 28 - Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

 hLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

INSPECTION and START-UP CHECK LIST

for the
SO - 150 kVA DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER

Unit Serial Number: Date:

Unit Model Number:

Inspection

ALL EQUIPMENTINSPECT~ONPROCEDURES ARE TO BE PER-

FORMED WITH POWER TO THE UNIT TURNED OFF AND LOCKED
OUT.
( EXTERIOR INSPECTION ---.7;
Check all breaker connections for tight-
- 1. damaged
Confirm that the exterior of unit is un-
(including cables and recepta-
ness. Retorque if necessary.

8. Check all terminal block connections

/--
cles, if furnished). 7

! for tightness. Retorque if necessary.

'. ._
- 2. Confirm that service and ventilation
clearances are adequate. (See Installa-
tion Manual Figures 2 and 3).
- 9. Check transformer mounting bolts for
tightness. Retorque if necessary.
.
'.. !'.

( INTERIOR INSPECTION )
..
'

,.<... . . . . r
. , ,!: .
-.-
.......... , . . . . . .
10. Remove.. any .!...f&&n
., . objects from the
- 3. Remove accessible exterior panels.
,I,1, \

&mponents or the interior area of the

. unit. Make sure air passages on trans-
formers are clear and free ordebris!
. . . . . . . ,>.
. . . .. .. .. . . . . ... .

When removing exterior panels, Dl$

- 11. Check that the cooling'fan blades move
freely, and that the intake and exhaust
CONNECT PANEL GROUND WIRES BY
SEPARATINB M E EASY-DISCONNECT 'air screens are clean and free of ob-
TERMINALS LOCATED ON THE suuctions. ' .
FRAME. When replacing exterior pan-
els, reconnect all panel ground wires.
-12. Replace side panels. leaving access to
- 4. Inspect all wire and conductor insulation
for damage.
circuit breakers for the following stan-

- 5. pacitor
Inspect all wiring connections to the ca-
banks. Re-secure the connec-
tions if necessary.
- 6. tions
Check all uansformer terminal connec-
for tightness. Retorque if neces-
When replacing the side panels, be
sure to reconnect t h e panel ground
lr sary. wires.
L

Installation Manual - 29 - Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

..... ...c,!.5,%.
. . .
bLiebert
Start - Up
START-UP PROCEDURES SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY QUALI-
FIED PERSONNEL. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE
EQUIPMENT THROUGHOUT THE MAJORITY OF THE START-UP
PROCEDURE. PROCEED WITH CAUTION.
-13. Make certain that all circuit breakers
are in the OFF position.
-14. Place BYPASS Switch (if provided) in
the 'NORMAL" position.
Steps 15 through 19 apply to the Main
lnput Junction Box. If this installation
is not provided with a Main lnput
Junction Box, proceed directly to
Step 20.
Remove the cover of the Main Input
Junction Box. Verify proper input power
connections to unit. including equip-
ment grounding conductor.
Turn ON the building power to the junc-
ticn Box. Check the phase rotation at
the Junction box. Phase rotation should
be A, B, C, as indicated.
Check and record the input voltages at
the junction box:
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
Volts, phase C to phase A =
-18. Turn OFF and lock out the bullding
power to the input junction box.
Installation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
-19. Replace the junction box cover.
-20. Verify proper input power connections
to unit. including equipment grounding
conductor and local grounding electrode
conductor.
-21. Turn ON the building input power to the
unit.
-22. Check the phase rotation at the main in-
put breaker. Phase rotation should be
A, B, C. left-to-right.
-23. Check and record the input voltages at
the main input breaker. Measured volt-
ages should correspond to the unit's
nameplate input voltage.
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
Volts. phase C to phaseA =
-24. Turn ON the main input breaker; wait
one minute. (If breaker trips OFF,
check for wiring errors. including con-
trol wiring. Contact Liebert customer
senrice and support or the local factory
representative for assistance).
-25. Check the phase rotation at the line side
terminals (top) of the output circuit
breaker(s). The rotation should be A,
B, C. left-to- right.
Datawave System. 50-150 kVA
bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

Start - Up Cont.
-26. Check and record the voltages at the
line-side terminals of the output circuit
breaker. Measured voltages should cor-
respond to the unit's nameplate output
voltage (within +4%. -0%).
Volts, phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
. . , . serve lnput Junction Box, proceed di-
Volts, phase C to phase A =
Volts, phase A to neutral =
Volts, phase B to neutral =
Volts, phase C to neutral =
If output voltage is incorrect, check for
wiring errors. Contact Liebert customer
service and support or the local factory
repr=se&ative for assistance.
-31. Turn the bypass switch to "AUXIL-
IARY" position.
Steps 32 through 36 apply to the Re-
serve lnput Junction Box. If this In-
stallation is not provided with a Re-
rectly to Step 37.
-32. ~ e m o v ethe cover of the Bypass Input
Junction Box. Verify proper input
power connections to unit including
neutral and equipment grounding con-
ductor.,
-33. Turn ON the building power to the By-
pass Input Junction Box. Check the
--.. phase rotation at the box. Phase rota-
tion should be A. B, C. as indicated.

Verify that all internal cooling fans are -34. Check and record the input htages at
the junction box:
operating.
- .-
.~ . Volts, phase A to phase B =
Depress the local EMERGENCY -
POWER OFF switch and verify system Volts, phase B to phase C =
shutdown. Turn the unit back on. .. ~
. .L .. . . ..
Volts, phase C to phase A =
. . . . , -_.a . __UP
-29. '
Repeat step 28 for each remote EMER-
-35. . ."2+
--GENCY POWER OFF switch with which - Turn OFF and lockout buil-wer
the system is equipped. to the Bypass Input Junction Box:
.L -- --
-36. Replace the junction box-cover.
-37. Verify proper bypass power connections
to unit, including neuual and equipment
Steps 30 through 44 apply to the op- grounding conductor.
tional Bypass Switch. If the system is
not equipped with a bypass switch. -38. Turn ON the building power to the by-
proceed directly to Step 45. pass input.
<.,
-39. Check the phase rotation at the line side
of the Bypass lnput Breaker. Phase ro-
-30. Turn off and lock out building power to
tation should be A. B, C, left-to-right.
the bypass input.

lnetallatlon Manual

- -
bLiebert
Start - Up Cont.
-40. Check and record the Input voltages at
the line slde (top) of the bypass Input
breaker:
volts. phase A to phase B =
volts. phase B to phase C =
Volts, phase C to phase A =
(NOTE THAT THE NOMINAL
VOLTAGE LEVEL O F THE BYPASS
INPUT MUST BE T H E SAME AS
T H E RATED NOMINAL OUTPUT
LEVEL O F THE DATAWAVE-
THERE IS NO STEP-DOWN OF
T H E BYPASS VOLTAGE INSIDE
T H E UNIT. )
-41. Turn ON the bypass input breaker.
Check the phase rotation at the line side
terminals of the output breaker(s). The
rotation should be A, B, C, left-to right.
-42. Check and record the voltages at the
line - side terminals of the output circuit
breaker:
Volts. phase A to phase B =
Volts, phase B to phase C =
Monitoring System Check Out
-46. BASIC INDICATORS
(Main Input):
a. With the bypass switch in NORMAL
position, nun the building power to the
main input ON, then turn the main in-
put breaker ON.
b. Check that the local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF button is illuminated and
that the second indicator (TRANS-
FORMER OVERTEMP or ALARM
PRESENT) is off.
c. Return all breakers to OFF.
Installation Manuel
Computer
Support
Systems
Volts, phase C to phase A =
Volts. phase A to neutral =
Volts, phase B to neutral =
Volts, phase C to neutral =
These voltages should not differ sig-
nificantly from those recorded in Step
26. If there is more than f 3% vari-
ation, turn OFF the building power to
the unit, then verify proper tap set-
tings of the bypass transformer tor
the building distribution transformer if
there is no bypass transformer).
Then repeat Steps 38 through 42.
-43. Depress the local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF switch and verify system
shutdown via Reserve Input Breaker
trip. Turn the unit back on.
-44. Repeat step 43 for each remote EMER-
GENCY POWER OFF switch with which
. --
the svstem is eauimed.
-45. T u n off all breakers and return Bypass
switch to "NORMAL" position.
-47. BASIC INDICATORS
(With Bypass Option):
a . W h the bypass switch in AUXIL-
IARY position. turn the building input
power ON. then turn the bypass input
breaker ON.
b. Check that the local EMERGENCY
POWER OFF button is illuminated and
that the second indicator (TRANS-
FORMER OVERTEMP or ALARM
PRESENT) is off. ( If 'UNIT IN BY-
PASS MODE" is alarmed, the
ALARM PRESENT indicator should
be ON.)
c. Return all breakers to OFF and by-
pass switch to the normal position.
Datawave System, 50-150 kVA
 c;omputer

bLiebert Support
Systems

Monitorino Svstern Check Out Cont.

48. MANUAL RESTART CHECK. (if used), or in the low voltage control
If unit is equipped with Manual Restan: section inside unit.
b. Turn the unit ON. Measure and re-
a. Turn on building power to the Main cord the control voltage on terminals 1
input. Turn Main Input breaker ON. (+) and 3 (corn).
b. Turn off all building power to unit.
c. Observe that Main Input breaker c. Control voltage =
automatically trips open upon power (Voltage should be between 20 and 26
loss.
. , Vdc.) ..
d. Restore main input building power
and return Main Input breaker to ON. -52. CUSTOMER ALARMS:
.. If customer alarms are provided:
-49. LOCAL VCMP:
If unit is equipped with local Volt-Cur- a. Turn the unit ON and simulate alarm
rent Monitor Panel. turn the unit ON, operation by jumpering the appropriate
and check to ensure that the voltage val- low voltage control terminals. (Refer to
ues indicated by the Monitor Panel cor- the control wiring instauation drawing
respond to the voltage values measured furnished with the unit.)
at the line side of the output circuit b. Verify correct alann annunciation by
breaker. . . the VCMP andlor by the Siternaster
console.
-50. SITEMASTER:
If the unit is connected to a Sitemaster
system: -53. SERVICE TERMINAL: --
If a Service Terminal is furnished with
- ... a. Turnurnthe
uni~%d_Sitemastef c?-le
ON. Verify monitor system operation as
. .
. -
- -.--.-_the system: .. .- ~..-. -
>. k ~4
described in . the
. , Sitemaster Owner's , a. Turn the unit ON and connect the
Manual. Service Terminal to the service terminal
b,.,Check to ensure that the voltage val- port of the unit. 9es.1 -a-
--.-.-.--.
ues indicated by the Sitemaster corre- b. Refer to the Service Temunal Opera-
spond to the input and output voltage tor's Manual and venfy correct opera-
va!ues measured previously. tion of the Service Terminal.
. ,. c. Using the Diagnostic function of the
-5 1. CONTROL VOLTAGE: Service Terminal (described in the Serv-
a. Obtain access to the low voltage ter- ----,-ice Terminal Operator's ManualLverify
minals in the Low Voltage Junction Box correct IGM operation.

Installation Manual Datawave System,

., ...
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Equipment Connection Check Out (for Units with Distribution Cables)

(also phase rotation, if a 3-phase cir-

cuit) at the receptacle or cable end.

All loads should b e disconnected or

turned off before proceeding with the -56.
following steps.
For units with output distribution ca-
bles, be sure that there are NO output
receptacles connected to load equip- -57.
ment plugs, and that the receptacles
are not in contact with foreign ob-
jects.
Pay special attention t o those output
cables intended for direct-wiring
-58.
connection; the exposed conductor
e n d s of these cables must not b e in
contact with e a c h other or with any -59.
foreign objects.
-54. With Bypass switch in the NORMAL po-
sition, turn on main input power to unit,
then nun on the panelboard mam out-
put breaker(s) . -60.
-55. Individually turn on each branch circuit
breaker and check the output voltage -61.
Turn OFF all branch circuit breakers
and the panelboard main output circuit
breaker($.
Connect the load equipment per equip-
ment manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations.
Turn on the panelboard main output
breaker(s).
Turn on branch circuit breakers to the
load equipment.
Observe the power-up sequence rec-
ommended by the equipment manu-
facturer.
Verify that all load equipment operates
properly.
Replace all exterior panels.

After Inspection and Start-up procedure is complete, the completed Start-up & In-
spection form furnished with the unit should be signed and returned to:
Liebert Corporation
Customer Service Department
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O. Box 29186 WARRANTY IS NOT 1N EFFECT UN-
Columbus. Ohio 43229 LESS INSPECTION AND START-UP
FORM IS RECEIVED BY THE FAC-
TORY.

-.

Installation Manual Datawave System. 50-150 kVA

 bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

MAINTENANCE
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (REPAIR)
Even the most reliable equlpment may lall. Llebert Customer Service and Support (CS&S) Is at your
service to assure fast repair o l your Datawave and mlnlmum downtlme of your lnstallatlon.

..
......
.. .=- . :. .!* i&$#ii#
'T
+,,

Standard electr& k o u b ~ e s h o o t i nprocedures ~ , Pepairs related to the Datawave conditioning

should be used to isolate problems in the elements . .should be referred to Eebert
...
Datawave power conditioner. If there are ',:.:rrfCSCS&S.. :?A*'
questfonr, don't hesitate to contact Liebert ;.:. .*,.! -: a. .*"
;. .Y

csu. . . i--" ~. , pTo contact Llebert CS&S f& in

pair service. call 1-800-LIEBE
Repair o r replacement of standard items, such &.. *... ~.y.Y:>-i??. z..; $ ~
as circuit breakers and indicator lights can be ,,.. ,. .*q .,e:
. ,-<&, , ,*
either handled by qualified electricians or re- .:&.:$$
ferred to Liebett CS&S. Refer k & i h q @ % g -.,?.. ..:
Datawave Parts Manual. . ".., -. j
.. . . .
.-- . . +-, ..-, ..~ ~.;.?: .~.l ia~,,. ~ ; . & + ~ ,w.,,-$. , ,, ,L
?.,

........:.: -x i . .
Z::%,P
...... . . . . ..-.
. &;:*, , ...., .<;,. . ...... :* .,. . . i33'

=<
~

,t.i:: ... 2.- /ntri';*;;r"-. ,.& - -

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (INSPECTION & CLEANING) '

Alr clrculatlon thmugKthe Datswave oablnet rna'oause dust to awi1rnul8te on Internal com~poneritm:
..Pa?-
~leanlngshould be done am neoemsary during e b t r ~ e sln8peotlon8.
l :*,??- f i .,;w.+.
~
nded to enmurm
\
' ,

ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL S H O U ~ PERFORM MAINTENANCE $?&%$.:,':

.,
ON THE DATAWAVE SYSTEM. ALL VOLTAGE SOURCES TO THE
DATAWAVE MUST BE DISCONNECTED BEFORE INSPECTING OR .- ..
CLEANING WITHIN THE. CABINET.
.....> ..*a5 ' '

Inspection Schedule - Ventilation openings and grilles should be

inspected and cleaned every six months.
b It is difficult to establish a schedule for
periodic cleanings since conditions vary from A complete inspection and operational
-

.
site to site. Inspections after the first, 2 4 . . , ?&eckout should be performed annually. This

.
hours, 30 days and 6 months of operation . is best done by performing the inspection and
:i-
should help determine a pattern for the in- start-up procedure as detailed in Section 3.
spection schedule. ...
% Lieben customer service and support of-
Elecuical connections and component fers a complete range of preventive mainte-
mountings should be inspected after the first nance services. These include thorough
24 hours. 30 days. and 6 months of opera- . .:. , : equipment performance checks, and calibra-
tion. Inspections should be conducted annu- tion of electronics. Contact Liebert customer
; - .,ac........
.ii,.+-.u-..
service and support for details. . .
(-', ally thereafter. - .
8
.4..,... . ,.?, -,I ;=&',
Ll
/'
I
' .i
.-.,,. .
-;, ,:-. .
.. - ..* ....
Installation Manual .- 35 - Datawave Systarn, 50-150....kVA
A World Leader in Computer Support Systems Liebert Corporar~ondes~gns.
Environmental Control
~ ~ manufactures and markets
Power Protection complete systems tor
mprovement ot computer
Site MonitoringiControl ~ptImeana performance
The result IS improved
buslness otwaaons.
increased broauct~v~i~
and hlgher return on tne
CQmPUterinvestment.
Liebert Systems provide
dependable environmental
control and electrical power
protection, combined with
centralized monitoring and
control. This approach
represents a single-source,
integrated computer support
network.
Based on two decades of
experience and over 80,000
installations woridwide,
Uebert is cnmmitted to
offering the highest Gali
products and services for
applications requiring
computer support.

. . . .. .
World Hemdaumrterw
...
Liebert Corporation
10.50 Dearborn D r ~ eP.O.
. Box 29186
Columbus. Ohio 43229 . is. t .. .
., , .. 614-888-0246
Telex 246-655 LIEBERT WOGN
 DATAWAVE PLUS FIELD SERVICE
START-UP PROCEDURE
(Revised 8 / 4 / 8 8 )

1 . ) Verify that a l l system power w i r i n g i s c o r r e c t p e r s u b m i t t a l

drawings.'

2.) V e r i f y t h a t a l l system c o n t r o l w i r i n g i s c o r r e c t per

subrni t t a l d r a w i n g s .

3 . ) V e r i f y t h a t phase r o t a t i o n i s c o r r e c t a t t h e i n p u t t o t h e DW+ and

t h e maintenance bypass c a b i n e t . T h i s s h o u l d be done w i t h an
o s c i l l o s c o p e t o ensure t h a t t h e phases ( l e f t t o r i g h t ) read fi, B ,
C, o r t h e u n i t w i l l n o t s t a r t .

4.) Remov'e t h e f o l l o w i n g Mate-N-Lock p l u g connectors:

a ) F-4 on t h e M o n i t o r Board
b ) P - l on t h e Buck R e g u l a t o r Board
c ) P-2 on t h e L i e b e r t I n v e r t e r D r i v e r Board
NOTE: The L i e b e r t I n v e r t e r D r i v e r Board o n l y appears on
15Kva - 50Kva u n i t s .

d ) ~ e m d v epower s u p p l y c o n n e c t o r s on t h e M i t s u b i s h i base
d r i v e r board.

r,
L
5. ) Remove t h e f o l l o w i n g f u s e s from t h e Datawave P l u s :

a) A l l c o n t r o l fuses.
NOTE: These f u s e s a r e n o t numbered f r o m t h e f a c t o r y , and
s h o u l d b e numbered p r i o r t o t h e i r removal, o r p l a c e
them i n o r d e r as t h e y a r e removed.
b ) F-1 and F-2 i n t h e Buck R e g u l a t o r assembly.

6 . ) Use an ohmmeter check t h e r e s i s t a n c e a c r o s s t h e l i n e s i d e o f t h e

MICB (CB-1) f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s :

a ) A-B : " INFINITE

b ) A-C :-, INF,INITE
C ) B-C : " INFINITE

7.) Use an ohmmeter t o check t h e r e s i s t a n c e a c r o s s t h e l o a d s i d e of

t h e MICB (CB-1) for t h e f o l l o w i n g values:

a) A-B : ' 1ZK-ohms

b ) A-C : " 12K-ohms
C) B-C : " IZK-ohms

8.) V e r i f y t h a t t h e system c o n f i g u r a t i o n s w i t c h (Sw-5) on t h e M o n i t o r

Board has been s e t t o t h e p r o p e r Kva and V o l t a g e l e v e l s . A 1 5 0
v e r i f y t h a t t h e system c o n f i g u r a t i o n s w i t c h l o c a t e d on t h e l o w e r
r i g h t s i d e o f t h e C o n t r o l Board i s s e t f o r t h e p r o p e r Kva and
voltage levels.
NOTE: T h i s s w i t c h s h o u l d b e s e t t o a p p r o p r i a t e l e v e l s on
15-50Kva u n i t s o n l y . On 75-150Kva u n i t s i t s h o u l d be
s e t no h i g h e r t h a n 50Kva o r damage t o t h e chopper
module w l l l occur.
 9.) V e r i f y t h a t s w i t c h 6 on t h e M o n i t o r Hoard h a s b e e n s e t t o t h e
proper frequency l e v e l .

10.) I n s t a l l c o n t r o l f u s e s F1, F2, F 1 8 , & F19, and a p p l y power t o t h e

i n p u t b r e a k e r of t h e Datawave P l u s . A t t h i s p o i n t t h e r e i s l o g i c
power a p p l i e d t o t h e p r i n t e d c i r c u i t b o a r d s , b u t n o d i s p l a y w i l l
b e p r e s e n t b e c a u s e p l u g c o n n e c t o r P-4 on t h e M o n i t o r Board was
removed i n s t e p 4.

11. ) Check f o r a p p r o x i m a t e l y 1ZEVac a c r o s s MOV-1 (w403 & 4 0 4 ) . T h i s

s i g n a l comes f r o m t h e l i n e s i d e o f t h e MICB (CB-1).

12.) Check f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g v o l t a g e l e v e l s a t t h e f e m a l e s i d e of
p l u g c o n n e c t o r P-4 o n t h e M o n i t o r B o a r d ( u n p l u g g e d f r o m s t e p 4 ) :

POSITIVE NEGATIVE
a) P-4.1 - P-4.2 +24Vdc
b)P-4.3 - F-4.5 +12Vdc
c)P-4.4 - P-4.5 -1ZVdc
d)P-4.7 - P-4.5 +5.2Vdc

13.) Remove power t o t h e i n p u t b r e a k e r of t h e DW+ a n d r e c o n n e c t P-4

t o t h e Monitor Board.

14.) Apply power t o t h e DW+ and p r e s s t h e g r e e n "ON" b u t t o n l o c a t e d o n

t h e f r o n t p a n e l d i s p l a y . T h i s would n o r m a l l y g a t e o n t h e s t a t i c
s w i t c h . However, t h e r i b b o n c a b l e f r o m t h e C o n t r e l Board t o t h e
P u l s e T r a n s f o r m e r B o a r d (which p r o v i d e s g a t e p u l s e s t o t h e s t a t i c
s w i t c h S C R ' s ) is d i s c o n n e c t e d f o r s h i p m e n t o f t h e u n i t .

15.) Check f o r g a t e d r i v e s t o t h e P u l s e T r a n s f o r m e r B o a r d w i t h an
o s c i l l o s c o p e on t h e r i g h t s i d e of RbB-73. T h e s e r e s i s t o r s a r e
l o c a t e d on t h e l e f t - t o p s i d e of t h e C o n t r o l Board. A s q u a r e wave
of a p p r o x i m a t e l y 15-24Khz s h o u l d b e p r e s e n t .

16.) On t h e C o n t r o l B o a r d , measure f o r f r e q u e n c y a t U-8.7 t o ground

(R-259). U s e RA-2 t o a d j u s t t h i s v a l u e t o 11520 Hz (+/- ZHz).

17.) C l o s e CB-1. On t h e C o n t r o l Board, m e a s u r e U-17.14 t o g r o u n d

( R - 2 3 9 ) f o r D.C. v o l t a g e . U s e RA-1 t o a d j u s t t h i s v a l u e t o
a p p r o x i m a t e l y 1EmV. A t t h i s p o i n t t h e " I n v e r t e r N o t S y n c " l i g h t
s h o u l d n o t be i l l u m i n a t e d .

18.) Remove a l l power t o t h e DM+. P l u g i n t h e r i b b o n c a b l e c o n n e c t i n g

t h e C o n t r o l Board t o t h e P u l s e Transformer Board, and r e - i n s t a l l
c o n t r o l f u s e s F 3 , F 4 , & F5.
NOTE: F u s e F5 i s o n l y u s e d o n DPA015, DPA020, DPA03Gl
a n d DPAE50.

19.) Apply power t o t h e DM+, c l o s e t h e MICB (CB-l), a n d p r e s s t h e

g r e e n "ON" b u t t o n o n t h e f r o n t p a n e l d i s p l a y . T h i s w i l l a l l o w t h e
P u l s e Transformer Board t o p r o v i d e g a t e d r i v e s t o t h e s t a t i c
s w i t c h SCR's.
 20.) Check f o r approximately 120Vac a c r o s s MOV-2 ( w 4 0 8 h ~ 4 1 5 ) .T h l s
\ s l g n a l comes f r o m t h e l o a d s l d e o f t h e s t a t l c s w i t c h .

21.) D.C. R A I L SET POINT O N THE CONTROL BOARD

P l a c e c h a n n e l o n e o f t h e s c o p e o n U49 p i n s 4 , 6 , % 8. ( T h e s i g n a l
o b s e r v e d w i l l be a s a w t o o t h r e f e r e n c e of u t i l i t y . ) Channel one
s h o u l d b e l e f t on t h e p i n w i t h t h e h i g h e s t p e a k s a w t o o t h . N e x t
p l a c e c h a n n e l t w o o f t h e s c o p e o n U 4 9 p i n s 5 , 7 , S: 9. ( T h e s i g n a l
observed w i l l b e a D.C. v a l u e used as a " r a i l " set p o i n t i n
r e f e r e n c e t o t h e s i g n a l o b s e r v e d on c h a n n e l o n e . P i n 5
c o r r e s p o n d s t o p i n 4 , p i n 6 t o p i n 7, and p i n 8 t o p i n 9 . ) .
Channel two s h o u l d b e p l a c e d on t h e p i n c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e
s i g n a l o b s e r v e d o n c h a n n e l o n e . i . : I f c h a n n e l o n e i s on p i n
4 , p l a c e c h a n n e l t w o o n p i n 5 , e t c . ) . U s e R-42 t o a d j u s t t h e D . C .
r a i l SO t h a t i t i s a minimum o f 0.4 v o l t s a b o v e t h e p e a k o f t h e
sawtooth observed on channel one

NOTE: I f t h e p e a k s on c h a n n e l o n e are n o t s t a b l e , t h i s is a
s i g n o f a s o f t u t i l i t y s o u r c e . T h e c o n t r o l r a i l may
need t o b e set h i g h e r t h a n 0 . 4 v o l t s . A f t e r s e t t i n g
t h e r a i l s i m u l a t e a n o u t a g e b y o p e n i n g t h e power f e e d
t o t h e Datawave P l u s t o e n s u r e t h a t t h e u n i t w i l l
d e t e c t a l o s s a f u t i l i t y . Be aware t h a t i f t h e r a i l
is s e t t o o h i g h , t h e u n i t may n o t d e t e c t a n o p e n l i n e
c o n d i t i o n and w i l l n o t t r a n s f e r t o i n v e r t e r . A f t e r
s e t t i n g t h e rail, always v e r i f y t h a t t h e u n i t w i l l
t r a n s f e r o n EVERY s i m u l a t e d o u t a g e

SITES WITH GENERATORS

If t h e s i t e h a s a g e n e r a t o r , t h e c o n t r o l r a i l must b e
set w h i l e t h e u n i t is r u n n i n g o n g e n e r a t o r . G e n e r a t o r s
are, i n g e n e r a l , s o f t s o u r c e s t h e r e f o r e t h e r a i l w i l l
be h i g h e r on t h e g e n e r a t o r t h a n on u t i l i t y . A f t e r
s e t t i n g t h e r a i l on t h e g e n e r a t o r , r e - t r a n s f e r t h e
u n i t t o u t i l i t y and s i m u l a t e a u t i l i t y o u t a g e t o
v e r i f y t h a t t h e u n i t w i l l d e t e c t a n open l i n e condi-
tion.

23.) Remove a l l power t o t h e DW+ a n d i n s t a l l f a n f u s e s F6-F8 a n d p l u g

c o n n e c t o r P-2 o n t h e L i e b e r t D r i v e r B o a r d .
NOTE: The L i e b e r t d r i v e r B o a r d is o n l y f o u n d o n 15-50Kva
units.

24.) A p p l y p o w e r t o t h e DW+, c l o s e t h e MICE ( C B - I ) , a n d p r e s s t h e "ON"

b u t t o n . V e r i f y a l l power s u p p l y s i g n a l s a t t h e B a s e D r i v e r Board
( l o c a t e d i n t h e i n v e r t e r i t s e l f ) are as f o l l o w s :
a ) M o d e l s DPC015-030 CONNECTORS 1-8 = 6 V
b ) M o d e l s DPA015-050 CONNECTORS 1-6 = 1 2 V
C ) Model s D P A 0 7 5 - I 5 0 PINS 4-3 = 7 V
PINS 4-2 = 14V
PINS 4-1 = 2 8 V
25.1 Remove a l l power t o t h e DW+ and reconnect the power supply
connectors t o the Base D r i v e r Board. I n s t a l l c o n t r o l fuses
F15-17.

@QIE: VERIFY THAT THESE CONNECTORS ARE I N THEIR PROPER

P O S I T I O N S OH SEVERE DAMAGE TO THE INVERTER WILL
OCCUR WHEN THE INVERTER DISCONNECT SWITCH I S CLOSED.
P9-N9Ix-UNQEE-BNY-CLECUM_SIBNC_ES~-EEhEI~-I~LS-SIEY-
26.) P o s i t i o n Sw-2, a r o t a r y s w i t c h l o c a t e d i n t h e upper l e f t hand
corner of t h e Monitor Board, t o show "D.C. I N V BUS" an t h e t h r e e
d i g i t d l s p l a y below t h e switch, o r connect a DVM d i r e c t l y t o the
i n v e r t e r bus t o begin m o n i t o r i n g t h e bus voltage.

27.1 ~ p p l ypower t o t h e DM+, c l o s e t h e MICB'(CB-1). and monitor t h e

bus v o l t a g e . Press t h e green "ON" b u t t o n on t h e f r o n t panel. T h i s
w i l l g a t e on t h e s t a t i c s w i t c h and immediately begin b u i l d i n g up
t h e v o l t a g e on t h e i n v e r t e r bus t o approximately 320Vdc ( f o r a
208V u n i t ) , o r 720Vdc ( f o r a 480V u n i t ) .

NgIg: THIS VOLTAGE BUILDS UP VERY RAPIDLY, SO BE PREPARED TO

ACTIVATE THE EPO BUTTON AT THIS POINT I F THE BUS
VOLTAGE BUILDS.UP BEYOND THE RATED LEVEL (+/-ZBV).

Also v e r i f y t h a t t h e L i e b e r t I n v e r t e r d r i v e r board has v a l t a g e

on i t fi.e.: t h e neon l i g h t should be f l a s h i n g . ) .

NO LOAD TEST
(Steps 28 and 29)

28.) Close t h e B a t t e r y and I n v e r t e r d i s c o n n e c t switches (CB-2 & CB-3,

r e s p e c t i v e l y ) . On t h e Monitor Board, p l a c e Sw-3 i n t h e "TEST"
p a s i t i o n mamentarily and then r e t u r n i t t o t h e "MANUAL RESTART"
p o s i t i o n . The u n i t w i l l t r a n s f e r t o i n v e r t e r and then begin ramp-
up f o r r e - t r a n s f e r t o s t a t i c s w i t c h .

29.) S i m u l a t e power f a i l u r e s by o p e n i n g / c l o s i n g t h e MICB (CB-1) i n

t h e DW+, t h e main i n p u t i n t h e maintenance bypass cabinet (CB-6).
and t h e main i n p u t t o t h e bypass c a b i n e t ( t h e u t i l i t y disconnect
t o t h e system). Each " f a i l u r e " s h w l d r e s u l t i n a t r a n s f e r t o
i n v e r t e r and r e - t r a n s f e r back t o u t i l i t y .

30.) Remove a l l power t o t h e DW+, WRIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES,

r e - i n s t a l l c o n t r o l fuses F12-F14, F1 & FZ i n t h e Buck Regulator
Assembly, and p l u g connector P-1 on t h e Buck Regulator Board.

31.) Apply power t o t h e DW+, c l o s e t h e MICB (CB-I), press t h e "ON"

b u t t o n , c l o s e t h e b a t t e r y d i s c o n n e c t s w i t c h (CB-21, and c l o s e
t h e i n v e r t e r disconnect s w i t c h (CB-3). Approximately 10-15
seconds a f t e r c l o s i n g CB-3 a r e l a y should a c t i v a t e i n t h e Buck
Regulator Assembiy which w i l l a l l o w f o r charging of t h e b a t t e r i e s .
T h i s s h o u l d be v e r i f i e d by o b s e r v i n g t h a t t h e b a t t e r y v o l t a g e an
 t h e f r o n t p a n e l d i s p l a y i n c r e a s e s a f t e r t h e r e l a y becomes a c t l v a t -
/.~
, , e d , o r b y p l a c i n g a n o s c i l l o s c o p e a c r o s s t h e Buck R e g u l a t o r C h o k e
( ~ 5 2 6% ~ 5 2 7 )t o o b s e r v e a s i g n a l s i m i l a r t o a s q u a r e wave (this.
w o u l d i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e c h o p p e r m o d u l e i n t h e Buck R e g u l a t o r i s
t u r n i n g on and o f f , as d e s i g n e d ) .

3 2 . ) T h e u n i t i s now r e a d y t o a s s u m e t h e l o a d . To c o r n p l ' e t e t h i s ,
perform t h e following steps:

a ) Open t h e i n v e r t e r d i s c o n n e c t s w i t c h . T h i s i s o l a t e s the
battery/inverter s t r i n g f r o m t h e r e s t of t h e system.

b ) V e r i f y t h a t t h e MICB i n t h e D a t a w a v e i s c l o s e d .
uijgLgx: NEVER a t t e m p t t o c l o s e t h e MICB i n t h e D a t a w a v e
w i t h t h e b a t t e r y / i n v e r t e r b r e a k e r s i n t h e DW+
c l o s e d . The i n r u s h c u r r e n t i n t o t h e Datawave w i l l
b e r e f l e c t e d i n t o t h e DW+ i n v e r t e r a n d c o u l d c a u s e
s e v e r e damage t a t h e i n v e r t e r .

c ) C l o s e t h e main o u t p u t b r e a k e r i n t h e m a i n t e n a n c e b y p a s s
c a b i n e t (CB-7).

d ) Verify t h a t t h e maintenance bypass breaker (CB-8) is o p e n .

----
*+NOTE++: NEVER LEAVE T H I S BREAKER CLOSED WHEN THE SYSTEM
---------------
I S UPS CAPABLE. T h i s would p r o v i d e a p a t h f o r
b a c k f e e d i n g u t i l i t y when a n y t r a n s f e r i s
a t t e m p t e d , and w i l l s e v e r e l y damage t h e i n v e r t e r .

e ) C l o s e t h e i n v e r t e r d i s c o n n e c t s w i t c h , and a g a i n v e r i f y t h a t
u n i t begins charging.

THE SYSTEM I S NOW UPS CAPABLE.

,- Installation and Datawave Plus
Operation Manual
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Unit Data Sheet

Installation:

Serial Number:

Date Installed:

NOTE: FLA = Full Load Amps OPD = Overlosld Protection Device

Battery System:
Back-Up Time: for kW load
Maintenance Bypass: -amp, Model
Remote Emergency Power Off Stations with -ft cable.
Floor Pedestals, Height = in.
Spare Parts Kit - Level
Remarks:

Installation and Operation M a n u a l Datawave Plus System

- 2 -
 bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

i ‘ CONTENTS
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................... 5
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION ............................................. 5
UNPACKING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
HANDLING CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LOCATION CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................... 8

MAINTENANCE BYPASS INSTALLATION ...................................... 10

FLOOR PEDESTAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
POWER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS WITH MAINTENANCE BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS WITHOUT MAINTENANCE BYPASS ............................. 13

SYSTEM GROUNDING .......................................................

CONTROL WIRING CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERALPROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIAL NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ...........................................................

OPERATING STATUS INDICATORS and CONTROLS .............................
INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
METERS
MONITOR BOARD CONTROLS ............................................................
INITIAL SYSTEM START-UP .................................................
SYSTEM OPERATION .......................................................
EMERGENCY SYSTEM TURN-OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM RECOVERY (RESTART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NORMAL SYSTEM TURN-OFF ............................................................
SYSTEM TURN-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE BYPASS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring From Normal To Maintenance Bypass Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring From Maintenance Bypass To Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
....
PROBLEM SOLVING and MAINTENANCE ......................................
SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATORS and CONTROLS .............................................
Alarmlndioators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InternalControls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................................

FIGURES
Figure 1. Typical Cabinet Data. Datawave Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 2 . Typical Cabinet Data. Maintenance Bypass Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 3 . Recommended Minimum Service and Ventilation Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 4 . Recommended Product Line-Ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 5 . Floor Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 6. Electrical Connections With Maintenance Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 7 . Electrical Connections Without Maintenance Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 8 . Simplified Grounding Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 9 . Control Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 10. Datawave Plus Monitor Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 11. Typical Internal Indicators and Controls Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

...
[ Table 1. Suggested Minimum Wire
TABLE
Size Data
...................................... 14

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

.3 .
kh Liebert Computer
Support
Systems

rYPlCAL GENERAL ARRANGEMENT, DATAWAVE PLUS SYSTEM

" 3 - P ~ A S E ,3- OR 4-WIRE

PLUS GROUND

' BATTERY
POWER PACK 94
WITH INTERNAL
BATTERY DISCONNECT
SWITCH /

3-BREAKER
MAINTENANCE
BYPASS SWITCH
(RECOMMENDED OPTION)

Installation and Operation M a n u a l

- A - Datawave Plus System
 bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

,
,\ ' Installation Instructions
for the
DATAWAVE PLUS
Po'wer Outage Protection System

UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

The installer of the Datawave Plus should perform the following steps to assure a quality installation. The
entire INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Section of this Manual should be read before starting installa-
tion.

Unpacking And Preliminary Inspection Handling Considerations

1. Inspect the shipping crate(s) for damage or
signs of mishandling before unpacking the
unit (s) .
2. Open the shipping crates by carefully re-
f
\% moving the sides, ends, and top. (Use care to
avoid puncturing the container with sharp ob-
jects that would damage the contents.)
3. Remove the packing and vapor barriers
and inspect the equipment for any obvious
shipping damages.
Complete internal inspection should
b e made after equipment positioning
and prior to electrical hookup.
4. If any damage as a result of shipping is
observed, immediately file a claim with the
shipping agency and forward a copy of this
claim to:
Liebert Corporation
Customer Service Department
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O. Box 29186
Columbus, Ohio 43229
The Datawave Plus is furnished with a heavy-duty
welded steel base. This base allows handling by
fork-lift equipment, whether or not the unit is
bolted to its shipping pallet.
Check the size and weight - Refer to the cabinet
submittal information furnished for the unit.
Typical size and weight information is shown
in Figures 1 and 2 .
-
Plan the route The route that the unit and bat-
tery pack will follow to their installation area
should be planned to ensure that all passages
are large enough to accommodate the units,
and that the floors will support the weight.
(i.e. Are the doorways, elevators, ramps, etc.
adequate? Are there any non-negotiable cor-
ners or offsets in the hallways?)
Move with care - To prevent damage while mov-
ing the units, the exterior side panels can be
removed. Remember to replace them before
the units are in their final installed position.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 5 -
k Liebert Computer
Support
Systems

CONDUIT
TERMINATION
AREAFORTOP
CABLE ENTRY
(15-50kVA)
--
TOP
t
10.5

CONDUIT
TERMINATION
AREAFORTOP
CABLE ENTRY
(75-150kVA)

,
MONITORING
BEZEL

FRONT

CONDUIT
TERMINATION
AREA FOR
BOTTOM
CABLE ENTRY UNIT DATA
HEAT DIMENSIONS
WEIGHT DISSIPATION In (mm)
22.0 N A AT
FULL-LOAD

11
Ib kg [BTU/HR) A B C
SOCKET FOR
FLOOR
PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION - 15
20
30
50
1000 454
1000 454
1000 454
1200 545
1 500
2:100
3,100
5 200
32 813
I1 I
32 813
32 813
32{813j
30 762
30 762
30 762
30[762]
I I
70 1778
70 1778
70 1778
76[1930]
75 1400 635 7:900 38 965 36 914 76 1930
100 1600 726 10 500 381965 361914 76 1930
125
150 1800 817 13'100 4 4 [ l l l d j 4 2 [ 1 0 6 ~ ] 76(1930I
2000 907 15:800 44 1118 42 1067 76 1930

Figure 1. Typical Cabinet Data, Datawave Plus.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 6 -
 bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

ONE-LINE DIAGRAM

OUTPUT
FEEDER

DATAWAVE DATAWAVE
PLUS PLUS
INPUT FEEDER OUTPUT FEEDER

FRONT
~

(w u t front panels)

4-
TYPICAL
"1
TOP AND
BOTTOM
AREAS
FRONT'
AND
REAR
LEITH~R
IDE)
FOR
BOLTING
FRAMES
TDGETHEI
(Exact
Vertical
lmatlons
are not
~rltlcal.
see
SeCtlon
A-A for
detall. 1
\
F
A

- 32.0
(613)
X 73 mm long)

114-20 x 3 (76)
BOTTOM
DATAWAVE PLUS MBS
FRAME SECTION A-A FRAME
(typical 4 places)
RECOMMENDED
CONDUIT
TERMINATION
AREA FOR UNIT DATA
BOTTOM
CABLE ENTRY HEIGHT "H" WEIGHT LUG MAX
MODEL NO. &YzG In (mm) Ib (kg1 WIRE SIZES
SOCKET FOR
FLOOR 100 70 I1781 200 (901 210
PEDESTAL MBSOBFB
INSTALLATION MBSOEFA 100 76 (1931 200 (90) 210
(Typ 4 corners1 MBSOBMA 225 76 (193) 200 (90) 300 MCM
MBSOBSA 400 76 (193) 250 (115) 2-250 MCM
MBSOSVA 600 76 (193) 250 (115) 2-350 MCM

/-
F i g u r e 2. Typical Cabinet Data, Maintenance Bypass Switch.
-,

and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

Installation - 7 -
kh Liebert Computer
Support
Systems

Location Considerations

Cable lengths - The Datawave Plus should be tems greater than 120 cells, the maximum
located next to the battery system and close battery voltage on any single rack should be
(within 100 feet (30 meters)) to the Data- limited to 250 Vdc in accordance wlth
wave magnetic synthesizer which it is supply- NEC 480-6.
ing. The shorter the runs of power cables to
the battery system and synthesizer the better.
Battery Disconnect switch (see Figure 4) -
The Datawave Plus battery disconnect switch
(See the Power Connections section for addi-
should be located as close to the battery sys-
tional considerations.)
tem as possible (within 10 feet (3 meters)).
Logical equipment arrangement and allow-
ances for future equipment additions or rear-
rangements must also be considered in deter-
mining the optimum location.
The Liebert Battery Disconnect is re-
Environment - The Datawave Plus is designed quired for correct system operation.
S e e Control Wiring section.
for operation in ambient temperatures of O°C
to 40 " C (32°F to 104OF) with a relative hu-
.
midity of 0% to 9 5% (noncondensing) When
considering the room ambient temperatures,
be sure to include the heat output of the
Datawave Plus during normal operation. Full-
load heat outputs for the Datawave Plus are
shown in Figure 1.
Audible noise - The Datawave Plus audible
noise level is less than 55 dBA, which allows
its placement within the computer room, if
desired.
Service clearances (see Figure 3) -Service
clearance is needed only at the front of the
unit. In accordance mth the National Elec-
trical Code (Article 110-16), 42 inches
(1067 rnm) minimum service clearance
should be provided. 18 inches (457 mm)
clearance above the unit is recommended for
cooling air flow.
Stationary batteries - When the Datawave Plus
is used with stationary (non-sealed) lead-acid
batteries, the battery system must be installed
according to local building codes. These
codes may include several special require-
ments, such as seismic mounting, ventilation, Figure 3. Recommended Minimum Service
eyewash stations, and drains. For battery sys- and Ventilation Clearances.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 8 -
 bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

Recommended Product Line-Up

for 15-30 kVA Systems,
Using Liebert Battery Power Pack (BPP)
and Maintenance Bypass Cabinets.*

POWER PACK
Wlth Internal
Battery Disconnect
Switch

MAINTENANCE
BYPASS SWITCH

AC OUTPUT

Recommended Product Line-Up

for 50-150 kVA Systems,
Using Liebert Battery Disconnect
and Battey Cabinet, and
Maintenance Bypass Cabinets.*

DATAWAVE
PLUS

MAINTENANCE
BYPASS SWITCH
BATTERY
DISCONNECT
SWITCH BATTERY
CABINET

When the cabinet heights of the Datawave Plus, Maintenance Bypass Cabinet
and Battery Cabinets are the same, cabinet sidepanels can be removed and
cabinets bolted together to form a matching line-up as shown.

1,-
Figure 4. Recommended Product Line-Ups.
\

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 9 -
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

MAINTENANCE BYPASS INSTALLATION

The Maintenance Bypass option is normally installed as an added sidesection to the Datawave Flus. Al-
though it can be mounted on either side of the Datawave Plus, right-side mounting is recommended to
facilitate power cable interconnections. (See Figure 4.)
1. Determine which side of the Datawave
Plus that the Maintenance Bypass is to be
mounted on. Remove that side panel and its
If floor pedestals are used for the
mounting hardware' (lower panel hooks and main unit, two additional floor pedes-
upper fastener bracket). Put aside for later tals are required for the sidesection.
installation on the Maintenance Bypass en- S e e Floor Pedesfal Installation.
closure. 3. Install the side panel mounting hardware
(lower panel hooks and upper fastener
2. Align the Maintenance Bypass sidesection
bracket) on the sidesection enclosure.
with the Datawave Plus cabinet, and bolt
the two frames together using the bolts and 4 . Install the unit side panel on the sidesec-
spacers provided. (See Figure 2.) tion enclosure.

FLOOR PEDESTAL INSTALLATION

Floor pedestals are optional equipment intended to provide clearance for bottom cable entry without
relylng on a raised floor to support the unit. The pedestals are adjustable over a limited range (approxi-
mately 3Il2 inches) to allow leveling the unit and minor adjustments in the unit's installed height.
Datawave Plus and two for the outside cor-
ners of the Maintenance Bypass.
Floor pedestals are reverse-assembled
for shipping. Before installation, the Additional pedestals are required for the bat-
pedestals should be reassembled as tery cabinet(s) supplied with the system..
shown in Figure 5. When the pedestal
is properly assembled, the washer on top
of the welded nut provides a bearing
surface for the unit weight. THREADED SHAFT

1. Insert the pedestal threaded shaft into the WASHER

inside corner tubing of the cabinet base. WELOEDNUT

2. Adjust the pedestal height by turning the J A M NUT
welded nutlshaft assembly into or out of the
pedestal base as required.
PEDESTALBASE
3. Lock the height by tightening the jam nut
against the pedestal base.
9116in 14rnrn) DIA.
M O U N ~ I N GHOLES
The pedestal may be mounted to the floor by (4 EA.1
means of the four holes in the base.
If the Datawave Plus and Maintenance Bypass
cabinets a r e installed as separate units,
eight floor pedestals are required - four for
each cabinet.
If the cabinets are bolted together as one unit,
only six pedestals are required-four for the Figure 5 . Floor Pedestal.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- lo -
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

POWER CONNECTIONS

VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING HIGH-VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW-

VOLTAGE (CONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE DE-ENERGIZED AND LOCKED
OUT BEFORE INSTALLING CABLES OR MAKING ANY CONNECTIONS,
WHETHER IN THE MAINTENANCE BYPASS OR IN THE UNIT. I T IS
RECOMMENDED THAT ONLY QUALIFIED ELECTRICIANS INSTALL
CABLES OR MAKE ANY CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE UNIT.

The 3-phase power input to the Datawave Plus is
normally supplied directly from the service
entrance to minimize disturbances caused by
other loads in the building.
Correct phase rotation is required for
Datawave Plus operation. Care must
b e taken to ensure that A-B-C phase
rotation exists a t all Datawave Plus
input and output power connections.
When the Datawave Plus is used with an alter-
nate energy source, such as a diesel-genera-
tor, the generator should be specified with an
isochronous governor to ensure proper regu-
lation of the frequency. Typical computer
systems require the frequency to be main-
tained within & 0.5 Hz of nominal.
The input, output, and battery feeder circuits
should be sized in accordance with the NEC
and any local building codes to assure the
feeders' ability to safely carry the system full-
load current, including losses.
The input feeder conductors should be sized for
no more than 2% voltage drop. If operation
at under-voltage conditions for extended pe-
riods of time is desired, the input feeders
must be oversized.
The battery conductors should be sized for no
more than a 2.0-volt total cable drop at the
maximum battery discharge current.
The a c input and output feeders should be
three-phase, three- or four-wire-plus-safety-
ground to match the input feeder require-
ments of the Datawave magnetic synthesizer.
The d c feeder to the battery system should be
two-wire plus safety-ground.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 11 -

-.~~
~ ~~ ~ . ~ -
~~ ~-
bLiebert
Electrical Connections
With Maintenance Bypass
( See Flgure 6 1
System a c input / output connections are made
to the Maintenance Bypass sidesection. AC
interconnections are also required between
the Maintenance Bypass and the Datawave
Plus cabinets.
System dc connections are made to the Datawave
Plus cabinet from the battery disconnect
switch. When the Battery Disconnect or Bat-
tery Power Pack is the same height as the
Figure 6 . Electrical Connections With Maintenance Bypass.
Installation and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
Datawave Plus and is located as recom-
mended in Figure 4, the dc connections can
be routed as intra-cabinet wiring.
The Maintenance Bypass alarm contact may be
wired to the Datawave magnetic synthes~zer
Customer Alarm circuit to announce that the
Datawave Plus is in maintenance bypass
mode.
- 12 - Datawave Plus System
 k Liebert
(', Electrical Connections
Without Maintenance Bypass
( See Figure 7 1
AC input 1 output connections to the Datawave
Plus system are made directly to the Data-
wave Plus input and output terminals.
System d c connections are made to the Datawave
Plus cabinet from the battery disconnect
C Figure 7. Electrical Connections Without Maintenance Bypass.
Installation and Operation Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
switch. When the Battery Disconnect or Bat-
tery Power Pack is the same height as the
Datawave Plus and is located as recom-
mended in Figure 4, the dc connections can
be routed as intra-cabinet wiring.
- 13 - Datawave Plus System
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Table I. Suggested Minimum Wire Size Data.

I I AC INPUT I
I AC OUTPUT
- BATTERY

--1
Voltage kVA FLA OPD Wire Size FLA Wire Size Max Wire Size
(AWG) WWG) rmp!

208 15 44 60 . 81
20 59 80 107
30 86 125 156 0000
50 143 200 260 350 MCM

-
480 15 19 25 10 40
20 26 40 8 54
30 37 50 8 78
50 62 90 3 130
75 93 125 1 195 225 0000
100 124 175 00 120 00 260 350 MCM
125 155 225 0000 150 0000 325 (2)OUO'
150 186 250 250 MCM 160 250 MCM 390
-
* PARALLEL FEEDERS PER NEC 300-20 AND 310-4

NOTES
WIRE SIZES BASED ON NEC 1987 TABLE 310-16, USING 75 'C (167 "F) COPPER CONDUCTORS.
WIRE SIZES LISTED ARE THE MINIMUM SlZE RECOMMENDED. LARGER WIRE SlZE MAY BE
REQUIRED BECAUSE OF SUPPLY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SIZE. VOLTAGE DROP, OR
NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS IN A RACEWAY.

FLA = FULL LOAD AMPS OF THE DATAWAVE PLUS. BASED ON FULL kVA LOAD
ON THE DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER AT 0.9 LOAD POWER FACTOR
AND NOMINAL INPUT VOLTAGE.
OPD = OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICE (CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSE).
LOCATED INSIDE THE DATAWAVE PLUS.
Max Amps = MAXIMUM BATTERY CURRENT AT END-OF-DISCHARGE (1.60 VOLTS PER
CELL) AND FULL LOAD (0.9 POWER FACTOR).
BDS = CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSE SIZE IN THE ASSOCIATED LIEBERT
BATTERY POWER PACK (IF FURNISHED) OR BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 14 -
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

SYSTEM GROUNDING
The performance and safety of any power condi-
tioning system depends upon a proper ground in-
stallation (Figure 8 ) .
All power feeders must include equipment
grounding means as required by the NEC lo-
cal codes. ,A.~ insulated ground conductor is rec-
ommended to be run in each ieeder conduit. Al-
though grounding conductors can be the minimum
size per NEC Table 250-95, they are recom-
mended to be parity-sized with power conductors
for increased system performance.
If the power feeder conduit is used as the ground-
ing conductor, adequate electrical continuity must
be maintained at all conduit connections through-
out the conduit run.

Figure 8. Simplified Grounding Diagram.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 15 -

-
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

CONTROL WIRING CONNECTIONS

VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING HIGH-VOLTAGE (POWER) AND LOW-

VOLTAGE ICONTROL) CIRCUITS ARE DE-ENERGIZED AND LOCKED

General Provisions Special Notes

External control wiring connections for Remote For Magnetic Synthesizers With Internal By-
Shutdown, alarm, andlor monitoring func- pass Option - Since the inverter output
tions are made to the low-voltage terminal must not be applied directly to the sensitive
strip located inside the Datawave Plus. load(s), any Datawave magnetic synthes~zer
Installation diagrams are included in the sub- equipped with Internal Bypass must be set up
mittal information furnished for the unit. to inhibit the inverter output whenever the
Typical control wiring connections are shown in synthesizer is placed in "BYPASS" mode. To
Figure 9. All control wiring connections are do this, wire the Datawave "IN BYPASS" In-
recommended to be run in conduits or race- dicator to the Datawave Plus " ~ N ~ E R T E R
ways separate from the power (high voltage) INHIBIT" input.
conductors.
Common REPO Switch - A common normally-
open (N.O.) REPO switch may be used to
control both the Datawave magnetic synthe-
Control wiring to the Liebert Battery sizer and the Datawave Plus.
Disconnect Switch is required for cor- For common N.O. REPO shutdown control,
rect system operation. Other control
wiring is optional. locate the low-voltage terminal strip of each
unit. Run two wires between the terminal
Centralized alarm monitoring of the Datawave strips, one wire connecting terminals 4 and I ,
Plus system is accomplished by wiring the the other connecting terminals 5 and 5.
Datawave Plus summary alarm contact to one
of the customer alarms of the Datawave mag-
netic synthesizer monitoring system. This
provides alarm annunciation at the synthe-
sizer as well as at Sitemaster or Sitescan cen-
tralized monitoring systems.
Alarm annunciation of Maintenance Bypass
operation can be accomplished by wiring the
n.0. auxiliary contact in the Maintenance By-
pass breaker (CB8) to one of the customer
alarms in the Datawave magnetic synthesizer
monitoring system.
Code compliance - Control wiring and connec-
tions must comply with the NEC and all other
applicable codes.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 16 -
 bLiebert
Computer
Support
Systems

INVERTER INHIBIT

amp load t o be 24 Vdc,

amp max total.

Contact closure trips open all

Datawave Plus breakers and
Batten/ Disconnect.
REP0 SWITCH 1N.C.)
optional connections j
I
Contacts should be suitable for
switching low-current 24Vdc.
Lamp load t o be 24 Vdc;,
1 amp max total.
,-. ( See Note 2 I

I Contact openin trlps open all

Datswave ~lus%reakersand
Battery Olroonnect.

,
'
Figure 9. Control Wiring Diagram.
id

Datawave Plus System

Installation and Operation Manual 7 -

~ ~ ~ ~.~
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Operating Instructions
for the
DATAWAVE PLUS
Power Outage Protection System

OPERATING STATUS INDICATORS and CONTROLS

Figure 10. Datawave Plus Monitor Panel.

Indicators

The Datawave to the external battery. A battery equalizing

he normal mode. charge cycle is initiated manually, or auto-
maticaily after each battery discharge, as se-
Power is being supplied through the static
lected by the user.
switch, and the inverter is in an active
standby mode.
The Datawave
The Datawave er mode, either
qualizing charge because the input power source has failed or

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 18 -
hLiebert
the inverter test mode has been activated.
The operating time on battery is limited by
the capacity of the battery system. When the
system is on battery, the user should restore
the input power source, or prepare for a n or-
derly system shutdown.
The battery sys-
tem is nearing end-of-capacity. Limited oper-
ating time on battery remains. Automatic
system shutdown is imminent.
0 Battery Not AvadaDle The power out-
age protection capability of the Datawave
Plus system is not available. Possible causes
of the "Battery Not Available" alarm are:
battery or inverter disconnect open, blown
battery fuse, and inverter failure. The system
should be restored to normal operation as
Meters
Displays external battery dc
voltage. Note: since it is sensed on the bat-
tery side of the Battery Disconnect switch,
battery voltage will be displayed whether the
Battery Disconnect switch is closed or open.
Monitor Panel Controls
Emergency Power Off @PO) - Press-
ing the red EPO button while the system is
operating causes immediate system shut-
down. The EPO trips open the Datawave
Plus input breaker, inverter output discon-
nect switch,and the external battery discon-
nect switch.
2m
)i ............................
performs the dual function of 1) testing all
lamps, indicators and the audible alarm, and
Installation and Operation Manual
- 19 -
Computer
Support
Systems
soon as possible to prevent system shutdown
due lo a power outage.
Any of a number
of conditions affecting system operation will
cause a system alarm. Detected conditions in-
clude: loss of input power, system on bat-
tery, battery or inverter disconnect open,
inverter failure, overload, high tempera-
ture, low battery, battery not charging, and
auto system restart.
The "System Alarm" indication in absence of
other status indicators generally means that
qualified service or repair is required to re-
store normal operation. The system should
be placed in the Maintenance Bypass mode
(if available) to continue operation until the
problem is corrected.
Displays the battery current
in amperes.
A NEGATIVE (-) current means the battery
is DISCHARGING.
A POSITIVE (t) current means the battery is
BEING CHARGED.
2) silencing an actual audible alarm. The
LTS turns on all indicators and the audible
alarm for as long as the button is pressed.
When rel,eased, it allows the indicators to go
back to normal, and silences any already-ex-
isting audible alarms.
ON - Used to initially activate the
Datawave Plus during system turn-on. The
" O N button should remain lit as long as the
system is on. (See the System Turn-On proce-
dure.)
Datawave Plus System
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

INITIAL SYSTEM START-UP

UPON COMPLETION O F THE DATAWAVE PLUS INSTALLATION. A LIEBERT AUTHORIZED REPRE-
SENTATIVE MUST PERFORM THE INITIAL SYSTEM START-UP TO ENSURE PROPER SYSTEM OPERA-
TION

Equipment warranties will be voided unless system sentative or Liebert Customer Service and Sup-
start-up is performed by a Liebert authorized rep- port (1-800-LIEBERT or in Ohio 1-800-TIP-
resentative. Contact your local Liebert sales repre- OHIO ) to arrange for system start-up

SYSTEM OPERATION
AFTER THE INITIAL SYSTEM START-UP, THE FOLLOWING OPERATION GUIDES MUST B E FOL-
RRECT OPERATION.
E "OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS" SECTION OF THIS M A N U A L BEFORE ATTEMPTING

Emergency System Turn-Off (EPO)

USE ONLY IN EMERGENCIES since the shutdown sequence Is uncontrolled and virtually
instantaneous.

1. Operate any EMERGENCY POWER OFF 2. Turn OFF the building power feeder to the
(EPO) pushbutton associated with the sys- system if it is desired to completely isolate
tem. the system.

-- -

Alarm Response
Any of a number of abnormal conditions affecting system operation will cause a system
alarm.
If t h e SYSTEM A L A R M should sound, proceed as follows.

1. If there is smoke o r a burning odor from 2. If there is no smoke or burning odor from
the system: the system:
a. I m m e d i a t e l y operate a n y E M E R G E N C Y
P O W E R O F F (EPO) p u s h b u t t o n associ- a. Observe the Monitor Panel'STATUS indi-
a t e d w i t h the system. cators.
b. turn O F F (open) the power feeder t o the b. I n l i e u of o t h e r company procedure, Col-
system. l o w the instructions f o r each indicator as
c. Investigate and correct the problem. Contact given in the Operating Stams Indicators section of
Liebert Customer Service and Support for arsis- this manual.
tame.
d. Perform the System Recovery (Restart) procedure
as detailed below.

System Recovery (Restart)

To turn the system back on after an EPO or automatic system shutdown, proceed as
foilows:

1. Perform the System Turn-Off procedure to 2. Perform the System Turn-On procedure.
reset all circuit breakers.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 20 -
 bLiebert
Normal Svstem Turn-off
1. On the Datawave magnetic synthesizer,
turn OFF (open) the output breakers follow-
ing load equipment manufacturers' recom-
mended shut-down sequence.
2. On the Datawave magnetic synthesizer,
turn OFF (open) the Main lnput breaker.
3 . Turn OFF (open) the Battery Disconnect
switch.
4. On the Datawave Plus, turn OFF (open)
the lnverter Output disconnect switch.
Normal System Turn-on
(Condltlon: "Cold start" - All Datawave and Datawave Plus clroult breakers and dls-
connects are OFF. )
1. Turn On (close) the power feeder to the
system.
If the system is equipped with a Maintenance
,.-~,. Bypass cabinet:
1 L rn Turn On (close) the Maintenance Bypass Input
breaker (cB~).
Check to ensure Maintenance Bypass breaker
(CB8) is OFF and padlocked OFF.
rn Turn On (close) the Maintenance Bypass Output
breaker (CB7).
2. On the Datawave Plus, observe that the
monitor panel is energized, and the Battery
Not Available and System Alarm status indi-
cators are lit.
3. On the Datawave Plus, turn ON (close) the
Main lnput breaker.
4. On the Datawave Plus monitor panel, mo-
mentarily press the ON pushbutton to acti-
Installation and Operation Manual
- 21
Computer
Support
Systems
5. On the Datawave Plus, turn OFF (open)
the Main lnput breaker.
6. If desired to completely de-energize the
equipment, turn OFF (open) the power
feeder to the system. If the system is
equipped with a Maintenance Bypass Cabi-
net, also turn OFF (open) the Maintenance
Bypass Input (CB6), Output (CB7), and By-
pass (CB8) breakers.
-=,,
vate the Datawave Plus system. Observe that
- - .--
the ON pushbutton is lit.
5. On the Datawave magnetic synthesizer,
turn ON (close) the Main lnput breaker.
6. On the Datawave Plus, turn ON (close) the
Inverter Output disconnect switch. ,, ,
7. Turn On (close) the Battery Disconnect
switch.
8. On the Datawave Plus, observe a System
Normal status indication.
9. If the Datawave magnetic synthesizer is
equipped with a local monitoring panel,
check the Datawave output voltages before
closing the output breakers.
10. On the Datawave magnetic synthesizer,
turn ON (close) the output breakers follow-
ing load equipment manufacturers' recom-
mended start-up sequence.
Datawave Plus System
-
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Maintenance Bypass Procedure

The Maintenance Bypass option provides an alternate electrical path to the Datawave
magnetic synthesizer for off-line maintenance of the Datawave Plus, or in the case of
Datawave Plus failure.

Under normal operating conditions, only two of the three breakers in

t h e Maintenance B V D ~ Scabinet
S should b e ON - . .
e a u i ~ m e n tINPUT
(CB6) and OUTPUT(CB7).
T h e MAINTENANCE BYPASS ( w r a ~ a r o u n d )breaker 0268) should b e
padlocked OFF to protect agahst'inadvertent operatfon &d possible
equipment damage.

--

Transferring From Normal Operation To Transferring From Maintenance Bypass

Maintenance B v ~ a s sO ~ e r a t i o n Operation To Normal Operation

1. On The Datawave Plus, Ensure that the
system on battery indicator is not lit. DO not
attempt to transfer to Maintenance Bypass if
Datawave Plus is operating on battery.
2. On the Datawave Plus, turn OFF (open)
the lnverter Output breaker.
3. O n the Maintenance Bypass cabinet, turn
ON (close) the Maintenance Bypass breaker
(CB8).
4. On the Maintenance Bypass cabinet, turn
O F F (open) and padlock OFF the Output
breaker (CB7).
The Datawave magnetic synthesizer and its load are now
being powered through the Maintenance Bypass circuit.
TO fully isolate the Datawave Plus from the sys-
tem, complete the following steps.
5. T u r n O F F (open) the Battery Disconnect
Switch.
6. On the Datawave Plus cabinet, turn OFF
(open) the lnput breaker.
7. On the Maintenance Bypass cabinet, turn
OFF (open) the Maintenance Bypass lnput
breaker (CB6).
1. On the Maintenance Bypass cabinet, turn
ON (close) the lnput breaker (CB6).
2. O n the Datawave Plus, observekthat the
monitor panel is energized and displays Bat-
tery Not Available and System Alarm.
3. On the Datawave Plus, turn ON (close) the
Main lnput circuit breaker.
4. On the Datawave Plus monitor panel, mo-
mentarily press the ON pushbutton to acti-
vate the Datawave Plus system. Observe that
the ON pushbutton is lit.
5 . On the Maintenance Bypass cabindt, turn
ON (close) the Output breaker (CB7). Sys-
tem Alarm status indication will be ON be-
cause Maintenance Bypass breaker is closed
and the inverter is not avajlable.
6. On the Maintenance Bypass cabinet, turn
OFF (open) and padlock OFF the Mainte-
nance Bypass breaker (CB8).
7. On the Datawave Plus, turn ON (close) the
lnverter Output disconnect switch.
8. Turn On (close) the Battery Disconnect
switch.
9. On the Datawave Plus, observe a System
Normal status indication.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 22 -
 hLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

P
I PROBLEM SOLVING and MAINTENANCE
Thls Section i s included as a convenience t o personnel qualified to troubleshoot o r p e r f o r m malnte-
nance o n t h e Datawave Plus outage protection system.

Supplemental lndicators and Controls

The supplemental lndicators and controls are Included to facilitate maintenance and call-
bration, and are intended for use by quallfled personnel

Location - All supplemental indicators and con- Access to the Monitor printed circuit board re-
trols (See Figure 11) are on the MONITOR quires a tool to open the left front door of
printed circuit board, located behind the left- the cabinet.
hand door of the Datawave Plus cabinet.

ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD OPEN THE DATAWAVE PLUS

LEFT-HAND CABINET DOOR. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES INSIDE THE
UNIT ARE ACCESSIBLE ONCE THIS CABINET DOOR IS OPENED. AP-
PROPRIATE CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN.

Alarm lndicators
NOTE: All indicators except INVERTER FAULT. MAIN AC OVERLOAD, HIGH TEM-
PERATURE, OVERTEMP SHUTDOWN, and SYS AUTO RESTART will automatically re-
set when alarmed condition Is corrected. To reset latched indicators. see Alarm
Silence/Reset paragraph,

Input voltage or Battery system is

..- *
( \; not able to be charged.
'\.-,

External battery A power failure

open. discharged,
- and
system has restarted static switch after power
Inverter output
was restored.

Inverter opera-
Inverter output
1 control contact.
to the input volt-
(Refer to Control Wiring diagram.)
age.

Inverter has Announces op-

efer to Control
Wiring Diagram.
Static switch was

The Alarm Si-

Unit overtem- to manually reset
oerature. internal alarm indicators. Do not reset
alarms until alarmlindicator status has been
System has shut corrected. Refer corrective action to quali-
down because of overtemperature. fied maintenance personnel. For assistance,
contact Liebert Customer Service And Sup-
Battery system is port (1-800-LIEBERT or, in Ohio,
I-800-TIP-OHIO).

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 23 -
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Figure 11. Typical Internal Indicators and Controls Locations.

The internal controls of the Datawave Plus system indicated in Fig-

ure 11 are to be operated only by qualified maintenance personnel.
All other internal controls are for system calibration, and are factory-
set for proper system performance.
Recalibration requires expert knowledge of the system, and should
be attempted only by qualified factory-trained personnel. Consult
Liebert Customer Sewice and Support for assistance.

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 24 -
bLiebert
Internal Controls
S y s t e m m o d e (auto, manual, t e s t ) , b a t t e r y equallze m o d e (off, auto, start now).
and b a t t e r y e q u a l i z e duration (0t o 63 hours) can be field-selected as described h e r e .
A.10
?enan
Mar
Renm
,,,Tost SYSTEM MODE The Sys'em
Mode toggle switch has a pull-to-unlock han-
dle t o prevent accidental operation. There
are three switch positions: Auto Restart, Man
Restart, and Inv Test.
"MAN R E S T A R T " - In this mode, the sys-
tem will automatically trip open the Dalawave Plus
input circuit breaker, Inverter output breaker, and
the battery disconnect switch at the end of a com-
plete battery discharge, and require the system to
be manually restarted.
"AUTO RESTART" - In this mode, the sys-
tem only trips the inverter circuit breaker and bat-
tery disconnect switch at the end of a complete
battery discharge. The main input breaker remains
closed. Once power is restored. the static switch
will turn on and apply power to the load. The in-
verter output breaker and battery disconnect
switch still must be manually reset to completely
restore normal operation. The AUTO RESTART
operation is also a latched alarm which requires
manual reset. (See Alarm SilenceIReset switch.)
"INV T E S T " - This mode is used to simulate
a power failure and test the battery backup opera-
tion. It is intended for maintenance operation
only, since in the normal operation, the inverter is
in a n active standby mode and is self-tested. If the
INV TEST mode is activated, be sure ta return the
system mode switch to either the MAN RESTART
or AUTO RESTART position.
I n s t a l l a t i o n a n d O p e r a t i o n Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
SW4
stam
BATTERY
EQUALIZE
011 CONTROL
The Battery
Equalize Control switch determines the op-
eration of the battery equalize circuit. Con-
sult battery manufacturer for battery equali-
zation recommendations.
"AUTO" - In this position, a battery equaliza-
tion cycle is automatically initiated alter each
complete battery discharge cycle.
"START" - This is a momentary position,
used to manuallv initiate a battery eoualize cycle.
After initiating START, the switih should b; left
in the AUTO position until the end of the battery
equalization cycle.
"OFF" - In the O F F position, the battery
equalize circuit is inhibited. This position should
be selected if no battery equalization is desired,
such as far mast sealed "maintenance free" bat-
teries. Placing the switch in the OFF position dur-
ing any battery equalization cycle immediately tcr-
minates the cycle.
the equalization cycle is programmed on six
poles of Battery Equalize DIP switch SW6.
Moving one of the switch poles to the ON position
adds the indicated hours to the equalizalian cycle.
For example, turning on only "1" and "4" sets a
5-hour cycle. A n 11-hour cycle would be set by
turning on only "8". " 2 " , and "1". The equaliza-
tion cycle can be programmed from 1 to 6 3 hours.
Datawave P l u s System
bLiebert Computer
Support
Systems

Preventive Maintenance

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES INSIDE THE UNIT ARE ACCESSIBLE ONCE

THE CABINET IS OPENED. ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD
PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON THE DATAWAVE PLUS SYSTEM.

A preventive maintenance inspection, which in-
cludes the following checks and operations, is rec-
ommended to be performed every 6 months.
Cleaning - The unit ventilation openings and all
interior components should be cleaned to re-
move dirt and debris.
Electrical Connections - Electrical connections
should be inspected for corrosion and con-
nection integrity. All electrical connections
should be tight. Inspect wiring for cuts, abra-
sion, discoloration, cracked insulation, or
other damage. Clean, repair, or replace as
required.
Battery Maintenance - The battery plant
should be maintained according to the bat-
tery manufacturer's recommendations to en-
sure its ability to support the load during a
power failure.
Battery Reserve Test - A test of battery reserve
time is recommended every six months to a
year. Before testing the battery reserve time,
be sure the Datawave Plus System Normal
status indicator is lit and batter~esare fully
charged.
1. E n s u r e i n v e r t e r o p e r a t i o n by momentarily
activating the Inverter Test Mode selector switch
located inside the Datawave Plus an the Monitor
p.c. board. (Be sure to return switch to the origi-
nal Manual or Auto Restart ~ositianas desired.)
Observe system On Battery operation for about ten
seconds.
2. Place t h e s y s t e m o n b a t t e r y o p e r a t i o n by
Opening the Datawave Plus Main input circuit
breaker.
3. M e a s u r e t h e b a t t e r y d i s c h a r g e t i m e until
the Low Battery Reserve status indicator lights.
4. R e a p p l y utility p o w e r by closing the Main In-
put circuit breaker of the Datawave Plus to Pre-
vent automatic system shutdown at end of battery
discharge.
5 . Observe t h e b a t t e r y charging c u r r e n t onthe
battery current meter. Battery recharging should
begin after a short delay.
Other Tests and Calibration Checks Other -
Datawave Plus preventive maintenance tests
and calibration checks require expert knowl-
edge of the system, and should be performed
only by qualified factory-trained personnel.
Consult Liebert Customer Service and
Support ( 1-800-LIEBERT or in Ohio.
1-800-TIP-OHIO ).

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

- 26 -
 Computer
Liebert Support
Systems

c-,
'
L

Installation and Operation Manual Datawave Plus System

A World Leader in Computer Support Systems Liebert Corporation designs,
Environmental Control r r a r ~ l a c l ~ , ea10
s markers
compere sysrems lcr
Power Protection Impro$cnenr 3f c o m p ~ e r
Site MonitoringlControl ~prlrneand pcrfovnarce
Tne res, r s npCovec
OLS IPSS 3peral ons
ncreaseo proo-CI w y
and higher return on ihe
com~uterinvestment,
-eoerr Sysrerns prov de
depencao e env~ronrnenta
conrro ano e ectrlca power
prolecr on, comoned w rh
central zea mon lortng and
conrrol Tn~sapproacn
re~resentsa s nale-so~rce
integrated comGter support
network.
Based on two decades of
experience and over 80,000
installations worldwide

We won't let you down

World Headquarters
While every precaution has been taken
Liebert Corporation lo ensure accu~acyand completeness
1050 ~~~~b~~~~ ~ B~~
PO, i 29186
~ ~1" this manual.
, Llebert Corporation
assumes no responsibility. and
Columbus, Ohio 43229 disclaims all lhab~litylor damages
614-886-0246 resulting lrom use at thls lnloirnatm
Telex 246-655 LIEBERT WOGN ar for any errors or om~ss~ans.
Europe Headquarters CCopyr~ghl1988 by Llebert Carparat~oi
all rights reserved
Liebert International B.V. *Liebert and the Lebert lago are
Model Farm Road regstered trademarks 01 Lleberl
Cork Ireland Carparallon
(021) 41633
Telex 75203 LBRT Ei
i Single-Phase Power Protection
In A Compact Unit

. .
Smaller computers are protection is a must.,,'
>
~
:-. . . '.,
. . . . ,.
. ...... ,
as susceptible to power
. .
The Accommodate
- . ... ....
.,.*< .
i...
problems as larger systems. single-phase power condi- -: . ..,.,,-...,'.A<,,..!,..., .I .
. - . r , ...> - " . . .::.;,<; .,.,, ::,<r. :,,>,. .. ,. ...* . '>,.,:
. .:.;*%,*.
.-:.;,,.~:..:.;.:<~,P~-

. .;:,;,
:-;;:a
And today, these &latively tioning module serves equally ,;-.,-, ,
, : . +
l
:
 Power condlttoning IS accom-
Fllsneo by rnagnetlccapacltlve Capacities ijor10kVA
technology. No moving parts. Input Voltages 208. 240 or 277 Vac 160 Hzl
'eeooack control loops or power 220.230. 240 Vac 150 Hzl
semtconductors are used.
The conditioning system is
,nherently rugged and reliabie.
1 Output Voltage

! Static Voltage Regulation

2401120 Vac (60 Hz)
220,230,240 Vac (50 Hz)
INPUT ,is. OUTPUT
ivith outstanding performance 1 (for any load, no load to full load) - 4046 - -i wa 1rnax.l i
characteristics.
! - 2096 - 5% (rnax )
Complete isolation of input and System Efficiency 92%-Full load
output power is rnaintained-no go%-% load
direct electrical connections between 86%- % load
input and output.
5 ~. i ~Ajr 2
rester
The system is equipped with a
secondary-classsurge arrester for
protection against dangerously high
power surges. It is factory-wired to
both phases of the input power
supply ahead of any other electrical
components.
Receptacle Panel ~ ~ ~

Located on the side of the unit.

the Accommodate2 module's 12
receptacle locations accept locking
or non-locking, single or duplex
receptacles. Installing or changing
receptacies is a simple process
easily handled by qualified personnel.
Distribution Panelboard
The panelboard of the
Accommodate2 is rated 2401120
Vac, single phase. It contains 20 pole
positions for one- and Wo-pole
breakers rated up to 100 amps for
complete flex~bilityand individual
circult isolation.
Input Circuit Breaker
The main input breaker prov~des
manual shutdown at any tlme or
automahc shutdown in the event of
an overcurrent cond~tion.A low-
voltage shunt trip mechanism
permlts shutdown manually wlth the
Emergency Power-Off bunon or
automatically by the control circu~t.
Emergency
-- Power-Off
The local Emergency Power-Off
IS an ~llumlnated,
fully guarded switch
that permlts manual shutdown of the
Manual Restart
The Manual Restart circuit
protects the computer system from
repeated power applications. It shunt
tn'ps the main input breaker upon
power loss, to allow for an orderly
system restart after power returns
to normal.
Overtemperature Alarm
and Shutdown
The control circult provides an
audlble and visual alarm if the
transformer windina reaches an
abnormally high tehperature. If the TAA
overtemp cordition persists, the
circuit will automatically shut down W Liebert
the svstem bv shunt triooino
a n " the inout
- - --
ivorld Headquarters
.-
--
c1rcu;t break& Liebert Corporation
1050 Dearborn Drtve, PO. Box 29186
Columbus. Ohlo 43229
614-668-0246
Telex 246-655 LIEBERT WOGN
Surc-,: e o d q u a r r e r s
~

system. A remote Emergency Liebert International B.V.

Power-Off optlon IS also available. Model Farm Road
Cork. Ireland
(021) 41633
Telex 75203 LBRT El
01987 Liekrt Corporation
All nghts reserved lhroughoul the worM.
Spec~ficaltons suqen to change wlhaut J
nauce. L i e k r l and the bgaara reqstered
trademarks 01 L~eberlCorwralwn.
Printed in U.S.A.
Part No.SL-la75 (SOISOHd (1187)
i- N 'Iser's Manual
 Accommodate2 Single-Phase Power Conditioner

Installation:

Serial Number:

Date Installed:

NOTE:
Optional Equipment: FLA = Full Load Amps
OPD = Overload Prolectlao Device

Manual Restart

- Auto Restart
U Remote Emergency Power Off Stations (Qty-)
Export Crating
[? Output D~strlbut!on

Remarks:

User's hlanual
 )~rnputer
support
Systems

CCNTENTS
\
I. (;ENER;\L I N F O R h I . 4 T I O S ................................................................
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................. .
3. 1NSTALL.ATION INSTRL'CTIONS ...........................................................
UNPACKING a n d INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking and Prel~mlnarylnspectlon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER a n d CONTROL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... .. ........... ....
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 60 Hz Feeder Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 50 Hz Feeder Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlwiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL SYSTEM START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ..............................................................
CONTROLS a n d INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Power Off (EPOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-former Over Temp / Silence (OTSI . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .... .... .... ..... ...
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency System Turn-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Recovery (Manual Restart) .. .
Aiarm Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalSystem Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalSystem Turn-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Turn-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . MAINTENANCE ............................................................................. ..
CORRECTIVE M A l N T E h A N C E (REPAIR) ............................................ 23
PREVENTIVE M A I N T E N A N C E . . . . . . . . ................................................. 24
f". 5. S C H E M A T I C DIAGRAMS ................................................................... 25
\\-., ' STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SPE 2000 7.5 ~ V A 2081240 Vin 60 Hz ................................................ 26
SPE 2001 7.5 kVA 277 Vin 60 Hz ................................................ 27
SPE 2002 10 kVA 2081240 Vin 60 Hz ................................................ 28
SPE 2003 10 kVA 277 Vln 60 HZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
sPE 2004 7.5 kVA 220/230/240Vin 50 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SPE 2006 10 kVA 220/230/240Vin 50 Hz ................................................ 31

FIGURES
Figure 1. A c c o m m o d a t e 2 Slngle-Phase Power P r o t e c t i o n S y s t e m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. Accommodate2 Functional Dlagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flgure
Figure
Flgure
2
3.
4. Major Component Locations
...........................................................
S i m p l i f i e d Schematic D i a g r a m Ferroresonant C o n d i t i o n e r (60Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
8

9
Figure 5. R e c o m m e n d e d M i n l m u m S e r v i c e a n d Ventilation C l e a r a n c e s ........................... 10
Figure 6. C o n d u i t Entrance L o c a t l o n s ........................................................... 11
Flgure 7. Slmpllfled Grounding Diagram ....................................................... 12
Flgure 8. 208 V a c . Single-Phase F e e d e r ......................................................... 13
Figure 9. 240 V a c . Slngle-Phase F e e d e r ......................................................... 13
10. .........................................................
flgure
Flgure
Flgure
11.
12 .
. . .
277 V a c . Single-Phase F e e d e r
220 230 o r 240 V a c Single-Phase Feeder
220 V a c . Slngle-Phase F e e d e r
.............................................
.........................................................
13
14
14
Figure 13 . ...................
C o n t r o l W i r i n g Diagram a n d Low-Voltage T e r m i n a l S t r i p C o n n e c t i o n s 15
flgure 14 . L o w V o l t a g e Terminal S t r i p L o c a t l o n ................................................... 15
Figure 15 . O p t l o n a l R e m o l e EPO W a l l - M o u n t B o x D i m e n s i o n s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Flgure 16. M a l o r C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 17 . Low-Voltage Terminal S t r i p Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... ............. .... . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 18 . Accommodate2 Nameplate Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 19 . A c c o m m o d a t e 2 EPO a n d V i s u a l A l a r m i n d i c a t o r L o c a t i o n s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 20 . C i r c u i t B r e a k e r Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flgure 21 . MaJor Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

TABLES
Table 1 . S u g g e s t e d M i n i m u m W i r e Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
iii Table 2 . R e c o m m e n d e d Torque V a l u e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

User's h l a n u a l .3 . 4c c o m m o d a t e 2
 ornputer
Support
Systems

INTRODUCTION
The ~ c c o m m o d a t e 2 - *power protecllon system solves the problem of p r o v ~ d l n gciean electrical
power f o r s~nqle-phasecomputer systems.

Fact: Fact:
C o m p u t e r s y s t e m s a r e b e c o m i n g smaller Power disturbances c a n cause computing
a n d m o r e powerful. S m a l l s i n g l e - p h a s e problems and hardware damage t o
c o m p u t e r systems have b e c o m e s i n g l e - p h a s e c o m p u t e r systems.
necessities - S o m e are a s indispensable as
l a r g e m a i n f r a m e systems.
Processing errors can be caused by noise and
General-purpose mini-computers. solkes.
Local Area Network (LAN) systems.
W lnformationlgraphicsltypesetting systems. W System crashes can be caused by sags
Site securttylrnonitoringlsupervlsion systems.
Machine control systems. W Hardware damage can be caused by sags.
Computer-aided-design (CADI systems. surges, or splkes

1 Problem:
P o w e r d i s t u r b a n c e s a r e a c o n s t a n t t h r e a t t o s i n g l e - p h a s e c o m p u t e r s . In fact, p o w e r p r o t e c t i o n
may be n e e d e d m o r e by s i n g l e - p h a s e s y s t e m s t h a n by t h e i r 3 - p h a s e c g u n f e r p w t s .
The single-phase system is less likely to have its own isolated power feeder.
W Disturbances may be greater or more frequent on a single-phase power branch than on the three-phask feeder.
Operating environments of single-Phase systems are less controlled, making power disturbances more likely.
Some environments, such as for machine control systems. may even be actively hostile due to the disturbances
from nearby equipment.
, .

ISolution:
The Accommodate2 o f f e r s p r o t e c t i o n from a wide r a n g e of power p r o b l e m s . It m a i n -
t a i n s v o l t a g e within s p e c i f i c a t i o n . a n d i s o l a t e s equipment from p o t e n t i a l l y d a m a g i n g v o l t a g e
v a r i a t i o n s find transients.

F i g u r e 1. A c c o m r n o d a t e 2 ~Single-Phase P o w e r P r o t e c t i o n System.

User's hlanual
- 4 -
 Computer
Support
Systems

SPECIFICATIONS
The Accommodate28 power protection system is efficient, rugged, and reliable, offering compre-
hensive, cost-effective power conditioning for single-phase power-sensitive electronic systems.
Of ail technologies developed to conditlon power for single-phase systems, t h e trled a n d proven
ferroresonant technology is t h e most reliable w i t h t h e best power conditioning characterlstlcs.

VOLTAGE REGULATION
PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE SAGS. Volt-
age decrease o n t h e Accommodate2 output i s
less than -7% for sags on the input to -40%, f o r
any load condition - no-load to full-load.
The Accommodate2 accepts an extremeiy wide
range of input voitage variations and produces
regulated output voltage, vlrtually lgnorlng vonage
sags. The Accommodate2 continues to provlde
normal output voltage during periods of severe
brownout conditions. Because there are no feed-
back circuits, the response t h e of the Accom-
modate2 is zero. ,. ' %
$:,;
. .

VOLTAGE REGULATION
PROTECTION
- AGAINST VOLTAGE SURGES. Volt- The Accommodate2 accepts an extremely wide
age Increase on t h e Accommodate2 output i s range of lnput voltage variations and prcducea
regulated output voltage, virtually lgnorlng v o l t a p
less than +5% f o r surges on the lnput to +20%, f o r
any load condition -
no-load l o full-load.
surges. The Accommodate2 continues t o provlde
normal output voltage during periods of aevere
high-line condltlons. Because there are no feed-
back clrcults, the response tlme of the Accom-

rn
modate2 is zero. ..

z.

..
NOISE a n d TRANSIENT REJECTION
-*..
4
~
..-
b&
;&
PROTECTION AGAINST NOISE and TRANSIENTS. . .
The Accommodate2 provides a mlnlmum of 60dB The electrical isolation and saturating 'tram:'
of common mode and normal mode noise a n d former of the Accommodate2 prevents Input
transient rejection. The Accommodate2 protects transients and nolse from reaching the output.
the sensitive loeds from severe input transients. There are no power semlconductora i n . the
Accommodate2 to be damaged by input tran-
Including those specified b y ANSlliEEE C62.41 sients.
Category 8.
. L.. ..+*
. , .-

m
,>..F..&
,;!;,
.Y?P@*:$
..
v..
,.*... %' ...*
,,x..sB#:
. . . .n i
VOLTAGE DISTORTION ,'
Output voltage harmonic distortion of t h e Accom-
The output voltage waveform is controlled by the
modate2 is less than 5%, with no individual com- saturating transformer, and Is not dependent on
ponent greater than 3%. Thls Is the maxlmum the input voltage waveform.
output distortion, and is not added to any incom-
ing ilne distortlon.
. ..,.:-=.&i.
...
T . ,
4 -..
* ..'

...::.::....:.::.::..,..
:
.:.,

OVERLOAD CAPACITY
The Accommodate2 can supply 250% ct Its full-load The high overload capacity of the Accommo-
current until the circuit protection devices op- date2 provides the capability t o start the com-
puter system. The Accommodate2 is also toler-
erate. ant of the non-llnear currents wlth high peak-to-
RMS ratios typical of computer power suppiles.

User's M a n u a l Accommodate2
- 5 -
 Computer
Support
Systems

The efficiencies of the Accommodate2 are:

Full Load
92%
=/.
Load
90%
I/, Load
86%

Standard inputs for the 60 Hz Accommodate2 are 208. 240, or 277 Vac. The stan-
dard 60 Hz output is 1201240 Vac, slngle-phase.

Standard Inputs lor the 50 Hz Aocommodate2 are 220. 230. or 240 Vac. For any 50
Hz Input. a slngle-phase output of 220. 230. or 240 Vac may be specifled.

The Accommodate2 slngle phase panelboard contalns twenty pole posltlons for
breakers u p to 100 amps. A separate branch circuit breaker is provlded for each
output receptacle.

RECEPTACLE PANEL
A 12-posltlon receptacle panel Is located on the slde of the Accommodatez. Each
posltlon will accept a locking or non-locklng. slngle or duplex receptacle up to
30 A. The design of the receptacle panel allows addltlons or changes to be made
easily uslng standard receptacles and cover plates.

A Secondary class surge arrester shunts hlgh energy Input voltage surges to
bulldlng ground to protect the system from hlgh voltage surges which otherwise
Could cause lnsulatlon or component failures. The arrester is rated for a mlni-
mum 2.6 k V discharge crest voltage at 1500 amps assuming an 8 x20 pet surge
current waveform.

I OVERTEMPERATURE ALARM and SHUTDOWN

Each magnetic device i n the Accommodate2 is equipped with two temperature
sensors, alarm and snuldown. Alarm sensors activate at a lower temperature than
shutdown sensors. Any alarm sensor detecting a temperature of 160'C (320°F)
or above will llght the X-FORMER OVERTEMP llght and sound an audlble alarm.
Any shutdown sensor detecting a temperature of 18O'C (356'F) or above will ac-
tivate the input breaker shunt trip mechanism to shut down the unit.

U s e r ' s hlanuai
 k
hLiebert Computer
support
Systems

,'-,
i MANUAL RESTART (option)
The Manual Restart clrcult opens the maln lnput breaker If lnput power Is lost. Thls
prevents uncontrolled restarts of the equipment durlng utillty fault cycllng, and

m
a-
allows an orderly manual restart after power returns to normal.

I Y I I - M
EMERGENCY POWER OFF (EPO)

Prssslna
. the lllumlnated EPO Dushbutton activates the shunt trlD mechanism of
the maln lnput clrcult breaker, shuttlng down the system. Intended for emer-
gency, non-orderly shutdowns. The EPO button Is fully guarded agalnst acclden-
tel actlvatlon.

REMOTE EPO (REPO) (option)

Optlonal REPO swltches operate ldentlcally to the local EPO swltch, but allows
emergency shutdown from locations remote from the Accommodate2. NEC anl-
cle 6 k - 3 riqulres a REPO at each data processing room exlt.

m!m $ j
HEAT OUTPUT.
Full Load BTUlHr (kCALIHr)
$1. Load Load '/.

AUDIBLE NOISE

DIMENSIONS and WEIGHT

Wldth = 38 In (965 mm) Depth = 19 in (483 mm) Height = 30 In (762 mm)

7 . 5 kVA 60 H z = 330 lb (150 kg) 50 Hz = 400 lb (181 kg)
10 kVA 60 H z = 400 lb (181 kg) 50 H z = 480 l b (217 kg)

(+3ZPFto +104'F)
Temperature, storage . . . . . .. . . . -5S°C to +85*C (-67OF to +185"F)
Relative Humldlty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0% to 95% (non condenslng)

User's M a n u a l

-
 Computer
Support
Systems

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The Accommodate2 Power Center is a slngle-Phase power conditlonlng system utlilzing a slrnple and
reilable ferroresonant clrcult. Thls Section describes the individual tunctlonal blocks ot the u n ~ t ,as
pictured in Figure 2. Figure 3 detalls t h e ferroresonant transformer, while Figure 4 shows the physi-
cal iocatlon of major components.

4
UTILITY Panelboard
POWER Ferroresonant and Branch
P Conditioner + oUT
.Breaker
----. . Circuit Breakers Receptacles

Alarm Circuits

Figure 2. Accommodate2 Functional Diagram.

T h e input circuit b r e a k e r is the main disconnect

a n d overcurrent protection for the condi-
tioner. T h e breaker is equipped with a low-
voltage shunt trip mechanism to allow shut-
down of the conditioner by means of the
control circuit.

A secondary-class lightninglsurge arrester pro-

tects the unit insulation from damaging high
voltage surges.

Forced-air cooling is provided by two redundant

fans. T h e fans are internally impedance-pro-
tected and externally fuse-protected for reli-
ability and safety.

T h e ferroresonant conditioner is detailed in Fig-

ure 3. It consists of three magnetic compo-
nents ( T I , T2, and T3), and a bank of ca-
pacitors (represented as C l ) .
The main ferroresonant transformer is TI. it Figure 3. Simplified Schematic Diagram,
consists of two windings, a primary and a secon- Ferroresonant Conditioner
dary, on separate legs of a grounded saturating
core. (60 Hz).
The voltage regulator Is formed by the secon-
dary winding of TI and capacitor bank C1, tuned T h e distribution panelboard is connected di-
for resonance at the operating frequency.
rectly to the output of the ferroresonant con-
The remaining magnetic components. T2 and ditioner. A 20-pole, 100-amp rated device.
T3. operate with the capacitor bank C1. To filter or
cancel unwanted harmonics on the out~ut. the panelboard provides distribution, control.

User's Manual Accommodate2

- 8 -
 Computer
Support
Systems
and protection' to the individual branch out-
put circuits.

Having the panelboard located in the same

package as the conditioning system minimizes
b o t h the pick-up of common mode noise and
the loss of voltage regulation between the
conditioner and distribution.

A s m a n y as twelve o u t p u t receptacles may b e

installed o n the Accommodate2. This allows
each branch circuit t o b e fed f r o m i t s o w n CAPACrTORS .. .
breaker a n d receptacle. W O L E
PANELBOAAD
\ TRANSFORMERS

T h e c o n t r o l c i r c u i t o f t h e Accommodate2 is of
the low-voltage d c type, using a d c supply de-
rived from the regulated output o f the condi-
tioner. T h e control circuit provides four
functions:
Overtemperature Alarm - Each rnagnetlc de-
vice has a 160°C (320°F) temperature sensor.
h l r h .-
Is connected to
.- the Aceommodate2 alarm
~~ ~ ~

circuit. The alarm setpolnt Is lower than the shut-

down setpolnt to allow for corrective actlon or or-

The trlpping ot an alarm sensor actlvattls both an

audlble and vlsble alann to warn of aonorrnahl n~gh
tamperature and lrnpendlng overtemperature shut-
down.
A SILENCE switch Is lnclvded to acknowledge and
sllence the audible alann. The vlsual Indicator (the
X-FORMER OVERTEMP Ilght) wlll remain ilghted
untll the overtemoerature condition is cleared or
the unit Is shut down.
Overtemperature Shutdown -
Each rnagnetlc
device ale0 hns a 180'C (356'F) temperature sen-
-;r which Is connected to the shutdown clrcult. If
c
F i g u r e 4. M a j o r C o m p o n e n t Locations.

,ly shutdown sensor detects an abnormally high

operating temperature, it actlvates the shunt trip
mechanism of the main input breaker to remove
power from the unlt.
Emergency Power Off -
The Emergency Power
OH (EPO) functlon la Initiated by manualhl Pressing
the EPO switch. Thls actlon dlrecthl activates the
shunt lrlp mechanism of the main lnput clrcult
breaknr and shuts down the system.
Manual RastaR (optional) -
N the output volt-
age falls for any reason, the manual restart clrcun
uses cmacitor-stored
~ . -- - enerav to trio the Input
breaker ~ F through
F its shunt trip mechanism.
Trlpplng the breaker upon power loss prevents
automatic system start-up, allowing an orderly
manual restart when power returns.

User's M a n u a l
 Computer
Support
Systems

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

NOTE: Read t h e entire Installation and Operation sectlons of this manual before lnstalllng and oper-
ating the system.

Unpacking And Preliminary Inspection Handling Considerations

A - on the receivlna- dock.
uualitv Installation bealns
1. Inspect the shipping crate(s) for damage or
signs of mishandling before unpackmg the
unit(s) .
2. Open the shipping crates by carefully re-
moving the sides, ends. and top. (Use care to
avoid puncturing the container wth sharp ob-
jects that would damage the contents.)
3. Remove the packing and vapor barriers
and inspect the equipment for any obvious
shipping damages.
The units should not be loosened
from the shipping pallet until after all
handling by fork lift or pallet jack is
completed. Complete internal in-
spection should be made after equip-
ment positioning and prior to electri-
cal hookuo.
The Accommodate2 is bolted to a wooden shlp-
ping pallet to allow handllng by fork-lift equlpment.
,"
Prevent panel damage by removing the exterlor
panels during handling and moving. When
replacing panels. remember to reconnect ail
panel ground wires and the bezel cable.
Check the size and weight, then select moving
equipment accordingly. Refer to the dimen-
sions and weight information in the Specifi-
cations Section.
P h n the route that the Accommodate2 will fol-
low to ensure that all passages will accommo-
date the unit and the moving equipment.
(i.e. Are there any non-negotiable comers or
offsets in the hallways?)
Maintain adequate service and ventilation
clearances in the final installed position, as
shown in Figure 5.

4. If any damage as a result of shipping is

observed, immediately file a claim with the
. shipping agency and forward a copy of this
claim to:
Lieben Corporation
Customer Senrice Department
1050 Dearborn Drive
P.O. Box 29186
Columbus. Ohio 43229

Figure 5 . Recommended Minimum Service

and Ventilation Clearances.

User's Manual
 b Liebert Computer
Support
Systems

(-' POWER and CONTROL CONNECTIONS

All connections must be in accordance wlth provisions of the NEC and a ~ ~ l l c a blocal
l e codes.

VERIFY THAT ALL INCOMING POWER A N D CONTROL CIRCUITS ARE

DE-ENERGIZED A N D LOCKED OUT BEFORE INSTALLING CABLES OR
MAKING ANY CONNECTIONS IN THE UNIT. IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT ONLY QUALIFIED ELECTRICIANS INSTALL CABLES OR MAKE
ANY CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE UNIT.

General

The single-phase power input to the Accommo- Table 1. Suggested Minimum Wire Sizes.
date2 should be supplied directly from the Input Wire Size
service entrance, if practical. This minimizes Voltage kVA FLA OPD
disturbances caused by other loads in the
building.
Input feeder configuration should be two-wire-
plus-ground. See input Feeder Arrangement
Figures 8 through 12.

NOTES
Make sure that the Accommodate2 Wlre slzee based on NEC 1987 Table 310-16, using
input voltage rating matches the 75'C (167°F) copper conductors.
nominal service voltage. Refer t o the FLA = Full Load Amps of the AocommodateZ, based
unit schematic diagram for possible on full kVA load at 1.0 load power factor.
voltage tap adjustments. OPD = Overcurrent Rotectlon Device (clrcult
breaker) located Inside the AOcornrnodateZ.
Minimum size of input feeders should be in ac-
cordance with the NEC and any local build-
ing codes. This assure the feeder's ability to
safely carry the system full-load current, in-
cluding losses. Table 1 shows minimum sug-
gested wire sizes.
For increased performance, input feeder con-
ductors should be sized for no more than 2%
voltage drop. If operation at under-voltage
conditions for extended periods of time is de-
sired. the input feeders must be oversized.
Standard conduitfcable entrance locations of
the Accommodate2 are shown in Figure 6.
Power connections are made directly to the main
input circuit breaker, the neutral terminal (if

.
used), and the ground busbar terminal pro-
vided. (See Figure 4 for component loca-
tions.)
Grounding arrangements are shown in the fol-
I
I
Power Feeder
(Bottom Entrance)

I
/
\., lowing System Grounding section. Figure 6. Conduit Entrance Locations.

User's Manual - 11 - Accommodate2


System Grounding
-
The performance and safety of any power conditioning system depends upon a proper
ground installation.
Figure 7 shows a fypicai grounding arrangement for the Accommodate2 system.
Equipment Grounding
Grounding is prlmarlly for safety Correct rnpie-
mentatlon of safety grounding can also enhance
eauloment Derformance.
Equipment grounding means must be lncluded
with all power feeders, as required by the Na-
t~onal Electrical Code (NEC) and local
codes.
An insulated grounding conductor 1s recom-
mended to be run in each feeder conduit to
ensure a low-impedance ground path.
Parity sizing of grounding conductors with the
power conductors is recommended to reduce
the grounding system impedance, and in-
crease system performance. Even minunurn-
sized grounding conductors, sized per NEC
Table 250-95, are preferred over using only
the metal conduit for grounding.
Metal power feeder conduit. if used as the
grounding conductor, must have adequate
electrical continuity maintained at all conduit
connections throughout the conduit run. Use
of insulating bushings in a metal conduit run
is not only a safety hazard, but also an NEC
violation, and is not recommended.
Figure 7. Simplified Grounding Diagram.
User's Manual
- 12 -
Computer
Support
Systems
- -
Local Grounding Electrode
The Accommodate2 is a -separately derived
source" as classified by the NEC. T h e following
grounding.provisions apply. .
.
~ ~
A separately derived source, such as the Accom-
modate2 system, requires a local grounding
electrode conductor (GEC), as specified in
NEC 250-26. The size of the GEC should be
#8 AWG copper per NEC 250-94.
+,>
The local grounding electrode conductor should
be routed without splices to the nearest effec-
tively grounded building steel, metal water
pipe, or other made electrode as defined in
NEC article 250.
Signal Reference Grid Ground
Any signal reference or 'low noise' grounding
grid must also be connected to the safety ground
system.
An additional grounding conductor. #8 AWG
or larger, should be run from the Accommo-
date2 system ground to the raised floor
stringer system or other signal reference
ground grid, if the room is so equipped. The
length of the conductor should be less than 3
feet (or 1 meter), if possible.
.I
 Computer
Support
Systems

Typical 60 Hz Feeder Arrangements

The standard 60 Hz Accommodate2 power conditioner accepts 60 Hz single-phase inputs
of 208 Vac. 240 Vac. or 277 Vac. Figures 8. 9 , and 10 show typical power and ground
arrangements. See the unit nameplale for nominal Input voltage. Refer to the unit
schematic dlagram for possible lnput voltage tap adlustments.

Figure 8. 208 Vac. Single-Phase Feeder.

The 208 Vac slngla-phase supply can be darlved lrom two phases of a three-
phase 1201208 Vao system.

Fieure 9 . 240 Vac. Single-Phase Feeder.

T i e 240 Vac slngle-phasbsupply can be derlved dlrectly from a three-wire sin-
gle-phase 1201240 Vac .ystem. The 240 Vac single-phase feeder can also be de-
rived from a three-phase 240 Vec delta source. The connectlon Is slrnllar to Fig-

BUILDING TRANSFORMER
(s-ary = 277nWV W p , threephase) ACCOMMODATE2

Input Neutral Terminal

Grrxlnd Burbar Terminal

Figure 10. 277 Vac. Single-Phase Feeder.

The 277 Vac slngle-phase supply can be derlved lrom one phase and the neutral
polnt of a three-phase ZTI1480 Vac system.

User's Manual
 Computer
Support
Systems

Typical 50 Hz Feeder Arrangements

The standard 50 Hz Accommodate2 power condltioner system will accept any af three
common 50 Hz s~noie-ohasel n ~ u voltages:
t 220 V ~ C230
. Vac. or 240 Vac. F~oures1 t
and 12 show ryplcal oower anc g-our0 arrangements '0- eacn 0' 1% +-ree k o rage n p ~ r s
See toe cnct nameplate tor nomlnal lnput voltage Refer to tne dnlt schemat c
diagram f o r possible input voltage tap adfustrnents.

UlLDlNG TRANSFORMER
Secondary = 2201300. 2301400. or 2401415V Wye, 3-phase ACCOMMODATE2

lnput Neutral Terrnmal

Grwnd Busbar Terminal

-- Lw1
. gmundlng elemrode Conductor
-

'igure 11. 220. 230. or 240 Vac. Single-Phase Feeder.

he 220. 230 or 240 Vac single-phase supply can be derived from one phase and
the neutral point of a three-phase 2201380, 2301400, or 2401415 Vac system.

BUILDING TRANSFORMER
(Secondary = 1271220V Wye, 3-pnarel ACCOMMODATE2

lnwt Neutral Terminal

GlwM Burbar Termlnal

Figure 12. 220 Vac, Single-Phase Feeder.

The 220 Vac smgle-phase supply can be derived from two phases of a three-
phase 1271220 Vac system. Note lnput connections are made to the main lnput
circuit breaker, and a jumper Is required from the main input circuit breaker to
the lnput neutral terminal as shown.

User's Manual
 Computer
Support
Systems

/' , Control Wiring Connections

The optlonal Remote EPO 1s connected t o the Accornrnadate2 by means of the control
iring terrnmals on the low voltage termlnal strip

Code compliance - Control wiring and connec-
rions musr comply with the XEC and all other
applicable codes.
External control wiring connections for Remore
Shutdown are made to the low-voltage termi-
nal strip, located inside the Accommodate2
as shown in Figures 13 and 14.
The Remote EPO (REP01 can be a switch or
other 3 . 0 . contact suitable for switching 30
Vdc. Clos~ngthe contact turns O F F the Ac-
commodate2 by shunt rripping the main in-
put circuit breaker. The optional Liebert
REP0 switch is shown in Figure 15.
-
Green 1

1 -
~ h l wiring
r can be
- TERMINAL
LOW-VOLTAGE
2

STRIP
ruppl$ed with R E P 0 optton.
3
- lnslde
Accommodate2
5

i-
Remote EPO
(optlonl

Figure 13. Control Wiring Diagram and Low-voltage Terminal Strip Connections.
81-k
- 8

\ I

FRONT VIEW
(Frmt and lnslda rlghi-hard panels removed1

I Pushbutton and m v s r p l a t s ars

dunountable lor use In I l u s l M x u n t lnrtallallms.

Figure 14. Low Voltage Terminal Strip Figure 15. Optional Remote EPO Wall-
Location. Mount Box Dimensions.
1
L,

User's Manual
 >.,..,puter
?---

Support
Systems

INITIAL SYSTEM START-UP

lnltial Start-Up of t h e Accommodate2 may be performed e l t h e r by t h e mstalllng contractor or b y
L l e b e r t CS&S

Customer-Performed Start-Up - '.A qualified

electrician should be employed to perform
the Equipment lnspecrion and Start-up
'

Check List. included with the Accommo-

date2. The completed check list must then
T o e n s u r e a correct initial system
start-up, a mail-in System Start-up be returned to Liebert Corporation to place
Procedure form is included with all the product warranty into effect.
Accommodate2 units.
Factory-performed initial system start-up may
EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES WILL BE be arranged for by calling either your local
VOIDED UNLESS THE COMPLETED Liebert sales representative or Liebert Cus-
FORM IS RECEIVED BY LIEBERT tomer Service and Support.
CORPORATION.
From outside Ohio, call 1-800-LIEBERT.
In Ohio, call 1-800-TIP-OHIO.

Table 2. Recommended Torque Values

User's Manual
- 16 - :\ccommodate2
 Computer
Support
Systems

SYSTEM START-UP
For Initial system start-up. or if the Accommodate2 is moved and reinstalled elsewhere, or If the
system is off for six months or more, t h e System Start-up p,rocedure should b e p e r f o r m e d to confirm
proper s y s t e m operation.

-7. Check all breaker connecrions for tight-

Exterior Inspection ness. Re-torque if necessary. (See Ta-
Look for panel dents. broken receptacles, or
other signs of accidental abuse. ble 2.)
8. Check all terminal block connections
1. Confirm that the exterior of the unit for tightness. Re-torque if necessary.
(Including receptacles and receptacle (See Table 2.)
panel) is undamaged. 9. Check all transformer mounting bolts
for tightness. T o avoid distoning the vi-
2. Confirm that service and ventilation
bration isolation pads, d o not exceed
clearances are adequate.
600 lb-in (68 newton-meters) of torque
on mounting bolts through vibration iso-
lation pads.
10. Remove any foreign objects from the in-
terior of the unit. Make sure air pas-
Interior Inspection sages o n the transformers are clear and
Figure 16 shows locatlons of major components
covered In this lnspectlon. free of debris. Make sure fan screens
and air intake screens are clear and free
of d i n and debris.
11. Replace end panels. (Leave front panels
THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT IN- off for access to breakers and voltage
SPECTION PROCEDURES ARE TO BE measurement points during Unit Stan-
PERFORMED WITH POWER TO THE
UNIT TURNED OFF AND LOCKED
OUT.
FRONT VIEW
(Front, len snd, and Intarlor panels removed)

CAPACITORS
3. Remove accessible exterior panels.
When removing exterior panels, discon-
25POLE
PANELBOARD
\ TRANSFORMERS
1
nect panel ground wires by separating
the " e q disconnect" terminals located
on the frame.
When replacing exterior panels, recon-
nect ail panel ground wires.

-4. Inspect all wire and conductor insulation

1 FANS
-55

for damage.

5 . Inspect all capacitors for damage, bulg-

ing, or other signs of failure.
GROUND
AND GEC
ELECTRONICS \
TERMINAL BLOCK TRAY FUSES
6. Check all transformer terminal connec-
tions for tightness. Re-torque i f neces- I
sary. (See Table 2.) Figure 16. M a j o r Component Locations.

User's Manual
&hLiebert
Unit Start-up
Includes baselme voltage measurements and
Safety C I ~ C U I ~checkout
S
START-UP PROCEDURES SHOULD BE
PERFORMED ONLY BY QUALIFIED
ELECTRICAL PERSONNEL. HAZARD-
OUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN
THE EQUIPMENT THROUGHOUT THE
MAJORITY OF THE START-UP PRO-
CEDURE. PROCEED WITH CAUTION.
Make cekain all unit circuit breakers
are in the O F F position.
Verify proper input power connections
to the unit, including equipment ground-
ing conductor and local grounding elec-
trode conductor.
Turn ON building power to the unit.
Measure a n d record the input voltages
at the input breaker:
Volts. phase-to-phase =
or
Volts, phase-to-neutral =
Verify that the measured input voltage
corresponds to the unit's nameplate in-
put voltage. If different, refer to unit
schematic diagram for possible Input
voltage tap adjustments. (Be sure to
turn off and lock out budding power to
the unit while making tap adjustments.)
All loads should b e disconnected or
turned OFF before proceeding with
t h e following steps.
7. .Turn ON main input breaker and wait
one minute.
,If breaker trips OFF, check for wiring
,
errors and retry.
If breaker still trips OFF, contact
Liebert Customer Service or the local
Factory representative for assistance.
User's Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
-18 .\leasure and record the output ~oltages
at the panelboard as appltcable
Volts, phase A to phase B =
.
Volts, phase .A to neutral =
Volts, phase B to neutral =
..
-19. Ver~fythat the measured output volt-
age corresponds to the unlt's nameplate
output voltage ( ~ i t t h ~+A%.
n -0%).
If d~fferent,turn OFF power.
Check for wring errors and retry.
Some units contaln output voltage -
taps; refer to unit wiring diagram for
.
output voltage tap adjustments. (Turn
off and lock out building power to the
unit while making tap adjustments.)
.
If Output voltage is still incorrect, con-
tact Lieben Customer Service or the lo-
cal Factory representative for assistance.
-20. Verify unit EMERGENCY POWER
..
OFF switch is lit. (Be sure contrijwiring
connector is connected to power panel
connector.)
Press the unit EMERGENCY POWER
OFF switch and verify unit shutdown.
Reset the main input breaker.
-21. Repeat Siep 20 for each REMOTE
EMERGENCY POWER OFF switch to
..
which the system is connected.
-22. MANUAL RESTART
If unit is furnished with Manual Restart:
With unit on. turn OFF building
power to the unit.
Observe unit main input breaker
automatically trips open upon power
loss.
-23. CONTROL VOLTAGE.
b With power to the unit OFF, gain ac-
cess to the low voltage, terminal strip in-
.
side the unit. (See ~ i ~17.)
~ i e
Restore input power to the unit and re-
set the input breaker.:-
Measure and record the dc control
voltage on terminals 4(+) and 1(-).
Control voltage =
(Voltage should be between 28 and
36 Vdc.)
- 18 - Accommodate2

.
4 . OVERTEMPERATURE .\LXR>I
b Gain access to the low wltage termi-
nal strip inside the unit. (See Figure 1 7 . )
..
Simulate an overtemperature alarm
by temporarily jumpering terminals 3
and 4 .
Verify correct audible and visual
.
alarm annunciations.
Verify Silence switch deactivates the
audible alarm.
Remove jumper to reset visual alarm.
LOW-VOLTAGE
TERMINAL
/
STRIP
Figure 17. Low-Voltage Terminal Strip Test Points.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION CHECKOUT
~~ ~
Verity correct &ation of all components as a
svstem.
Be s u r e all loads a r e disconnected
before proceeding with t h e following
steps.
If unit is furnished with output con-
duits or cables, b e s u r e load equip-
ment is unplugged or disconnected.
Pay special attention t o cableslcon-
duits intended for direct wiring; the
exposed conductor e n d s of these ca-
bles must not b e in contact with e a c h
other or any foreign objects.
27. Individually turn ON each output
breaker and verify correct voltage at
each receptacle or cable end.
User's Manual
Computer
Supporr
Systems
25. OVERTELIPERATURE SHUTDOWN
b Gain access to the low voltage termi-
nal strip inside the unit. (See Figure 17.)
b Temporarily jumper terminals 4 and
8.
b Verify unit shutdown.
b Remove jumper.
-26. b Turn OFF and lock out buildins
power to the unit.
Replace front interior panel.
t Turn ON building power to the unit
and reset input breaker.
t Verify proper cooling air flow.
-28. Turn OFF all output breakers. Connect
load equipment per manufacturer's
specifications and recommendations.
-29. Turn ON output breakers to the load
equipment. Observe the power-up se-
quence recommended by the manufac-
turer.
-30. Verify output voltage is acceptable un-
der loaded conditions and load equip-
ment operates properly.
-31. Replace all exterior panels.
T h e 0 n . y a1:entlon t h e Accommooate2 system
should now nee0 Is perlo0.c prevenllve man-
tenance ~nspectlonsa s glven n Sectlon 4
- 19 - Accommodate2

&IItiebert
OPERATING INSTRUCTXONS
CONTROLS and INDICATORS
The Accommodate2 EPO controls and OVERTEMP lndlcators are located In the nameplate bezel on
the front of the unlt.
Emergency Power Off (EPO)
Illuminated red pushbutton swltch, fully guarded
against accidental actlvatlon.
Lifting the guard and pressing the red EPO
button whlle the system is operating causes
~mmediatesystem shutdown. The EPO trips
open the Accommodate2 input breaker.
Under normal operating conditions, the EPO
switch is illuminated to indicate that the unit
is ON.
Figure 18. Accommodate2 Nameplate Bezel.
User's Manual
Computer
Support
Systems
X-Former Over Temp I Silence (OTS)
Yellow pushbunon swltchlhdlcator, llghted during
overtemp alarm condltlon.
The OTS is a dual-function switchlindicator.
1) It visually indicates a transformer over-
temperature condition.
,c,
. ~
2) It silences the audible alarm. *
An overtemperature condition causes
the OTS indicator to light and an alarm
to sound. When pressed and released
during an alarm condition, the OTS si-
lences the audible alarm. The OTS light
stays ON until the overtemp alarm con-
dition is corrected.
 Computer
Support
Systems

SYSTEM OPERATION
The Accommodate2 is simple to Operate. Aside from Emergency System T u r n O f f a n d recovery, t h e
only manual operations required a r e T u r n - O n . Turn-Off, and Alarm Response.

Emergency System Turn-Off (EPO) System Recovery (Restart)

USE O N L Y IN EMERGENCIES, smce the shut- To turn the system back on after a n EPO or a
down sequence 1s uncontrolled and virtually In- power outage trlps the Main Input breaker OFF.
stantaneous. oroceed as follows:

1. Operate any EMERGENCY POIVER O F F
(EPO) pushbutton associated with the sys-
tem.
2. T u r n O F F the building power feeder to the
system if it is desired to completely isolate
the Accommodate2.
1. Open all output breakers on the Accommo-
date2.
2. Reset (turn O F F , then turn ON) the Main
Input breaker on the Accommodate2.
3. Sequentially turn ON the Accommodate2
output breakers to the load equipment.
Follow the power-up sequence recommended
by the manufacturer(s).

Alarm Response
Overtemperature Is the only condltlon alarmed on the AccommodateZ. if corrective acrion
is not taken upon overremp alarm and rhe overremp condition persists, auromaric over-
remp shufdown will occur.
If t h e X-FORMER OVER TEMP alarm should sound. Droceed as follows.

1. If there is smoke o r a burning odor from 2. If there is no smoke or obvious problem

the AccommodateZ:
a. Immediately operate any EMER-
GENCY POWER O F F (EPO) push-
button associated with the system.
b. T u r n O F F the power feeder to the
system.
c. Investigate and correct the problem.
Posslble causes are blocked ventilation, room over-
temperature, coollng fan failure, defective compo-
nent, or system overload. Contact Llebert Cus-
tomer Service for asslstance.
d. Perform the System Restart procedure
as detailed above.
with the Accommodate2:
a. Perform the Normal System Turn-Off
procedure.
b. Investigate and correct the problem,
.. .
Possible causes are blocked ventllatlon, room over-
temperature, coollng fan fallure, defecthe compo-
nent, or system overload. Contact Ueben Cus-
tomer Service for assistance.
c. Perform the System Restart procedure
as detailed above.

I Indicator

Figure 19. Accommodate2 EPO and Visual Alarm Indicator Locations.

User's Manual
 Computer
Support
Systems

Normal System Operation

-Business as usual', with the security of condi-
tioned Dower.

No operating attention is required by the Ac-

commodate:! during normal system opera-
tion.

Normal System Turn-Off

- ~ n d - o f - d i y ' shutdown.
Perform only it desired - Accommodate2 is
designed for continuous 24-hour-a-day operation.
RONT VIEW
(Front panel removed1
1. Sequentially open the output breakers on
the Accommodate2. Follow load equipment
MAIN
manufacturers' recommended shut-down se- INPUT
BREAKER
quence. OUTPUT

2. Open the Main lnput breaker on the Ac-

cornmodate2 if the unit is to be shut down.
I BREAKERS
/

3. Turn OFF the building power feeder to the

system if it is desired to completely isolate the
equipment.

System Turn-On
(Procedure assumes the Accommodate2 power
feeder and all circuit breakers are OFF. I

1. Turn O N the building power feeder to the

system.
2. Turn ON (close) the Main lnput breaker on Figure 20. Circuit Breaker Locations.
the Accommodate2.
3. Sequentially turn ON the Accommodate2
output breakers to the load equipment.
Follow the power-up sequence recommended
by the manufacturer(s).

User's Manual
 Computer
Support
Systems

MAINTENANCE

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (REPAIR)

Even the best equipment may fall. Liebert Customer Servlce and Support (CSBS) Is at your servlce
to assure fast repair of your Accommodate2 and mlnlmum downtime o f your Installation.

ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

I
SHOULD PERFORM MAINTENANCE FRONT VIEW
ON THE ACCOMMODATE2 SYSTEM. ( ~ r o n t ,left end, and Interior p a n e l s removed)

Standard electrical troubleshooting procedures

should be used to isolate problems in the Ac-
commodate:! power conditioner. Follow rhe
I 20-POLE
PANELBOARD
CAPACITORS
\ TRANSFORMERS
I

appropriate schematic diagram for your in-

stallation. If rhere are queslions, don't hesi-
tate to contact Lieberr C S U .
Repair o r replacement of standard items, such
as circuit breakers and indicator lights can be
either handled by in-plant electricians or re-
ferred to Lieben CS&S. Refer to the Accom-
modate2 Parts Manual.
Repairs related to the Accommodate2 condi-
tioning elements should be referred to
Lieben CS&S. I .
GROUND
AND GEC
TERMINAL BLOCK
ELECTRONICS \
TRAY NSES

To contact Liebert CS&S for information o r re-

pair service: Figure 21. Major Component Locations.
From outside Ohio, call 1-800-LIEBERT.
In Ohio, call 1-800-TIP-OHIO.

-
/
C
User's Manual
 Computer
Support
Systems

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
An annual general system inspection, cleaning, and operation check I s recommended to ensure sys-
tem ~ertormanceand long service life.

ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM MAINTENANCE

ON THE ACCOMMODATE2 SYSTEM.

Initial Inspections and Cleaning

Alr circulation through the ~ccommodate?cabinet may cause dust to accumulate on in-
ternal components. Cieanlng should be done as necessary during electrical In-
spectlons.

Inspection Schedule -
, Electrical connections and component
mountings should be inspected after the firm
24 hours, 30 days, and 6 months of opera-
tion.
b Ventilation openings and grilles should be
inspected and cleaned every six months.
b A complete inspection and operational
checkout should be performed annually. This
is best done by performing the System Stan-
Up procedure in Section 2.

User's Manual
 Computer
Support
Systems

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS
Besldes showlng the system conflguration, a schematlc dlagram Is a valuable troubleshootlng ald.
A separate schematic dlagram for each Accommodate2 standard conffguratlon appears In the follow-

Standard Accommodate2 configurations are:

60 Hz:
7.5 kVA 2081240 Vln 120124 Vout
7 . 5 ~ V A277 Vln 1201240 vout
1 0 ~ V A 2081240 Vln 1201240 Vout
1 0 ~ V A 277 Vln 1201240 vout

5 0 Hz:
7 . 5 kVA 22012301240 Vln 22012301240 Vout
10 kVA 22012301240 Vln 22012301240 Vout

Of the following schematic diagrams, the one

representing your system should be marked
for easy future reference. Determine the ap-
propriate schematic by comparing the input/
output voltage and kVA information on the
unit identification label with the standard-
configuration schematics in this section. ..... .
For special configurations, a separate schematic
diagram is furnished with the unit. Retain the
diagram with this manual for future refer-
ence.

User's Manual
 Computer
Support
Systems

SPE 2000 7.5 kVA 208 1240 Vin 60 Hz

User's Manual Accommodate2

- 26 -
 Computer
Support
Systems

SPE 2001 7.5 kVA 277 Vin 60 Hz

User's Manual
 '33mputei
Support
Systems

SPE 2002 10 kVA 208 / 240 Vin 60 Hz

Accommodate2
User's Manual - 28 -
& Liebert
Computer
Support
Systems

SPE 2003 10 kVA 277 Vin 60 Hz

User's Manual

-- -
 Computer
&iLiebert Support
Systems

SPE 2004 7.5 kVA 50 Hz

User's Manual Accommodate2

- 30 -
 Computer
Support
Systems

SPE' 2006 10 kVA 50 Hz

User's Manual
 Llebert Corporar~onceslqns mmputer investment.
manufactures and rnarKets Liebert Systems prov~de
? C r r C e'e 5 ) i l e l s lo' dependable envronmental - ~

mprcvevnr 31 : c n x e . conlro anc e ecrrica power

-
~ P t l r r eano p r i o r n z n c e
heres- t s rro7nveo
c w r e s s oceralois
increased product~v-lt~
A World Leader in Computef Support Systems higher return on the
Env~ronmentalControl
x:es:~on wmbtneo wltn
centralized rnonltorlng and
control. This approach
represents a single-source,
integrated cornouter suoDort
network.
, ,

Power Protection Based on two decades of

experience and over 80.000
installations worldw~de,
Bulldmg Chiller Liebert 1s committed to
/
Deluxe Syslern13
Fire Suppress~on Environmen~al D~esel offering the highest quality
System Control Svstern / Generator products and services for
applications requiring
computer support.

Power Conditioning
System

We won't let you down

hLiebert
Whlle every precaution has been taken
lo ensure accuracy and mmpletenesr
Liebert Corporation In thls manual. Llebert Carparatton
assumes no reswnstb8lfty.and
dtsla~msall Ihablllly lor damages
resulting from use at lhls lntormat~on
or lor any ermrs or omtsscons
FCopynght. 1986 by Llebert Corparaltoi
all rlghtsreserved.
Liebert International B.V. 9Lleberl and the Llebenlqlo are
Model Farm Road registered trademarks al Lleben
Cork, Ireland co~wlallo".
(021) 41633
Telex 75203 LBRT El
Power Problems: Spikes/Phase Lose/Surges/Sags
S p i k e s = 200-400% o f r a t e d RMS v o l t a g e o r h i g h e r f o r s h o r t d u r a t i o n .
T r a n s i e n t s = 2-5Khz o r h i g h e r / d u r a t i o n up t o (1) c y c l e .
S a g s = Voltage 80-85% below nominal v l o t a g e .
s u r g e = Voltage above 110% of nominal.
Noise = Superimposed on sinewave.
D i s t o r t i o n = A change i n t h e s h a p e of t h e sinewave.
Outage = T o t a l power o u t a g e .

Normal Mode n o i s e -
Common Mode of n o i s e = Impulse 8 E M 1 - RF on any p h a s e t o ground.
Phase t o phase.

Mini-Center/Precision Power/Rccomadate/Datawave(PMC) Power Managenent C e n t e r .

~ l ( 4l ) t y p e s p r o v i d e e l e c t r i c a l i s o l a t i o n .

Non-Requlatinq
Mini-Center Isolation against noise,
p r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r some i s o l a t i o n a g a i n s t spikes

Requlatinq.
Accomadate I1 = s i n g l e phase
Power Management C e n t e r (Datawave)

Mini-Center s i z e s = 1 5 , 3 0 8 50Kva
P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r = 50 - 225Kva

Rccomadate I1 = 7.5 & lOKva

Datawave (PMC) = 15,20,30,50,75Kva (one frame s i z e ) 100,125 8 15OKva s p l i t cab

Model No.'s
Mini-Center:
LL = w/xfmr
L R = wo/xfmr

P r e c i s i o n Power Center:
PP = w/xfmr
PR = wo/xfmr

Accomadate:
SP = S i n g l e p h a s e

Datawave (PMC): Datawaves have ( 7 ) t r a n s f o r m e r s 8 ( 9 ) i n d u c t o r s ( c h o k e s ) .

CA = C o n d i t i o n i n g O n l y = No i n d i v i d u a l l o a d d i s t r i b u t i o n , ( 1 ) o u t p u t b r k .
SC = S e l f c o n t a i n e d = I n d i v i d u a l l o a d d i s t r i b u t i o n o u t p u t b r e a k e r s .

I n t e r f a c e b o a r d s w i l l be on a l l u n i t s f o r s h u n t -
trip.
Datawave 2nd & 3 r d harmonic t r a p s a r e used f o r i n i t i a l c o r r e c t s a t u r a t i o n o r
s i n g l e phase l o s e . Harmonics w i l l h e l p m a i n t a i n 3 p h a s e o u t p u t w i t h a l o s t
i n p u t phase. U n i t can m a i n t a i n 60% l o a d f o r l o n g p e r i o d s of time w i t h a l o s t
i n p u t phase. Zig-Zag t r a n s f o r m e r g e n e r a t e s n e u t r a l . Wound 120 d e g r e e s a p a r t
e l e c t r i c a l y t o e q u a l phase v o l t a g e .
1% change i n frequency = 1-1.2 v o l t change i n o u t p u t .
Frequency g o e s up = v o l t a g e g o e s down.
Frequency g o e s down = v o l t a g e g o e s down.
 Phase r o t a t i o n must be c o r r e c t (ABC) f o r c o r r e c t operation of Datawave.
Temperature Sensors:
(--) LL & PP models = Alarm @ 180c Shutdown ( s h u n t - t r i p ) 200c
white wires = 180c red wires = 200c
Temp. s e n s o r s c o n t a c t s a r e normally c l o s e d (N.C.)

SP model = Alarm @ 160c Shutdown @ 180c

yellow l e a d s = 160c brown l e a d s = 180c
c o n t a c t s a r e normally open (N.O.), connected i n p a r r a l e l l

SC & CA models = Alarm @ l6Oc Shutdown @ 180c

blue l e a d s = l6Oc white l e a d s = 180c
Contacts a r e normally closed (N.C.), connected i n s e r i e s

CONTROL W I R I N G :
F i r s t ( 5 ) t e r m i n a l s on low v o l t a g e t e r m i n a l s t r i p a r e a l l t h e same on a l l
models. Terminals 1 & 2 must have a jumper between them i f customer is u s i n g
a normally open (N.O.) remote EPO (REPO).
s i t e m a s t e r connections can a l s o be wired t o low voltage t e r m i n a l s t r i p ( 2 )
connections, b l a c k h e d wires term. #18 blk. & term. $19 red s i g n a l i s t 5 v .

LEVELS OF M O N I T O R I N G :
Level o = No monitoring = c o n t r o l v o l t a g e l e v e l = 24vdc
Level 1 = VCMP only = c o n t r o l voltage l e v e l s = t 15vdc & 5vdc
Level 2 = I G M only = c o n t r o l v o l t a g e l e v e l s = 24vdc i l 5 v d c 8 +Svdc
Level 3 = VCMP & I G M = c o n t r o l v o l t a g e l e v e l s = +24vdc, fl5vdc & t5vdc
A l l l e v e l s w i l l have t h e i n t e r f a c e board.

I n t h e card cage f i r s t ( 4 ) c a r d s from r i g h t t o l e f t a r e t h e I G M c a r d s - next

( 6 ) c a r d s a r e f o r LDA ( 5 ) counting t h e i n t e r f a c e board.

ALflRM INFORMATION:
Output Undervoltage = -13%
Output Overvoltage = +6%
Output Overcurrent = any ( 1 ) phase 95% of c a p a c i t y
Overtemperature = 160c t o 180c
Frequency Deviation
Ground Overcurrent
Ground System Faulty = ) 3 ohms impedancce d i f f e r a n c e between I / O & ground
Ground F a i l u r e = ) 5 ohms impedance d i f f e r a n c e between I / O 8 ground
Phase Rotation or Phase Loss
Water Under Floor
Unit I n By-Pass node ( o p t i o n a l Datawave Only)
Emergency Shutdown (EPO or REPO)
S e c u r i t y Alarm

F8 f u s e blown = no fan o p e r a t i o n on card cage c i r c u i t - no EPO l i g h t on.

FUSE LAYOUT:
A B C X Y Z S T P S ST = S h u n t - t r i p PS = Power Supply
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 O n some u n i t s F9 - F11 a r e f o r f a n s

I - On some u n i t s w i t h f u s e layout staggered F4 is Shunt-trip. (F5-F8 s t a g g e r e d )

Never remove F7 or S h u n t - t r i p fuse w i t h u n i t running. ( T r i p s input b r e a k e r )
i
LnA (Line Disturbance Analyzer):
Contains ( 8 ) boards i n the l a s t (6) s l o t s of t h e card cage ( 2 ) boards piggy-
backed.
1. Clock/Battery Ram
2. Micro Processor ad.
3 . Input Impulse Assembly ( 2 ) c a r d s = Analog & D i g i t a l .
4 . Output Impulse Assembly ( 2 ) c a r d s = Analog & D i g i t a l .
5. Input Sag/Surge card
6 . Output Sag/Surge card

Cannot have an LDA without an 1 G M board i n s t a l l e d .

Factory Set Points f o r Impulse = 500 v o l t s above nominal.
Factory Set Points for Sag = -15% of nominal.
Factory Set Points f o r Surge = +7!4 of nominal.
Factory Set Points f o r O V = +6!4 of nominal.
Factory Set Points f o r UV = -13% of nominal.

L D A ' s a r e normally used with S i t e s c a n & S i t e m a s t e r

L , n A Report : ( f o r every occurrance)
x per occurrance p r i n t oQ s a g s , s u r g e s & impulse.
L D A Power Analysis Summary: ( p a s t 24 hours)
x Total number o f sags, s u r g e s 8 impulses f o r l a s t 24hrs. or s i n c e l a s t
summary.
r Automatically a t m i d n i g h t .
X Upon request

nicro-Processor is t h e same a s I G M except f o r E-Prom.

L D A ' s & I G N ' s communicate w i t h s i t e s c a n & s i t e m a s t e r .
s e r v i c e t e r m i n a l can be used t o change f a c t o r y s e t p o i n t s f o r impulse, s a g
and surge s e t t i n g s .
Service Terminal = can r e s e t alarms without having t o shutdown t h e u n i t . I t
can a l s o change t h e alarm parameters.
( 4 ) Basic Functions of S e r v i c e Terminal:
x Monitor = L-L, L-N
x Control = Controls LDA f a c t o r y s e t p o i n t s
x D i a i g n o s t i c s = Does t e s t o f card cage boards ( a l s o r e s e t s alarms)
x Review = Reviews a l l of t h e alarms (checks a l l alarms & r e p e a t s s e v e r a l
times t o check a c t u a l alarms.

E-PROM SERIES:
x 1st s e r i e s : G-280-X = "X" i s a l e t t e r used t o designate E-Prom p o s i t i o n on
c i r c u i t board. Designed f o r i n t r o d u c t i o n of I G M .
x 2nd s e r i e s : G-309-X = "X" is a l e t t e r used t o d e s i n a t e E-Prom p o s i t i o n on

x 3rd s e r i e s : G-309-X-Rev. A -
c i r c u i t board. Designed f o r a d d i t i o n og LDA.
"X" is a l e t t e r used t o d e s i g n a t e E-Prom p o s i t i o n
on c i r c u i t board. Designed t o c l e a r up alarm promblems on G-309 s o f t w a r e .
x 4th s e r i e s : 020-XXXX = "XXXX" a r e numbers used t o d e s i g n a t e E-Prom p o s i t i o n .
Designed f o r communications t o Sitemaster 100.
x 5 t h s e r i e s : lC16849PXX = "XX" d e s i g n a t e s E-Prom p o s i t i o n . Designed f o r
communications w i t h S i t e m a s t e r 200.
T R O U B L I N G SHOOTING TIPS:

Always V e r i f y :
x Fuses
x Power Supply v o l t a g e s a r e c o r r e c t
x E-Prom s e r i e s c o r r e c t
x Proper P l u g Connections
x PCB's a r e seated properly
x Proper h i g h 8 low v o l t a g e w i r i n g
x C o r r e c t t a p p i n g on I n p u t t r a n s f o r m e r

CONNON SHUNT TRIP FAILURES: ( S t a r t s 1

x Terminals 1 8 2 on L V T S ( ~ OvW o l t a g e t e r m i n a l s t r i p ) a r e open. (N.c. R E P O )
x F a i l e d i n p u t b r e a k e r = v e r i f y by removing s h u n t t r i p w i r e s t o b r e a k e r (W317
and W316 on i n t e r f a c e b o a r d ) . (Term. 20 & 2 1 on LVTS) and t r y t o r e s t a r t u n i t
x Open g l a s s f u s e on i n t e r f a c e board ( F 1 )
x Open Shu'tdown temp. s e n s o r . V e r i f y by p l a c i n g jumper a c r o s s r e a r s p a d e
c o n n e c t i o n s 1 6 8 1 7 on i n t . e r f a c e Ed. 8 t r y t o r e s t a r t
x Open f u s e F7 ( u s u a l l y r e d s t i c k e r e d ) u n i t w i l l r e s t a r t f o l l o w i n g f u s e f a i l u r e
but no EPO a v a i l a b l e and t r a n s f o r m e r overtemp. i l l u m a n a t e d
x Miswired o r d e f e c t i v e o p t i o n )GFCI, Phase R o t a t i o n / L o s s
* Output d i s p l a y g a r b l e d o r i r r a t i c , check f o r bad +5vdc power s u p p l y o r t 5 v d c
power s u p p l y c o u l d need c a l i b r a t i n g
x I r a t t i c f a l s e alarms = t 5 v d c power s u p p l y

TYPICAL OPTIONS ON POWER UNITS:

x L i g h t n i n g A i r e s t o r s = C a p a c i t o r s t i e d i n v a r r a l l e l w i t h main AC i n p u t '
x spike ~ u p r e s s i o n
x High/Low V o l t a g e s = J-Box, u s u a l l u y under computer room f l o o r
8 Input/output Cables
x G F C I ( w i t h CT's) G F C I = Ground F a u l t C i r c u i t I n t e r u p t
x Floor Stands 8 Levelers
x Phase Rotation/Loss u n i t s
x S i t e r m a s t e r 100 o r 200
x I G M ; ~ - VcflpPs I G M = ( I n f o r m a t i o n G a t h e r i n g n o d u l e ) VCMP = ( V o l t s , C u r r e n t
Monitoring P a n e l )
x By-Pass S w i t c h (Oatawave o n l y )
x BY-pass Transformer (Oatawaue o n l y )
LIEBEKI CORPOIUTE ELECTRICAL POWR CODE
..
OBSERVED
COMPOrnT

NO DATA AVAILABLE AT SITEMNTER O SOFIWARE MARDS NEED ,

ID BE SEATED PR3Pm2i'
' NO CCWlLlNI~TIONAT SERVIE
TErU4TNAL
O
DISPLAY NDT LEGIBLE AT SITTWGTEI

O READ31PT ON STATUS PANEL

BLANXING OLPP

O SECURE/REPLACE
CABLING

STAWS
PANEL

O R E P L P C E ~
M3NITOR BaARD (STArnS
PANEL)
 OBSERVED
C Q M P O ~

NO DATA AVAILAD'LE
O I m m DATA DISPUYED
60 HZ RE- UNSTAI3LE
UNDERJOLTAGE NAM ON

SITDlAFER REACOVP AND P I U W

m ALL Z!zmS
NO DATA AVAILABLE
O lMPROPER rn+iJNICATICN WITH
SITMRSPER

O
NO DATA AVAIiirijLE AT S I T D R X E R
" ERPATIC VOLTXES
O mc
u-
A L
A RM

O
NO DATA AVAIIABLE AT SI-
O 0 v p W T - w

O ~ C ; A C U M ) ~
A M .

I
I

O VOLTAGE READaPT 1Na)RRDCP O REPLACE INERFACE i

TDPERARIRE L I W CN Bavm (IGM)
NO DATA AVAILABLE

O CHANGE J1, 52 JUMPER

ON ml'EsE'ACE E
DW
-
(J1 AVID, 52 MAhUAL)

ICM - LDA
 SITEMASTER TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

CHECK IGM ON LINE I

CHECK IGM FUNCTION WITH SERVICE TERMINAL -

CHECK COMMUNICATIONS CABLE CONNECTIONS
CHECK CABLE POLARITY
CHECK W L E INTEGRITY
CHECK COW. PCB OPTION J W E R
REPLACE COMNICATIONS PCB
.
RE-INITIALIZE S I T E W T E R
CHECK IGH UNITS ON LINE. ,

CHECK CABLE CONNECTIONS

INTEWITTENT
DATA
. RE-INSERT COW PC8 (WUER/OFF)

CHECK POUER*ON
CHECK CABLE
CHECK POWER SUPPLY .
NO REPLACE UP PCB. EPROM PCB
OISPLAY

. REPLACE DISPLAY

CHARACTER
FAULTY . REPLACE OISPLAY

CHECK W L E
RE-INITIALIZE SITENASTER I
REPLACE p P PCB. EPRW PCB
NO
RESPONSE .
CHECK CABLE
REPLACE UP. EPROM PCB
INTEWITTENT
ncclm..rc
-
.
 OBSERVED
COMPONWT

I G M B PHASE LIGFIT Om ON DELTA L.E.D.

ALL lENXiFPS ARE ZERO AT SERVICE
mPMIu4L.
FUSES
O ZERO COLT AND CURRENT REACOCPT
luwxmT mc% ON INPVT VOLTAGES
(208/126/120)

s1- O GRCUND 1NIP;RITY AND GKUND

AND SYSTEM FAULTY ALARMS ON
P D U
 PRODUCT DESIGN DISCUSSION
DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZERS

The Datawave Magentic Synthesizer is a packaged power center for use with
sensitive electronic systems. The Datawave combines power conditioning.
monitoring, distribution and control in a single package in which the
power conditioning element is the Liebert-exclusive magnetic synthesizer.
The Datawave is manufactured under US Patents 4,305,033 and 4,544,817
(abstract attached). The synthesizer regenerates an output waveform
independent of the input waveform to protect the sensitive load from
common mode disturbances, normal mode spikes, imyblses. transients 6nd
noise, sags, surges, and waveform distortion. For specifications, refer
to the Datawave Technical Data Manual.
The output waveform is generated by combining the pulses from six
interconnected saturating pulse transformers. The pulse of each
transformer is determined by the physical construction of the transformer
(core geometry and windings) which limits the available volt-seconds. The
attached saturation sequence shows how the six pulse transformers (labeled
TX1-TX6) produce three-phase sinusoidal output voltages. The pulse
identifications (1.4, 10, 2A, 28, etc.) on the attached saturation sequence
diagram correspond to the pulse transformer windings (TX1, TX2, etc.).
Note that TX1 to TX3 have multiple windings on the same core and are
labeled "A" and "0" (lA, 10, etc.).

During normal operation, energy is constantly oscillating between the main

capacitor banks (Cl, C4) and the pulse transformer cores (TXI - TX6).
This ferroresonance ensures that the cores go into hard saturation and
produce the desired voltage pulses. Since multiple transforner cores are
used, a single critical value of capacitance is not required. The amount
of capacitance becomes more of an energy-handling consideration. In fact.
as a matter of practical design, multiple capacitors are used which allow
for 10 to 20% of the capacitance to be removed and normal operation
continued. The large capacitor bank directly connected to the output of
the Datawave also allows the Datawave to supply the non-linear current
requirements of modern data processing loads without causing added voltage
waveform distortion.

Three large non-linear line chokes (TX7 - TX9) are used to isolate the
synthesizing network (with regulated output voltage) from the utility. In
other words, the variable impedance of the line chokes allows the pulse
transformers to operate at a voltage level different from the utility
input voltage, essentially converting the utility from a constant voltage
source to a current source which drives the saturating pulse transformer
network. - ~ .~ ~~. ~ ~~ ~~~ ~ ~ - ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~

~ ~ ~~-~~ ~

Common mode isolation is obtained since the input is electrically isolated

from the output. The pulse transformers have isolated primary and
secondary windings with multiple electro-static shields. With the bypass
option.. the common node isolation of the synthesizer is maintained because
the output neutral is switched and the isolation of allcircuit conductors
is maintained.
DATAWAVE DISCUSSION
Page -2-

The output of the pulse transformer network is a regulated, three-phase,

delta voltage source. A zig-zag transformer (TXlO) is used to derive a
neutral. The neutral is utilized for grounding purposes and for output
line-to-neutral loads. One practical benefit of this approach is the
ability of the snythesizer to supply unbalanced loads while naintaining
120- phase separation.

The remaining magnetic elements of the synthesizer are 2nd harmonic traps
(TX11 - TX19) and 3rd haraonic traps (TX14 - T915). These traps a r e nnt
used, as expected, to filter the output voltage waveform under normal
operation. Under normal operation. the stepwave-generated sinusoidal
output voltage has the 11th harmonic as its lowest order harmonic
component. However, at start-up before the saturation sequence becomes
stabilized, the harmonic traps become important to force the synthesizer
into the desired saturation sequence. Any saturation sequence other than
the one previously described produces an output waveform which has
significant 2nd and/or 3rd harmonic components.

The Datawave provides a comprehensive solution to all power disturbances

except for outages. For input surges (impluses, spikes or transients),
the synthesizing action virtually ignores the input voltage waveform. The
input surges are blocked by the large input chokes and the saturating
pulse transformers. As an option, a secondary class thyrite valve surge -
arrestor can be included which adds supplementary surge protection from
high voltage surges which might otherwise damage the insulation and wiring
of the Datarave. Attached is a discussion and typical testing of cne
Datawave to the input surges specified in ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (formerly IEEE
5 8 7 ) . Isolation of the Datawave is in excess of 120 dB for both common
and normal sode transients.

Included is a copy of the Datawave demonstration which is routinely

offered to prospective customers. Demonstration facilities are located in
Columbus and six other locations nationwide. The demonstration tests
allow witnessing of the Datawave's characteristics first hand for those
who find its outstanding performance too hard to believe.

There are over 6000 Datawaves in use around the world supporting computer
systems from virtually every major computer manufacturer. Within its KVA
range, it is believed to be the most comaercially successful power
conditioning product. Selected user lists can be furnished upon request.
Although major computer vendors have avoided approving power conditioning
manufacturers, the Liebert Datawave enjoys favorable status on most
computer vendor's informal list of recommended suppliers. In addition.
Liebert Datawaves are used by major computer vendors in their own
facilities.
DATAWAVE DISCUSSION
Page -3-

Datawaves are designed to be very reliable. The electronics are used for
monitoring only and failure of the electronics does not affect the power
conditioning. The synthesizer, discussed previously, consists only of
magnetics and capacitors. The magnetics are designed for a 62 year llfe
using Class H. 220°C insulation with copper conductors operating at
temperatures below 160'C. The capacitors are self-healing metalized
polypropylene AC capacitors, specially designed for the application by
General Electric. Failure rate calculations by GE indicate an expected
failure rate of one capacitor per unit every nine years. Field experience
indicates an MTBF of the Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer in excess of 1
million hours.
, .
. , United States Patent 1191 1111 4,305,033
\
Powell- (451 Dec. 8. 1981

[ Y ] POLYPHASE FERRORCSOhA\T VOLTAGE "Sp~ke", by Kirnball. Ucctronic Product%. rcprintcd

SIABILIZER HAVING 1 4 P L 7 CHOKES by Thorn- rt 11.. Bulletm No. L-552.
WITH Y O I - L I \ U R LWPEDANCE
CHARACERISTIC
1751 Inwenlor. JeRrrr M. Powell, &lurnbus, Ohm
Iator K+alec. 1EEE T r a n u c u o m on Mqncucr. vol.
- ~---
1731 Arngnee: U c b c Carpantian,
~ Cnlurnbur. Ohm MAG+. No. I. Mar. 1970.
1211 Appl. No.: IZO.Sl5 Der~gnTcchniqus for F e r r o r ~ n a n Trmsionnen
t by
Workman. Ir.. reprinted by r h o m u ct .I. Inc.. Bullctin
1221 Filed. Fcb. 11. lPUl No. L-551.
Cornp.llron of l n n n e r Circuiu lor Uu zn Fixed Frc.
quency iJninlempublc Power Supplies by Bratton and
Powell. Innmrnen! Society ofArncnc% 1%-76. In!cr.
national Conference m d L h i b n . Oct. 11-14. 1976.
Ref- Cited P n n o y kaminer-Williun H. Behr 11.
'.S. PATEKT W C U M E F m Allorne~.AApenr or Fim-Mueller md Smith
9/1%? l h w . IW ARTRACT
II/I%? Meunhimr
64961 b & I s ct al. . Power conditioning a p p . n t w puticululy suited lor
6l1961 Plow . computer l u i l i l i s and including non-linear input
UIW Flctchn CI d. c h o k a w n n a t i b l e wilh line power. T h e outputs o i the
l / I P X ) M-hrmcr CI d. . input c h o k s i r e ~ % d l y mgnctiu!ly
. coupled thmug?
!/I970 F r i c d M s a al. pnnury w i n d ~ n pl o pulse ururable r c u t o n o i a syn-
411974 h t h r --.-
9/1914 W&nm . lhcririnp network which includa Iupacitor hank and
opmls to synrhaire a u n w r v e output. Sen- tuned
OTHER PLTBLlCATlONS trap uc wuplcd lo the synth&r network to avozd
P n c t i u l Equivalent Circuiu lor E l e c v o n u b n i c De- rhe developmet of humonics above f u n d m e n d .
v i by~B i c g i T h e ElecMnic Engineer. Jun. 1967.
Sufc-?Aa.?ieiic Xtgulator-A Gun Io: ?owe? ti-
United States Patent r191 (111 Patent Kurnber: 4,544,877
Powell 1451 Date of Patent: Oct. 1. 1985

(541 P O W E R C O N D m O N l N C SYSTEM A N D PNmory Emminrr-Pctcr S . W o n g

APPARATUS Avrrranr Ezommer-Judron H . Jones
Arrorncy. Agcnr. or F~rm-Mucllcr and Smlth
(751 Invmtor: Jeffrey M. Powell. Gilena. O h i o
1571 ABSTRACT
(73) A m g n c c : Ueben Carpontion, Columbus, O h i o
Power c o n d i l ~ o n m gapparatus p r t i c u l a r l y rutted lor
[21] Appl. No: 5 1 0 . W cornpuler iacilittcs and including n o n - h e a r m p u ~
1221 Filed: Jul. 5. 1983 chokcs conncctablc with line power. Thcv c h o k n arc
struclured having a center leg conligurcd t o define a
[51] Inf Cl.' . G0SF 3/06
1521 us. a. .................................... 323/jos, 3 2 ~ 1 0 varylng gap havmg a narrowcst flux transfcr rcglon
located centrally wllh rerpecl t o a surroundmg rhcll
(581 Fieid ol Snrcb ....................... 353/44. 4. 20. 47.
structure. T h e g a p c o n f i g u r a l ~ o nexpands untiormi!
363/48. 64. 75. 90,91. I&. 171. 172; 123/214.
215. M6.307, 308. 361. 362. 232. 3 1 0 333/177, outwardly from l h ~ snarrowcst region. T h c outputs of
180. 307/7; 336/165. 178. 214. 215. 233, 234, thc input chokcs are x r > a l l y , rnagnct~cally coupled
212, 213. 217 through primary w n d m g s t o p u l x u l u r n b l c reactors a l
a synthcsiring nctwork which Includes a capacttor bank
[ w References Cited and operates to rynthcsirc a slnewavc oulput. T h c ca-
US. PATENT DOCUMENTS pacltancc valuer of thc c a p a c m r bank arc s e l e c l l v c l ~
dtstr~butcdbetwccn l h e pnmary, irolalion windmps and
1.353.711 9/1920 Bergman ......................... 336/165 X
the pulsc saturable secondary o r rcgulalor components
3243.65 )/I966 Feinberg et rl. ................... 336/165
4.305.033 12/1981 Powell ................................ 323/3M o l the synthesircr nctu.ork lo r c h ~ c v cimportant m.
provemenls in syrlrrn eficlency.
FORE!GN PATENT D O C U M E N T S
UB341 12/1934 United Kingdom ................361/17l 32 Clsimr. I 1 D n r i n g Figures
U.S. Patent OCL I , 1985 Sheet 1 of 3 4,544,877
 V
A-B

vB-C

1 ,:..
1 ( ,,,
-.-, D A T A W A V E MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER SATURATION SEQUENCE
I
 IEEE STD. 587 TESTING OF
LIEBERT POWER MANAGEMENT CENTERS

IEEE Standard 587 "Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits"
has recently been applied to power conditioning equipment as a performance
criterion. Some manufacturers have claimed that their power conditioning
products aeet IEEE Standard 587. However. using a power conditioning product
which conforms to IEEE 587 does not ensure that the product will solve any
power problems. Some understanding of what IEEE 587 requires may alleviate
some of the confusion.

The purpose of IEEE 587 was to characterize the surge voltages observed in
iuw-voltage k i power c:rcu:ta and :o devise a standardized surze test
representative of the observed surges. The standardized surge tests are
summarized in Table 1. There are two categories of surge tests based on the
equipment location inside the building: Category A, for long branch circuits
and outlets, and Category 0 , for major feeders and short branch circuits.
Additionally, the type of surge test for each category depends on the type of
device tested: High impedance devices are tested using a surge voltage: low
impedance devices are tested using a surge current. The sophisticated surge
generators available today automatically act as a voltage or current source.
depending upon the device impedance.

No equipment performance criteria are established in IEEE 587. Survivability

of the device under test to surges is all that is implied by meeting IEEE 587.
For power conditioning equipment which is expected to protect sensitive load
equipment from surges like IEEE 587, n o output criteria are specified in IEEE -
587. Also, IEEE 587 does not specify testing the devices with surges in all
the available common and normal modes.

Liebert Power Management Centers have been tested to IEEE 587 Categories A and
B, using both the ring wave and unidirectional wave surges. All tests were
conducted using Keytek Model 711AJ surge generators. Surges were inserted in
the common and normal modes. No Power Management Center failures were
observed. As a measure of the protection provided by Power Management Centers.
the output of the Power Management Centers was observed for any common or
normal mode disturbances caused by the input surges. Sample results are
attached for Category B 1.2 x 50 microsecond surge inputs.

As recommended by IEEE 587, all surge tests were conducted with the Power
Management Centers energized and the surges were injected randomly with respect
t o the power frequency.

Conclusions -
The Power Management Centers can survive the surge voltages expected on
low-voltage AC power circuits since no failures were observed when the unit was
subjected to numerous IEEE 587 Category A and B surges.

The Power Management Center is extremely effective in protecting sensitive

equipment from the surge voltages expected on low-voltage AC power circuits
since none, minimal, output disturbances were observed when IEEE 587
Category A and B surges were injected in common or normal modes on the input.
 Table 1
Surge Voltages and Currents Deemed to Represent the Indoor Environment
and Recommended for Use in Designing Protective Syatem
-
Enemy Uoule:)
-
TIP. D e ~ d l e ~n
d 1~ u p p r t u o r *
Compunblm t o LmpvLe o f spcdmen r l l b Clunpin; V o l ~ a t co f
LouUon 1 I C N o 884 Madlum E x v n n r n or Load MOV 1000V
&LIM Wrrrlotm Amplltudm &ult 0 2 0 V 8lmt.m) (UOV 8 ~ a t u n )

..- a x zolu S k~ t o w Impedmcef 40 ao

*Other rupvrr-on bmvln# d l l t e m n t clamplo; volla;n would rccclve dlffcrcnt c n e m l e n h .

t ~ o hlrh.(mvc&nee
r tot rpeclmew o r l o r d elrcul(.. thr voltage ahown repreaenu (he ~USIC voltage. lo rmldac h u L U o n tertr. Us*
(hat rrlua-for (he over14radt rollage o f t h e t a t gencrmtor.
or l o w 4 m p c d ~ c mtat rpcelmmu o r load drculll. (he current ahown n p r a e n l a (he dlrchule c u m n i o r (be #urW (not the abort-
&cult e u m n t o f the power rmiem). In m a h u h U o n test.. uw t h t current f o r the short-clrcult c u n e u t o f Lhe tat generator.
O T ~ . m a r l m u m unpUtud. (200 o r M)O A) b rpcclfied. but (he exact wmvefonn rill be bOuenccd b l the load chancterlrtler.

Fig 3
Fig 2 ~;iidirretion.l W a v e s h a p (ANSIIIEEE Std 28-1974)
Proposed 0.5 pr-lOO'Hz Ring Wave
(Open-Circuit Volme) ()I Open-Ciiit Waveform. (b) Dimcharge Current Waveform.
 DATAWAVE KAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER DEMONSTRATION

Liebert welcomes the opportunity to demonstrate the Datawave technology's

capabilities.

The Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer is a true three phase power synthesizer

which has significant performance advantages over other technolopies. The
Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer provides a more complete and cost effective
solution to computer power problems.

Input Voltage Regulation Ranee

The Datawave has a very broad input voltage range, rignificantly greater
than line voltage regulators and motor-generators. The broad input
voltage range allows the Datawave to protect the computer system from very
deep sags such as those caused when large loads are started. when ground
faults occur in the power system. or from lightning-related disturbances.
The Datawave can run through deep sags that other technologies would
consider an outage.

Typical Test Data Demonstration

No Load
-.,<-
.a,<

625V(+30%)
Vou:
215V(+3%)
Full Load 240V(-50%) 193V(-7%)
60% Load 192V(-60%) 196V(-6%)

Output Voltage Rezulation

Output voltage regulation is defined as the percent change in output

vcltage between no load and full output load. For a computer system it is
desirable that the output voltage not change as the system load changes.
With an isolation transformer. the output voltage will drop as the load is
increased due to the transformer impedance and the cable voltage drops.
The Datawave will regulate the output voltage as the load is Increased.

m ~ i c a lTest Data Demonstration

No Load
Pull Load
Vout
Tolerance to Nonlinear Loads

Computer systems are typically very nonlinear loads. The power source
should be able to supply the nonlinear current required by the computer
system without the voltage distortion exceeding the computer
specifications (5% THD). Because of the Datawave's low output impedance
at high frequencies. the Datawave is much better able to supply the
ccaputer'r n m l i n e a r ccrrent without voltage distortion than inductive
output devices such as isolation transformers and motor generators. The
Datawave will also prevent the nonlinear currents from affecting other
loads in the building because the Datawave's input current remains linear.

8..
s&ms
I.. ._. 3

I.. l.. U .
a I.. .. . ...

Shielded Transformer Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer

~~. ~~~ ~ ~ ~. ~~ ~
Overload Ca~abllity
It is important that computer power sources have the capability to supply
inrush and start-up currents demanded by the computer system. Some
technoloeies have little overload capability. The Datawave can supply
250% load.

Ty~icalTest Data Demonstration

a ~oad KVAOU~ a Load

200% 205Vt-1.5%)

Tolerance to Poor Power Factor Loads

Computer system loads are not unity power factor loads. Computer power
sources must be able to supply poor power factor loads without
compromising performance or reliability. The Datawave is not limited by
load power factor and can supply full rated KVA to any power factor load
(zero to unity power factor). Additionally. the Datawave's input power
factor is characteristic of the technology and not dependent on the load
power factor. The Datawave rill provide a nearly unity input power factor .
for any load, half to full load. which can avoid power factor penalties
assessed by many utilities.

?Joical Test Data Demonstration

Input
-
P.F.
.Q6
Output .60

Tolerance to Unbalanced Loads

Power sources supplying single phase computer equipment must be able to

handle unbalanced load conditions. Even if the loads are initially
balanced. turning off loads or adding loads rill cause a load current
imbalance. The Datawave can handle unbalanced loading continuously. even
100% unbalance (full load on one phase and no load on another).
Additionally.-rince the Datawave uses the input as source of energy to run
the three phase synthesizing network, the Datarave input currents remaln
balanced even though tbe output current is unbalanced.

Tyuical Test Data Demonstration

Output Currant
-
A
BOA
-
B
OA
rOA
Output Voltage 209V Z12V 211V
Input Current 15A 15A 15A
Input Spike and Transient Immunity

Because t h e Datawave's output voltage is synthesized from six pulses per

half cycle, the output voltage waveform i s independent from the input
waveform. High energy spikes and rineine transients on the input are not
r v l d m t on t h e output. The Datawave is a very effective solution where
spikes, noise, and voltage distortion are a problem.

Shielded Isolation Transformer

With Spike Suppression

Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer

Unbalanced Input Voltace (Single Phasine Capabilitv)

Uany power problems are associated with only one of the three phases: for
example. a single phase-to-ground fault, a utility reclosure. or a blown
fuse. A computer power conditioner should be able t o protect the computer
system from these severe voltage imbalances. The Datawave has the ability
to prcduct three phase output tven when on?y twc inrut phases src w a i l a b l *

Typical Test Data Demonstration

B c. -A -
B c
Input Voltage
A
3% 480V 300V Input Voltage
Input Current
-
-
output voltage 2 0 8 ~ 216V zdev Output voltage
- &hLiebert
1050 Dearborn Drive.PO. BOX 29186
Columbus.Ohlo 43229 USA
614-888-0246 Telex 246-655 LIEBERT W O G N

CUSTOMER SERVICE & SUPPORT

DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER CHECK-OUT

The following is a brief procedure to determine if the current design

Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer (one with forced-air cooling) is operating
properly. (For non-forced air cooled Datawaves, consult factory). This
procedure does not supersede the requirements for a thorough visual and
physical inspection to determine hot components, loose connections, etc.
Recommended practice is to record the values measured at start-up and at
each preventive maintenance visit for comparison purposes and trend
analysis.

When the Datawave is operating properly the output voltages (line-to-line

-
and line-to-neutral) and the internal capacitor currents should be
balanced. Refer to the attached typical Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer
schematidwiring diagrams. The capacitors are divided into four (4) three
phase capacitor banks. C1 through C4. C1 (secondary winding) and C4
(primary winding) are the main ferroresonant capacitor banks whose currents
oscillate in conjunction with the six saturating pulse transformers. C2
and C3 are capacitors associated with the second and third harmonic traps.
Under normal operation, the output pulses of the six saturating
transformers are combined to form a step-wave approximation of a sinewave
with the lowest significant harmonic being the 11th. The second and third
harmonic traps are used for dynamic conditions (such as start-up) to ensure
proper transformer saturation sequence for a sinewave output.

In order to.properly test the operation of the synthesize:, ensure that the
input voltage to the synthesizer is near nominal (within -5%) and
relatively balanced (within -3% of the average). To avoid any possible
effects of unbalanced loading or harmonic load currents, the unit should be
tested at-no load. Also, the unit should be tested at normal operating
temperature.

With a-true RMS voltmeter. measure the output voltages line-to-iine and
line-to-neutral. The output voltage should be balanced within -1% of the
average. The average should be within 3% of the nameplate output voltage

INPUT VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE

. .
World Leader in Computer Support Systems
Env~ronmentalControl Power Protect~on MonitonngControl
Page ... 2

With a true RXS clamp-on current meter. measure the current of each phase
of each capacitor bank. Refer to the synthesizer wiring diagram for
identification of capacitor wire numbers.
CZ currents can be measured on wires W141, W142, and W143 at the harmonic
traps TX11. TX12 and TX13.
C3 currents can be measured on wires W150. W151 and W152 at the harmonic
traps TX14. TX15 and TX16.
On 15 to 30 KVA units. C4 can be measured by clamping on all capacitor
wires connected to terminal 1 of transformers TX4. TX5 and TX6. On 50 to
150 KVA units. C4 can be measured on wires W156. W157 and W158 at the
capacitor busbars 94. 05 and 66. m- If parallel wire8 are used.
measure the current in all parallel wires simultaneou8ly to avoid suuing
errors.

The C1 capacitor current is sometimes difficult to measure directly due to

wire routing. For ease of measurement, the C1 plus the C2 and C3 currents
can be measured. NOTE- When comparing to the charted nominal values, be
sure to add the values given for C 1 , C2 and C3. On 15 to 30 KVA units.
measure the Cl+C2+C3 currents by clamping on all capacitor wires connected
to terminal 3 of transformers TX4. TX5 and TX6. On 90 to 150 KVA units
measure the Cl+C2+C3 currents on wires W115, W116 and W117 connected to
busbars 31. 02 and 83 and taiainal 3 09 transiormers PX4. TX5 and TX6.

The measured capacitor currents should be balanced within 1.5% or 1 amp

(whichever is greater). The percent unbalance equals the highest phase
minus the lowest phase divided by the average of the three phases times
100%. The average of the measured currents should be within 5% or 1 amp
(whichever is greater) of the nominal value listed in the attached
chart(s1.

PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
AVERAGE -
If outp<t voltage or capacitor currents are out of tolerance check for
failed capacitors. faulty wiring or other failed components.
 60 HZ DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZERS
YOMINAL CAPACITOR CURRENTS AT NO LOAD

KVA Vin Vout

15 208 208
480 '
.
8
0
2
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208
<

30 208 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

50 208 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

75 208 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

100 208 208

480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
i40 208

208- 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

208 208
480 208'
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

- -
vA-B

vB-C

D A T A W A V E MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER SATURATION SEQUENCE

I '+ I t t t

i
ril ~--
 FOR:
-
MINI CENTER REV. DATE 92iO?/89
?

-
-

(? MAIN POWER WIRING DIAGRAM

STANDARD 512121, REV. 1

MAIN CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM

W/O MONITORING 1D14577, REV. 2
W/ VCMP 511601, REV. 1

OPTIONS
R.E.P.O. lC15091, REV. 0
SPIKE SUPPRESSOR
W/ TRANSFORMER AUX 2006, REV. 0
W/O TRANSORMER AUX 2009, REV. 0

GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT 1C19411, REV. 0

e PHASE LOSS/PHASE ROTATION 1C18273, REV. 1

 v
-
FOR: PRECISION POWER REV. DATE: 02-91-92 ;

1 ADDITIONAL UNIT 511584. REV. 0

2 - 4 UNITS 511582, REV. 0
1 ADDITIONAL UNIT W/O PANELBOARDS W/ 2 OUTPUT BREAKERS 511583, REV. 0

1 FEEDER - 1 OR 2 PANELBOARDS 1C17042, REV. 0

2 FEEDERS - 2 PANELBOARDS (DUAL INPUT) 1C17043, REV. 0
FOR :
-
- REV. DATE: 02-01-89

NO MONITORING, W/ XFMR 1D14056, REV. 3

NO MONITORING, W/O XFMR 1D14057, REV. 3

VCMP, W/ XFMR 511599, REV. 0

VCMP, W/O XFMR 511600, REV. 1

VCFMP, W/ OR W/O LDC 1D20126, REV. 2

IGH, W/ XFMR 511598, REV. 0

IGM, W/O XFMR 511602, REV. 1

W t i l N i PO# ZUH W/ VtilMP, k b W @UF'@LY kUX=OBd@, REV: 2

DO NOT GIVE AUX IF IT HAS SITEMASTER 200
OPTIONS
SPIKE SUPPRESSOR
WITH XMFR: 10-50 KVA REV.
75-125 KVA REV.
150-225 KVA --
REV.
W/O XFMR: 10-50 KVA REV.
75-125 KVA REV,
150-225 KVA REV.

PHASE ROTATION/PHASE LOSS 1C18273, REV. 1

2 OR 3 PANELBOARD - ALARM OR SHUTDOWN
GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT 511581, REV. 1
2 AND 3 PANELBOARD - ALARM OR SHUTDOWN
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE CO-3001, REV. 0

REP0 CO-2000, REV. 2

FOR: nATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER REV 2 0 2 - 0 1 - 8 9
- 0 KVA. CONDITIONING ALONE OR SE1,F CONTAINED

M A I NPOWERChoose one)
STANDARD UNIT REV 0

UNIT WITH BYPASS OPTION, REV 2

CONTROL W I R I N G ( C h o o s e one)
NOTE: FOR UNITS W/IGM AND VCMP, INCLUDE REV 2

NO MONITORING, 208 VOLTS OUT REV 3

NO MONITORING, 390 THRU 5 7 5 VOLTS OUT REV 3
VCMP MONITORING, 208 VOLTS OUT REV 3
VCMP MONITORING, 380 THRU 575 VOLTS OUT REV 3
IGM MONITORING, 208 VOLTS OUT REV 2
IGM MONITORING, 380 THRU 575 VOLTS OUT REV 2
NOTE; FOR IGM & VCMP SUPPLY REV. 2

OPTIONAL (Choose accordingly)

PHASE LOSS/PHASE ROTATION MONITOR (ALARM STD.)
REV 1
GROUND OVERCURRENT RELAY REV 1
BYPASS TRANSFORMER
I N NEMA ENCLOSURE REV 4
I N DECORATIVE ENCLOSURE REV 3
REMOTE EMERGENCY POWER OFF(R.E.P.0.) REV 2

TRANSIENT SUPRESSION PLATE REV 0

FOR: DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER
- KVA OH "CONDITIO-

M A I N(choose one)
STANDARD UNIT 511594, REV 0
UNIT WITH BYPASS 511595, REV 0
M A I N (choose one)
NOTE: FOR UNITS W/IGM AND V C M P , INCLUDE AUX-2059, REV 2
NO MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT REV 0
NO MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 1
VCMP MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT REV 0
VCMP MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 1
IGM MONITORING 2 0 8 VOLTS OUT REV 0
IGM MONITORING 2 0 9 VOLTS OUT W/ BYPASS REV 1

NO MONITORING 3 9 0 - 5 7 5 VOLTS OUT REV 0

NO MONITORING 3 8 0 - 5 7 5 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 1
VCMP MONITORING 3 8 0 - 5 7 5 VOLTS OUT REV 0
VCMP MONITORING 3 8 0 - 5 7 5 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 1
IGM MONITORING 3 8 0 - 5 7 5 VOLTS OUT REV 0
IGM MONITORING 3 8 0 - 5 7 5 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 0
OPTIO N A LEgnIPMENTchoo(choose accordingly)
PHASE LOSS/PHASE ROTATION MONITOR
ALARM OR SHUTDOWN REV 1
GROUND OVERCURRENT RELAY REV 1
BYPASS TRANSFORMER
NEMA ENCLOSURE REV 4
DECORATIVE ENCLOSURE REV 3
REMOTE EMERGENCY POWER OFF (R.E.P.O.) REV 2
TRANSIENT SUPRESSION PLATE REV 0
SUBFEED CIRCUIT BREAKER REV 3
 c-
(DATAWAVE)
v
FOR. POWER MANAGEMENT CENTER REV. DATE 02-31-3:
CONDITIONING ALONE OR SFLF 100- 150 KV4

SC 2-4 PANELBOARD W/BYPASS REV. 0

SC 2-4 PANELBOARD REV. 0
CA STANDARD (1 OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER) REV. O
CA W/ BYPASS REV. O

W/O MONITORING 208/120V OUT REV. 0

W/O MONITORING 380/575V OUT REV. 0

W/O MONITORING W/BYPASS 208/120V OUT REV. 1
W/O MONITORING W/BYPASS 380/575V OUT REV. 1
W/VCMP 208/120V OUT REV. 0
W/VCMP 380/575V OUT REV. 0
W/VCMP W/BYPASS 208/120V OUT REV. 1
W/VCMP W/BYPASS 380/575V OUT REV. 1
W/IGM 208/120V OUT REV. 0
W/IGM 380/575V OUT REV. 0
W/IGM W/BYPASS 208/120V OUT REV. 1
W/IGM W/BYPASS 380/575V OUT REV. L
NOTE: FOR UNITS W/IGM AND VCMP, INCLUDE AUX-2059, REV. 2

MODULES TOGETHER STANDARD 1C12758, REV. 1

MODULES SPLIT 1C12759. REV. 1
OPTIONS
PHASE LOSS/PHASE ROTATION MONITOR (ALARM STD.)
ALARM OR SHUTDOWN lC18273. REV. 1
GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT - SHUTDOWN (STD) 511581, REV. 1
BYPASS TRANSFORMER W/NEMA ENCLOS. AUX-2030, REV. 4
BYPASS TRANSFORMER W/DECORATIVE ENCLOS. 1C17038.
- - - ~~
REV. 3
REP0 CO-2000~ REV. 2
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE CO-3001; REV. 0
(RIGM) WITH LIEBERT UPS DWG. 1C17DG0, REV. L

CABINET DATA FOR (HIGH) DWG. 1Cl6999, REV. 9

IN- (CHOOSE ONE)
MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM (RIGM) 380/575 VOLTS DWG. 1D16997, REV. 3
MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM (RIGM) 208 DWG. 5D11070, REV. 1

(RIGM) FOR POWER CONDITIONING UNITS DWG. 1D16999, REV. 0

CABINET DATA FOR (RIGMI DWG. 1C16998, REV. 0
&SO U C U (CHOOSE ONE)
MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM (RIGM) 380/575 VOLTS DWG. 1D16997, REV. 3
MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM (RIGM) 208 VOLTS DWG. 5D11070, REV. 1

(RIGM) WITH LIEBERT UPS (415 HZ)

MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM DWG. 1D20118, REV. O
INSTALLATION DATA DWG. 1D20119, REV, 0

OABXNET DATA DWG. 1016998, REV. 0

MODEL NUMBER FOR (RIGM) (5010047)

UNIT W/O TRANSFORMER 7

UNIT W/ TRANSFORMER
I
.
,
.
-- It
7--
mrnm
A

1.
I"'
--N
:
9
j.
I
-"I""
- ..
F:g.-..~:f
d. :
,..-..-....-
,.-..-..-.
"
:.'"-
..-..-.. ..-(.A
7 -
 INTERFACE CHASSIS :
d I

,,.lrnWoulMauu
1- 6 ml ,I- rm -1- gH, LE- FIELD 5 U P c e
.ma ",I\
..*,Srn,YPIO(Y*lWIL E? .~R!HGF??EI.SUWIILO
""!""""[:""*! 2'22% M YIRI- rim SWPLIEU
i i i
dm-
YTIRATwY
CnUGE
(CORE Y TURATED)
I
 bLiebert
Power Conditions/Problems
(-

... - -

Causes
---... ! , .
Cornouter Svrnotoms
, .

ladlo rransm~ss:c~~ I !nc:rre~: ::2; :r::~.+,

iormal computer operarlon / f i l m CPL :3 C S r 5''S:i
\rclna contacts 3r "r.lTer
T~,~,,,~ ?..:.<
.~ghtiinp. q p ~ :5.:pti: :a'acare
'oor grounding and sheldlnC
. .
dorma computer operaton Process~ng?!%rs
jw~tch~ng power supplies 1ncor:ec: aaia :rzls'e
lower line moauatlon :rsm CPV to m e w r ,
?qulpment (I e S I ~ W W " Pr;n:s. v :erm;:a
:locks1 errors
Uotor speed conirollers.
jwltchng loads on or 3tl Incorrec: data on a 1 5 6i'
vormal computer operation tapes
:suit ciearlng
: Processtic errors
~rn!er o::erm,x
errors
i Haraware oamage
S u n 0 faults. ' Comnc!e' sysie-
Start~nglarge loam , crasnes
Inadequate power System / H a m a r e oamage
capacity I
Utlllty sw~tchlng
ut111tyequipment fallure
Lighln!ng
-
i
Rap16ioaa reduction I Hardware damaoe
Utlllty SwltChlnQ

:s the dellnltior 2f outage as seen by most c o n s u t e a U i ~ i i t ycompanies

usually a e f ~ l eoutage as a zero-vol! coid!tlor lasting longer than h e nlrutt!s
 hLiebert
- Power Problems

HARDWARE INPUTIOUTPUT SYMPTOMS

PROBLEMS DEFINITIONS j AFFECTED

SPIKES 200-400% of the rated RMS : CPU, Disk, Program stops.

voltage or higher. ! Tape Incorrect data on disk or tape.
Duration-0.5-200 rnicro- Printer prints garbage.
seconds. I
I

TRANSIENTS .2-5 kHz or higher.

Duration-up to one cycle.
' CPU. Disk
Tape
Program stops.
Incorrect data on d~sksor
tapes.
Hardware damage.

SAGS Voltages below 80-85% of CPU, Disk, Computer system crashes.

nominal. Tape
Duration-4-60 cycles.

I SURGES Voltages above 110% of CPU, Disk, Hardware damage.

nominal. Tape i
Duration-4-60 cycles.

I 1
I I
i NOISE Superimposed on the CPU, Disk Incorrect data transfer from 1
sinewave. CPU to disk or tape. I
Terminal or printer display
Amplitude-5-10 volts.
garbage. !
-

~
I DISTORTION A change in the shape of the CPU. Disk, System can crash. I
smewave. Can affect voltage or Tape Communications problem
current wave shape. between CPU and peripheral i
equipment. I

I
A zero volt condition lasting CPU, Disk, System crashes. I!
lonqer than a half cycle. Tape
Below 80-85% of rated RMS.
2-60 second auto-correction.
15 minute to 4 hour manual
 Power Problems: S p i k e s I P h a s e Lose/Surges/Sags

( , S p i k e s = 200-400% of r a t e d RMS v o l t a g e o r h i g h e r f o r s h o r t d u r a t i o n .
,'
T r a n s i e n t s = 2-5Khz o r h i g h e r / d u r a t i o n up t o ( '1 ) c y c l e .
S a g s = Voltage 8 0 4 5 % below nominal v l o t a g e .
S u r g e = Voltage above 110% of nominal.
Noise = Superimposed on sinewave.
D i s t o r t i o n = A change i n t h e s h a p e of t h e sinewave.
Outage = T o t a l power o u t a g e .

Common Mode of n o i s e = Impulse & EM1 - RF on any p h a s e t o ground.

Normal Mode n o i s e = Phase t o phase.

Mini-Center/Precision Power/Accomadate/Datawave(PMC) Power Managenent C e n t e r

A l l ( 4 ) types provide e l e c t r i c a l isolation.

Non-Re4ulatin4
Mini-Center Isolation against noise,
P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r some i s o l a t i o n a g a i n s t s p i k e s

Requlatinq
Accomadate I1 = s i n g l e phase
Power Management C e n t e r (Datawave)

Mini-Center s i z e s = 1 5 , 3 0 & 5OKva

P r e c i s i o n Power C e n t e r = 50 - 225Kva
- hccomadate I1 = 7 . 5 & lOKva
(x Datawave (PMC) = 15,20,30,50,75Kva (one frame s i z e ) 100,125 & l5OKva s p l i t c a b .

Model No%
:
Mini-Center:
L L = w/xfmr
LR = wo/xfmr

P r e c i s i o n Power Center:
PP = w/xfmr
PR = wolxfmr

Accomadate:
SP = S i n g l e phase

Oatawave (PMC): Oatawaves have ( 7 ) t r a n s f o r m e r s & ( 9 ) i n d u c t o r s ( c h o k e s ) .

CA = C o n d i t i o n i n g Only = No i n d i v i d u a l l o a d d i s t r i b u t i o n , ( 1 ) o u t p u t b r k .
SC = S e l f c o n t a i n e d = I n d i v i d u a l l o a d d i s t r i b u t i o n o u t p u t b r e a k e r s .

I n t e r f a c e b o a r d s w i l l be on a l l u n i t s f o r s h u n t - t r i p .
Datawave 2nd & 3 r d harmonic t r a p s a r e used f o r i n i t i a l c o r r e c t s a t u r a t i o n o r
s i n g l e phase l o s e . Harmonics w i l l h e l p m a i n t a i n 3 p h a s e o u t p u t w i t h a Lost
i n p u t phase. Unit c a n m a i n t a i n 60% l o a d f o r l o n g p e r i o d s of t i m e w i t h a l o s t
i n p u t phase. Zig-Zag t r a n s f o r m e r g e n e r a t e s n e u t r a l . Wound 120 d e g r e e s a p a r t
e l e c t r i c a l y t o e q u a l phase v o l t a g e .
1%change i n f r e q u e n c y = 1-1.2 v o l t change i n o u t p u t .
Frequency g o e s u p = v o l t a g e g o e s down.
Frequency g o e s down = v o l t a g e g o e s down.
 Phase r o t a t i o n must be c o r r e c t (ABC) f o r c o r r e c t o p e r a t i o n of Datawave.
F- Temperature S e n s o r s :
1 LL & PP models = Alarm @ 180c Shutdown ( s h u n t - t r i p ) 200c
\
white wires = 180c r e d w i r e s = 200c
Temp. s e n s o r s c o n t a c t s a r e n o r m a l l y c l o s e d (N.c.)

SP model = Alarm @ 1 6 0 c Shutdown @ 180c

yellow l e a d s = l6Oc brown l e a d s = 180c
C o n t a c t s a r e normally open (N.O.), connected i n p a r r a l e l l

SC & CA models = Alarm @ l6Oc Shutdown @ 1 8 0 c

blue l e a d s = l 6 0 c white l e a d s = 180c
C o n t a c t s a r e n o r m a l l y c l o s e d (N.C.), connected i n s e r i e s

CONTROL W I R I N G :
First (.5 .) t e r m i n a l s on low v o l t a s e t e r m i n a l . s t r i p a r e a l l t h e same on a l l
-

models. T e r m i n a l s 1 & 2 must have a jumper between them i f customer is u s i n g

a normally open (N.O.) remote EPO (REPO).
S i t e m a s t e r c o n n e c t i o n s can a l s o b e wired t o low v o l t a g e t e r m i n a l s t r i p ( 2 )
c o n n e c t i o n s , b l a c k / r e d w i r e s term. #18 b l k . 8 t e r m . #19 r e d s i g n a l is t 5 v .

LEVELS OF M O N I T O R I N G :
Level 0 = No monitoring = c o n t r o l v o l t a g e l e v e l = 24vdc
Level 1 = VcnP o n l y = c o n t r o l v o l t a g e l e v e l s = ~ 1 5 v d c& 5vdc
Level 2 = I G n o n l y = c o n t r o l v o l t a g e l e v e l s = 24vdc t l 5 v d c & +5vdc
Level 3 = VCMP 8 I G i l = c o n t r o l v o l t a g e l e v e l s = t 2 4 v d c , t_lSvdc & t5vdc
A l l l e v e l s w i l l have t h e i n t e r f a c e board.
(-
, I n t h e c a r d c a g e f i r s t ( 4 ) c a r d s from r i g h t t o l e f t a r e t h e I G M c a r d s - n e x t
( 6 ) c a r d s a r e f o r LDA ( 5 ) c o u n t i n g t h e i n t e r f a c e b o a r d .

ALARM INFORMATION:
Output Undervoltage = -13%
Output ~ v e r v o l t a g e= +6%
Output O v e r c u r r e n t = any ( 1 ) p h a s e 95% of c a p a c i t y
O v e r t e m p e r a t u r e = l 6 0 c t o 180c
Frequency D e v i a t i o n
Ground O v e r c u r r e n t
Ground System F a u l t y = > 3 ohms impedancce d i f f e r a n c e between I / O & ground
Ground F a i l u r e = > 5 ohms impedance d i f f e r a n c e between I / O & ground
Phase R o t a t i o n o r Phase Loss
Water Under F l o o r
Unit I n By-Pass node ( o p t i o n a l Datawave Only)
Emergency Shutdown (EPO o r REPO)
S e c u r i t y Alarm

F 8 f u s e blown = no f a n o p e r a t i o n on c a r d c a g e c i r c u i t - no EPO l i g h t on.

FUSE L A Y O U T :
A B C X Y Z S T P S ST = S h u n t - t r i p PS = Power Supply
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 On some u n i t s F9 - F l 1 a r e f o r f a n s

On some u n i t s w i t h f u s e l a y o u t s t a g g e r e d F4 i s S h u n t - t r i p . (F5-F8 s t a g g e r e d )
i Never remove F7 o r S h u n t - t r i p f u s e w i t h u n i t r u n n i n g . ( T r i p s i n p u t b r e a k e r )
L-
 LDA ( L i n e O i s t u r b a n c e A n a l y z e r ) :
C o n t a i n s ( 8 ) b o a r d s i n t h e l a s t ( 6 ) s l o t s of t h e c a r d c a g e ( 2 ) b o a r d s piggy-
CI backed.
1. C l o c k / B a t t e r y Ram
2. Micro P r o c e s s o r Ed.
3. I n p u t Impulse Assembly ( 2 ) c a r d s = Analog 8 D i g i t a l .
d . Output Impulse Assembly ( 2 ) c a r d s = Analog 8 D i g i t a l .
5 . I n p u t Sag/Surge c a r d
6 . Output Sag/Surge c a r d

Cannot have an LDA w i t h o u t an I G M board i n s t a l l e d .

Factory Set Points f o r Impulse = 5DO v o l t s above nominal.
Factory Set Points f o r Sag = -15% of nominal.
Factory Set Points f o r S u r g e = +7% of nominal.
Factory Set Points f o r OV = +6% of nominal.
Factory Set Points f o r U V = -13% of nominal.

LDA'S a r e normally used w i t h S i t e s c a n ?. S i t e m a s t e r

LDA Report: ( f o r e v e r y o c c u r r a n c e )
x p e r o c c u r r a n c e p r i n t o$ s a g s , surges ?. impulse.
LO4 Power A n a l y s i s Summary: ( p a s t 24 h o u r s )
x T o t a l number of s a g s , s u r g e s 8 i m p u l s e s f o r l a s t 2 4 h r s . o r s i n c e l a s t
summary.
x Automatically a t midnight.
X Upon r e q u e s t

l l i c r o - P r o c e s s o r is t h e same a s I G M e x c e p t f o r E-Prom.
L D A ' s 8 IGM's communicate w i t h s i t e s c a n 8 s i t e m a s t e r .
i-
'.. I S e r v i c e t e r m i n a l c a n b e used t o change f a c t o r y set p o i n t s f o r i m p u l s e , s a g
and s u r g e s e t t i n g s .
S e r v i c e Terminal = can r e s e t a l a r m s without having t o shutdown t h e u n i t . It
can a l s o change t h e a l a r m p a r a m e t e r s .

( 4 ) B a s i c F u n c t i o n s of S e r v i c e Terminal:
x Monitor = L-L, L-N
x C o n t r o l = C o n t r o l s LDA f a c t o r y s e t p o i n t s
x D i a i g n o s t i c s = Does test of c a r d c a g e b o a r d s ( a l s o r e s e t s a l a r m s )
x Review = Reviews a l l of t h e a l a r m s ( c h e c k s a l l a l a r m s 8 r e p e a t s s e v e r a l
t i m e s t o check a c t u a l a l a r i n s .

E-PROM SERIES:
x 1st s e r i e s : G-280-X = " X u is a l e t t e r used t o d e s i g n a t e E-Prom p o s i t i o n on
c i r c u i t board. Designed f o r i n t r o d u c t i o n of I G M .
x 2nd s e r i e s : G-309-X = " X u i s a l e t t e r used t o d e s i n a t e E-Prom p o s i t i o n on
c i r c u i t board. Designed f o r a d d i t i o n og L O & .
x 3 r d s e r i e s : G-309-X-Rev. A = " X " is a l e t t e r used t o d e s i g n a t e E-Prom p o s i t i o n
on c i r c u i t b o a r d . Oesigned t o c l e a r up alarm promblems on G-309 s o f t w a r e .
x 4 t h s e r i e s : 020-XXXX = " X X X X " a r e numbers used t o d e s i g n a t e E-Prom p o s i t i o n .
Designed for communications t o S i t e m a s t e r 100.
x St h s e r i e s : lCl6849PXX = " X X " d e s i g n a t e s E-Prom p o s i t i o n . Designed f o r
communications w i t h s i t e m a s t e r 200.
 TROUBLING SHOOTING TIPS:
('- \ Always V e r i f y :
\ x Fuses
x Power S u p p l y V o l t a g e s a r e c o r r e c t
x E-Prom series c o r r e c t
x Proper Plug Connections
x PCB's a r e s e a t e d p r o p e r l y
x P r o p e r h i g h & low v o l t a g e w i r i n g
x C o r r e c t t a p p i n g on In'put t r a n s f o r m e r

COMMON SHUNT TRIP FAILURES: ( S t a r t - u p )

x T e r m i n a l s 1 8 2 on LVTS(1ow v o l t a g e t e r m i n a l s t r i p ) a r e open. (N.C. REPO)
x F a i l e d i n p u t b r e a k e r = v e r i f y by removing s h u n t t r i p wires t o b r e a k e r (W317
a n d W316 on i n t e r f a c e b o a r d ) . (Term. 20 & 2 1 on LVTS) a n d t r y t o r e s t a r t u n i t
x Open g l a s s f u s e on i n t e r f a c e b o a r d ( F 1 )
x Open Shutdown temp. s e n s o r . V e r i f y by p l a c i n g jumper a c r o s s r e a r s p a d e
c o n n e c t i o n s 1 6 8 17 on i n t e r f a c e Bd. 8 t r y t o r e s t a r t
x Open f u s e F7 ( u s u a l l y r e d s t i c k e r e d ) u n i t w i l l r e s t a r t f o l l o w i n g f u s e f a i l u r e
b u t no EPO a v a i l a b l e and t r a n s f o r m e r o v e r t e m p . i l l u m a n a t e d
x Miswired o r d e f e c t i v e o p t i o n )GFCI, P h a s e R o t a t i o n / L o s s
x Output d i s p l a y g a r b l e d o r i r r a t i c , c h e c k f o r b a d t 5 v d c power s u p p l y o r t 5 v d c
power s u p p l y c o u l d need c a l i b r a t i n g
x I r a t t i c f a l s e a l a r m s = + 5 v d c power s u p p l y

TYPICAL OPTIONS O N POWER UNITS:

x L i g h t n i n g A r r e s t o r s = C a p a c i t o r s t i e d i n p a r r a l l e l w i t h main AC i n p u t
x Spike Supression
x High/Low V o l t a g e s = J-Box, u s u a l l u y u n d e r c o m p u t e r room f l o o r
x Input/output Cables
x GFCI ( w i t h C T ' s ) GFCI = Ground F a u l t C i r c u i t I n t e r u p t
x Floor Stands 8 Levelers
x Phase R o t a t i o n / L o s s u n i t s
x S i t e r m a s t e r 100 o r 2 0 0
x 1GM;s - VCMP7s I G M = ( I n f o r m a t i o n G a t h e r i n g Module) UCMP = ( V o l t s , C u r r e n t
Monitoring P a n e l )
x By-Pass S w i t c h (Datawave o n l y )
* By-Pass T r a n s f o r m e r (Datawave o n l y )
 VOLTAGE PH HZ
WOE
208 3 60 C
230 3 60
D
616 3 60
E
160 3 60 A
575 3 . 60 1
208/230 3 60 Y

200 3 M J
230
380
3
3
M
50
n
t
.
Q O 3 sa U
&I5 -3 50 G
200/230 3 50 I
3801620 .3
1m AND
SITEMASmR NO DATA AVAILABLE XI! SITEMASTER
' NO CCWIUNICATION AT SEWICE
TERMINAL
DISPLAY EXrr LEGIBLE AT SIEWSTEF

O SECURE/REPLACE
CABLING

STATUS
PANEL
UNIT 03NPINUWg,Y/Ca3ASIONWY
SHUNT TRIPS
OBSERVED
Corn=

S I r n r n R FExcm AND P R I m
ARE W ZEROS
NO DATA AVAILAD'LE
INCORRECT DATA DISPLAYED
O 60 HZ READCWT UNSTABLE
LRJDCRVOLTAGE ALARM ON

sI'- REACOVTAND P r u J J m n
m AIL z m s
O NO DATA AVAILABLE
IMPROPER CDWJNICATION mni
SITEMASER

-- -

O
NO DATA AVAIzGIE AT SI-

O NO OATA AVAILABLE
 SITEMASTER TROU8LESHOOTlNG GUIDE

CHECK IGM ON LINE

CHECK ICH FUNCTION WITH SERVICE TERMINAL -
CHECK COMMUNICATIONS CABLE CONNECTIONS
CHECK CABLE POLARITY
CHECK W L E INTEGRITY
CHECK C M . PCB OPTION JUMPER
REPLACE C O M N I C A T I O N S PC8

RE-INITIALIZE S I T E W T E R
CHECK IGll VNITS ON LINE. ,
CHECK CABLE CONNECTIONS
INTERnITTEM
DATA RE-INSERT COFW PCB (POWER OFF)
/

CHECK POWER-ON
CHECK CABLE
CHECK PCUER SUPPLY .
NO REPLACE UP PCB. EPROM PC8
DISPLAY
REPLACE DISPLAY
.
CHARACTER
FAULTY . REPLACE DISPLAY

CHECK W L E
RE-INITIALIZE SITEMASTER 1
REPLACE UP PCB, E P R W PC8

L-
NO
RESPONSE .
I JOARO
CHECK U B L E
REPLACE UP. EPROM PC8
 I G M 5 PHASE LIGHT OLPT ON DELTA L.E.D.
O ALL FEN33jT.S ARE ZERO AT SERVICE
ERMIN4L.
ZEFO COLT AND CLREM7 REACCUT
lU3XUT MXV?Z ON INPVT VOLTAGES
(208/120/120)

SITEMASTER
AND
P D U
 PRODUCT DESIGN DISCUSSION
DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZERS

The Datawave Magentic Synthesizer is a packaged power center for use with
sensitive electronic systems. The Datawave combines power conditioning,
monitoring. distribution and control in a single package in which the
power conditioning element is the Liebert-exclusive magnetic synthesizer.
The Datawave is manufactured under US Patents 4,305.033 and 4.544,877
{abstract attached). The synthesizer regenerates an output waveform
independent of the input waveform to protect the sensitive load from
common mode disturbances, normal mode spikes, imyulses, transisnts and
noise. sags, surges. and waveform distortion. For specifications, refer
to the Datawave Technical Data Manual.

The output waveform is generated by combining the pulses from six

interconnected saturating pulse transformers. The pulse of each
transformer is determined by the physical construction of the transformer
(core geometry and windings) which limits the available volt-seconds. The
attached saturation sequence shows how the six pulse transformers (labeled
TX1-TX6) produce three-phase sinusoidal output voltages. The pulse
identifications (1A. 10, 2A. 28. etc.) on the attached saturation sequence
diagram correspond to the pulse transformer windings (TX1. TX2, etc.).
Note that TX1 to TX3 have multiple windings on the same core and are
labeled " A " and "0" (1A. 10, etc. I .

During normal operation, energy is constantly oscillating between the main

capacitor banks (C1. C4) and the pulse transformer cores (TXl - TX6).
This ferroresonance ensures that the cores go into hard saturation and
produce the desired voltage pulses. Since multiple transformer cores are
used, a single critical value of capacitance is not required. The amount
of capacitance becomes more of an energy-handling consideration. In fact.
as a matter of practical design, multiple capacitors are used which allow
for 10 to 20% of the capacitance to be removed and normal operation
continued. The large capacitor bank directly connected to the output of
the Datawave also allows the Datawave to supply the non-linear current
requirements of aodern data processing loads without causing added voltage
waveform distortion.

Three large non-linear line chokes (TX7 - TX9) are used to isolate the
synthesizing network (with regulated output voltage) from the utility. In
other words. the variable impedance of the line chokes allows the pulse
transformers to operate at a voltage level different from the utility
input voltage, essentially converting the utility from a constant voltage
source to a current source which drives the saturating pulse transformer
network.

Common mode isolation is obtained since the input is electrically isolated

from the output. The pulse transformers have isolated primary and
secondary windings with multiple electro-static shields. With the bypass
option, the common mode isolation of the synthesizer is maintained because
the output neutral is switched and the isolation of allcircuit conductors
is maintained.
DATAWAVE DISCUSSION
Page -2-
-

The output of the pulse transformer network is a regulated. three-phase.

delta voltage source. A zig-zag transformer (TXIO) is used to derive a
neutral. The neutral is utilized for grounding purposes and for output
line-to-neutral loads. One practical benefit of this approach is the
ability of the snythesizer to supply unbalanced loads while maintaining
120' phase separation.

The remaining magnetic elecments of the synthesizer are 2nd harmonic traps
(TX11 - TX13) and 3rd harmonic treps (TX14 - TY16). These trans a r e nnt
used. as expected. to filter the output voltage waveform under normal
operation. Under normal operation. the stepwave-generated sinusoidal
output voltage has the 11th harmonic as its lowest order harmonic
component. However, at start-up before the saturation sequence becomes
stabilized, the harmonic traps become important to force the synthesizer
into the desired saturation sequence. Any saturation sequence other than
the one previously described produces an output waveform which has
significant 2nd and/or 3rd harmonic components.

The Datawave provides a comprehensive solution to all power disturbances

except for outages. For input surges (impluses, spikes or transients).
the synthesizing action virtually ignores the input voltage waveform. The
input surges are blocked by the large input chokes and the saturating
pulse transformers. As an option, a secondary class thyrite valve surge
arrestor can be included which adds supplementary surge protection from
high voltage surges which might otherwise damage the insulation and wiring
of the Datawave. Attached is a discussion and typical testing of the
Datawave to the input surges specified in ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (formerly IEEE
5 8 7 ) . Isolation of the Datawave is in excess of l2Q dB for both conmon
and normal mode transients.

Included is a copy of the Datawave demonstration which is routinely

offered to prospective customers. Demonstration facilities are located in
Columbus and six other locations nationwide. The demonstration tests
allow witnessing of the Datawave's characteristics first hand for those
who find its outstanding performance too hard to believe.

There are over 6000 Datawaves in use around the world supporting computer
systems from virtually every major computer manufacturer. Within its KVA
range, it is believed to be the most commercially successful power
conditioning product. Selected user lists can be furnished upon request.
Although major computer vendors have avoided approving power conditioning
manufacturers, the Liebert Datawave enjoys favorable status on most
computer vendor's informal list of recommended suppliers. In addition.
Liebert Datawaves are used by major computer vendors in their own
facilities.
DATAWAVE DISCUSSION
Page -3-

Datawaves are designed to be very reliable. The electronics are used for
monitoring only and failure of the electronics does not affect the power
conditioning. The synthesizer, discussed previously. consists only of
magnetics and capacitors. The magnetics are designed for a 62 year llfe
using Class H. 220'C insulation with copper conductors operating at
temperatures below 160'C. The capacitors are self-healing metalized
polypropylene AC capacitors, specially dcsigned for the application by
General Electric. Failure rate, calculations by GE indicate an expected
failure rate of one capacitor per unit every nine years. Field experience
indicates an MTBF of the Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer in excess of 1
million hours.
' , /'

.-
. , United States Patent ~ 9 1
\
Powell- (451 Dec. 8. 1981

POLYPHASE F E R R O R E O N A > T VOLTAGE "Sptks". by Kirnb.11. U a t r o n i c Products. rcprsnted

STABILIZER HAVIYG l N P b 7 CHOKES
WITH HOS-LINEAR IMPEDANCE
Inventor: Jeffrey M. Po-dl, b l u m b u ~Ohio
by Tnomrr et a!.. Bullct~nNo. I-552.
IEEE T r a n n c r ~ o n on
s M a g n e t i s rol. MAG-7, No 1.
pp. 571-574 Scp. 1971.
I a o r Kaialcc. I E E E Tranvctiom on Magncuu. "01.
-
A F e d b a c k G a n l r o l l c d Fcrroraonant V a l u a c R e m .
0~

Assignee: U e b c n Colpontion. b l u m b u s . Ohm M A G 4 No. I. Mar. 1970.

Appl. No.: 1W5lS h ~ g Tcchniqucr
n Tor Fcrrorcsonan~Trsnsiormen by
Workman. Jr.. r c p r i n t d by T h o m u et al. In:.. Bullctm
Elad: Fee. 11. 1#0 No. L-551.
a m p a r i s a n of l n n n e r Circuiu for U u m Fiicd F r e
qucncy U n i n t e m p u b l c P o v c r Supplin by Bratton and
Powell. h s t ~ m e n Societyl of A m e n c a 154-76. 1n:cr.
muiod Conference and L h i b i ~Oct. 11-14. 1976.
Ref- Cited P n n o y .Gominer-Willii H. Beha Jr.
U.S. PATE.- DOCUMEFLS Arromey. AApenL or Finn-Muellcr and Smith
3.M1.766 V/1W7 I l k y o . PI] ABSrUCT
3.JSI.tA9 II/IW7 Mernhimr IUMJ
3.3Pa.120 Wl961 h d l e f et d. . Power conditioning a p p u u l r r ~ u l r r l ym i l d for
3.390.321 6/1961 Plow . computer fuiliticr and including non-lmur inpur
3.450.911 U1969 Flcrchn n d. 321160 c h o k o connestible with line power. The outputs oT rhc
, .
3.~11.lb6 3/19m ~ ~ h r a a c d. input c h o k s u e r i r l l y , n u g n c t i d l y coupled through
1544.1aJ
3.IO3.419
'/1q70
(/I974 kttwr
--.-
-JZt/bl
121'61 pn- vindmgr t o p u l v u:urable r e r a n of a c y n
3.116.254 )/I914 W
- . chairing network which includcr a o p a c i t o r bulk and
opnrcr t o r y c h & a s i n w r v e oulput. kncs tmd
m
ER PUBUUTlONS ma us w u o l d w the smrhedrcr ncrvark to w o l d
United States Patent [ I ~ I [ II ] Patent Murnber: 4,544,877
Powell [45] Date of Patent: Oct. 1, 1985

[S4] POWER C O N D m O N I N G S Y S I E M AND Primary Exammrr-Pctcr S. Wong

APPARATUS Amrlanr Exomtnw-Judson H. l o n a
Alrorney. Agcnr. or Firm-Mucllcr and Smtlh
[7s] Invmtor: JcKrcy hi. Powell. Galena. Ohio
~571 ABSTRACT
[73] Arrignce: Ueberi Carpontion, Columbus. Ohio
Power condit~oningapparatus plnicularly rutted for
[21] Appl. No.: 510.540 computer lacilities and including non-lmur mput
[22] Filcd: Jul. 5. 1983 chokes connectable with line power. Thne chokes are
nruclurcd having a ccntcr leg configured t o dcfinc a
[51] I a r Q : ................................................ C05F3/06
varying gap h a v ~ n ga narrowest flux lranslcr regmn
[52] U S . Q. .....................................
3 U / W 323/310 located centrally wllh respect lo a surrounding rhcll
1581 Firid of %ch ....................... IS:/", 45. I C . 47. nructurc. T h e gap configuratton capands umiormi>
363/48. 64.75. 90. 91. 164. 171. 172: 323/214.
215.M6.30?.308, 361.362.232.310; 333/177. outwardly From this narrowest region. T h e outputs o l
180 307/7; 336/165. 178. 211. 215. 233. 234. the inpul chokes arc s e r d l y , magncucally couplcd
212. 211. 217 through primary wmdmgs to pulse u l u r r b l c reactors of
a synthesizing nctwork u,hich i n c l u d s a capacitor bank
[W References Cited and operates to rynthcsize a slnewavc output. Thc ca-
U S PATEKT DOCUMENTS p a c m n c e values of the capacttor bank a r c s e l c c ~ ~ v c l ! .
dislnbutcd bclween thc pnrnary, irolatlon windmps and
1.351.711 9/1920 Bergman ......................... 336/16S X
3,243,651 3/1966 Fcinberg ct .I. .................... 316/165 the pulse uturable secondary or regulator components
4.30S.033 11/1981 Powell ................................ 323/306 o l the synlhcstrer nctu.ork lo achlcvc imporcant m-
provcrncnrs in s$rtem cficrcncy. . ~

FORE!GN P A T E K T D O C U M E N T S
U 8 U I 12/1934 Uniled Kingdam ............... 163/171
U.S.Patent OCL 1.1985 Sheet 1 of 3 4,544,877
vA-B

vB-C

vC-A

D A T A W A V E MAGNETIC S Y N T H E S I Z E R S A T U R A T I O N SEQUENCE
 IEEE STD. 587 TESTING OF
LIEBERT POWER MANAGEMENT CENTERS

IEEE Standard 587 "Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits"
has recently been applied to power conditioning equipment as a performance
criterion. Some manufacturers have claimed that their power conditioning
products meet IEEE Standard 587. However, using a power conditioning product
which conforms to IEEE 587 does not ensure that the product will solve any
power problems. Some understanding of what IEEE 587 requires may alleviate
some of the confusion.

The purpose of IEEE 587 was to characterize the surge voltages observed in
iu*-voltdge kC power circii:ts and t o dev:se a standardized surze test
representative of the observed surges. The standardized surge tests are
summarized in Table 1. There are two categories of surge tests based on the
equipment location inside the building: Category A. for long branch circuits
and outlets, and Category 8. for major feeders and short branch circuits.
Additionally. the type of surge test for each category depends on the type of
device tested: High impedance devices are tested using a surge voltage: low
impedance devices are tested using a surge current. The sophisticated surge
generators available today automatically act as a voltage or current source.
depending upon the device impedance.

No equipment performance criteria are established in IEEE 587. Survivability

of the device under test to surges is all that is implied by meeting IEEE 587
For power conditioning equipment which is expected to protect sensitive load
equipment from surges like IEEE 587, no output criteria are specified in IEEE
587. Also, IEEE 587 does not specify testing the devices with surges in all
the available common and normal modes.

Liebert Power Management Centers have been tested to IEEE 587 Categories A and
8 , using both the ring wave and unidirectional wave surges. All tests were
conducted using Keytek Model 711AJ surge generators. Surges were inserted in
the common and normal modes. No Power Management Center failures were
observed. As a measure of the protection provided by Power Management Centers.
the output of the Power Management Centers was observed for any common or
normal mode disturbances caused by the input surges. Sample results are
attached for Category B 1.2 x 50 microsecond surge inputs.

As recommended by IEEE 587. all surge tests were conducted with the Power
Management Centers energized and the surges were injected randomly with respect
to the power frequency.

Conclusions -
The Power Management Centers can survive the surge voltages expected on
low-voltage AC power circuits since no failures were observed when the unit was
subjected to numerous IEEE 587 Category A and B surges.

The Power Management Center is extremely effective in protecting sensitive

equipment from the surge voltages expected on low-voltage AC power circuits
since none, ar minimal, output disturbances were observed when IEEE 587
Category A and B surges were injected in common or normal modes on the input.
 Table 1
Surge Voltages an'd Currents Deemed to Represent the Indoor Environment
and Recommended for Use in Designing Protective S y ~ t e m I

h ~ o Dcgodted Lo a SUPP-r*
C o m p a n b l ~l o lmpvLs of Suedmen wllb Clamping Volhgr o t
Loullon IEC No 864 Hodlum EKQODW* or Load bOOV lOOOV
Cdwon CaC.raI7 Wa*.fo~m Amplllud~ CLmult (120 V 8rnL.m) (240 V 8 r ~ U m )
A Long brroch
CLrcuIu and
1

I1 0.6 pel00 U I a
6 kV
200 A
Wrh l m m h c e t
Low h m d u ~ c e f8,
-
0.8
-
1.6
oullell
II Mdor fredcn. 1.2 X b0 lu 6 kV W L Imptdrocet
~ - -
d o r l branch
c l ~ ~ u l and
u.
III
O X 20lu
0.6 p e l 0 0 kHz
S kA
6 kV
Low h m d m c e +
1Uch lmpcdmcet
40
- -
10

load center 600 A L o r hmdancef.t 2 4

- . -.
*Other r u p p r r n o n bavlnr dltterrnt clunplor vollawa would rcerlvr dlltercnt e n c m IewIr.
t ~ o blh-lmpr&ncc
r t a t mpeclmetu o r load clrculla. the rollage . h o r n npreaenla lhe a w e vollage. In &C d ~ ~ U I&. o nU B ~
that nJu. lor l h r open<lrcdt vollage of lbc l d generator.
f ? o r lo-&pcdmca t a l wcclmslu o r load &ulII. lhcurrent &own m p r a e n l ~(ha d l l c b w e c u m n t of lhr ruwe (not the &or(-
h u l l c-nl o f (he power arslem). In m u ilmuLUon Icmll. w e ib.1 c u m 0 1 for (he sborislrcull currot1 01 lhc t a t ~ c n e n t o r .
t ~ h marlmum
r unpllluda (200 o r WO A) Ir ~pecltlcd,but tba crmcl waveform rlll be LnOucnced b r the load c h m c t e ~ l l c r

Fig 3
Fig 2 ~ k d i r e c t i o n dWavnhapea (ANSI/IEEE !ild 28-1974)
RopoKd 0.5 ~ ~ 1 Hz0 Ring
0 Wave
(Open-Circuit Voltage) (I) Open-Circuit Wavefom. (b) Dimhuge Cumnt W~vcfonn.
 DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER DEYONSTRATION

Liebert welcomes the opportunity to demonstrate the Datawave technology's

capabilities.

The Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer is a true three phase power synthesizer

which has significant performance advantages over other technologies. The
Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer provides a more complete and cost effective
solution to computer power problems.

Invut Voltaee R e a l a t i o n Ranee

The Datawave has a very broad input voltage range, sienificantly greater
than line voltage regulators and motor-generators. The broad input
voltage range allows the Datawave to protect the computer system from very
deep sags such as those caused when large loads are started. when ground
faults occur in the power system. or from lightning-related disturbances.
The Datawave can run through deep sags that other technologies would
consider an outage.

Tvvical Test Data Demonstration

Full Load 240V(-50%) 193V(-7%)

60% Load 192V(-60%) 196V(-6%)

Output Voltace Reeulation

Output voltage regulation is defined as the percent change in output

voltage between no load and full output load. For a computer system it is
desirable that the output voltage not change as the aystem load chances.
With an isolation transformer, the output voltage will drop as the load is
increased due to the transformer impedance and the cable voltage drops.
The Datawave rill regulate the output voltage a s the load is increased.

T m i c a l Test Data Demonstration

No Load
-
Vout

pull Load
Vout
 Tolerance to Nonlinear Loads

Computer systems are typically very nonlinear loads. The power source
should be able to supply the nonlinear current required by the computer
aystem without the voltace distortion exceeding the computer
rpecifications ( 5 % THD). Because of the Datawave's low output impedance
at high frequencies, the Datawave is much better able to supply the
c=a~cter's noc?lnear current without vnltage distortion than inductive
output devices such as isolation transformers and motor generators. The
Datawave will also prevent the nonlinear currents from affecting other
loads in the buildinc because the Datawave's input current remains linear.

I.. ... U .
A

' 3::g, 1.. - 1.. I.. ..

Shielded Isolation Transformer Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer

Overload Cawability

It is important that computer power sources have the capability to supply

inrush and start-up currents demanded by the computer system. Some
technologies have little overload capability. The Datawave can supply
250% load.

Tyuical Test Data Demonstration

% Load
200%
-V
205V(-1.5%)
KVAout % Load -
Vou t

Tolerance to Poor Power Factor Loads

Computer system loads are not unity power factor loads. Computer power
sources must be able to supply poor power factor loads without
compromising performance or reliability. The Datawave is not limited by
load power factor and can supply full rated KVA to any power factor load
(zero to unity power factor). Additionally. the Datawave's input power
factor is characteristic of the technology and not dependent on the load
power factor. The Datawave will provide a nearly unity input power factor
for any load. half to full load, which can avoid power factor penalties
assessed by many utilities.

Tyuical Test Data Demonstration

Input
-
P.F.
.06
Output .60

Tolerance to Unbalanced Loads

Power sources supplying single phase computer equipment must be able to

handle unbalanced load conditions. Even if the loads are initially
balanced, turning off loads or adding loads will cause a load current
imbalance. The Datawave can handle unbalanced loadlng continuously. even
100% unbalance (full load on one phase and no load on another).
Additionally.-since the Datawave uses the input a s source of energy to run
the three phase synthesizing network. the Datawave input currents remain
balanced even though the output current is unbalanced.

Typical Test Data Demonstratlon

Output Current
-
A
BOA
a_
OA
c_
OA
Output Voltage 209V 212V 211V
Input Current A 15A 1SA
Input Spike and Transient Immunity

Because the Datawave's output voltace is synthesized from six pulses per
half cycle. the output voltage waveform is independent from the input
waveform. High energy spikes and rinzinc transients on the input are not
r v l d p n t on t h e output. The Datawave is a very effective solution where
spikes, noise. and voltage distortion are a problem.

Shielded Isolation T r a n s f o n e r
With Spike Suppression

Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer

Unbalanced Inuut Voltaze (Sinele P h a s i n ~Caoability)

Many power problems are associated with only one of the three phases: for
example. a single phase-to-ground fault, a utility reclosure. or a blown
fuse. A computer power conditioner should be able to protect the computer
system from these severe voltage imbalances. The Datawave has the ability
t o sroducr three phase outpct w e n when only two h p u t phases a?* s a i i a b l e .

Typical Test Data Demonstration

A B- c, a_ e_ c_
Input Voltage 300'4 48OV 300V Input Voltage
Input Current
-
Output Voltage 208V 216V 208~ Output Voltage
c &hLiebert
1050 Seerborn Drive.PO.BOX 29186
TYG
6/9/86

Columbus.Ohio 43229 USA

614.888-0246 Teiex 246-655 LIEBERT W O G N

CUSTOMER SER'IICE & SUPPORT

DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER CHECK-OUT

The following is a brief procedure to deternine if the current deslgn

Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer (one with forced-air cooling) is operating
properly. (For non-forced air cooled Datawaves. consult factory). Thls
procedure does not supersede the requirements for a thorough visual and
physical inspection to determine hot components, loose connections, etc.
Recommended practice is to record the values measured at start-up and at
each preventive maintenance visit for comparison purposes and trend
analysis.

When the Datawave is operating properly the output voltages (line-to-line

&line-to-neutral) and the internal capacitor currents should be
balanced. Refer to the attached typical Datawave Magnetic Synthesizer
schenatic/wiring diagrams. The capacitors are divided into four (4) three
phase capacitor banks. C1 through C4. Cl (secondary winding) and Cl
(primary winding) are the main ferroresonant capacitor banks whose currents
oscillate in conjunction with the six saturating pulse transformers. C2
and C3 are capacitors associated with the second and third harmonic traps.
Under normal operation, the output pulses of the six saturating
transformers are combined to form a step-wave approximation of a sinewave
with the lowest significant harmonic being the 11th. The second and third
harmonic traps are used for dynamic conditions (such as start-up) to ensure
proper transformer saturation sequence for a sinewave output.

In order to.properly test the operation of the S ~ n t h e S i Z e ~ensure

, that the
input voltage to the synthesizer is near nominal (within -5%) and
relatively balanced (within -3% of the average). To avoid any possible
effects of unbalanced loading or harmonic load currents, the unit should be
tested at-no load. Also, the unit should be tested at normal operating
temperature.

With a true RMS voltmeter, measure the output voltages line-to-!ine and
line-to-neutral. The output voltage should be balanced within -1% of the
average. The average should be within 3% of the nameplate output voltage.

INPUT VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE

World Leader in Computer Support Systems

.
Env~ronmentalControl Power Protection Mon~lorlngControl
Page ... 2

With a true RwS clamp-on current meter. measure the current of each phase
of each capacitor bank. Refer to the synthesizer wiring diagram for
identification of capacitor wire numbers.

C2 currents can be measured an wires W141. W142, and W143 at the harmonic
traps TX11. TX12 and TX13.

--
C3 currents can be measured on wires W150. W151 and U152 at the harmonic
traps TX14. TX15 and TX16.

On 15 to 30 KVA units. C4 can be measured by clamping on all capacitor

wires connected to terminal 1 of transformers TX4, TX5 and TX6. On 50 to
150 KVA units. C4 can be measured on wires W156. W157 and W158 at the
capacitor busbars 04, 05 and 06. If parallel wires are used.
measure the current in all parallel wires simultaneously to avoid summing
errors.

The C1 capacitor current is sometimes difficult to measure directly due to

wire routing. For ease of measurement. the C1 plus the C2 and C3 currents
can be measured. NOTE- When comparing to the charted nominal values, be
sure to add the values given for C1, C2 and C3. On 15 to 30 KVA units.
measure the Cl+C2+C3 currents by clamping on all capacitor wires connected
to terminal 3 of transformers TX4. TX5 and TX6. On 50 to 150 KVA units
measure the Cl+C2+C3 currents on wires W115, W116 and W117 connected to
busbars 01. 02 and 03 and terminal 3 of transformers TX4. TX5 and TX6.

The measured capacitor currents should be balanced within 1.5% or 1 amp

(whichever is greater). The percent unbalance equals the hlghest phase
minus the lowest phase divided by the average of the three phases times
100%. The average of the measured currents should be within 5% or 1 amp
(whichever is greater) of the nominal value listed in the attached
chart(s1.

PHASE A
PHASE 0
PHASE C
AVERAGE .

If outpu-t voltage or capacitor currents are out of tolerance check for

failed capacitors, faulty wiring or other failed components.
 60 HZ DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZERS
YOMINAL CAPACITOR CURRENTS AT NO LOAD

KVA Vin Vout

15 208 208
480 208/
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

30 208 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

50 208 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

75 208 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

208 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
i40 208

- 208 208
480 208
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208

208 208
480 208'
480 480
575 208
575 575
240 208
vA-B

vB-C

vC-A

60 120 180 240 300 360

I I I I t I I 1 I I I
a I I I I I I I I I I I I

0 30 90 150 210 270 330

- -
DATAWAVE MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER SATURATION SEQliENCE
FOR: MINI CENTER SEV. DATE 02/0?/89 I

MAIN POWER WIRING DIAGRAM

STANDARD 512121, REV. 1

MAIN CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM

W/O MONITORING 1014577, REV. 2
W/ VCMP 511601, REV. 1

OPTIONS
R.E.P.O. 1C15091, REV. 0
SPIKE SUPPRESSOR
W/ TRANSFORMER AUX 2006, REV. O
W/O TRANSORMER AUX 2009, REV. 0

GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT 1C19411, REV. 0

PHASE LOSS/PHASE ROTATION lC18273, REV. 1
 v
EOR: P R E C I S I O N POWER R E V . DATS. 0 2 - 0 1 - 3 3 ;

1 ADDITIONAL UNIT 511584, REV. 0

2 - 4 UNITS 511582, REV. 0
1 A D D I T I O N A L U N I T W/O PANELBOARDS W/ 2 O U T P U T B R E A K E R S 5 1 1 5 8 3 , REV. 0

1 F E E D E R - 1 OR 2 PANELBOARDS 1C17042, REV. 0

2 FEEDERS - 2 PANELBOARDS ( D U A L I N P U T ) 1C17043, REV. 0
FOR:
- REV. DATE: 02-01-89

511585, REV. 0
511586.
~- - REV. 0
511498: REV. 0
511500, REV. 0
LDC 511499. REV. 0
LDC 511631; REV. 0

1D14056, REV. 3
NO MONITORING, W/O XFMR 1D14057, REV. 3
VCMP, W/ XFMR 511599, REV. 0
VCMP, W/O XFMR 511600, REV. 1

VCFMP, W/ OR W/O LDC 1D20126, REV. 2

IGM, W/ XEMR 511598, REV. 0

IGM, W/O XFMR 511602, REV. 1

W@'f&i f@# MBf it/ VlilBIP, AM0 BURWf kUX=!206$, REV: 4

DO NOT GIVE AUX IF IT HAS SITEMASTER 200
OPTIONS
SPIKE SUPPRESSOR
WITH XMFR: 10-50 KVA AUX-2006, REV. 0
75-125 KVA AUX-2007, REV. 0
150-225 KVA AUX-2008, REV. 0
W/O XFMR: 10-50 KVA AUX-2009, REV. 0
75-125 KVA AUX-2010; REV. 0
150-225 KVA AUX-2011, REV. 0

PHASE ROTATION/PHASE LOSS lC18273, REV. 1

2 OR 3 PANELBOARD - ALARM OH SHUTDOWN
GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT
2 AND 3 PANELBOARD ALARM OR SHUTDOWN
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE CO-3001, REV. 0

REP0
FOR. QX&U!G MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER REV 2 02-01-89
15-30 X V GONDITTOWIG
~ ar,oE OR = F COW

W POWER YIRING (Choose one)

STANDA3D [JNIT 511592, REV 0
UNIT WITH BYPASS OPTION, 511593, REV 2
G D I ~ ( C h o o s eone)
NOTE: FOR UNITS W/IGM AND VCMP, INCLUDE AUX-2059, REV 2
NO MONITORING, 208 VOLTS OUT 511563, REV 3
NO MONITORING, 380 THRU 575 VOLTS OUT 511565, REV 3
VCMP MONITORING, 208 VOLTS OUT 511562, REV 3
VCMP MONITORING, 380 THRU 575 VOLTS OUT 511564. REV 3
IGM MONITORING, 208 VOLTS OUT 511567, REV 2
IGM MONITORING, 380 THRU 575 VOLTS OUT 511566, REV 2
NOTE; FOR IGM & VCMP SUPPLY AUX-2059, REV. 2
OPTIONAL E Q U I P M E N T (Choose accordingly)
PHASE LOSS/PHASE ROTATION MONITOR (ALARM STD.)
ALARM OR SHUTDOWN 1C18273, REV 1
GROUND OVERCURRENT RELAY 511581. REV 1
BYPASS TRANSFORMER
IN NEMA ENCLOSURE AUX-2030, REV 4
IN DECORATIVE ENCLOSURE 1C17038, REV 3
REMOTE EMERGENCY POWER OFF(R.E.P.0.) CO-2000, REV 2
TRANSIENT SUPRESSION PLATE CO-3001. REV 0
 FOR: DATAWAVF MAGNETIC SYNTHESIZER
KV& I ' S E L FOR
\ 1
-.-
OWER (choose one)
STANDARD UNIT 511594, REV 0
UNIT WITH BYPASS 511595, REV 0
(choose one)
NOTE: FOR UNITS W/IGM AND VCMP, INCLUDE AUX-2059, REV 2
NO MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT 511529, REV 0
NO MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS 511531, REV 1
VCMP MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT REV 0
VCMP MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 1
IGM MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT REV 0
IGM MONITORING 208 VOLTS OUT W/ BYPASS REV 1
NO MONITORING 380-575 VOLTS OUT REV 0

NO MONITORING 380-575 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 1

VCMP MONITORING 380-575 VOLTS OUT REV 0
VCMP MONITORING 380-575 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 1
IGM MONITORING 380-575 VOLTS OUT REV 0
IGM MONITORING 380-575 VOLTS OUT W/BYPASS REV 0
EXTONAL EgDIPMENT (choose accordingly)
PHASE LOSS/PHASE ROTATION MONITOR
ALARM OR SHUTDOWN 1C18273, REV 1
GROUND OVERCURRENT RELAY 511581, REV 1
BYPASS TRANSFORMER
NEMA ENCLOSURE AUX-2030, REV 4
1C17038, REV 3
REMOTE EMERGENCY POWER OFF (R.E.P.O.) CO-2000, REV 2
TRANSIENT SUPRESSION PLATE CO-3001, REV 0
SUBFEED CIRCUIT BREAKER 1C13238, REV 3
EOR: POWER MANAGEMENT CENTER REV. DATE: 02-831-33
CONDTT- OR RXLF CONT- 100- 150 KV&

SC 2-4 PANELBOARD W~BYPASS 511590. REV. 0

SC 2-4 PANELBOARD 511589. REV. 0
CA STANDARD (1 OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER) 511587, REV. 0
CA W/ BYPASS 511588, REV. 0

W/O MONITORING 208/120V OUT 511543, REV. 0

W/O MONITORING 380/575V OUT 511546, REV. 0
W/O MONITORING W/BYPASS 208/120V OUT 511545, REV. 1
W/O MONITORING W/BYPASS 380/575V OUT 511544, REV. 1
W/VCMP 208/120V OUT 511540, REV. 0
W/VCMP 380/575V OUT 511542, REV. 0
W/VCMP W/BYPASS 208/120V OUT 511547, REV. 1
W/VCMP W/BYPASS 380/575V OUT 511541, REV. 1
W/IGM 208/120V OUT 511548, REV. 0
W/IGM 380/575V OUT 511532, REV. 0
W/IGM W/BYPASS 208/120V OUT 511533, REV. 1
W/IGM W/BYPASS 380/575V OUT 511534, REV. L
NOTE: FOR UNITS W/IGM AND VCMP, INCLUDE AUX-2059, REV. 2

MODULES TOGETHER STANDARD 1C12758, REV. 1

MODULES SPLIT 1C12759, REV. 1
OPTIONS
PHASE LOSS/PHASE ROTATION MONITOR (ALARM STD. )
ALARM OR SHUTDOWN 1C18273, REV. 1
GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT - SHUTDOWN (STD) 511581, REV. 1
BYPASS TRANSFORMER W/NEMA ENCLOS. AUX-2030, REV. 4
BYPASS TRANSFORMER W/DECORATIVE ENCLOS. 1C17038, REV. 3
-
REPO CO-2000; REV. 2
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE CO-3001; REV. 0
(RIGM) WITH LIEBERT UPS DWG. 1C17000, REV. 1
CABINET DATA FOR (RIGM) DWG. 1C16998, REV. i
ALQO ((CHOOSE ONE)
MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM (RIGM) 380/575 VOLTS DWG. 1D16997, REV. 3
MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM (RIGM) 208 DWG. 5DllD70, REV. 1

(RIGM) FOR POWER CONDITIONING UNITS DWG. 1016999, REV. 0

CABINET DATA FOR (RIGMI DWG. 1C16998, REV. 0
ALSO TNPlLZLI1E (CHOOSE ONE)
MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM (RIGM) 380/575 VOLTS DWG. 1D16997, REV. 3
MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM (RIGM) 208 VOLTS DWG. 5D11070, REV. 1

(RIGM) WITH LIEBERT UPS (415 HZ)

MAIN WIRING DIAGRAM DWG. 1D20118, REV. O
INSTALLATION DATA DWG. 1D20118, RE7 O

CABINET DATA DWG. 1C16993, REV. 0

MODEL NUMBER FOR (RIGM) (5D10047)

 UNIT W/O TRANSFORMER 7

Y R l T CL*CURITKm
FOR VllS W O >BOX

1 I, W I W ",I, U Wnl. r- r-
m r r rm ~ W N C ~ W L I $ WIS a r .
................I 4
CONDITIONING-ALONE
O U T P U T CONFIGURATION --
="?
".- -I
M. " WlRll
* " I.

------
I

------
------

EE
..-..-.. ..................
I"-.'
- &-.
. .,.,.,. ..................
m Y S
-..4
Y I Y l U4UO
wrnm
wr .-..-..-.. -.. J-" J W J
I . .
I : :
i
Figure 5. Outplt of Saturating Transforma.
 bLiebert
Power Conditions/Problems
i-

Pass~ble
Causes C o m ~ u t e rSvrnotoms

Normal computer operation ?!ocess8q er7:rs

Swllchlng power sucplles 1ncor:ec: gala :rans;er
Power lhne moau!ation m
;: CPLi to rne.m.;.
equipment ( I e. Simplex" Prtn;e. Qr :erm;:a
clocksi errors
Motor speed conrrolers
Swltchlng loans on or on Incorrec: aaia o i cis.s c.
Normal computer operation tapes
Fault ciearlna I P r o c e s m ~errors
!
?r;n!er o: term.%
! errorc
. ..
Haraware samage
Grouno iaults Comoc:e, sys:em
Slarnna large loacs , crasnes
lnadeoiate bower svslem I Haratiare oamaoe

Rapld loan reouc:lon ! Haroware oamage

utility swltcnlng
1
 kh Liebert
Power Problems
c-'

I ;
: PROBLEMS DEFINITIONS HARDWARE INPUVOUTPUT SYMPTOMS !
AFFECTED !

SPIKES 200-400% of the rated RMS

voltage or higher.
ZPU, Disk,
Tape
1 Program stops.
j Incorrect data on d~skor tape.
Duration-0.5-200 micro-
seconds.
1 Prmter prmts garbage.

TRANSIENTS .2-5 kHz or higher. ZPU, Disk, Program stops.

Duration-up to one cycle. Tape Incorrect data on disks or
tapes.
Hardware damage.

SAGS Voltages below 80-85% of CPU, Disk, Computer system crashes. i

nominal. Tape I
Duration-4-60 cycles.

SURGES Voltages above 110% of CPU, Disk, Hardware damage.

nominal. Tape
Duration-4-60 cycles.

1
7
I
I
I
1 NOISE Superimposed on the CPU, Disk Incorrect data transfer from
sinewave. CPU to disk or tape. I
Amplitude-5-10 volts. Terminal or pnnter display
garbage. 1
I
-

I
DISTORTION A change in the shape of the CPU. Disk. System can crash. I
: slnewave. Can affect voltage or Tape Commun~cat~ons problem
, current wave shape. behveen CPU and per~pheral i
equipment. !

OUTAGE A zero volt condition lasting

longer than a half cycle.
Below 80435% of rated AMS.
2-60 second auto -correction.
15 mlnute to 4 hour manual
correction.
 LIEBERT
PDU COMMUNICATION AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

This procedure is intended to communicate with the PPA product line from Liebert with
an HF,Coinpaq nx 9010.

1. Install the upgrade for the USB adapter. This e-mail was sent out on April 28, 2004.

2. Go to hyper link and set the following parameters.

A. Baud Rate 9600

B. Parity none
C. Data Bits 8
D. Stop Bits 1
E. Flow None

You will need a cable for connecting to the lnonitor board which is located in the upper
right of the unit, b e l ~ ad dead panel with four Phillip head screws. It is on a slide so it
can be moved out for easy application. The cable is to be a polarized six pin header,
female wit11 foul. leads. The six Pin Female header will be from tenninal 1, 2, 3,4, they
will attach to aNine Pin Female D connector pins 5,2, 3,4,

SIGNAL 9-PIN D 6-PIN HEADER

Female Connector Female Connector

TXD 2 2

RXD 3 3

DTR 4 4

This cable will attach to a USB adapter and plug in the USB p o ~of t your lap top. COM 1
port is to be used. The 6-pin Header Female connector is to be plugged into the monitor
board at P-7, located in the top center of the monitor board. Once you have all the
equipment ready then remove the shunt trip wires 317 and 331 located at P-8 located at
the bottom fiont ofthe monitor board. At the rear of the board you should see an in line
fuse approximately 3 amps. This is the power supply to the board being removed. BE
CAREFUL NOT TO DROP IT, It will defiutely be hard to retrieve. With power
removed, co~mectto P-7 with cable, and power up laptop. Replace fuse (Note: tlus will
cause the logic to reverse back to default). Loolc at the display and record the date and
time. 4 digits of the date example 0101 would be your password. Once the board has
been powered back up then the two devices sl~ouldstart communicating. You should
receive a prompt of SVTP>. Tlis lets you laow colu~ectionhas been made. You have
two fmctions: Read Only and Diagnostic (Setting). A ? is added to the connnand to go
to the diagnostic mode for cllanging parameters. PMP Connnand Set will bring up a
screen of all parameters and the type of function. Once you are asked for the password,
then enter PWD 4 digit default date (Ex. 0101) and 20. The 20 will allow you twenty
minutes before logging off, this is the maxilnun time allowable. You now have access to
setting parameters and calibration. To shut down, remove the power supply fuse and
disconnect from P-7, reinstall the sl~unttrip P-8 (wire 316 and 317), reapply power
supply, and set date and time via the fiont panel. This is accomplished by pressing both
the Scan and Hold membranes simultaneously in the lime and date screen displayed on
the LCD, and setting the time and date utilizing the proper format. The Scan membrane
will increase the high lighted field and Hold will decrease the ligh lighted field. The
time can be set AMDM or 24 hour format.
& 09 d 7 d

S?- 53acc
Sanle cablings as before, the lap top will need to be set up as,
Baud: 1200
Parity: None
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
Hard Flow: off
SofiFlow: off

Once coimection has been made, connnunication should start immediately. Hitting
"ENTER" should initiate a connnand. Calibration is performed in main inenu 2. Then
you should be prompted to select one of the following menus, by utilizing the sequential
number:

voltage a-b
voltage b-c
voltage c-a
voltage x-y
voltage x-n
voltage y-z
voltage y-n
voltage z-x
voltage z-n
current x
current n
current y
current gnd
current z
ICilowatts
Accessing Protect Commands.
Passwords are based upon the unit serial number in association with the current system
date. Therefore its inlperative that these data items be coirect and entered into the ~ u u t
before the unprotected access can be granted.

Use the following for configuring or determining a valid password.

1. Enter the unit serial number using SS1 comu~and
2. Enter a valid system date using the date comnand.
3. Increment the last 4 digits in the serial number by the system inontl~and date
using zero to augment months or days less than 10 (is. 9=09). Increment
from zero to Z then back to zero.

Example:
Assume we have entered a serial number of 123456-ZC-9Q.
The last four alpha-nuneric characters are ZC9Q
Date of 12-9-97
The applicable digits are 12 09

The process:

Password: OE92

Explanation:

Z, inoved 1 positions is 0
C, moved 2 posilions, is E
9, inoved 0 positions, is 9
Q, moved 9 positions, is Z

Move from left to right.

Therefore the PWD connnand is used as follows: PWD OE9Z 20

This will allow a maximum of twenty minutes before being automatically logged off.
 Rpr OB 0 4 0S:aq.p Rntnony sm1.c"
,-. -.

To Set Unit CLoek-To set the clock *Om

the -t &nt ppanei, simultaneoudypress the
-C Sean and Hold membrane switches while the Texminatox
.time and date screen is djsalayedan the LCD. Hand Shaltig: Not Supported
A.cursor should appear 011 the selsctedtime
.
and date field Use the Scan swiWh to
hrement the highlighted &Id and the Hold Echo: OFF
witch t,~ decrement the mh-lighted field.
"".,"--
rT.- +hn--" ---- nu& butim~to select the next
SiImm
time ,qnd date field The time can be
Change to Receive AHcer Transmit:
1.28msec
displayedin AMmM or 24 how f0rmt. m.D&y t o TransmitAfter
Siolimeously press the Scan and Hold Receive: 120 kIS%
switches to exit the dock set screen. M a r E e ~ o n s time
e Turn Around:
300 msee
RS-232ASCII ~ o m m ~ ~ i c a t iPort-
ons Mar. Eesgonse Completion 'Pime:
- -
Units with power monitoring are equipped 500 msec
with an jsdatkd RS-232-4SCXI C~my~.Uni- Min. Delay Between Commands:
cations Part, which aYom access to unit 500 msee
monitoredparameters and akam informa- ~ a rIntercharacter
. belay:
tion. The RS -232 port connections are 12.5mSOe
locatedon the low voltage conhol tenninal
ship inside t h e unit. See ~ypicalcontrol
wiring Figure 1-13. The ASCIIpart uses a Query-Response
Format.
The ASCII interface default parametem are
as mows: m e list of available customer commands are
shown in Table 41. Only one command is
Interf&ae: XS-232Using EIAVoItage serviced at a time. Valid commands are
-. Levels terminated with a carriage return [ODhJ.
Baud Xate: 96M) Commands are accepted in upper or lower
Parity: None case. Responses are m upper case.
terminated with a line feed [&%I and
Data Bits: 8 caniage return IODhl.

T a e 41. W$Z ASCII Port Customer Go-**

7
Command Deseriotioa \ Typical Basponse
-&rie?<@ Unit Time 03:40:37A<LFrcCR;.
Date?<CB Unit Date 05-15-97 4 W .cCB
UID?<CI+ nit^^ u ~ ~ ~ J ~ o . J ' D U ~ ~ B--4- -2 x C E -
WA?cC% Nominal gVA 015WLFxCW
V?4% Nominal L-LVolta OZOBcLFxC~
SSl?<m Sys~mInfonnatio," UNLTMODEL-MJMBER~,>SE=~ER---,---,
. -charaeterfrelds
(20 .
- S I T E D 3 U M B E R---- -4TAG-mMBEL ----- ----
I with comma 1

stam.
-UPMD?CCR~ Mon&redParameters, 0484,0485,0483.~1~,~~12,0~~~,01~1,0~,0121,006~,
82 C o m a Separated 01)SS,0120,0131,0018,01130,0092,00~3,0600,0038,0D41,
- Data Fields
See Table 4 2 For
OO~$,OXS,O~~~~,~OOOL~~~~~~~B,OD~~,OD~O
0047,0049,0044<L%c~
Dewription6 of Field
Positions
&4 installati6n and Operation Manual

iI 5LMQ-
Rpr 08 0 4 05:34p Rnthony Smith

Table 42. Monitored Parameters Data Dehnitions

~ p 02
r 04 06: 46p ~ames
PROCOMM Setup Information

PROCOMM Setup Informatkn

The strial commnnications parameters used by lhe PROCOMM sobare BhouId match Chose listed below.

BAUD: 1200
PARITY:NONE

Last Updated:07-27-99 1030 AM EST

0 1999 Licbort Global Services WS). All Rights Reserved.
Cable Specifications

Serial Cable Pinout

LastUpW; 07-Z7-99 1030 A M EST

. €2 1999 Liebnt GIohd ServicesWS). An Righk Keservod
Rpr 0 2 04 06:46P James Bensa
Calibration Page 1 of 1
3
Calibration
Calibrdtion is initialed by entering ? from the main menu. Once initiated, themenu of nvailnble parameters to be calibrated is
displayed on (hc terminal screen, 2s shown below. The operator is prompted to selecl from the list of parwetcrs.

Selection of a plrameter is accomplished by entering thc number m m p o n d i n ~

to the desired sclecrion, followed by hitting
<Enlet>. Enlering anylhiog other than a proper number will causothc canceling of the calibration sequcnce (with an m o r
meswge) and a Mum to the main mcm. Hining CEnten or cEs-0 causes the command to b~ canceled and a rehlrn to the
main menu, without any orrur message.

0. voltagc a-b
I. voltage h-c
2. vollagc c-a
3. voltage x-y
4. voltage x-n
5. voifdge y-z
6. voltago y-n
7. voItdg0 2-X
8. voltage z-n
9. current x
10.cmt n
1i.cunwty
12. current god
13. cutrent z
14. Kilowam

Oncz a parammr is selected, a pmmpcnppmson the meen givingthe opemor a chance to insure that all calibration
equipmenr is propky installed-befm acml calibration begins. The opcrator is uskedto continue with calibration by
prcsshg y. h l e i h g any other value resuls in caneellatbn of (he c a l i M o n command and a return lo the main %mu

If h o p e n t o r indicates thatthe calibration sequacc &ould conLinu+ the user is pmmpcd a enrer the measured value for
use in calibiation. Ifno numeric c h m t e r s have lxcn entered a n d a t e r > is ~ m s c d
the c~libratinnsequence is canceled
and the main menu is displayed Once one or mom dj& havebean entered, h& <ESP causes the cammund t<r be
canceled.

When a numberhas been entered the cdibmiion value is computed and stored in the battery backed VITAL (able. ltislhcn
read back from this table to c o n f k proper stmge. Ifthe MI& read back is not equal lo ille computed value, an error
messagr. is displayed prnrnptin2 the uscr tn repeat the calibration sequence. Oncc calibrab'on is complete, the main menu is
displayed.

?aslUpdatcd 07-27-99 10:30AM EST

0 1999 Liebeit Global Services (LGS). An RighS Reserved.
Procedures for Programming PMP, Using a Laptop
1. Set S2 for proper configuration

(When usingfirmware From Rev. 1.8 or higher, all programming can be done tmm me lapr~p.)

2. To start from a e l m elatc, depress dam silence and holdlsquence, simultaneonsly, while energizing input power ta
the onit.
3. Connect RS-232to P7ofthe PMP PCB.
4. ~00tihesoRware.
5. lype PCPLUS nt the DOS prompt. (The unit should st~communicating.~

(You can also use one of the following; Hyperterm, Winterm, PC Plus, etc. or any offim~pcofwmmunications
soflware. Just seethat the proper haudrakand hardlsofi flow mtml s e n @ ateset pmperl)..)

6. For dibmtion, see: Commands Overdew, Co~6guredkVACalib~ation,A l m Setpoim, and User Aim Messages.

Last Updated: 07-27-99 10:30 AMEST

O 1999 Liebert GlobalServices (u;S). All Rig& Resewed.
~ p 0r2 04 06:46p James Benso 515-462-6780 P.3
Connector Definition Page I of I
EPM? \ -7 1

Connector Definition
The s d c e terminal interface connector used is a pslarized 6-pin header 0'7) labeled SERV TERM. 71 is locatcd on &c
upper middls edge of the monitor board. The connector and pin dcfnition, as desmibed below in Scrvife Terminal
ConneetorAssignments, is consislentwith the existing PMPand USRC.

i i
i 7 Signal Ground i
i 2 TXD - Data OutToSe~iceTerminal i
i Locking 3 RDX- Data In From Service Terminal 1
; Ramp . 4 SERV-INT I

1 5 1-12 V (Loaded with 100 ohm. If4 watt resistor) i

-12 V [Loaded with 100 ohm, 114 watt resistor)
I
i
I
6 f
i
;

For terminal communication$ pins l,Z and 3 of F?areffiernbimum cannection requirementsto establish seWke terminal
communioations.

Last Updated: 0M3-98 ID30AM EST

02000 Liebat Global Services (LGS). All Rights Wetved.
R p r 0 2 0 4 0F:Wp James Bensa 5I5-462-87eU p.ti
Esfab1ishhgService TermiPalInterface CGxnmunications Page I of I
FVMP

Establishing Sewice Terminal Interface Cammunications

The cahlc From tbe PC or terminal can bc plugged onlo Lbe service tcrminsl connector a( any time. Once the physical
mnnMion has been made,verification of the communications link is accomp:ishcd by pressing th: <ENTER> key on the PC
or terminal keyherd. The inkrfBcc c+mmunidoos system shoold r e s p ~ das indjmed in the f o l l o h g Servicc l ' e m i o a f
Prompt.

Sewicc TenninalPrompt

Too few parameters...

)/ c?> of <help?> displays the service temind commwd set.

N

The SVI'P prompt indicates thal senicc teminal communications have been esmbliied 1:thar: is m, response or prompt
dis~tayed,verify dmt che physical connection has been made conacrly and that the PC or terminal serial interface is working

Last Updated: 02-03-981050 AM EST

Q ZOO0 Liebert GlobaI Services GGS). All Rights Reservod
Rpr 02 0 4 0 G : 4 G p James Benso 515-4SE-SYWU P- I

Service Terminal InterfaceDefault Pararn~ters Page I o f 1

I=,Pf.r\P
3
Senice Terminal Interface Default Parameters
T%eServiccTerminal Inlefice Default Parameters listedbelow are default factory senings and cannot be changwl.

Last Updated: 03-26-99 10:30 A M EST

O 2000 Lieben Global Services &GS). All Ridlts Reserved
Apr OZ 04 06:46P James Bensa a13-4bl-b lUU p.a
Commands Page 1of2

Commands
A summv of sewice terminal commandsalongwith their lyveandabriefdesrripfionof each is provided in the following
ServiccTemtinslCommands.

Adehiled description af each command iollows in the section on Command Description. A decriptim includes:

Two types ofcommundsare identified; opemtional (OPS)and diagnosticiDIAO).

Operational commands deal primarily with machine opedons; metering, slam evenls and ndsient analysis.T ? i s
information is also available through the fmntpmel human interface.

Diagnostic commands are intendedlo allow manipulation oftheinternalmachine operatiwparam&rs. Access to these
mmmands is limited thr(,u& password protection.

Service Terminal Commands

R p r 02 04 0 6 3 4 6 ~ James Bensa
C 0 ~ d S

Repom time.

Last Updated: 02-04-98 10:30 AM EST

t32OOO Liebert Global Gcrvices GGS). All RigktsReLnrved
Rpr 02 04 0 6 r 4 6 p James Bensa
Accessing Protected Commands

Accessing Protected Commands

Rotecred carnmwds are accessed b u & !he PWD bassword) c o m m ~ dPasswords . are based u p n thelmit, serial number
in association wilh the current system dale. Tlmeforc, it is b p a I i v e that these data items be enmed mro the unit before

Usa the followiog procedure to determine Ule validpwword:

I. &mr the unit serial humbtrusingthe SSI command. (It MUSTcanCain atleasl4aIpha-numeric chambers.)
2. Enter a valid system date using !he Date command.
3. Increment the last 4 8lpha-numeric characters in the serial number by the system month and day using m r o
augment months or days lessthan 10. (i.c.,9 = 09). We increment from zem to Zthm backtozcm. Note: This
inmment is circular innature.

EXAWLE:

Assume we have entered aserial number of 123456-Z G9Q.

e four alpbnumerio charaoters are ZC9Q.

T l ~ last

Assume our system date is 12-9-97

The applicabledigitsare 12 09
Tae Pmcess:
ZC9Q

.lZgg
.
Password:OE92

Explanation:

2,moved 1position, is0

C, moved2 positions, is E

9, moved 0 positions, is 9

Q, moved9 pasi!ions, is Z

Ihe commandFWD is thenused es follows: PWD OE9Z20

?his will log the war into tl~unpratectedmade kru)minutes.

Command Limitations:
npr ue U + u6: *kip dames aenso
Accessing Protected Commands

TIClad p m e t e r has n maximum of 59. Which means the max-mum one time protected mode login is 59 minutes. I f the
last parameter is amined, the syslern defaults lo a 59-minute acccn period

While in unprotected mode, the systnn time oaonotbe changed.

Last Updated: 02-05-99 1030A M EST

I3U)OO LiebaaGIobal Services (LGS). AU Rights R e ~ e ~ e d ,
 This is an Nov. 14, 1990 revision by E.H. Nail.
1. SCOPE

( x.- ' This document provides functional descriptions of the VCMP Service
terminal features from an operators point of view. Included are
descriptions of both the hardware setup, and the available features
provided by the firmware..The functions described in ;this document
will be the complete definition used to develop the firmware. No
additional feature not described herein will be included.
2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The terminal hardware use t o develop the VCMP service terminal
interface consisted of a Toshiba Laptop IBM PC compatible computer
equipped with a 9 pin PC A/T to 25 pin male D "Null Modem Adapter".
The terminal functions were provided by using PROCOMM PLUS PC
communications software.
2.1 HARDWARE
2.1.1 CABLE SPECIFICATION
The physical interface to the VCMP board consists of a 25 pin female D
or a 9 pin female D connector and a 6 pin header connector attached to
connector P7 on the VCMP board. The pin-to-pin wiring scheme between
these two connectors is shown in figure 1.

t RXD and TXD are crossed. No "Null Modem Adapter" required.

t RXD and TXD are crossed. No "Null Modem Adapter" required.

Figure 1: Serial Cable Pinout
2.1.2 PROCOMM or Communications Software Setup Information
The serial communications parameters used by the Communications
Software should match those shown in table 1.
BAUD 1200
PARITY NONE
DATA BITS 8
STOP BITS 1

1 Table 1. Communication Parameters

2.2 Software Overview
The service terminal interface software will run under the
established VCMP round-robin task switching scheme. -.1 nis
guarantees that the VCMP software will not be adversly affected bv
waiting for the operator to enter -characters. In addition to tasks
which interpret commands, display response screens, and handle dara
entry, there will be a separate interupt driver that will provide
type ahead ca~ability up to 10 characters, will handle echo all
characters entered in sequence, and will send XOFF characters to
the terminal in case the type ahead buffer is full.

3.0 Glossary -
VITALS: Refers to the table of configuration data that is stored
in battery backed.static RAM

4. Command Summary
This section contains descriptions of the available service
terminal commands, and is subdivided by individual commands.
Included for each command will be discussions of the 6ata or VCMP
function accessed by the c o k a n d , detailed descriptions of the
format of the response on the service terminal, and descriptions
of data entry procedures and limits if available for the command.

All of the commands 'are available from the service terminal main
menu, shown in figure 2. This menu is initially brought up when
the terminal is first connected to the VCMP by hitting the <enter>
key on the service terminal. After the completion of a given
command sequence, the main menu is always displayed. Hitting
<enter> at.this point will repeat the last command sequence.
..
/--
--
0-rated kva
1.rated 1-n volt
2.calibration
3.alarm setpoints
4.alarm messages
5.measurements

enter choice>
Figure 2: Main Menu
 In addition to the cur-ent K V A , a Srornnt is dis~layc6civing !:he
operator an opportunity to chacge tie KVA value usinc :he data
entry feature. The format for the kva dis??ay is shown i" figure
-
3a. If the kva value is to be changes, the operator respo?.ds wit:?
a y to the prompt. cntering anythizg other than y rfs:l;ts in the
cancelling of kva data entry and a return to the maic xenu.

(a) - Rated KVA> 0225

change(y/n)>

(b) enter new value>

Figure 3: KVA Data Screens

Once data entry has been confirnee, the operator is prompted to

enter an integer as shown'in figure 3b. Entered values can ran-
from O.to 9999 inclusive.
If, while typing in a number, an invaiid digit is entered, hitting
<backspace> erases that digit . If no number has been entered,
entering <enter> cause the commanci t'o be aborted without changizg
any values. Entering a non-numeric charac.ter will be ignpred .
Once four valid num&ic digits have been entered, the resulting
number' is automatically entered.
Note: When either the configured KVA rating or Line-to-Line voltage
are changed using the service terminal, the alarm setpoints are
reset to the standard defaults. Also, any previous calibration
..
- --- -
factors are erased, and the unit should be re-calibra2ed.
4.2 Configured Line-to-Line Voltage Co ~ 7p u-
J

This command is initiated by entering 1 from the main menu. The

configured Line-to-Line voltage value is read from the VITALS table
-and displayed as a four digit inteqer with no leading zeroes. Tie
value for L-N voltage may be change6 in the same manner as that for
KVA. The screen format for the L-N voltage display is similar to
that shown in figure 3.
4.3 Calibration
I

C,] -
Calibration is ifiitiatediby entering 2 from the main menu. Once
initiated, the menu of available parameters to be calibrated is
displayed on the terminal screen as shown in figure 4 , and the
operator is prompted to select from the list of parameters.
 Selection of a parameter is accomplished by entering the number
corresponding to the deslred selection, followed by hitting
<enter>. Entering anything other than a Proper number will cause
the cancelling of the calibration
-.. seouence(with an error message)
and a returil to the main menu. nltting <enter> Or <eSC> causes the
command to be cancelled and a return to the main m e w without any
error message.
calibration menu

0.voltage a-b
i.voltage 5-c
2.voltage c-a
3.voltage x-y
&.voltage x-n
- 5 .voltage y-z
6.voltage y-n
7.voltage z-x
8 .voltage z-n
9.current x
l0.current n
1l.current y
12.current gnd
13.current z
14.Kilowatts
enter # to choose
Figure 4: Calibration selection menu

Once a parameter is selected, a prompt appears on the screen giving

the operator a chance to insure that all calibration equipment is
properly installed before actual calibration begins. The operator
is asked to continue with calibration by pressing y. Entering any
other value results in cancellation of the calibration command and
a return to the main nenu.

If the operator indicates that the calibration sequence should

continue, the user is prompted to enter the measured-value for use
in calibration. If no numeric characters have been entered, and
<enter> is entered, the calibration sequence is cancelled and the
main menu.is displayed. Once one or more digits have been entered,
hitting <esc> causes the command to be cancelled.
When a number has been entered, the calibration value is computed
and stored in the battery backed VITAL table. It is then read back
from this table to confirm proper storage. If the value read back
is not equal to the computed value, an error message is displayed
prompting the user to repeat the calibration sequence. Once
calibration is complete, the-main menu is displayed. -
i
- 4.4 Configured Alarm Setpoints

This command is initiated by entering 3 from the main menu. Once

 nser messages
1.CUSTOMER ALARM #1
2.CUSTOMER ALARM #2
3.CUSTOMER ALARM $3
4.CUSTOMER ALARM #4
5.CUSTOMER ALARM #5
change[y/n)

Figure 6: customer alarm message display

Once a change has been confirmed, the user is promgted to enter the
menu item number of the message to be changed. Entering a number
outside the range of 1 - 5 results in an error prompt indicating
the command has been cancelled, and a return to the main menu.
After selecting the message number to change, a menu of available
standard messages is displayed as shown in figure 7, and the user
is prompted to select one of these. Entering the number of one of
these selections causes that text string to be copied to the
appropriate message.

message options

O).ground system fault

l).ground failure
2).water under floor
3).security alarm
Q).datawave overtemp
5).emergency shutdown
6).unit in bypass mode
,7).custom message entry
select option>
Figure 7:customer alarm message options
Also included on this menu is the ability to enter user customized
message strings. Entering 7 in response to the message option menu
'results in a prompt to enter a new message. At this.spZnt a string
of up to 20 ASCII characters can be entered. If during the entry
of the new string undesired characters are entered, the <BkSp> key
can be used to backspace over these characters. Messages of less
than 20 characters require an <enter> to accept the string. Once
2 0 characters have been entered, the twenty first stroke causes the
string to automatically be entered.
Once the string is entered, the VITALS table is written to battery
backed memory, read back from battery backed memory, and the new
messages displayed. If no characters are entered,.and <enter> is
hit, the selected string will not be altered. If characters have
been entered, hitting <esy> will cause the command to abort without
- altering the selected str'ing.
4.6 Realtime Measurements
 the sequence has been initiated. the aiara setpoinfs are read from
the VITALS tabie and dispLayrd as a f o x - digit integer with 20
leading zeroes. These aunbcrs represent a e r c e n t a o e devjario~
from the noninai. Aii mrnbers are di,splayed a s positive. The
format of Chis display i.s shown in figure 5.
alarm setpoints
O.over voltage(%) >
1.under voltage(%) >
2.over c:uzrent ( % ) >
3.over gn6 current(%)>
4.over frequency(hz) >
5.under frequency(hz)>
change[y/n)
Figure-5: alarm setpoints display

Additionally, a data entry prompt is displayed. Entering y allows

the pperator to 'enter a new value for a particular setpoint.
Entering anything else, including just <enter> causes a return to
the main menu. Once a change has been indicated, the user is
prompted to enter the mena number of the setpoint to be changed.
The user then enters a single digit number 0 - 5 inclusive (no
' <enter> neccessary), after which a prompt appears indicating a new
value should be entered. Entering a menu selection outside the
range of 0 - 5 results in the command being cancelled with an error
prompt, and a return to the main menu.
Once the enter value proinpt appears, the user may enter a integer
number in the normal fashion. All 'alarm setpoints are stored in
the VITALS table as byte values, therefore the limit on the number
that can be entered is 0 - 255. After entering the new value, the
value is store& to the battery backed configuration memory, then
read out again and the setpoint table displayed to confirm proper
storage of the change. In addition, the alarm limit calculated
from these setpoints are updated to reflect the change.
'4.5 Configured User Alarm Messages
This command is initiated by entering an 4 from the main menu. The
5 user configureable alarm messages are then read from the VITALS
table and displayed as shown in figure 6, along with a prompt to
indicate a desired change. The messages shown in figure 6 are the
- default messages that are used by the system during the first power
up. Entering y allows the operator to enter a new alarm message
string. Entering anything else causes the command to be cancelled
and the main menu to be displayed.
This sepence is initiated by entering a 5 from the main menu.
The measurement data is displayed in two paoes as shown in figure
8. Once the first page has been displayed, hitting any key causes
the second page to be displayed. There is no data entry available
through this command.
input voltages
a-b >
b-c >
c-a >
output voitages
x-y >
x-n >
- y-z >
y-n >
z-X >
z-n >
output current
X
n >
Y >
gnd >
z >
hit any key for next page

(a). measurement page 1

kva ' >

frequency >
Kwatts >
% load >
power factor >
(b). measurement page 2
Figure 8: measurement data display -.
 November 14, 1990
,-.
)PO: CE's AND DISTRICT MANAGERS
FROM: E.H. NAIL, REGIONAL TECH SUPPORT
REF: NEW STYLE PDU'S AND PMP SETUPS
There seems to be some confusion and misinformation on the setup and
startup of a new style PDU with PMP. Maybe I can clarify some of the
requirements.
1. Every Start-up will not require the use of a Laptop. The
parameters will have been set at the factory and only
failures, replacements and grossly maladjusted PMP's would
need to be recalibrated. If the VCMP and the Fluke are
within tolerance of each other, no recalibration or
manipulation of the PMP is necessary.
2. When it is necessary to calibrate a PMP, it is not necessary
to use a Laptop. Any computer, dumb terminal, or device
which can generate an RS-232, ASCII signal out a configurable
serial port will suffice. The firmware in the PMP has the
Menu's and necessary information. The computer is used only
to give the PMP a place to display it's information and a
point of input to recalibrate when necessary.
The software necessary to configure the serial port on the
computer may be any communications software program which
will allow you to configure the serial port to:
Baud 1200
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Virtually any good communications program will allow you to
set these parameters. Even dumb Terminals allow for the
configuring of their serial ports. Some Software names to
look for are CrossTalk, Procomm, PC-Talk, ASCOM, whatever you
may be comfortable with will probably work.
4. The most difficult problem is the Cable between the Computer
or Terminal and the PMP connector. The serial port connector
on most Laptops is a 9 pin D connector, commonly called a
DB9. On most PC's and Terminals it will be a 25 Pin D
connector, called a DB25. There are only 4 wires used for
communications, The Transmit Data (TXD) line; the Receive
Data (RXD) line; the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) line; and the
signal Ground (SG) line. The pinouts for the DB9 and DB25
are not exactly the same. A pinout is shown on the next page
of this memo. A ItNullModem Adapter" is referred to in the
Procedure Outline and is used to connect the TXD line on the
PMP to the RXD line on the computer or terminal and the TXD
line on the computer or terminal to the RXD line 0.n the PMP.
This is not necessary if you make the cable up and have the
TXD line on one end connect to the RXD line on the other.
The cable becomes a "Null Modem Cablettand no further
adaptation is necessary. The Drawings in Figure 1 of the
Nov. 14 Revised Outline have been arranged in a "Null Modem"
configuration.
 COMPUTER SUPPORT PRODUCTS GROUP 03/06/90 0825
PART COMPONENTS EXPL INQ - 1 01176 STE

ASSY 5 1 3 7 2 8 6 1 EFF: DATE S E R NO M T NO

PLT MODEL MA SEQ ( I , C) C S K I P TO ITEM/%OMPONENT
DESC EL ASSY MONT 208//575VOUT
,, MPS PCC M EFFECTIVITY OTY. U/
ITM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ( 2 9 ) MOD FROM THRU PERASSY /M
0 1 5 E-056A FASTENER CABLE T I E LARGE MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 EA
0 2 2 E-2510 TERM TAB FEMALE 1 / 4 " 2 2 - 1 6 AW MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 EA
0 2 1 E-307A TERM S P L I C E END CAP 22-14G MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 4.000 EA
0 1 4 G05-1070 FASTENER CABLE-TIE PAD SMALL MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 EA
0 0 7 G12-3640 ALARM SONALERT 6-16VDC MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 EA
013 5-3080 RIVET 1 / 8 " POP ALUM 3 / 8 " MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 09
009 5-5600 SCREW M PH PHL BZ #8-32 X 5/1 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 EA
0 1 9 5-5'720 WASHER LOCK HELICAL SPRING # 8 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 EA
011 1C10181Pl S C E W TPG HWH SLT B Z 8 X 1 / 4 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 Ej9
018 1 2 2 1 7 5 P l CABLE RIBBON 20POS VCMP ELECT MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 EA
024 1 2 8 5 7 2 P l CONN HDR FEMALE UNIV MNL MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 E4
023 128573P1 SOCKET CONTACT FEMALE MNL MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 ZA
008 128576P1 STANDOFF NYLATCH . 7 5 0 1/4TURN MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1 3 . 0 5 2 52.
003 4C13451Gl PCB ASSY VCMP INTERFACE MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.005 3
0 0 2 4D13461G1 PCB ASSY VCMP MONITOR MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.005 3
017 511885P1 FUSE DUAL ELEMENT T/D 1/2AM MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.OG3 3
005 513701Pl XFMR 50VA 2 0 8 / / 6 0 0 - 2 4 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.OC3 3
001 513727P1 BRKT MTG MON 16GA GALV MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.063 3
004 5 1 3 7 3 2 P 1 ANGLE ALARM MTG 20GA GALV MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.OC.3
006 513733P1 FUSEBLOCK CLASS CC W/REJECT MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.OGO 3.
016 513741P1 LABEL WARNING FUSES MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.0C3 3
020 515114G1 HARNESS BUZZER MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.OW 3.
DC700012 END OF L I S T

ASSY 1 2 2 9 8 0 G 1 EFF: DATE S E R NO LOT NO

PLT MODEL MA SEQ ( I , C) C S K I P TO ITEM/COMPONENT
DESC DISPLAY ASSY VCMP/PPC/DATAWAVE MPS PCC M EFFECTIVITY QTY. u/
ITM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ( 2 9 ) MOD FROM THRU PER ASSY /H
0 1 5 G-118A WASHER FIBER # 4 0 1 / 4 0 D X 1 / 1 6 I D MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2 . 0 0 0 EA
0 0 3 G12-0470 SWITCH GUARD'D P-BTN EMERG OF MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 0
0 0 4 G12-0480 LAMP CLE?2d 28V WEDGE BASE MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
0 0 8 G12-0490 BUTTON RECT RED W/BLACK LEGEN MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
009 612-1400 GUARD S& P-BTN PIERG PWR-OFF MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
014 S30-0060 SPACER ROUND 3 / 1 6 X 3 / 1 6 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
007 530-0070 SCREW TR PH PHL Z 4-20 X 1 / 4 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
012 122176P1 NUT NYLON INSERT 2-56 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
013 122177P1 STUD PEM 2-56X1/2 FLUSH MOUNT MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
002 122941P1 LABEL MEMBRANE SWITCH VCMP MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
0 0 1 122942P1 DISPLAY LCD 2 0 x 4 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
010 122943P1 PLATE MOUNTING VCMP DISPLAY MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
011 122981P1 CONNECTOR HDR 14POSITION MTA MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
016 128528P1 WAFER HEADER .100CTR 4 POS MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
0 0 5 4A10069P1 LENS YELWW "ALARM SILENCE" MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
006 4D10399Pl BEZEL LEVEL0 SYS3 4 S T MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9
DC700012 END OF L I S T
 CBMDISPl COMPUTER SUPPORT PRODUCTS GROUP 03/06/30 0824
i'i EXPLOD1 PART COMPONENTS EXPL INQ 1 - 01176 STE'

ASSY 1 2 2 9 8 0 6 2 EFF: DATE SER NO LOT NO

PLT MODEL MA S E Q ( 1 , C ) C S K I P TO ITEM/COMPONENT
DESC BEZEL ASSY VCMP NO MONITORING MPS PCC M EFFECTIVITY QTY. U/ 2
ITM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ( 2 9 ) MOD FROM THRU PER ASSY /X :<
0 0 1 G12-0470 SWITCH GUARD'D P-BTN EMERG OF MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 Eh
0 0 2 G12-0480 LAMP CLEAR 28V WEDGE BASE MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 4.000 Eh
010 G12-0498 BUTTON RECT YEL W/BLK 7/64LEG MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 EX
003 G12-0490 BUTTON RECT RED W/BLACK LEGEN MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 EX
004 G12-1400 GUARD SWT P-BTN EMERG PWR-OFF MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 E2,
005 530-0060 SPACER ROUND 3 / 1 6 X 3 / 1 6 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 4.000
006 S30-0070 SCREW TR PH PHL Z 4-20 X 1 / 4 MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 2.000 El?
009 122943P1 PLATE MOUNTING VCMP DISPLAY MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 EI. Y
007 122987P1 LABEL VCMP NO MONITORING MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 E
l.
0 1 1 4D10399P1 BEZEL LEVEL0 SYS3 4 S T MA 0 1 0 5 8 7 1 2 2 6 9 9 1.000 D.

EXPLOSION LEVEL : 1

NEXT RESPONSE : EXPLOD1 NEXT KEY :

DC700012 END OF L I S T *
 PMP MONITOR

VCMp SWITCH ASSEMBLY #2(SW2) SETTINGS

EIGHT SWITCH CONFIGURATION

EXAMPLE 8:
SW1

PIN # 1 OF IC-0

NOTE: OFF = 0
ON = 1

SW8
OFF ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW
0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

= 1C HEX = 50 KVA, 208V

LOCATED ON PCB ASSEMBLY MONITOR DRAWING # 4D13461

.,.. ..
-
 1. SCOPE

...,s document pro'rides functional descriptions of the VCMP service

m4i
terminal features fro~nan operators point of view. Included are
descriptions of both the hardware setup, and !:he avai,laSle features
nrovided by the firmware. The functions described in this document
will be the complete definition used to deveiop the firmware. Xo
additional features not described herein will be included.

2 System Overview

The terminal hardware used to deveiop the VCMP service terminal

interface consisted of a Toshiba laptop ISM P C compatible computer
equiped with a 9 pin PC A/T to 25 pin male D null modem adapter.
The terminal functions were provided by using PROCONM PLUS PC
communications software.

2.1 Hardware

2.1.1 Cable Specification

, The physical interface to the VCMP board consists of a 25 pin

female D connector and a 6 in header connector attached to
connector P 7 on the VCMP board. The pin-to-pin wiring scheme
between these two connectors is shown in figure 1.

Signal
------
SG
TXD
RXD
D TR

2.1.2 PROCOMM Setup Information

The sesial communications parameters used by the PROCOMM software

should match those shown in table 1.

SAUD : 1200
PARITY : NOXE
DATA BITS: 8
STOP BITS: 1

Table 1: PCPLUS Communication Parameters

 72.2 Software Overview

The service terminal interface software will run under the

established VCMP round-robin task switching scheme. This
guarantees that the VCMP software will not be adversly affected by
waiting for the operator to enter characters. In addition to tasks
which interpret commands, display response screens, and handle data
entry, there will be a separate interupt driver that will provide
type ahead capability up to 10 characters, will handle echo all
characters entered in sequence, and will send XOFF characters to
the terminal in case the type ahead buffer is full.

3.0
., Glossary -
VITALS: Refers to the table of configuration data that is stored
in battery backed.static RAN

4. Command Summary

This section contains descriptions of the available service

terminal commands, and is subdivided by individual commands.
Included for each command will be discussions of the data or VCMP
function accessed by the command, detailed descriptions of the
format of the response on the service terminal, and descriptions
of data entry procedures and limits if available for the command.

All of the commands 'are available from the service terminal main
menu, shown in figure 2. This menu is initially brought up when
the terminal is first connected to the VCMP by hitting the <enter>
key on the service terminal. After the completion of a given
command sequence, the main menu is always displayed. Hitting
, <enter> at this point will repeat the last command sequence.
-
-. -
0.rated kva
l.rated 1-n volt
2.calibration
3.alarm setpoints
4.alarm messages
5 .measurements

enter choice>

Figure 2: Main Menu

 4.1 configured KVA

This colilmand is initiated by entering 0 froln t-he s r r s j c e terminal

main menu. Once the command is lni r-iated,t h e confipred KVA value
is read from the VITALS table and'd9splayed as a four digit integer
with no ieading zeroes. .
In addition to the current XVA, a prompt is displayed giving the
operator an opportunity to change the KVA value using the data,
entry feature. The format for the kva dis3lay is shown in figure
3a. If the kva value is to be change<, the operator responds with
a y to the prompt.' Entering anything other than y res:~lts in the
cancelling of kva data entry and a return to the main menu.

(a) - Rated KVA> 0225

change (y/n)>

( b1 enter new value>

Figure 3 : KVA Data Screens

, Once data entry has been confirmed, the operator is prompted to

enter an integer as shown in figure 3b. Entered values can range
from 0 - t o 9999 inclusive.

If, while typing in a number, an invalid digit is entered, hitting

<backspace> erases that digit . If no number has been entered,
entering <enter> cause the command to be aborted without changing
any values. Enteripg a non-numeric character will be ignored.
Once four valid numeric digits have been entered, the resulting
number is automatically entered.

Note: When either the configured KVA rating or Line-to-Line voltage

are changed using the service terminal, the alarm setpoints are
reset to the standard defaults. Also, any previous calibration
.factors are erased, and the unit should be re-calibrated.
-. -
4.2 Configured Line-to-Line Voltage

This command is initiated by entering 1 from the main menu. The

configured tine-to-Line voltage value is read from the VITALS table
and displayed as a four digit integer with no leading zeroes. The
value for L-N voltage may be changed in the same manner as that for
KVA. The screen format for the L-N voltage display is similar to
that shown in figure 3.

4.3 Calibration

Calibration is ihitiated by entering 2 from the main menu. Once

- initiated, the menu of available parameters to be calibrated is
displayed on the terminal screen as shown in figure 4, and the
operator is prompted to select from the list of parameters.
 Selection of a parameter is accomplished by entering the number
corresponding to the desired selection, followed by hitting
<enter>. Entering anything other than a proper number will cause
thc cancelling of the calibration sequence(with an error message)
and a return to the main menu. Hitting <enter> or test> causes the
command to be cancelled and a return to the main menu without any
error message.
calibration menu

0.voltage a-b
1.voltage b-c
2.voltage c-a
3.voltage x - y
4.voltage x-n
- 5.voltage y-z
6.voltage y-n
?.voltage z - x
8.voltage z-n
9.current x
l0.current n
1l.current y
12.current gnd
13.current z
14.Kilowatts
enter # to choose

Figure 4: Calibration selection menu

Once a parameter is selected, a prompt appears on the screen giving

the operator a chance to insure that all calibration equipment is
properly installed before actual calibration begins. The operator
is asked to continue with calibration by pressing y. Entering any
other value results in cancellation of the calibration command and
a return to the main menu.

If the operator indicates that the calibration sequence should

continue, the user is prompted to enter the measured:value for use
in calibration. If no numeric characters have been entered, and
<enter> is entered, the calibration sequence is cancelled and the
main menu is displayed. Once one or more digits have been entered,
hitting <esc> causes the command to be cancelled.

When a number has been entered, the calibration value is computed

and stored in the battery backed VITAL table. It is then read back
from this table to confirm proper storage. If the value read back
is not equal to the computed value, a n error message is displayed
prompting the user to repeat the calibration sequence. Once
calibration is complete, the-main menu is displayed.

I
- 4.4 Configured Alarm Setpoints
j C
j
I-

This command is initiated by entering 3 from the main menu. Once

 the sequence has been initiated, the alarm setpoints are read fro~n
,- the VITALS table and dispiayed as a four digit integer with no
( I:) leading zeroes. These nunjers represent a Fercentage cie\rj.aCinc
from the nominal. .41i numbers are displayed as positive. The
format of this display is shown in figure 5 .
alarm setpoints
0.over voltage(%) >
1.under voltage(%) >
2.over current ( % ) >
3.over gn6 current(%)>
4.over frequency(hz) >
5.under frequency(hz)>
change (y/n)

Figure-5: alarm setpoints display

Additionally, a data entry prompt is displayed. Entering y allows

the operator to 'enter a new value for a particular setpoint.
Entering spything else, including just <enter> causes a return to
the main menu. Once a change has been indicated, the user is
prompted to enter the menu number of the setpoint to be changed.
The user then enters a single digit number 0 - 5 inclusive (no
<enter> neccessary), after which a prompt appears indicating a new
value should be entered. Entering a menu selection outside the
range of 0 - 5 results in the command being cancelled with an error
prompt, and a return to the main menu.

Once the enter value prompt appears, the user may enter a integer
number in the normal fashion. All alarm setpoints are stored in
the VITALS table as byte values, therefore the limit on the number
that can be entered is 0 - 255. After entering the new value, the
value is stored to the battery backed configuration memory, then
read out again and the setpoint table displayed to confirm proper
storage of the change. In addition, the alarm limit calculated
from these setpoints are updated to reflect the change.

'4.5 Configured User Alarm Messages ---

This command is initiated by entering an 4 from the main menu. The
5 user configureable alarm messages are then read from the VITALS
table and displayed as shown in figure 6, along with a prompt to
indicate a desired change. The messages shown in figure 6 are the
default messages that are used by the system during the first power
up. Entering y allows the operator to enter a new alarm message
string. Entering anything else causes the command to be cancelled
and the main menu to be displayed.
 user messages
1.CUSTOMER ALARM
2.CUSTOMER ALARM
3.CUSTOMER ALARM
4.CUSTOMER ALARM
5.CUSTOMER ALARM
change(y/n)

Figure 6: customer alarm message display

Once a change has been confirmed, the user is prompted to enter the
menu item number of the message to be clianged. Entering a number
outside the range of 1 - 5 results in an error prompt indicating
the command has been cancelled, and a return to the main menu.

After selecting the message number to change, a menu of available

standazd messages is displayed as shown in figure 7, and the user
is prompted to select one of these. Entering the number of one of
these selections causes that text string to be copied to the
appropriate message.

message options

O).ground system fault

l).ground failure
2).water under floor
3).security alarm
4).datawave overtemp
S).emergency shutdown
6).unit in bypass mode
.7).custom message entry
select option>
Figure 7:customer alarm message options

Also included o n this menu is the ability to enter user customized

message strings. Entering 7 in response to the message option menu
'results in a prompt to enter a new message. At this_poht a string
of up to 20 ASCII characters can be entered. If during the entry
of the new string undesired characters are entered, the <BkSp> key
can be used to backspace over these characters. Messages of less
than 20 characters reguire a n <enter> to accept the string. Once
20 characters have been entered, the twenty first stroke causes the
string to automatically be entered.
Once the string is entered, the VITALS table is written to battery
backed memory, read back from battery backed memory, and the new
messages displayed. If no characters are entered,.and <enter> is
hit, the selected string will not be altered. If characters have
been entered, hit-ting <esc> will cause the command to abort without
altering the selected string.
-
4.6 Realtime Measurements
This sequence is initiated by entering a 5 from the main menu.
The measurement data is displayed in two pages as shown in figure
8. Once the first page has been displayed, hitting any key causes
the second page to be displayed. There is no data entry available
through this command.
input voitages
a-b >
b-c >
c-a >

output voltages
x-y >
x-n >
- y-z >
y-n >
Z-X >
2-n >

output current
X >
n >
Y >
gnd >
z >
hit any key for next page

(a). measurement page 1

kva >
frequency >
Kwatts >
% load >
power factor >

(b). measurement page 2

Figure 8: measurement data display
--
- - - - - ~. -. . . . . . " -- - ~- -
-~ -
. -- ...- 1.
.- .
-. . ....... . -- ...
...- . . . . .. .. .-.___
-- - ., I.-.7.. ..
~ ~

-. ..... .- . . ..... . . . . . .
. . . . . ..... ~. . , ~
x-
~~

\ ... l . ..-
---. ~ = ?. ... .. .
......
-. ...... ---- >.. -.-.
~ -..---.
-.LLT;=.=:+T
.-
.- - -
. . -.-..... . .. . .. .
---7--.. .-

- . . , . . 'L
...
. ---.-
.
~_.
--
-_
. -
.-
.- -. -. --
--
...-......
...... --.-.
... ...
..
-
.
.- .
I
"3.
. . . . . . . .-
... m*, -~ - z
wl~lrn~er - . -
lI4t 1-m -
.r--' I
[---UNIT W/O TRANSFORMER 7

f (SEE NOTE 3 k 4

. U14
O
I ns O
PANEL-
BOARD

..............................
MUTRU SEE NOTE 2

-
I I

f w ~ E R
,
INPUT CONFlCVRATlON
I FOR UNITS W/O J-BOX

-4 m x n r t r
: UNIT W/ TRANSFORMER I, ~SYEP
EPCV
MUR )~ )
I I .wGDU(iRW

MAIN PC 'ER
vaT/rGE FACTORY W P L l ED WIRING Dl/ ;RAM
31 PAX% BD*RDS liltE 42 PKE. 225 *LIP.
. I ..pM.. ...... LOU Y a T m F I E L D SVPPLI ED
m LUN'CRarT WAKm . . . .........
IS RITE0 AT 225 UIP.
.%!;is'
p..YLR~.FL%'IE
GND
-1.1
YRIK F I E L D S W P L I ED
1.111.1.1-1.111.
 tONTRcL BOARD II
LOW VOLTAGE
TEM!NAL S W LOCAL DISPLAY
PANEL
6: 1;:
~ r r s y ~ p : ~ % ! ! ~IY.I:IIY
~ i

..
v I..
$ gig
s
W~
 -m
I -n
BOARD MONITOR
PROJECT VCMP
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED1
Indenture Level: Rev. 0
LiiU/tS;iR No.: 677 1/3/84
S S V I C E TEflMINAL i3.q. No.: 020-0247

The main functions of the Service Terminal are to nunitor locally

at the PDU, via a connection to the IGM, (1) all data and ( 2 ) all dm,
and also to do a diagnostics operation of the four ICM cardcage PCB's,
(MrcroprocessorPCB, Epran Alarm PCB, Input/Output PCB, Data Acquisition
Signal P C B ) . The Service Terminal is also used to set the I D A setpoints
and the LDA clcck's t h e and can be used to reset the LDA alarm data.
In addition, the Service Terminal gives an optional way to nunitor the
IGV parameters in the event that the Sitaster malfunctions.

The Sennce Ternunal is approximtely 4" by 64" and one 1s used as

~ollows:
 HEY PAD
ooao

SERVICE T E R M I N A L
P A W NO. nZOd;?qT
 O P E R A T I O N

OF THE
SITE MASTER^ MONrrORING SYSTEM'S

Orig 10182
OP-ST
 WaAT
5 'Service T u m i P r l ' ?
The S e r v ~ c e Terminal de-
s c r ~ b e din t h i s manual IS a
small hand-held instrument
featurq a 16-pos~cion
n u m e n c key pad, a 20-
character alphanumeric
display. supporting
electronic logic, and an
interconnecting cable.
This Service Terminal is in-
tended to be used with any
~ i e b e r t power
~ or envi-
ronm ental conditioning sys-
tem which is e uipped with
the Sitemasterqm monitor-
ing system.

WEY
L a 'Service T e r m i d ' Needed?
Many of the Si temaster-equipped Liebert power / environ-
mental conditioning installations have no need for local
monitoring capability during normal operation. In most of
these installations, therefore, monitor r e a d o u u a r e not
provided on t h e individual device(s). However, during main-
tenance of such systems, the convenience of being able to
check data without constantly running between t h e
Siternaster MC module and the unit under maintenance is
an obvious advantage.
The Service Terminal pmvides means for direct access to
the mmitoring/contml microprocesscr of any unit of a
Liebert Sitemaster-equipped system. Aside from providing
a close-proximity means of examining data of an individual
unit, the Service Terminal allows the changing of the pre-
s e t parameter limits of that unit, and also allows initiation
of a diagnostic check o f the unit micropmcessor circuits.

HOW
is a 'krice T e r m W 9 Us&?
Briefly, the Service Terminal merely allows communication betw :en the user and the
mlc--urocessor of the unit under evaluation (UUEI. The Service Terminal itself does na
con:::lling or decision-making. Rather, it provides the means for the operator to access
the monitor, control, and diagnostic modes o f the micropmcessor of the UUE.
The Service Terminal may be used with the microprocessor module of any unit served by
the Sitemaster system. Connection of the Service Terminal to the UUE automatically
provides power to t h e Service Terminal and establishes che communication Link to the
\
UUE. The usage of the Service Terminal is fully described in this manual.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 2 OP-ST
 CONTENTS

SECTION I USING THE SERVICE TERL6LNA.L ..................................................... 4

1.1. Introdactton to the Sitemaster Service Terminal .................................... 4
1.2. Operating the Service Terminal .......................................................... 5

1.2.1. Controls and Indicaton ........................................................... 5

1.2.2. "Control" Mode Selection and Operatmn ..................................... 6
1.2.3. "Monrtor" Mode Selection and Operation .................................. 18
1.2.4. "Diagnosttc" Mode Selection and Operation .............................. 27
1.2.5. "Revtew* Mode Selection and Operation ................................... 29
1.2.6. .......................................................... 34
Miscellaneous Messages

1.3. Command Key Request Menu ........................................................ 35

1.3.1. Environmental Command Modes ............................................. 35

1.3.2. Power Command Modes ......................................................... 35

SECTION U MAINTENANCE OF TEE SERVICE TERLdINAL ............................... 36

OPERATION. SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 3

.
 SECTION I
1.1. INTRODUCTION TO THE
SITEMASTER SERVICE TIZRMINAL
The Sitemaster Service
Terminal is used for local
evaluation of Sitemaster-
equipped power or envi-
ronm ental conditioning
units. -It is not intended far
use with uniO equipped
with the alternative "szand
alone" mmitor?l.
The Service Terminal k
equipped with a 20-charac-
ter alphanumeric display
(16-segment type), a 16-
parition keypad, and a
serial communications
part. The Terminal is con-
nected to the unit under
evaluation (UUE)by meana
of a quick-connect plug and
fourconductor cable. W
models and configurations
of the Sitemaster local-
unit processor modules are
compatible with the S e r
vice Terminal.
Upon connecticm to the
UUE, a built-in self-test
routine of the Service
Terminal is e x e a t c d to
assure the user that the
Terminal is functiming
properly.
The four main modes that
the Service Terminal
presents to the user are:
M O m R capability.
This mode allows the
user to examine and
evaluate the values of
the various parameters
of the UUE (e.g.
voltage, temperature,
humidity, current,
etc.).
OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL
Page 4
USING THE SERVICE TERMINAL
2 CONTROL capability.
This mode allows the
user to examine and
chauge any limits or
setpoints in the
mcmitored parameters
of the UUE (e.g. high &
low limits of humidity
and temperature).
3 REvnm capability.
This mode allows the
user to access dl
alarm information of
the UUE.
4 DIAGNOSIIC
capability.
This mode allows the
user to initiate a self-
diagnostic routine in
the local processor of
the UUE.
When the interactive capa-
bilities between t h e Ser-
vice Terminal and the
local-unit p m c a u o r are
combined with the
marritceing and analysis
capabilitiu of the Site-
m a s t a system, t b s result
L a valuable tool for ana-
lyzing and troubleshooting
exiating power and envi-
ronmental conditions,
well as maintaining the
conditiaaing equipment.
OP-ST
 1.2.1. CONTROLS AND IHDICArORS
A l l operating modes of the Service Terminal are selected
by pressing appropriately labeled keypad pushbuttons. Tne
keypad arrangement and labeling are shown in Figure 2.
Table I briefly describes the function of each control.

Yes
1 2 3 Control
D4 m5 - 6 mMonitor
m7
m8
m m
9 Diagnos
mC
00 . m
E Review
D m D m .
No

F i w 2. K q a d Arrirrqtemmt, S a r i - T e

Table L SERVICE TERMINAL CONTROLS.

Ccmttol Name Control Fuactim

Control ..................................... Alerts the UUE processor to consider subsequent

numerical -try a s a Control type request.
Mmitor .....................................Alerts the UUE p m c e u o r t o consider subsequent
numerical e n t r y as a Monitor type request.
Diagmm .....................................Alerts the UUE processor to consider subsequent
numerical entry as a Diagnostic type request.
Review ......................................Places the UUE p m c e u o r directly into the Alarm
Review mode.
0 -9 (Number Keys) ................... Select a parameter (request code), or select a param-
e t e r value (value code).
C (Cleaz) .................................... Corrects errors made when entering numerical codes
or setpoints.
E (Enter) .................................... Causes command / selection displayed on Terminal
readout to b e entered into UUE p m c e u o r . (Response
is then received and displayed by Terminal.)
Y a / No ...................................... Initiate affirmative or negative reply to question
from UUE p m c e w r .

c, ' OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10/82 Page 5
1.2.2. 'CONTROL' MODE SELECTION AND OPERATION - Changing the Limits.
Selection o f t h e C O N T R O L mode allows the operator to change parameter l~rnits,such as
temperature and humlditv set points \ i n environmental un~tsl. The follow~ngprocedures
contaln instructions ior selecting / chang~ngall selectable set pomts.

CONTROL 0 INPUT VOLTS SAG SETPOINT - Review ar Change

(a1 Plug the S e r v ~ c eTermma1 into the UUE.

rnuul m r T F
then LUI u c~)trJ-LRT&uawSG:K
~ r ) r #

displayed by the Service Terminal, indicating that the communications kak u

established and the system is ready to accept commads.

(c) Preu Control then 0

m m
rnm T
(dl O b s u v c LU, a 4 9
displayed by the Service TermiaaL

dinplayed by the Service Terminal.

(g) At this point, if it is not desired t o change the setpoint, another mode may be
entered by pressing the appropriate command key. Proceed as follows if it is
desired to change the setpoiut. (For example, to 417.)

(h) Press then

i then 7
rn

(k) Observe
displayed by the Service TuminaL
7 ---
(1) NOTE: The display in Step (k) is a confirmatian from the UUE, showing the actual
setpoint now existing. If this value is incorrect, repeat Steps (h) through (1). L[ the
value is correct, select the next desired mode by pressing the appropriate command
and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 6 OP-ST
 CONTROL 1 OUTPUT VOLTS SAG SEITOINT - R e r i o cr -e

* a i Plug the S e r v ~ c eTerminal into the UUE.

ilm
then
rn&a-1
CU0
m t r r
CPUALR Lu-5 t3)(
1
displayed by the Service Terminal, irdicating t h a t the communications Lid is
established and the system is ready to accept commands.

(c) Press Pontrol then 1

m m
r
(dl Observe LUIu I
n a
UL
t ~ p ;
displayed by the Service T u m i n a L

(1) Observe XYZ SAG S T 1 0 8

displayed by the Service Terminal.
---
(g) A t this point, if it is not desired to chauge the setpoint, m o t h e r mode may be
entered by pressing t h e appropriate command key. Pmcecd a. follows if i t is
desired t o change the setpoint. (For example, t o 105.)

(h) Press 1 then 0 then 5

m 0 0

(k) Observe V V 7
A I L
displayed by the Service TermimL
X T :3 ---
(11 NOTE: The display in Step (k) u a confirmatian f m m the UUE, showing the a c t u a l
setpoint now existing. If t h u value is incorrect, repeat Steps (h) though (1). Lf t h e
value is correct, select the next desired mode by preariag the appropriate command
and number keys.

ci OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10182 Page 7
CONTROL 2 INPUT VOLTS SURGE SETPOINT - Rev~esror Change

(a1 Plug the S e r w c e Terminal into the UUE.

r n b a u e s r 1 7 P
then CUI 11 IUI-AL a R AUIWSGK
T T n r r

displayed by the Service Terminal, indicating that the communications link is

established and the system is ready to accept commands.

(cl Press Control then 2

m m
(d) Observe L Ur~a
rn-17
REL 2
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(e) P r e u E
0
AJt Sms S T 533 ---

- -
( f ) Observe
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(gl At this point, if i t is not desired to change the setpoint, another mode may be
entered by p e r r i n g the appropriate command key. Proceed as follows d i t 1s
desired to change the setpoint. (For example, to 526.)

(h) P r e u 5 then 2 then 6

m
ii) observe R a t &WO S T
displayed by the Service Terminal.

Ci) Preu E
m
(k) o b s e r v e ABC 0
- S T
displayed by t h e Service Termirml.

(1) NOTE: The display in Step (kl is a confirmation from the UUE, showing the actual
setpoint now existing. If this value is incorrect, repeat Steps (hl through (1). If t h e
value is c o r r e c t , s e l e c t the next desired mode by pressing the appropriate command
and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 8 OP-ST
CONTROL 3 OUTPUT VOLTS SURGE SETWINT - R e v i e r or Cbange
la) Plug the Service Terminal Into the UUE.

displayed by the Serplce Terminal, indicating that the communications link is

established and the system is ready to accept commands.

(c) Press Control then 3

m m
,J) Observe c13r4Ta 3
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(el Press E
m
( f ) Observe XYZ -6
displayed by the Serolce TerminaL
SET 21 ---
(g) At this point, if it is not desired to change the setpoint, another mode may be
entered by pressing the appropriate command key. Proceed as follows if ~t IS
desired t o change the setpoint. (For example, to 124.)

(h) Press 1 then 2 then 4

m m m
vv7
(i) observe A I L so
S T
displayed by the Service Terminal.
:2 1 :zq

vv7
(k) Observe A I L
displayed by the Service TerminaL
SET Y ---
(I) NOTE: The display in Step (Id is a confirmaticm fmm the UUE, showing the actual
setpoint now existing. If this value is incorrect, repeat Steps (h) thmugh (11. If the
value is correct, select the next desired mode by pressing the appropriate command
and number keys.

OPERATLON, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10/82 Page 9

-
- -- -
CONTROL 4 INPUT VOLTS WPULSE SETFQINT - Revler ar Change
(a) Plug the Service Termlnal into the UUE.

established and the system is ready to accept commands.

(c) P r e u

(d) Observe r ~
Control
m
-u u 1
8a -,
then

7 ~
displayed by the Service TermimL
m
4

(gf At this point, if it k not desired to change the setpoint, auother mode may be
enter& by pressing tbe appropriate command kep Pmceed as follows if it ls
desired to change the setpoiat. (For example, to 1225.)

(h) Press 1 then z then Z then 5

I 0 m m

(k) Observe
displayed
Flat 1
the Service TumiaaL
2 ----
(1) NOTE: The display in Step (kl ia a c o n f i r m a t h from the UUE, showing the actual
setpoint now existing. If this value ia incorrect, =peat Steps (h) through (1). If the
value is correct, select the next desired mode by pressing the appropriate command
a d number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 10 OP-ST
CONTROL 5 OUTPUT VOLTS W U U E SETPOINT - Review ar Change

a1 P!ug the Servlce Terrn~nalInto the UUE.

rnuul 8 a l T r n
then CuInawar~LRI~UlrS T t C \ r a
uK
displayed by the Service Terminal, indicating that the communications Link is
established and the system is ready t o accept commands.

(c) Press Control then 5

0 m
(dl Observe ~
C ~
~ 8
~
m
nI o T
8UC r
displayed by the Service Terminal.
s
(e) Press E
rn

desired to change the setpoiat. (For example, to 300.)

(h) Press

V
(i) Observe A I L
0
rn
W ~
then
0
3

U S Un nU
AIIPST n
TM
displayed by the Service Termiaal.

E
then

n
u3U
0
nU
0

n
then
-
(g) At this point, if i t is not desired to change the setpoint, another mode may b e
entered by pressing the appropriate command key. Pmceed as follows if i t is

(j) Press
m
(k) Observe v A I
w 7 ru
AI I-?
displayed by the Service Terminal.
C 3cB ----
(11 NOTE: The display in Step (Irl is a confirmation fmm the UUE, showing the actual
setpoint now existing. If this value is incorrect, repeat Steps (h) through (11. If t h e
value is correct, select the next desired mode by pe,saing the appropriate command
and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

CONTROL 6 SYS'IEM PRFSET TO ORIGINAL F A C M R Y S R W t N T S

( a ) Plug the Servlce Terrn~naIInto the UUE.

mu-8 w e s r TTOI,
then L u a u -*&LA SX
AU~~ S
displayed by the Service Termmal, indicating that the communlcatlons link is
established and the system is ready to accept commands.

(c) P r e u Control then 6

m m

(I) Observe Y s ? : 4 ? -
displayed by the S e r n c e TcrminaL

(g) If it is not: desired t o preset to the original factory setpoiats, pmceed to Step (m).
-
If i t is desired to preset to the arigirul factary setpoinu proceed to Step (h).

Yes

displayed by the Service Terminal

(k) Observe
displayed by the Service T u m i ~ L

(1) NOTE: The display in Step (Ir) is a confirmation from the UUE, showing that the
PRESET c o d i t i m n o r exists. Select t h e next desired mode by pressing the
appropriate command a d numbcr keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL OP-ST

Page 12
 0
in1 Press
m
In) Observe WESET
d ~ p l a y e dby the S e r v ~ c eTerminal.
El? :: ? u
n

(01 Press E
0
(p) Observe LzR a au u
8 n t7 PRESET
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(q) NOTE: The display in Step (p) u a c o n f i r m a t i m f m m the UUE, showing t h a t the
UUE has been preset. If this condition k incorrect, repeat Steps (c) thmugh (g),
then s e l e c t the correct conditim. If the conditian is correct a s is, select the next
desired mode by pressing the appropriate command and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10182 Page 13
CONTROL 7 SYSTEM RESET (to zero accumulative parameter data)

la1 ?lug the Service Terminal Into the UUE.

r n M U 8 a a a T r T T n r a
then L u a a a u a - A C 8 8 r u a u 5 CK
displayed by the Service T e r m l ~ l , Indicating that the communications link 1s
established and t h e system is ready to accept commands.

ic) Press Control then 7

m m
r
(dl Observe LCJ(
m 8
w I
T
UL
R A
? a

displayed by t h e Service Terminal.

(e) Press
E
m
(I) observe REXT = X ? -
displayed by t h e Service Terminal.

-
(g) If it is not desired to reset .to zero all accumulative parameter d a t a (except the
clockl, proceed to Step (m).
If it 4desired t o reset to zero all accumulative parameter d a t a except the clock,
proceed to S t e p (h).

Yes
(h) Press 1
m
(i) Observe -sf
displayed by t h e Service Terminal.
ua#?ti?:
(j) Press B
'0
Ik) Observe aL Y %SET
displayed by t h e S u v i c e TerminaL

(1) NOTE: The d h p l a y in S t e p (k) k a confirmatian f m m the UUE, showing the actual
reset conditim now existing. Select the next desired mode pressing the
appropriate command and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMlNAL

OP-ST
 0
Im) Press
m
N0

displayed by the Service Termin+

(0) Press E
m
rI ~ T
(p) Observe LZR I"", RESET
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(q) NOTE: The display in Step (p) is a confirmation from the UUE, showing the actual
reset condition now existing. If this conditim h incorrect, r e p e a t Steps (c) through
(g), then select the correct condition. If the condition is c o r r e c t as is, s e l e c t the
next desired mode by pressing t h e appropriate command and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10/82 Page 15
CONTROL 8 TZME SET O F THE L D A CLOCK

la) Piug the Servlce T e r m ~ n a lInto the UUE.

then mu-8
LU* I* I U 1 In~1A7L AUIWSZK
Ir ~ 7 7 n ~ ~
d Y P l a ~ e d by the service Term~nal, ~ndicatlng that the communlcatlons lln*
established and the system 1s ready to accept commands.

( c ) Press Control then 8

m rn

(e) P r e u E
m
observe T1,k.i 1 3 1 32 1 5 8 - uM
,I U I
displayed by the Service Terminal.

111 At this point, if it is not desired to chzage the time f m m t h t displayed, .nother
mode may be entered by pressing the appmpriate command key. Proceed as follows
if i t is desired to change the t i s t i n g . (For example. to 4 : 3 3 (Note t h t
seconds a r e cleared to 00.)

(h) Press 1 then 4 then 3 3

m .
I m
then
m
(i) o b s e r v e TI= ! 3133158 1 u 133
d i ~ p h y e dby the Service Tuminal.

(k) o b s e r v eTIIT : Y 1 3 3 - n, n,,

displayed by the Service T u m i m L
_ -UU
_,
(1) NOTE: The d k p l a y in S t e p (k) L a confirmation f m m the UUE, showing the actual
time now existing in t h e LDA. If this t i m e setting h incorrect, repeat Steps (h)
through (k). If the condition u c o r r e c t as u, select the next desired mode by
pressing t h e appropriate command and n u m b u keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page I6
CONTROL 9 DATE SET OF THE LDA CLOCK

ial Plug the Service Terminal Into the UUE.

then mu-I i r i T r
L u a ir i u u A ~ 8 I Iun.rS
T T n r r
CK
displayed by the Service Terminal, indicating that the communications link is
established and the system is ready to accept commands.

( c ) Press Control then 9

m rn
(d) Observe rnr
LUI I
IT
REL 9
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(el Press E
m
i f ) Observe ZRTE 3 9 2 Y 8 2 uu
I r 1,
8-n /VW
I a
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(g) At this point, if i t is not desired to change the date from t h a t displayed, another
mode may be entered by pressing t h e appropriate command key. Proceed as follows
~f it 1s deslred to change the date setting. (For example, to 10/05/82).

(h) Press 1 then 0 then 0 then 5

m rn rn m
then a then 2
m 0
(i) Observe IATE C 92 8 2
Y I n r n
u S/ 82
dbplayed by t h e Service Terminal.

) Press E
m

(1) NOTE: The display in Step (k) is a confirmation from the UUE, showing the actual
date now existing in t h e LDA. If this date setting is incorrect, repeat Steps (h)
through (k). If the condition is c o r r e c t as is, select the next desired mode by
pressing the appropriate mode and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10182 Page I7
1.23. 'MOWXOR' MODE SELECTKIN AND OPERATION - Looking a t the Parameters.
Selection o f the MONTTOR mode allows the operator to observe parameter values, such as
temperature and h u m ~ d i t ylevels lin envlmnrnental units), or voitage and current leveis [In
power units). The following procedures contarn instructions f o r selecting any desired
parameter. The pazameter -value is updated constantly as long as the parameter 1s
displayed.

MOMTOR 1 VOLTS IN (LINE TO LINE)

(a) Plug the Service Terminal into the UUE.

then

(c) Press

(dl Observe
cue u

,
-
r r \ u u s

Monitor

u n n 1 r 7 n
u c .r A s
~ iIr I~T rA TT-s

1
displayed by t h e Service TerminaL

le) Press E
&
m
W
LARUI, ~ S
displayed by the Service Terminal, indicating that the communications link is
established and t h e system is ready to accept commands.

then 1

m
(I) o b s e r v e
era71 T
v UL .cS r YTI I
3 9 Y 78 Y82
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(8) NOTE: T h e display in S t e p (fl d t p l a y a the correct value(s) for the parameter
selected. The value(s) continue to be updated until another mode u selected. Select
the next desired mode by p r e y i n g t h e appropriate command and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 18 OP-ST
 MONiTOR 2 VOLTS OUT (LINETO LLNE)

ai ?!.qtne Service Terminal into the UUE.

then rnuuw irnTC T T n r 8

Luw 1, i u a w r L 8 l LunrS ZK
displayed by the Service Terminal, indicating that the communications link u
established and the system k ready to accept commands.

(c) Press Monitor then 2

m m
(d) Observe M ~ ~ I T T
1 IUl UJ. I !? 2 ~
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(el Press

if) Observe r r m ~T r)r I T

v UL I Suul ZC9:Z89:Z28
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(g) NOTE: The display in Step (f) displays the correct value(.) for the parameter
selected. The value(s) continue to be updated until l n o t h u made k selected. Select
.L- next desired mode by pressing the appropriate command and number keys.
~ U F

OPERATlON, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10/82 Page 19
MONITOR 3 VOLTS OUT (LINETO NEUTRAL)

(a) Plug the Service Terminal into the UUE.

Cnuna -IT#-
then LU u U-JALR AW-5
% T7nA
I
displayed by the Service Termlnal, indicating that the communlcatlons link k
established and the system k ready to accept commands.

(c) Press Monitor 3

m 0
u-lTt
(d) Observe I I- r~ I 3
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(g) NOIE: The display in Step (fl dirplays the correct value(d for the parameter
selected. The valudd continue to be updated until another mode k selected. Select
the next desired mode by presing the appropriate commaud and number keys.

OPERAnON, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 20
MONITOR 4 OUTPUT CURRENT

la) P l q the S e r v ~ c eTermlnal into the UUE.

rnuul I-IT?
then LU, II IUIUS ZK
7Tn-1
IU~WALRB
displayed by the S e r v ~ c eTerminal, indicating that the communications link k
established and t h e system is ready t o accept commands.

( c ) Press Monitor then 4

0 m
(dl Observe I
unr I T T n
I", I us
displayed by the Service Termjnal.

(el P: ess E
m
( f ) Observe REPS uu 0117 i n
I 1 u 9 -,I 3 : ,
- I
I
I
I 8
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(g) NOTE: The display in Step (f) displays the c o r r e c t value(s) for t h e parameter
selected. The value(s1 continue to b e updated until another mode is selected. Select
the next desired mode by pressing t h e appropriate command and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 21
MONITOR 5 GROUND CURRENT

; a ) Plug the Servlce Terminal lnto the U U E .

then
r n u u a a
L U a 81 8 u I u L L R a
a a l r

- Luaus
TTnsa
CK
displayed by the Servlce Terminal, indicating that the communlcatlons llnk
established and the system IS peady to accept commands.

(c) Press Monitor

m
-nn#TTn
(d) Observe 8 8 U 8 r & I
then

&
displayed by the Service Terminal.

le) Press E
5
IS

(g) NOTE: The display in Step (f) displays the correct value(r) for the parameter
selected. The value(3 continue to be updated until anothu mode is selected. Select
the next desired mode by pressing the appropriate command and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 22 OP-ST
 MONITOR 6 NEUTRAL CURRENT

iai Plug t h e S e r v i c e Terminal i n t o t h e UUE.

then
rnuu~
8 b 8 T r
C U 8 11 8 U U A L R 8 A u 8 U S
TTnra
ZK
displayed hy the Service Terminal, indicating that the communrcations link is
established and the system is ready to accept commands.

(c) Press Monitor then 6

m 0
M C I A a T T n
(d) Observe 8 8 U 8 r A 8 & 6
displayed by the Service Terminal,

-
displayed by t h e Service Terminal.

(g) NOTE: The display in Step If) d i p l a y s the correct value(s) for the parameter
selected. The value(s) continue to be updated until a n o t h u mode is selected. Select
the next desired mode by pressing the appropriate commaud and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMmAL

Orig 10/8Z P a g e 23

-
--- --
MOmOR 7 KVA AND KW

(a) Plug the S e r v ~ c eTerm~nalinto the UUE.

rnuut m a T P T'rnr~
then Lu( LUIYILA~ AUIYS%
drsplayed by the Service Terrn~nal, indicating that the communlcatrons l ~ n ku
established and the system is ready to accept commands.

Press Mon~tor then 7

m m
unr e T TCL
(dl Observe a n u s u~ a VR ?
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(f) Observe Kb'R 9 i) . 3, KG 88 .1

displayed by the Service Terminal.

(g) NOTE: The display in Step (f) displays the correct value(s) for the parameter
selected. The v a l u d d continue to be updated until another mode is selected. Select
the next desired mode by pressing the appropriate command and number keys.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL OP-ST

Page 2-4
 MONITOR 8 FREQUENCY

(a) P1w t h e S e r v ~ c eTermlnal into the UUE.

rnuul
then cul u - - J , L ~8 r u - S
U B T ~ TT-O
W
duplayed by the Service Terminal, indicatmg that the communlcatlons hnlr u
established and the system u ready t o accept c o m m a & .

(c) Preaa Monitor then 8

0 0
(d) Observe
ulk.#TT
I UA 8 8
displayed by the Service T u m i n a L

(g) NOTE: The display in Step (fl d l p l a y s the c o r r e c t value(s) far the parameter
selected. The v a l d s ) continue t o b e updated until another mode is a e l e c t e d Select
C the next desired m o b by pressing the appropriate command and numb- keys.

OPERAnON, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 25
MONITOR 9 % LOAD CAPACrrY U4 USE

ia) Plug tne S e r v ~ c eTerrnlnal Into the UUE.

then LU
TT-t
L A ~W
~ I U ~ ~ AAU-S
rnuut u t ~ r

dzsplayed by the Sernce Terminal, indicatzng that the communlcatlons hnk rs

established and the system is ready to accept commands.

-
(cl Press Monitor then 9
m m
(dl Obherve r
MnatTTn
' r I~ &? 9
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(e) Press E
m

( g ) NOTE: The display in Step (0 displays the correct value(s1 for the parameter
selected. The value(J continue to be updatkl until another mode is selected. Select
the next desired mode by pressing the appropriate command and number keys.

OPERARON, SERVICE TERMINAL OP-ST

Page 26
 1.2.4. 'DIAGNOSnCg MODE SELECTION AND OPERATION -
Checking Logic Unit Operaticm.
Selectton of the DIXGNOSnC mode initiates'a self-test routine in the m i c r o p r o c e s o r and
support circuits of the UUE. The following procedure contains the instructions and
interacttons involved in a diagnostic t e s t of the system.

D I A G N O S ' C 0 IGY BOARD TJZX

(a) Plug the Service Terminal into t h e UUE. .

r n u w IalTr t T n n 1
then ~ u a I U ~ ~ L L AUUS
8R 2)(
displayed by the Service Terminal, indicating t h a t the c o m m u m c a t i m s link is
established and the system is ready to accept cornmar&.

(el Press E
m.
If) At this point, any m e of the following six messages ( (h) through (m) ) will be
displayed, depending upon whether t h e processor unit of t h e U U E is operating
properly or (if i t is defective), what fuuctian is defective.
, - . *

. -.
(g) Observe TEST PRSSEJ
displayed *by
- the Service TuminaL s4. ..
.. ..
. .. . , . . . . .
.This display indicates that t h e p m c e u o r unit of the UUE is operating correctly in all
a r e a covered by the Diagnostic 0 routine. Select the next desired mode by pressing
. ...
the appropriate command and number keys.
.

(h) observe Z f f i 32FW3 F R I L E Z

displayed by the Service TerminaL
This display indicates that t h e diagnostic routine has detected an apparent
malfunction in the circuits of t h e DAS (Data Acquisition) Board. Remove power
from the processing unit of the UUE, replace the DAS Board, then run the
Diagnostic 0 routine again.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10/82
 This displav indicates t h a t the diagnostic routine has detected an apparent malfunc-
tlon, but cannot localize i t to a specific single area. Acknowledging this limitation,
the pcssible areas involved a r e Listed in the order of faiiure probability. Remove the
power f r o m the processing rmit of the UUE, replace the fuses, then run the Diag-
x s t i c 0 routine again. If the same message appears, the trouble location is
u r o w e d to either the DAS Board or t h e INT. Board. Replace the DAS Board and
run the Diagnostic 0 routine again. If the message appears again, replace t h e INT.
Board. Run t h e Diagnostic 0 mutine again a s assurance t h a t t h e problem has been
eliminated.

(j) Observe I/3 BSRRI) FRILEZ

displayed by the S e r v ~ c eTerminrL
This display indicates t h a t there is an apparent malfunction in the I/O Board.
Remove power from t h p r o c e s s a unit of t h e UUE and replace the I/O Board.
Repeat t h e Diagnostic 0 m u t i n e for assurance t h a t the problem has been corrected.

(k) Observe EPRCR 3-2 FAILEX

displayed by the Service TerminaL
This d h p l a y indicates t h a t t h e r e h an apparent malfunction in the EPROM Board.
Remove power from t h e processor unit of t h e U U E and replace the EPROM Board.
Repeat t h e Diagnostic 0 routine for assurance t h a t the pmblem has been corrected.

(11 Observe r I*
LPU 3 FAKE33
displayed by t h e Service TerminaL
This display indicates t h a t t h e r e is an apparent malfunction in the CPU Board.
Remove power from t h e p r o c e s s a =it of t h e UUE and replace the CPU Board.
Repeat t h e Diagnostic 0 routine for a s u r a n c e that the pmblem has been corrected.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 28 OP-ST
 1.2.5. 'REVIEW' MODE SELECTION AND OPERATTON - Checlring t h e Aarms.
Selection of the REVIEW mode allows the operator to vtew any alarm messages whtch may
be present i n the pmcessor unlt of the UUE. Only one alarm message is displayed by the
Service Termlnal at a tlme. If there are multiple alarm messages present in the U U E ,
eacn mav be examlned in sequence by repeatedly selecting the REVIEW mode.

(a) Plug the Service Terminal into the UUE.

r n u u a m1Tr ttnrI
then bumu Iul-ALAm AUI& SK
displayed by the Service Terminal, indicating that the communicatims link is
established and the system is ready to accept commanda.

(c) Preu Review

m
(dl Observe R E:' I E K
displayed by the Service Terminal.

(f) At this pomt, any one of the following messages will b e displayed, depmding upon
whether or not an alarm corditiaa exists in the U U E
NOTE: If an alarm message is displayed, record the message then repeat Steps (d)
and (e) to cause the next a l u m message t o b e d k p l a y c d Repeating steps (dl and (e)
w ~ l sequentially
l call up all a l u m messages resent a t the UUE. IIL there is only one
alarm present, the message will not change. f' c.\
. ..'
(g) Observe 8""
r
mAC;)- P-s::?
displayed by the Service TerminaL
This message announces the absence of m o u a t i or facility ~ u m for a the
UUE. The m c u a g e n activated &ring t h e R&& r
nze when no a l u m s exist.
- .,
(h) o h s u v e IFITRLSL'E WFRTEW
displayed by the Service T u m i n r L
..
\-

This alarm announces an overtemperature conditim in the synthesizer module of a

twc-module Datawave system. The a l u m is activated when t h e temperaturn within
one or more magnetic elements reaches 16O0C. If the alarm ia ignored m d the
temperature continues to r u e , the system will be s h t down when the temperature
reaches 180°C.
....
....
Check for excessively low or high input voltage.
Check for unbalanced inpat voltage.
....
....
Check fur excessive output load.
Check for obsVucted cmling vents a t top and bottom of unit.
.... Consult Elecertcal Maintenance Department.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orlg 10182 -;Pqe 29
 dsplayed by the S e r v ~ c eTerminal.
This alarm -ounces that the pou.-: unit has been in an emergency shutdown
condltlon. The alarm IS activated when the power unlt has come back on line.
.... Lnvestigate cause o f EPO.
.... Restart System.

(J) Observe F-REQdEFitY yEr r R rrm*l

a Ausr
dsplayed by the Sermce T e r m l ~ l .
This alarm announces a deviation in the power line frequency. The alarm is
activated if the frequency deviates more than a half-Hertz from the nominal in the
50Hz and 6OHz systems, or more than one Hertz from nominal in 400 (415) Hz
systems.
.... Check FREQUENCY value. If i t is now correct, deviation was only momentary.
Restart any equipment which may have s e w e d the deviation and shut down.
.... If FREQUENCY display continues to indicate an abnormally high or low frequency,
BEGIN ORDERLY SHUTDOWN OF ANY EQUIPMENT WHfCH HAS NOT ALREADY
AUTOMATICALLY SHUT DOWN.
.... Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

(k) Observe GRuuain*a

#TI
-8
FALL&€
TI a I

displayed by the Servace Terminal.

WARNING AVOLD TOUCHING METAL PARTS OF EQUIPMENT.

EQUIPMENT CABWETS MAY BE ELECTRICALLY *HOTg.
This alarm announces a failure or disconnection of t h e d a t a center safety ground
system. The alarm IS activated when t h e monitor senses an impedance g r e a t e r than
5 ohms in the s a f e t y nmund circuit.
.... Remove power from d a t a center. ( U r Emu-- Power Off or Remote Emergency
Power Off buttons.)
.... Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

This alarm announces a n excessive current flowing in the s a f e t y gmund conductor.

The alarm is a c t i v a t e d when the current in t h e safety gmund reaches SA in system
sizes through 50kVA, and 1OA in larger systems. (75kVA and up.)
.... Check the integrity o f the neutral conductor and i t s connections to the gmund
system.
.... Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Page 30 OP-ST
in! Cbsuve
n
SRUUI in S V S T E ~FRULTY
~
ilspiayrti Sv the Servlce Terminal.

WARNING AVOID TOUCHJNG MEfAL PARTS OF EQUIPMEXT.

EQUIPMENT CAJ3lNElX MAY BE ELECTRICALLY 'HOT..
Thu alarm announces the existance of a high impedance condition somewhere tn the
data center s a f e t y ground path. The alarm is activated when the rnonltor senses an
impedance g r e a t e r than 3 ohms in the safety ground
- conductor.
.... Remove power from data center. (UseEmerqency Power Off or Remote E m e r ~ e n c y
Power Off buttons.)
.... Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

This alarm announces an overcurrent condition on one or more of the output

phases. The alarm is activated any time one or more of the three phases is loaded
above 95% o f its theoretical capability.
.... Check output m r r e n t levels.
.... Check for unauthorized equipment connected to power conditioner output circuits.
.... Reduce lnad a s necessary.
.... Upgrade power conditioner s i z e as appropriate.
.... Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

This alarm announces an output voltage which is above the generally accepted limit
for proper computer equipment operation. T h e alarm is activated if the output
voltage of the power conditioner rises more than 6% above nominal - the CBEMA-
recommended limit.
.... -
Check the a c t u a l voltage value if t h e voltage level is more than 10% over nominal
value, begin orderly shutdown of computer equipment.
.... Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

mi ~Tpat~
(p) Observe UUI U I U I U
I IA t n
~
~ f
r tUm
CI
displayed by the Service Terminal.
This alarm announces an output voltage which b below the generally accepted limit
for proper computer equipment operation. The alarm is activated if the output
voltage o f the power conditioner falls t o less than 13% below nominal - the
CBEMA-recommended limit.
.... Check the actual voltage value -if the voltage has fallen to less than 15% below
nominal value, begin orderly s h t d o w n of compiuter equipment.
.... Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig lOi8Z Page 3 1
 Observe PHRSE F?GTR
d~splayedby the S e r v ~ c eTerrn~nai.
TT
- Lm
Ur .I 5s
I -l ~ L U
r-7

This alarm announces either the incorrect phase rotatlon or the loss o f a phase to
the i n p t of the power conditioner. The alarm is activated upon sensrnq e ~ t h e r
condition.
Shut down any equipment which has not already automatically been shut down.
Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

displayed by the Service Terminal.

This alarm announces a potential breach of d a t a center security. The alarm is
activated by an unclcsed d a t a center access door (or doors).
Local conditions, circumstances, time-of-day, and company policy determine the
a c t i m to b e taken in response to this alarm. KNOW COMPANY POLICY A N D
FOLLOW Tr.
Notify company security or local police if situation warrants.
Close door.

Observe TRFI?iSFnSREF3 Gv'E RTEfiP

displayed by t h e Service Terminal.
This a l u m announces an overtemperature condition of the transformer located In
the d i s t r r t u t i m module of t h e power conditioner. The alarm is activated when the
temperature *]thin the magnetic elements reaches 160°C. If the alarm is lgnored
and the temperature continues to rise, the system will b e shut down when the
temperatrve reaches 1 8 0 ~ ~ .
Check for excessively low or high i n p t voltage.
Check for unbalanced input voltage.
Check for excessive o u t p l t load.
Check for obstructed cooling vents at t o p and bottom of unit.
Consult Electrical Maintenance Department.

I
Observe UI r~ I
m#TT T r l
3YF)RSS K G z f
displayed by the Service Terminal.
This alarm announces that the power conditianing unit is being bypassed, and that
raw or minimally conditioned power is being supplied to the data center. The alarm
is activated by the bypass switch circuitry.
Investigate reason for system being m bypass mode.
Operate in bypasr mode only if necersary for as long u necersary (e.g. durlng
preventive maintenance operations for the conditioner.)
Switch back t o Normal mode as soon as practical. (CAUTION: observe correct
procedure to prevent equipment damage.)

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL OP-ST

Page 32
 tisplayed by t h e Service Terminal.
This alarm announces the presence of water under the raised floor o f t h e d a t a
center. The alarm sensor is activated by t h e presence of w a t e r on t h e s u b f l o o r , or
by the reaching of a predetermined w a t e r level in a drain sump.
.... Check the e x t e n t of water preserice.
.... Begin orderly shutdown of d a t a c e n t e r if n e c e s a r y .
.... Consult Plumbing and Elecwical Maintenance Departments.

Page 33
1.2.6. MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES.

O c c a s ~ o n a ~ lay mistaken number may be e n t e r e d rnto the system. If the number 1s rn

undeilned or unacceptable mode classification f o r t h e U U E , or IL t h e setpoint u outslde
predetermined limits, the S e r v ~ c eTerminal will d ~ s p l a ythe EoUow~ngmessage:

If a command number e x c e e d s t h e establilshed range, the Service T e r m i n a l will display the

followmg message:

A f t e r pressing t h e "C"key, the S e r v ~ c eTerminal will display t h e f o l l o w ~ n gmessage:

NOTE: If i t is discovered before e n t e r i n g (before pressing "E"1 t h a t one o r more

mistaken digits were selected, t h e s e l e c t i o n may b e c o r r e c t e d by pressing "C" to
c l e a r t h e s e l e c t e d digits from t h e display, t h e n selecting t h e c o r r e c t digits.

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

P a g e 34 OP-ST
 1.3. COMMAND KEY REQUEST MENU.

Follwv~ng 1s a ilsf o f command key request numbers presently a c n v e in the S e r v ~ c e

Termrnal.

1.3.1. Environmental Command Modes.

( N o Envrronmental Command modes are y e t in existence.)

13.2. Power Command Modes.

The following power command modes are now in existence:

Control 0 ........................................................... Input Volts Sag Setpoint

Control 1 ........................................................ O u t p l t Volts Sag Setpoint
Control Z ........................................................Input Volts Surge Setpoint
Control 3 ..................................................... O u t p t Volts Surge Setpoint
Control 4 ........................................................... h p t Voltr Impulse Set
Contml 5 ...................................................... O u t p t Volts Impulse Set
Control 6 .........................................................................System Preset
Control 7 .......................................................................... System Reset
Control 8 ......................................: . Time Set
Control 9 .............................................................................. D a t e S e t
Monitor 1 ........................................................... Voltr In (line-to-fine)
Mcmitor 2 ............................................................Volts Out (fine-to-line)
Monitor 3 .....................................................Volts Out (line-to-neutral)
Monitor 4 ....................................................................... Output Current
Monitor 5 ....................................................................... Ground C u n e n t
Monitor 6 ................................................................... Neutral Current
Monitor 7 ............................................................................kVA and KW
Monitor 8 .............................................................................. Frequency
Monitor 9 ............................................................................. % Capacity
Diagnos 0 .................................................................. IGM Board(s) Test

Review (No number req'd) ................................ Alarm Message Review

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMINAL

Orig 10182 Page 3 5
 SECTION U MAINTENANCE O F THE SERVICE TERMINAL

Maintenance ~i t h e S e r v ~ c eTerminal is limited to keeping t h e unlt clean and dry. Store

the unlt where it will not be subjected to dust, d i r t , s p ~ i l a g eo f iiqu~ds,or p h y s ~ c a l&buse.
\ P a y particuiar a t t e n t i o n to protecting t h e interconnecting cable.)
T h e S e r v ~ c eT e r m l m i u ~ n t e n d e dto be r e t u r n e d to t h e F a c t o r y if e i e c v o n ~ cmalnrenance
or repalr 1s necessary.
DO NOT A'ITEMIT TO DISASSEMBLE THE SERVICE TERMINAL.

8 1982, Liebert Corporation All rights reserved

P r i n t e d in U.S.A. Specifications Subject to Change Without Notrce
PTM Form No. St-23400

OPERATION, SERVICE TERMtNAL OP-ST

Page 36
k Liebert Corporation (. ../
2he c h a s s i s assembly of the Information Gather- Mcdule ( I m )
contains circuitry t o provide several function with resped t o the
in@/- voltages and currents of the Liebert Power Center (PC) .
? h e fundions include monitoring, data gatherirq ard calculations,
alarm alerting, safety shutdown and ccnmunication to the Liebert
S-,i Sitescan, or unit l d monitor. Functions under micro-
processor control in dedicated portions of the overall &assis
a s s a b l y on be divided as follows:
1.0 mta Monitoring - pcx~erparameters

2.0 Data Qlollations -

power parameters: cut&& KVA (power
factnr mt available to e), c u t p t XW, psmmt output
axrent capacity per phase.
3.0 Alarm Wnitoring
3.1 m h Aim: autprt w ~ / voltage ~ u (+6, -13% of
naninal @rise to neutrdl voltage), frequency deviation
(+/-.5 Hz), aApt werolzrent (alarm a t 95% of autplt
capacity) , and alann present lccal lamp(s) .
3.2 Safety Alanm: transformer overtemperature (>I60 deg c) ,
grrmnd system faulty, and grand failure.
3.3 Olstomer Alarm: (optional) dry contact up to 4 n o m l l y
open an3 1 norrrally c l d .
4.0 Emergency Fewer O f f (EEO) and Safety Control

4.1 ER, Control: both local (at PC) and m m t e shutdm.

4.2 Safety Control: transformer overtemperature (7180 deg C)
autamtic shutdown circuitry.

5.1 A l l data and a l a r m sent t o Sitemaster and/or Sitescan,

o r local m n i t o r ( i f used).
 5.2 A l l data and alanm except Line D i s t u r b a n c e h a l y z e r
(IDA) available a t service terminal and local q n i t o r
( i f used).

m e abare fundions are carried cut using eleven BEis. Table 1

identifies the board's usual locations (in the ICM cardcage) and
provides a brief description of each board's function.

usual
Board Location

Interface Board olrtside 1. Provides correct scaling of

of voltage/-* by +, f o r sag/
olassis =JTwimpzl=.
2. Provides alarm function, auto/
mnual restart w o n , grumd f a u l t
detect, t r a n s f o n w overtemp alarm,
loal and remote Em.
3. Provides interfa- to ather boards
fran K.
4. Cbdan=r N.O., N.C. amtad
alarns.
ICM hta Requisition Slot #1* Pmvides A/D conversion of voltage,
Board -, Fhase angle and frequency
data.
ICM EpwryAlarm Slot #2 Pmvides operating instructions f o r
Board IGM microp11~3essor.
Slot #3 Pmvides ammnmication interface
(special custmer) t o S i t a r a s t e r ,
Sitescan; dry contact alarm
monitoring, w n t r o l N.O. ard N.C.
custamer alarm contacts.
Slot #4 Pmvides micrq,roce~sor f o r data
calculation and monitor functions of
ICM.
LDA Microprocessor Slot #5 Prwides microprccessor control f o r
Board LDA - sag/Surge (90-998V), m se
inplt/cutprt volts (100-4KV, 1 t o
2048 usec) ; ommmicatiorrs w i t h IGM
micmp~oces~r.
 Usual
Board Location

LDA Inplt Fssy Slot #6 Measures a m p l i w e and duration of

(Analog Inpxlls a-d input d q irlplses (100 to 4KV,
Digital Inpxllse Boards) 1 to 2048 uSec incrwents then in
semnds) .
IDA mtpt m s e S l o t #7 &aswes a m p l i M eand duration of
Assy (-03 w e arput analog irrpxiLses (100 to 4m,
& Digital Impllse B3s) 1 to 2048 u ~ e c-
t
s then in
secords).

IDA Clock Battery/ S l o t #8 Frwides battery back up of RAM used

RAMBoard to -re data; c l c c k provides tLning
f o r sag/surge measurements.

IDA mpk sagsurge S l o t #9 ~LSUES timing of irpxlt sag/surge

Board voltages (duration 1/2 cycle/phase -
90 to 997 f o r sag; 9 1 to 998 f o r
surge; or +7%, -15% of norminal line
voltage).

m cutput sagsurge Slot #lo Measures timing of artprr .=qY=mge

Board voltages (duration 1/2 cyde/phase -
90 to 997 for sag; 91 t o 998 f o r
singe; o r +7%, -15% of norminal line
voltage).

IGf/UX Backplane B3. Inside Prwides mnnon t m s . s ~and

~
Q1.dcage micnp~oce~sor control, data, and
address busses f o r IWLDA. ICM and
LDI are separate m i c c o p ~ ~ ~ e ~ ~ ~ r s ,
each having its a ~ control,
n data,
address bus, but sharing conanon p e r
tus.

* S l o t 1 refers to topn>st s l o t in cardcage as seen on SKD-020-0265.

Also s l o t mmkers f o r boarrls are shm on U118843 drawing.
 e,
IGM SYSTEM
-~ DIAGRAM 6
CARDCAGE ASSEMBLY

IGM. OPT. M O N T CARDCAGE IGM. LDA CAROCAGE

PCB ASSEMBLIES (4) PCB ASSEMBLIES (6)

DAS PC0 ASSEYOLY

,I SLOT
CAB & E.P.O. BUTTON AH0 A8 ARM PRESEHT INDICATOR

JBOX: CUSTOMER I' :II COHTACTI ALARMS kHD

REMOTE E.P 0.

cA7 + 5. ? 15 POWER UPPLIES A N 0 1OVA. l 5 V A

TRANSFORMER

EPROM f f i D ASSEYILY
n SLOT
LOAlWPUTlYPULSE
W U D L E K D ASSEYDLV
I SLOT 11 LOAINPUTSAOISUIIOE
ffiIASSEYOLV
"M

INTEMFACE
C U
TRANSFORMER OVER TEMP. GROUND SYSTEM
FAULTY. GROUND FAILURE. CUSTOMER ALARMS
TO 110 PCB (CAROCAGEI

A U R M PRESEHT INOICATOR $10 FROM 110 PCB

PCD A S S E Y I L I NOT USE0 OH PRECISION POWER OR SELF-

CQHTAINEO OATAWAVE

I H R l T IMPULSE PCB ASSEMBLY

'".":
I
LDAOUTPUTIYPULIE LOA OUTPUT CAOISUMGE (CARDCAGE) ,, IMPULSE A N 0
W U D L E PC8 ASSEYBLV K B ASSEMBLY S*OISURGE
,ISLOT OUTPUT IMPULSE PCB VOLTkGE SIONAl

SIONAL L N E L
CU~ kt- ASSEMBLY ICARDCAGEI
VOLTAGES

CIS
0 A s PCB ASSEMBLY
(CARDCAGE)
I VOLTAGE. CURRENT.
FREQUENCY SIGNALS

OPT. YONT.
YICIIOPROCESSOM
U O ASEYBLV
U S L O T . I,.

PCB PCB
10 S L O l BACKPLANE PCB ASSEMBLY
 PROJECT, I
1011 @hart I CALCULATED
--
BY DATE
- - 1
me plupose of the IGM Interface Board is to provide a monitoring
function, a safety function, and an emergency power off ( E . P . O . ) /
restart fundion. me monitor function is further divided into a
data section and an alarm section.

In the data section (of the xmnitor fundion) high voltages/currents

are scaled and routed to additional PCBs (DFS koard, sag/surge,
hpke boards) f o r precessing. Typical received signals include:
inprt sagsurge, hpims, and phase t o phase voltages; cutput
sagsurge, impllse, ard phase to neutral voltages: ground currents,
neutral clrrrents, ard phase to neutrdl o2rrents.

In the alm section, t h e interface board monitors overtempera-

(>I60 deg. C and >I80 d q . C ranges), grand f a u l t armnts, and
optimal custDwer a l a r m . The optional alanm are used t o alert t h e
system operator of imPeniing problems requiring action.
me safety function of t h e interface board provides f o r inaaediate
shutdmn of the EC (p.er center) a t the main breaker i n the event
that either local o r remote E.P.O. switches are activated, o r extreme
overtmprature (>I80 deg. C) are fciud a t the Izransformers.

The E.P.O./restart section provides f o r omlerly restart of the PC

a f t e r power outage (i-e., a manual restart). men prcgramed f o r
manual restart the p e r center's inprt breaker trips to the off
position during a pmer outage. ?his prevents a l l ccanplter room
peripherals f n m sinniltaneously being pckuered up during a restart;
the operator provides f o r an orderly restart by individually
controlling power to t h e peripherals dw,bq restart. lhis prevents
damagetomnprrrterrocan~Itduringthepowerupsequ-.

The interface board has the capability to be pmpmned a t factbry

f o r auto restart if c u d c m r desires (i.e. power center cclmes on
autaoatically after power outage remvery) .
The main iryxlt c-t breakers are qui&pdwith a 24 v o l t shunt t r i p
fed-. 'Ibis means t h a t an extezTlal voltage of 24 v o l t s CC o r
greater can inrmediately t r i p the i n p t breakers to the off o r
disconnect position.

m: 1. ?his description w i l l consider t h e interface board in

three parts (xmnitor fundion, safety function, E.P.O./restart
funaion) . 2. Table 1 references voltage/cllrrent callouts by phase
(this description assumes phase A only).
Page 2

Monitor Fundion
A. Data Section:

Input voltage (phase to phase) is received from fuses F-1 thr-

F-3, passing through dividerj R7-25-26, and R10-31-32-43-44.
From the first divider network (R7-25-26), the scaled voltage is
passed thmiqh P-1 (CA-1) to the IGN Data Acquisition Board
(IS). Scaled voltages f r o m the second network (IJ.10-31-32-43-44)
are rolrted thrw.qh P-11 (CA-3) to the LLl& input impzlse board for
additional bpt sag/surge and impulse pmcessing. . A t t h i s time,
the DAS board is also prooessing phase voltage/current
information.
auwlt measurements are made using a 500:5 current transformer
for phase and neutral cuzrents an3 a 50:s transformer for gnxlnd
current. These current transformers are laated i n the PC and
their leads terminate a t F-9 on the interface boarrl. Fmm P-9,
these current signals are rarted t o wrrent termination
transformers T-1 thmugh F 5 on the interface bead. T h e s e
current -tion transformers are used to scale cllrrents f o r
wnitoring [3800 (seccarlary):2 ( p r b a q ) 1.
cnaplt voltage (phase to neutral) is received thnmgh voltage
dividers R1-13-14 ard R4-13-20-36-37. Fnm the f i r s t divider
network scaled voltage i s passed to the DAS Board. Scaled
voltages frnm the second network are routed to F2 t o the IDA
output board for additional output sadsurge ard m s e
pnxzssing. Also a t this time, the DAS board is pnxessirq phase
voltage/current information. Both the system grolnd and neutral
terminate on the interfa- board (P-8). lhis grand/neutral
system is used to provide the separate signals used to
any gmund faults or loss of ground integrity. m ' e ground
neutrdl also provides for a graund return for o w b a r d pm?.r
-lies (i.e. , CR-1 and CR-2) .
B. Alarm Section:
are lccated on
1. O v e r t e m p e r a t u r e - - o v ~ t u r ealm sasors
the p e r transformers and consist of two heat ranges (160
deg. C and 180 d q . C). A s the f i r s t alarm (160 deg) trips,
its signal is muted via P-5 to the 1/0 board of the Im.
The 1/0 board turns on the alarm lamp via K-3.

2. G r o u n d Fault-the interface board d e t e d s ground faults in

two levels (grwrd fault and loss of ground inwity).

A 12.6 volt AC p e r line laated off of the interface board

is half wave rectified to approxirrately 12.6 volts by CR-9,
R-60, and Cft-7. This current source is placed on the system
n e u t r a l . me return signal is sensed on the system ground a t
Page 3

P 8 . Comparator U-1 ( p i n s 1, 2 , 3 ) , referenced by resistor

n e t w o r k R 61-63, w i l l t r i p n o r m a l l y open relay K-7 i f the
voltage sensed is greater than 1.08 volts. mis corresponds
t o a 3 ohm path t o ground and indicates a ground s y s t e m
fault. Comparator U-1 (pins 5, 6 , 7) referenced by resistor
n e t w o r k R 62-64 w i l l t r i p the N.O. contacts of K-6 if the
sensed voltage is greater than 4.47 volts. lhis corresponds
to a >5 ohm path to grounj. and indicates a ground failure.
InbothcaseS, the signal is sent to the 1/0 bard via P 5
and the alarm lamp is lit thraqh K-3.
3. mstawr Aim-the PC and interface board provide for up t o
5 axstmer provided alarm. lhree of these, i f used, must be
specified from this list: water under floor, phase rotation
loss, security alarm, e m ~ ~ g e n cshutdam,
y and u n i t in bypass
mode. ?he remaining tho alarms are ~ l e t e l definabley by
the astamz. F o r u s e w i t h the I Q Y I D A Sitemaster, up to 2 0
&araders each m y be specified to define these two alarm.
defined alarm me5~agesare properly d e d and reside
inEEcMlocatedontheI~~board.

Of the 5 astmer alazms, 4 w N o r r r a l l y Open (N.O.)

amtacts, and the fmainirq alann u s e s N o r r r a l l y Closed (N.C.)
omtacts. Signals frcmn these alanm are sent to the 1/0
board via P 5 (CA-6). I n no case is a customer a l a r m
configured to shunt t r i p the nab breaker; ( t h e s e alarm are
provided f o r operator use o n l y ) .

If the transfomer operating tWpera- continues to increase to

180 deg. C, a -mi overtemperature s w i t c h closes initiating a
signdL to open the N.C. mntacts of K-2 providing an ' te "

shunttripofthemainirqxltbreaker, thus shuttingthepwer

center dawn. Temperature smsnrs are lccated on the tranSformerS
an3 the signals received on the interface board via P 6 .

Lacal E.P.O. and rewte E.P.O. s w i t c h e s also shunt t r i p the

breakers. These switches are a N.O. type. Once m u a l l y clmed,
their 32 volt CC signals are reoeived on CA-6 ard inrmediately
trip the min breaker.

~.~.o./Restart
-ion
A. E.P.O./Remote E.P.O. Section

If approximately 32 volts CC is applied to the shunt t r i p breaker

coil, the breaker w i l l t r i p shutting off all hpt pawer. me
1- emergency p e r off (E.P.O.) and remte E.P.O. (R.E.P.O.)
Page 4

operate in an identical manner. When any E.P.O. switch is

pressed, norrrally open contacts close providing a 32 v o l t !X path
from bridges a-1and CR-2 t o activate relay K-1 c l m i n g its
nomnlly open contacts. The now closed contacts provide the 32
volt shunt t r i p voltage t o irmnediately t r i p the min pa~er
breaker.

8. Restart Section

1. Auto Restart (Jumper J-1 soldered in on t h e interface board,

J-2 at). As the main pckyer re-, the =in inpt breaker
to t h e p e r center is still i n t h e "on1'position, enabling
t h e P.C. to sirmiltaneously provide ps.er to a l l peripherals
and equipment conneded to the P.C. DC voltage is applied
tlreqh path CR-3, F-1, N.C. contacts, and overtemperature
switch t o c o i l of K-2. Relay K-2 N.C. W c t s close
providing voltage to K-1, whose normally closed contacts open
remxring any 24 v o l t frcan t h e shunt trip c-t.
2. Manual Festart (Juniper J-1 a&, J v 5-2 soldered in). The
main~breakerofthepower~~bemanudLlyreset
by t h e operator when pmer is restored. When voltage is
amlied, relay contacts are clcsed as irrlicated atme.
Initial voltage to activate relay amtacts K-2 is prdvided by
capacitor C-7.
 TABLE 1

Phase Phase Phase

A B C

Scale Voltage R7, 25, 26 R8, 27, 28 R9, 29, 3 0

Scale Voltage R1, 13, 14 R2, 15, 16 R 3 , 17, 18

 IGM
I N T E R F A C E B O A R D
 IGM
I N T E R F A C E B O A R D
 IGM
I N T E R F A C E B O A R O

F R O M

R E M O T E S T E P D O W N lo;&. -. . -
B O A R O
 IGM
I N T E R , F A C E B O A R D

N E U T .
I - S Y S . F O R 2 1 5 V D C S U P P L Y '
2-SyS. r\rEuT. F O R 7 5 V A X F O 6 ' M E R
3-2 4 VAC F R O M 7 5 V A T 0 I O V A % F MR.
4 - 1 2 V A C F R O M TO
I O V A GND. M O N .
5-SYS. N E U T . F O R 7 5 V A X F O R M E R
6 - 2 ~ V A CF A O M * 7 5 VA T O (C R I r z
7-SYS. N E u T . F O R + 5 V D C S U P P L Y
T O 10VA X F M R .
 IGM
I N T E S F A C E B O A R D

E P O L I G . H T N.0. E P O 2 4 V O C
C O M M O N S W I T C H + L I G H T
A P L 2 4 v D C A P L C O M M O N

N.O. E P 0 N C
R E T U R N

CA9
C D / ~ C .,&?'
,/.
/
- i - - L l ~ -9 E", ;

LOCAL EPO
 MAIN MICROPROCESSOR DOAKL
020-0251

GENERAL DESCRIPTION:

The purpose of the main microDrocessor board is to ath her data from
all points in the system, process and/or store this data, and
initiate action when necessary. This board polls all peripheral
units, reads the keypad for user input, directs the readout and the
data printer, and initiates the alarm when necessary.

The heart of the 020-0251 board is a Motorola MC6802 microprocessor

operating at 1 mifz. Also on board is 8K of RAM in addition to the 1K
in the microprocessor. 32K of ROM, two peripheral interface adapters,
a chip select decoder. bus drivers. deta transcievers and a watchdog
chip to reset the microprocessor in the event of power loss or
powerdown.

The microprocessor board is 8 x 4% inches and mounts in a slot of the

cardcage in the main unit. A 44 position edge connector in the
cardcage connects the board to the address. data and control busses.
power supplies and ground. Three additional headers are provided on
the outer end of the board for connections to the keypad, display
board, and alarm circpit.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION:

This board houses the main microprocessor and memory and the devices
it needs to communicate with the rest of the system. The micro-
processor. US, is a Motorola MC6802. 8 bit microprocessor with 1K of
on chip RAM operating at 1mH.z. It communicates with the rest of the
systems through a 16 bit address bus, an 8 bit data bus. and a 6 bit
control bus. Initialization information and program instructions are
stored in Read Only Memory. Two 16K EPROMs. U5 and U7. type 2716 are
on board for this purpose. These carry all the characteristics of
the system. Data obtained from the peripheral units and sensors in
the system are stored in Random Access Memory until needed for
display. printing, or further processing. Two 4K static RAMS. U1 and
U2, type 2114 are provided to supplement the 1K of RAM in the micro-
processor for this purpose. Communication between the keypad and the
microprocessor is managed by a Peripheral Interface Adapter. An
MC6821 PIA, U4. performs this function. Another PIA. U6, manages
communication with the display and alarm functions. These functions.
along with the printer. form the operator interface with the system.
A 74LS138. U11. serves to decode address information and select the
proper chip for each step of the program. Logic gates U16 and U17
are used for additional decoding and control functions. The
powerdown detector, or "watchdog" circuit, monitors the +5 volt logic
power supply and activates the reset bus whenever this voltage falls
below 4.75 volts. This prevents the loss or scrambling of
information during powerdown. powerup, or in the event of a power
failure. This function is performed by U18. a precision voltage
reference and op amp. type LMlO and its associated circuitry. The
 Page 2

balance of the integrated circuits on the 020-0251 board are bus

driver/buffers used to isolate the busses on the board from the rest
of the system. The address bus is buffered by three type MC8T95 hex
bus drivers. U10. U13. U14. A fourth such unit. U15, buffers the
control bus. The data bus, since it must pass information either
direction. is buffered by two type 8216 quad bidirectional bus
drivers. US and U12. The direction of data flow is controlled by the
read/write command from the microprocessor.

A description of the detailed operation of the microprocessor chip is

beyond the scope of this manual. Should this information be
required. the reader is referred to the current edition of the
Motorola 8 Bit Microprocessor Manual.

Component locations are shown on assembly drawing t020-0251 and

pinouts are clearly called out on accompanying schematic *G12-3020.
both included in this manual.

The 020-0251 board operates on +5 VDC power, taken from the cardcage
through the 44 position edge connector.
 4
I 16 CONDUCTORS CONOUCTORS

J'.............. ..........1 I
I
.
...
17 POS 12 POS

MICROPROCESSOR PCB

THlS PCB PLUGS INTO IGM'S CARbCAQE BACKPUNE PCB.

THROUGH THlS CONNECTION THE MICROPROCESSOR PC8
ACCESSES THE AOORESS BUS. DATA BUS, CONTROL BUS AND
+ 5 VOLT POWER SUPPLY.

MICROPROCESSOR PCB-IGM
GENERAL DESCRIPTIOS:

The programialarm board carries two separate circuits. independent

except for common connections to +5 V logic power and ground. The
first of these is the program memory, which consists of four EPROMs.
U6, U7, U9, U10, and an address decoder. U4. This circuit connects
to the main microprocessor through the card edge connector, which
also carries logic power and ground. The second is the alarm control
circuit, which consists of a multivibrator, a relay, a charge pump,
switch transistors. and wired logic. This circuit connects to the
main microprocessor through a 4 pin header, PI, and to the
piezoelectric audible alarm and remote customer alarms through P2,
both mounted on the outer edge of the board.

The physical size of the board is 8 x 4% inches and mounts in a slot

in the cardcage of the main unit.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION:

The program instructions for the main microprocessor are stored in

the four 2K x 8 EPROMs U6, U7. U9, and U10. The correct EPROM is
selected by the address decoder U4 when it is selected by a VMA
signal. Sixteen address lines and eight data lines connect this
memory bank to the main microprocessor through the card edee
connectors.

The alarm control circuit accepts an alarm command from'the

microprocessor and sounds a pulsing audible alarm from a piezo-
electric "buzzer". At the same time a relay is activated, the
contacts of which can be connected to a remote alarm system. Both of
these circuits are de-activated when the "alarm cancel" is operated.
An additional signal from the microprocessor causes the audible alarm
to "chirp" each time a key is pressed. providing tactile feedback for
the operator.

An alarm signal is received in the form of a logic "1" on pin 4 of

PI. This is inverted by U2B and turns on Q 3 which activates the
remote alarm relay K1. This inverted signal also reverse biases CR1,
removing the clamp on U2A, which is a 1 Hz square wave multivibrator.
This signal'is used to switch Q 2 on and off, which pulses the audible
alarm through Q1. U 3 is a capacitively coupled charge pump producing
-5 vdc from the +5 V power supply. This is necessary to provide
sufficient voltage to operate the piezoelectric "buzzer".

The tactile feedback signal is received as a short positive pulse on

pin 3 of PI. This momentarily turns on Q2 and discharges C1, causing
the alarm to sound until C1 recharges through R2 and R1. This
results in a "chirp". indicating the input has been recognized.

The program/alarm board obtains its power from the 5 vdc logic supply
through the card edge connector. Refer to the schematic diagram and
layout drawing for pinout information.
 Dual Oufput Models

1!3mirial Refer to Model Selection Chart Crowbars both OulPlltS. Typical sening 3 . 4 ~
Vol:nSe above sum o f operating voltage.
P.d.iuhin~cnts t 5 % nominal output, minimum Triple Output Models
:~:!d Axiges OVP Universal on +5V Outputs. Optional on
iieiji~lation(Line) 20.05% for 210% line change outputs 2 arid 3 as above. Overvoltage
modules do not add lo outline dimensions.
Regulation (Load) t.0.05% for 50% load change
Remote Sense Standard on most models to compensate lor
M p p k [R:4S) 2mV RMS Max up to 0.25 volt drop in the load cable. Open
I (k?k) 3mV P-P typical; I 0 mV P-P maximum sense lead protection is built in on all units.

Trat~s.Response Output voltage returns to within regulation

limits typically within 30 microsec in response
to a 50% load step. Environmenta!
Overshoot No turn-on or lurn-off overshoot. Operating 0-70aC. Full rating to50°C. Seederating chart.
Overload Inherently protected againstoverload and Temperature
Protection shod circuit by a lotdback type of Storaga -55OC to 8SoC
characteristic. Recovery is automatic. Temperature
Overvoltage Standard on all +5V outputs. Preset at 6.2 Temperature 0.02%PC
Protection t 0 . 4 V (fixed). Overvoltage protection Coefficient
optional. Universal OVP module available for
any model. Adjustable 4.5-36V. Typical setting Stability Typically *0.15% for 24 hours after initial
10.20% above operating voltage. warm-up.
Cooling Natural convection
Humidity Up to 95% R.H.. Non-Condensing

Dcrating Chart

.lr .ersal 0rc.rvo :age Protect~m-Tn s SC3 crowoar m o o ~ l e can

oe sou-a v. Ihln I',e ~ u oshed
l o-lime toany on versa1serles power
supply with an output voltage of otherthan5~.On multi-output
models i: is usually installed across both outputs (output 2 & 3 on
triples) i n d IS adjusted to trip and short both outputs if their sum
exceeds a predelermined level.
Tn,s overvo lage moo-'e can be used on any regulated power 8
- .. . .. .
. .
.. ... . .
s ~ p ~o.::gut
l, witn a load rallnq less !ran 15A wll;cn has fola-oack * so I I I
.
I
' . ,:.. ."-.. .,.
. .'
1
I
' ,
:/<e &en1 limiting. It is adjusable from 4.5V to 36V.
I 40
..
M €4 7O.C

3rd2ring Information:
-

Orcd: 3( s p x I cmode. lrorn se e'cl~onc.rarlI1OVP 1s deslreo on a

-
s GO ~C.IICLI mooelotner tna15V. or on a r r ~ ~ l ~ . o u l m o oacd
l o the nioo4 number.
e l . a-1

The OVP module with mounting hardware is shipped as a

separa!e item in the container. Installation and adjustment
iirocedures are included.
YO..^ .oca. Oistr;butor can snip !nese moae s lrom stocn an0
zerlorm rn;iivvai-e added services. sucn as instalmq - OVP's. See
Ilsting of dktnbutors at rear of this catalog.
 T H I R D A N G L E PRO.JECilOP1
I REVISIONS

C A R D C A G E BUS CONNECTION FOR J1

t5volts
t5vo1ts
t15volts
A14
A12
A10 12. A l l
A8 14. A9
A6 16. A7
A4 18. A5
A2 20. A3
A0 22. A1
-15vo1ts 24. -15~0lt.s
I RQ 26. NMI
VMA 28. VMA
RESET 30. R/W
D6 32. D7
D4 34. D5
D2 36. D3
D0 38. D l
ANALOG G N D 40. ANALOG G N D
DIGITAL G N D . 42. DIGITAL G N D .
DIGITAL G N D . 44. DIGITAL G N D .

NOTES :

1. F o r S c h e m a t i c , .see it2-367d
2. F o r A s s e m b l y , see L C L 6 8 6 q

AWN , OATE
B l l l Hamer
IECwCm
OAT€
3-26-87
3 - ~ 78
-7
&
--.A
iebert'
PO - I s - -- -
OATE TITLE
J OATE I CARDCAGE B U S CONNECTIONS
 EPROM PCB

THlS PCB PLUGS INTO IGM:S CARDCAGE BACKPLANE PCB.

THROUGH THlS CONNECTION THE EPROM PCB ACCESSES THE
AOORESS BUS. DATA BUS. CONTROL BUS AN0 + 5 VOLT POWER

EPROM ALARM PCB-IGM I

Position - IGM
'Ihe primary plrpme of the Data Acquisition Board (W) is to convert
voltage and currrnt infomation from the interface board into digital
form for use by the micropnxessmr. A second is ta provide
frequency reaaings and phase angle i n f o n r a t i o n v b y the Im to
caloilate kilowatt (K.W.) readings.

Voltage ard current phase angle information for calculations of

kilowatt readings are obtained from the wltage/cllrrent output
readbqs of phase X. This phase angle i n i o m t i o n is not sham
d i r e d l y on the SitPmaster. Voltage and arrcnt information for each
@mse is used to calculate the percentage of p a ~ e rusage by each
~anltoreporttotheSitemaSteranyimbdLancesbetWeenphases,
or FUKT center approaching IMxirmrm cut@.

Voltage/Quzent Section:

Voltaqe - I n p t voltage is measured @mseto Ejhase (i-e., A-B, B-C,

C-A) . To phase A-B voltage, the microproogsor data
bus pmvides addressing infomation through data selector U6 to
s e l & p h a s e A - N ~ n M L K l (Ul) andphaseB-NOnMUX2 (U4).

~ f r o m U 1 a 1 r i U 4 i s r m t e d t o follaersU5 (Pins 5, 6, 7) d U 5
(Pins 1, 2, 3) to variable gain differential MX (U2), m l i f i e r U5
(pins 8, 9, l o ) . The diffewrtidL gain is in a binary form. Gains
are set to be 1, 2, 4 , o r 8. Proper gain is d B by addressh3
appropriate channels of the differential HJX.

me phase to phase (A-B) diff-tidl voltage is routed frcan the

differential amp U5 (Pin 8) to Sample ard Hold ( S p ) q l i f i e r , U3.
Fnom U3 (Pin 7 ) , the voltage is rmtd to the AndLog to Digital (WD)
oonverter, U7. U7 Places the d i g i t a l ini011~tionon the data bus.
In a similar 1~nner,the remaining inprt: voltages are and
converted fn d i g i t a l form ard finally placed on the d a t a bus for u s e
by the m i c r o p ~ ~ 3 e ~ ~ 0 r .

Ocrtput voltage is measured &ase to neutrdl ( e , X-N, Y-N, Z-N).

As for iqut voltage, the microprccssor seleds the appropriate
phase to be measured; e.g. phase X on MUX 2 (U4) ard neutral on ralX 1
. Output from the MLTXs is muted thrmgh follawers US (Pins 1,
(Ul)
2 , 3 ard 5, 6, 7) . Again, addressing by the rnicsop-r
proper differentidl gain for the U2 differentidl d t i p l e x e r
sekd-5
-
differential a m p l i f i e r U5 (Pins 8, 9, 10) cmbination. T h e
differential amplifier routes the phase to n e u M differential
mQxt voltage to the S/H, U3. U3 Routes the output t o the A/D
mnverter, U7, ard finally, in d i g i t a l form, to the microprocwor
data bus.
DASBoard
Page 2

In a similar manner, remining cutput voltage is sel-,

multiplied, anl converted to digital form. The d t i r g data is
Uses by the microprocessor.

to phase is measured and put into d i g i t a l form

C u t p i ? voltage phase
as prarimsly described for in@ voltage phase to phase. The micro-
processor selects appropriate addresses for outprt phase t o phase
(e.g. , X-N, Y-N) a .the signal digitization proceeds in a s t r a i g h t
forwazd faskion.

-
Cument olrrent mea~ulfementsare made phase t o neutral (i-e., X-N,
Y-Z, o r Z-N) .
Also, neutral current ard grolrnd currents are measured
an3 digitized.
?he micropn>3es50r selects a axrent to ke uemxed by addressing the
.
apprpriate d m m e l of MUX 1 (Ul) 'Ihe micrq,roce~sorholds MUX 2
(U4) a t granrl by seleding chanml 8. 'Ihe difference is passed
thraagh f o l l a e r s U5 ( 1 , 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7) t o tlae differential gain
.
pair W U2 and differential amp U5) wropriate gain is selected
for U5 and the differential result passed to the S F , U3. me
aummt infomation p x c e d s fran U3 to the A@, U7, to a data
bus. Five cwrrents are r e m ~ ~X-N, & Y-N, Z-N, neutrdl and ground.
fhase Currents X-N, Y-N, and Z-N are usad f o r pzw=r calculations.
Neutral ardgrandaurents a r e u s e d t o ~ t h e c o t r 3 i t i o nof the
system g r a n d to deck for grolnd faults.

m-e4uency-Fr%pencyismrmdlly 6 O H z . lhis frequMcy ismeasured

in the p e r cmtet using the fhase X-N and neutral voltage signdls.
Note: R e f e r to Figure 1 "Frequency Timing Diagramla for
graphic illustration of lcgic c;.hanges during frequency
.t-
Thrmqh U6, the microp~oce~sor -a the rrmltiplexers (MUXS) such
that the n&tral voltage is selected by MUX 1 (Ul) and the X-N
voltage by MUX 2 (U4). O u t p t from m 1 (Ul) is bxmght out on a
separate Line labeled "freq a" (sham on schematic 4 D U l l l G l ) .
C u t p t frcw MUX 2 (U4) is brought out on a signal l i n e labeled
Yreq b" sham on the same schevatic. lbese two signals are routed
as follows: Vreq a" is muted to unity gain buffer U8 ( P b 12, 13,
14) foUowed by a 2 pole l m pass filter U8 (Pins 8, 9, 1 0 and
associated FC camponents) to transistor inverter Q1; " f r q b", in a
like ~ ~ n n eirs, routed to follcwer U8 (Pins 1, 2, 3) thzugh a 2 p l e
lw pass f i l t e r U8 (Pins 5, 6 , 7 ard associated RC mmponents) to
transistor inverter Q2. ~ r a n s i s t nQI ~ 42 &so serve to shift
~ ' ard
inpks to proper cnrtput voltage levels.
 Wt from Q 1 represents the ground ref- for frequency
nemmments and does not change; thus the output of Ul1 (Pin 1 3 ) is
driven high ( l o g i c 1 ) and remains t h a .

Cmtprt from Q2 is the frequency to be maswd, and is fed to U11.

Flip flap (FF) ~ 1 output
1 a t Pin 1 is a squarewave of the frequency
( i . . ,a 16.7 M s s positive pllse).
'Ihese two signals are fed to Ul3, XNOR. OIQXIZ of U13 (Pin 11) is
the inv& form of the frequency signal. Signal. fmn U13 (Pin 11)
is ~ u t to .
d U14 (Pins 11, 12, U) H e r e the signal is again
inverted and exits a t U14 (Pin 1 1 ) .
Assume that the signal of the PIA (Ul.7, Pin 3 9 ) is a logic 1.
(a2
lhen XWR (8, 9, 1 0 ) rerdk-s lm. 'Ikk lw is input a t U14 (Pin 6 ) .
mtpt of this gate U14 (Pin 4 ) f o l l m U l 4 (Pin 11) am3 is the
frequency signd. A t the san?e time, W s i g d (logic 1 ) of U17 (Pin
4 0 ) is bp.t to U14 (Pin 8) ; the other of this gate arrives
fmn U l l (Pin 1 ) . CMqut fmn U14 (Pin 1 0 ) is rmted t o NAND gate
U14 (Pins 1, 2, 3 ) . cutput fronu14 (Pin 3) f o l l w the hpk signal
and is rcuted b U13 (Pin 3 ) and to FF dl& U12 (Pin 3 ) . O d p l t
fmn U l 3 (Pin 4 ) is the inverted form of the frequency signal and is
rmtea t o FF clock U13 (Pin 1 1 ) .
r\
i Flip flop U12 is p i t i v e w e triggered. C u Q u t fran U12 (Pin 1 -
t h e Q a r t p r t ) isrmrtedtoXNOR13 ( P i n l ) . C u t p t f n m U U ( P i n 2 -
Qnot) i s I o u t e d t o t h e ~ e c 0 r d X N o R i r q X r t U l 3 ( P i n 2 ) .
C u t p t f r c a n U U ( P i n 3 ) isapllsewhosewidthrepre~entsthe
fresuencr being measured (i.e., 16.7 f o r 60 Hz). T h i s signdL is
r m t e a t o t h e b b x y c o u n t e r U l 6 ( P i n 2 ) e m b l e i q x t a n d t o t h e PIA
(U17, Pin 4 0 ) cAl input. "EM pkes at 1megahertz arriving f m the
m i u q x c e s m r pmvide ccunt pilses for the aamters (U15-U16). The
binary aunt, representing frequency, is muted directly to the PIA
(U17) by m t e r s Ul.5 and Ul6. Pie PIA, under software mntrul,
rclutes this information to the micmprcazzsnr. 'Ihe CE? signal of U17
(Pin 1 9 ) provides a reset pllse for the counters, U15 and U16, and
dexder, U9.
-
-
Phase Ansle In a similar manner as described for frequency
measurements, phase angle measuranents of voltage anl axrent of the
sam+ @ase can be made. In phase angle neaamwnts, the "freq a"
irqxrt is t h e olrrent ard "freqb" is thevoltage of the phase to be
lm3slrd.

Note: Refer to Figure 2 "Phase Timing Diagram" for l q i c

changes OCO~ZT* airing phase -t. Both
"in phase" and " a r t of @ - m s e I 1 signals are diagranrmed.
MUYs U 1 ard U4 are selected by the micropr0oe5~0r U6) t o (w
pmvide simultaneous voltage and current inputs of the same phase t o
"freq a" and "freq b" inputs. " F r q a" is the amrent to be
measured; Yreq b" is the voltage.

TIE current mx3rewnt is routed to U8 unity gain buffer ( P i n s 11,

12, 13) a 2 pole lotr pass f i l t e r U8 (Pins 8, 9, 10 and
associated FC ciraJitry) and thrcqh Q1,an inverter and lwel
shifter. In l i k e ~ ~ n n ethe
r , voltage is muted t o U8
follower (Pins 1, 2, 3) t h r c q h a 2 pole low pass f i l t e r U8 ( P i n s 5,
6, 7 and associated FC c k m i t r y ) and thraqh Q2 inverter, an
inverter and lwel shifter.

Fwn Q1 and 42, the signals are squared in f l i p flop U 1 1 (Pins 8, 9,

l o , 11, l2, 13) and U l l (Pins 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ) . Logic f l o w thraqh
gates U13 and Ul4 is the same as for fnqueq A with the
exception that both voltage and axrent signals a r e used by the
logic. No signal is a t grard lwel.

?he findL result is that signals aFpearing a t the outplt of FF U12

(Pins 1ard 12) drive XNOR U13 (Pins 1, 2, 3) w h i c h enables a m n t e r
U15. Pihen the signals are h o e d tbrcqh the logic, it is f a r d that
resulting pilse width of the signal sent to binary m t e r U15
rep- 16.67 Mssc plus any @ase angle difference (in W ) . I f
the is 16.67 m, --the L-jase arqle is zero; the
pawer factor is 1. T h e greater the pilse width diff- frm 16.67
Msec, the greater the plase angle difference and thus the pxer
fador.

N h : Fefer to Figure 2 tlWof Pnasett diagrmn f o r detailed

lcgic flow.
Wee the axrent, voltage, and phase angle are m e ,
a- p w e r axsmption can be calculated. The ~ t h c used
d to ,

calculate pmsr mnnmpstion is:

KK4 x p . f . = K.W. used

(determines fmm
angle)
Tnis infomation is sent to the Sitemaster for reporting plrposes-
In a similar manner, a Itpercentt' consumption by phase reprt is also
available a t the Sitmaster. Tnis value is d e t e n h d as follms:
DASBoard
Page 5

I. Assume a 3 phase, 100 KCa FW+rer Center supplying 120 volts.

?hen the amperage is:

2. Each phase is to supply 1/3 of this or:

3. Eachphase~tmeasurewrrtiScomparedtOtbatCal~ated
for the P.C. In the exanple each phase is to supply 277.7
amps. If Phase x current measures at 275 amps, then p3wer
usage is:
275
277.7 x 100 = 99% of available power

Note: If power usage is greater than 95% of a d a b l e

m,an alarm is sent to the S i t a n s t e r .
 v
THIRO ANGLE PROJECTIOPJ REVISIOEJS
- REV. DESCRIPTION DATE GPPROVEO

-
I I

CARDCAGE B U S CONNECTION FOR Jl

2. +5vo1ts
4. +5volts
6. +15volts
8. A15
10. A13
12. All
14. A9
16. A7
18. A5
20. A3
22. A1
24. -15volts
25. IRQ 26. NMI
2 7 . VkIA 28. VMA
2 9 . RESET 30. R/W
3 1 . D6 32. D7
3 3 . D4 34. D5
35. D2 36. D3
3 7 . DO 38. Dl
3 9 . ANALOG GND 40. ANALOG G N D
4 1 . DIGITAL GND. 42. DIGITAL GND.
4 3 . DIGITAL GND. 44. DIGITAL GND.

NOTES:

1. F O E S c h e m a t i c , see 4~13110
2. For Assembly, see 4"131!1

DRAWN . DATE.
B r l l Harner 3-26-87
CHECKED
OAT€ 3 -27-87
@A Lieberf
-- . -(.--D-r.r. -ar-D-w

- 2.

:D
DATE

DATE
TITLE
CARDCAGE BUS CONNECTIONS
 BUSSES

MUX SELECTABLE

NOTES:
1. FOR FREOUENCY MEASURMEN1-S MUX'S
UI AM) U4 SELECT P H I S X TO GROIINO.

2. FOR P W E MERSURMEllTS MUX'S

U1 AND U4 SELECT AP.'ROl'nlATE
PHASE OF VOLTAGE AH0 CURRENT.
3. FREOUEMCY AND PHASF MEASllnMENTS
FROM PIA USE SAME CIRCUITRY. !4EhSIIIlMENTS
9 +" U17 CE2 16-I'M-7 ARE DETERMINED BY UP CONTROL.
PBB-7
: . BINARY

FREO COUNT

NOTE 1

FROM PIA
U17 CB2 -
BINARY

C
TO U12 PHASE
DIFFERENCE
COUNT
& o-nsonH
Lieber -I-
ORE P.O.BOX m.6 COLULIUUI.OIIIO 1,229

NOTE 2 . LOGIC CTR TITLE

U11.12.13.14
U15.16
DAS BOARD
BLOCK D I A G R A M
 DAS PCB CONNECTS TO THE INTERFACE PCB (VIA CAI. 20 PO3
RIBBON CABLE ASSEMBLY). IT IS THIS CONNECTION THAT
SUPPLIES THE DAS PCB WITH SIGNAL LEVELS VOLTAGES FOR
INPUT VOLTS. OUTPUT VOLTS. CURRENTS. AND FREQUENCY.
THE DAS PCB MEASURES THE ANALOG SIGNALS~ANO DIGITIZES
THEM SO THEY CAN BE DISPLAYED.

')
N
a
CURRENTS

Y N
Z-N
\
SIGNAL GROUND
SIGNAL GROUP40

THIS PCB PLUGS INTO IGM'S CARDCAGE OACKPUNE

P C ~ THC
.
OAS PCB CONNECTS TO THE"MICROPMCESS0R SYSTEM'S'
CONTROL BUS. DATA BUS; AOORESS BUS. + 5 A N 0 15
POWERSUPPLIESTHROUOH~HE OAS-BACKPCANECONNECT~N.

film
1 :-L ,A' nara
~
~ r n t t ~ c r r CtI ~n, N~A I
~ . ~ .
DPR-ICM
~~~~ .~
I
- - - - ~ - - ~ ~
~

~~
GESERAL PURPOSE
The 1/0 Communication Board has three basic functions:

1. Receive inputs from standard & customer alarms.

2. Enable
K3 Alarm Present Lamp (24vdc)
K4 Common Alarm Relay (24vdc)
K5 Common Alarm Relay (24vdc)

3. Provide communication from the IGM to a Liebert site

monjtoring device.

The physical size of this board is 9-4" x 4 - g " . The PCB

is of the bus card-type which plugs into a given slot of
the IGM's cardcage.

ALARM INPUT CONNECTIONS

P2.1 Alarm Common (digital gnd)

P2.2 Extra Alarm #1 (N/O dry contact to TTL input)
P2.3 Extra Alarm #4 (N/O dry contact to TTL input)
P2.4 Extra Alarm #2 (K/O dry contact to TTL input)
P2.5 Extra Alarm t 5 (N/O dry contact to TTL input)
P2.6 GND System Faulty Alarm (N/O dry contact K7 on interface board
to TTL input)
P2.7 Transformer Overtemp Alarm (N/C dry contact to TTL input)
P2.8 GNU Failure Alarm (N/O dry contact K6 on interface board to
TTL input)
P2.9 No Connection
P2.10 Extra Alarm #3 (N/O dry contact to TTL input)

ALARM INPUTS

Alarm inputs are received via a ribbon cable connected between P2 on

the 110 PCB and P5 on the interface board. The following circuit
describes The alarm jnput interface.

All alarm inputs are to be activated via a set of dry conracts

between the alarm TTL input and alarm common fnieital GND). The
alarm input connection table shows which alarms are controlled via
normally open (N/Ol contacts or normally closed IS/Cl contacts. For
esample. extra alarm a1 (X/O Alarm! is activated when the alarm inpu:
is taken to alarm common. The voltage at thc input of the FdC9!1.'
Inverting Schmitt-trizger is 0.5 volts (Logic z e r o ) and output of the
Scilmitt tri~ger (Inpu:. lo PIA: is ;! :.ucic o n e s i<hvn no itlilrm is
present from a , ' a r . thy i n of the 7 4 C : ) l ? Schnlitt-trigger is
pulled h i ~ hto a Lofic ont: via the 182K-onn~:.esistor and the output.
of the Schmitt-trieger (Inpltt to PiAl is Logic zero.
 ~< -..- . .. .,

Page 2 of 7
i ', ALARM ISPUTS (cont'd)

The L o ~ i cfor the normally closed (N/Cl alarms is the opposite of the
normally open (N/O) example. I . E . an alarm condition places a Logic
zero at the input of the PIA while a non-alarm condition places a
Logic one at the input of the PIA.

In the event that an external voltage (l2Ovac maxl is mistakenly

applied to an alarm input. the zener diode will protect the Schmitt-
trlgger input to a max voltage of 12.6 volts. The 22K-ohm resistor
is to limit the current through the zener diode.

PIA TO P3 CONNECTIONS

A six position ribbon cable connects P3 of the I/O board to P4 of the

interface board. P3.1 and P3.2 are the relay common lines and are
both tied high. Two lines are used for current carrying consider-
ations. P3.3 is used for energizing the coil of relay K3 on the
interface board. To fire K3: CA2 of PIA is taken hieh to a Logic one
which triggers Ql and provides a parh to ground for K3 coil. P3.4 is
used for energizing the coil of relay K4 on the interface board. To
fire K4: PR4 of the PTA is taken high which triggers Q 2 and provides
path to ground for the coil of K4. P3.5 is used for energizing the
coil of relay K5 on the interface board. To fire K5: PB5 of the PIA
is taken high which triggers Q3 and provides a path to ground for the
cnii of K5. P3.6 is an extra output which is not connected to
anything on the interface board.
f 3 - 2 7-87'
L P RbO2J0E C- 0
TLSj DATE
LLiebert ,+.,;nufii/<ilti<
CHECKED Qy
'
7.-7k-3
DATE
7
1050 D r a r u o r n Ormrr' D//kf?Ofl
I,0 Lia. 2llsG
c~~~~~~~~0 1 . ~ .13:24
~ D ~ A I V I N C ,N I J ~ E R
 Page 3 of 7
COMMUNICATION HARDWARE

The hardware setup for the communication section is as follows:

1 - 6821 PIA lines PBO, PB1, PB2, PB3

2 - 6850 ACIA (Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter)
U5 Controls communication with site products
U6 Controls communication with service terminal
1 - 74LS93 - counter used to divide the MPU E (02) pulse into two
separate frequencies.
1 - 75174 - Quad differential line receiver used for developing
the power to send communications over long runs.
1 - 75176 - Quad differential line receiver used for developing
the power to receive communications over long runs.
2 - 75176 - Differential bus transceivers used as an alternative
way of transmitting data. These parts are currently not
being stuffed in the PCB.
1 - 74LS138 - Address decoder used to select PIA and ACIAs on
the communicatious board.

1. The PIA is utilized to determine the direction of data on the

communication line by enabling the corresponding line drivers or
the line receivers.

2. The 74LS93 is utilized to provide 2 distinct clock rates to

be used by the ACIA's. The E pulse (02 from MPU) is approxi-
mately 1MHz. This is fed in through pin 14 (clock input to
divide by 2 section). The clock is divided down ( lMHz / 2 -
500KHz) and outputted through pin 12 (output from divide by 2
section) to the receive & transmit clock inputs of U6 (RXC &
TXC). With the switch in the SM1 position (shown this way on
schematic; R33 is not stuffed). The output of pin 12 is also fed
into pin 1 (the clock input to divide by 8 section). Once
divided down (500KHz divided by 8 = 62.5KNz) it is outputted
through pin 11 (which is output from the divide by 8 section) to
receive & transmit clock inputs of U5 (RXC & TXC). With the
switch in the SM2 position the receive and transmit clock inputs
of U5 are fed by U3 pin12 (output from divide by 2 section).

3. The f w ~ A C 1 A ' s are responsible for communication between the

IGM & service terminal (U6) or between the IGM & site products
(U5). Both ACIA's convert data from a parallel to a serial
format (transmit) and from a serial to parallel format (receive).
The ACIA's use the inputs to the RXC & TXC along with an internal
divide counter (this is a software controlled counter and is set
up to function as divide by 64) to synchronize the flow of data.

4. The 7415138 Decoder (U4) is used by the microprocessor to

I select the communications board and devices on the communications
board [PIA (U11). ACIAl (U5). ACIA2 (U6) 1 .
 Page 4 of 7

5. The final two pieces of hardware are needed to amplify the

transmitted serial data over long runs. The 75174 is a
differential line driver Quad package of which only 2 drivers are
used. The 75175 is a differential line receiver Quad package of
which only 2 receivers are used. Differential components are
used because of their excellent performance in canceling out
unwanted noised. The data are transmitted through P1 over
twisted pair communication cable. Maximum recommended
communication run is 1,500 feet.

CONNECTIONS TO P 1

P1.l -TX data to Site Products

P1.2 +TX data to Site Products
P1.3 +5vdc Vcc power for Service Terminal
P1.4 +TX data to Service Terminal
P1.5 -TX data to Service Terminal
P1.6 Digital ground for Service Terminal
 Page 5 of 7

BAUD RATE DATA

Site Products Port Service Term Port

Baud Rate

Bit Time (m

*Character Time .0llsec .001sec .001sec

Characters/sec 88.7 710.2 710.2

Data Bi ts/sec 710.2 5681.8 5661.8

*Use 11 bits per character - one start bit, eight data bits
and two stop bits.

Baud Rate is determined by the following calculation:

Baud Rate = E(MPU 02 PULSE) / CLOCK DIVIDER / ACIA CLOCK DIVIDER

SM1 Baud Rate = lMHz / 16 / 64 = 976.5

SM2 Baud Rate = lMHz/2 / 6 4 = 7812.5
Service Terminal Baud Rate = lMHz/2 / 6 4 = 7812.5 .

*Serial communications follows the RS422A Standard

s -
 Page 6 of 7

PIN-OUT OF CARDCAGE BUS - J1 PCB EDGE CARD FINGERS

Communication with the rest of the IGM is handled through the

onld
-..- - of the cardcage bus. The following is a detailed
fineers
list of the pinout of this bus:
1. +5volts 2. +5vOltS
3. +5volts 4. +5volts
5. +15volts 6. +15~0lts '
7. A14 8. A15
9. A12 10. A13
11. A10 12. All
13. A8 14. A9
15. A6 16. A7
17. A4 18. A5
19. A2 20. A3
21. A0 22. A1
23. -15~0lts 24. -15~0ltS
25. IRQ 26. NMI
27. VMA 28. VMA
29. RESET 30. R/W
31. D6 32. D7
33. D4 34. D5
35. 02 36. D3
37. DO 38. Dl
39. ANALOG GND 40. ANALOG GND
41. DIGITAL GND 42. DIGITAL GND
43. DIGITAL GND 44. DIGITAL GND
 Page 7 of 7

COMMUNICATION BOARD 020-0253

DC POWER REQUIREMENTS

1.) .7 Amps at 5 VDC (No Alarms Activated, NO communications)

2.) Less Than 1 Amp a t 5 VDC (All Alarms Activated. SMlOO Communications)
(Active/Service Terminal Communications )
(Active )
3.) Digital Power Supply ( 5 VDC) Voltage Tolerance
5.0 VDC +- 5% (1.e. 4.75 VDC to 5.25 M C )
 CAS PIN DESCRIPTION

ALARM LIGHT SIC (K3 RELAY)

+ 5 VOLTS

CAB PIN DESCRIPTION

PIN 1 DESCRIPTION
COMMUNICATION 1 ALARM COMMON
CONNECTOR 2 CUSTOMER ALARM 41
3 CUSTOMER ALARM i 4
4 CUSTOMER ALARM 12
5 CUSTOMER ALARM 15
6 GROUND SYSTEM FAULTY
7 TRANSFORMER OVERTEMP 160.
8 GROUND FAILURE
9 NO CONNECTION
10 CUSTOMER ALARM M3
I/O PCB

rn -
-
PIN I
1
2
3
4
s
6

THIS PCB PLUGS INTO IGM'S CARDCAGE BACKPLANE Pca

THROUGH THIS CONNECTION -THE 110 PC8 ACCESSES THE
ADDRESS BUS. OATA BUS. CONTROL BUS A N 0 +S VOLT POWER
SUPPLY.
The purprse of the LDA Clock/RAM Board is t o remember factory o r user
setpoints f o r irrpxllse o r saq/suqe -ts. The board a l s o
oontains EPRCM t o provide the LnA m i c r o p r ~ ~ we i ~t h~operating
~r
instructions. Two clocks reside on board: t h e f i r s t provides a time
stamp for p e r p x h r h t i o n events; the second provides a pericdic
interrupt to the LnA micmprccessor f o r sag/surge measu~ements.

CHIP FUNCTION TABLE

The board p e r f o l ~ hits

~ function using 13 I- as described below:

U1 MC6821 PIA -
used t o interface between clock chip and
microprccessor; used f o r crystdl cdlibration: w i t h IGY
microp~ocessorPIA and Liebert Service 'jkminal passes u s e r
s e t p i n t s t o MOD-1.
U2 MC5832 Clock - provides t k stamp infomation f o r
prtwhtions.

U3-7 (inclusive) ERKNS - provides operating software f o r LDA

microprocessor.

U9 LM-10 V o l t a g e ?leferrnce Op Amp - disables clc& U2 on law

5 v o l t conditions.

U10 MC14013 DJal D F l i p f l a p -

used with U 1 1 to provide
periodic interrupt (8.192 milliseoord) .
I
U11 MC14020 14 B i t Binary Counter - used with U10 to provide
periodic interrupt.
U12 741504 H e x Inverter -
used w i t h LDA control bus t o provide
^ d i i p select to MD-1 non-volatile RAM.

MOD-1 Battery Backed RAM M e -

provides pnnanent storage of
setpoint., daily summazy infomation, and transient
reports.

The microprm=essor (U8 on the LDA prooessor board) obtains its

operating instructions fmm U3 -
U7 inclusive v i a t h e I N bacwlane
FCB. In addition, this micmpm~e550rao=epts information from t h e
sag/surge PCB and stores it in Moo.1, non-volatile RAM. W i n g
operation the microprocessor w i l l use U8, a 74LS138 t o select the
appropriate EPRCM (E3 - E7) for a r r e n t operating instmctions; when
storing perturbation data, the micmp~oce~sor uses U12, a 74x138, t o
seled the appropriate rerory chip in -1.

To t i m e p r t u h t i o n s , the PIA (Ul) uses the on-board timer U2 - U9.

'Ibis timing informtion together with the -tion i n f o m t i o n is
sent to the microproce~sor. To calibrate the clodc crystal
f r e q u ~ plug , P1 is used. See attached crystal calibration
i n f o m t l o n f o r details.

-
U 1 1 is referenced to Plase 2 of
A second clcck, w n s i s t i n g of U10
the microprccessor clcck. This clock provides an 8.192 millisecond
pulse to p r i d d l y interrupt the m i c s o p r ~ ~ e ~the
~ ~ rpurpose
: of
the interrupt is t o Mate sampling of the inpxllse and sag/surge
boards by the microp~ccessor.
By using a Liebert Service Terminal, the user can set desired
sag/smge ard/or k p l s e set points. ?he service terminal
OcaRrmnicates to the I M micmpro~essorvia cable; the IGM
m i q ~ a 3 e s s o rpasses setpoints to the LDA v i a p a r a l l e l ports (PIAS)
on both micropmcessor boards. 'Ihe LDA micmpsawsor w i l l s t o r e t h e
new setpoints i n ran-volatile RAM (MID-1) .
 \\. 1

CHIP SELECT DECODER

U8 74LS138
7
I
I

L LOA OPERATING
i U3-7 SOFTWARE -
1 CLOCK XTAL ADJUST
10. EPROM
h (4
a m
_J
a a

m SERVICE TERMINAL
1
NOTE: I/O TO IGM,SYSTEM, I
PA0-6
-
Iuu2 PERTURBATION
'IA VIA IGM UP PIA TIMER
-
6 1 I
PBI-7 ,
t- 7 LOW VOLTAGE
a !u12 CHIP SELECT n I U9 OISABLE OF CLOCK

NONVOLATILE RAM
STORES: SET POINTS
MOD-1 PERTURBATION INFORMATION
DAILY SUMMARY
TRANSIENT REPORTS
Lieber t
1050 DEARBORN DRIVE P.O.0OX 29186 C O L U l l B i l 5 . V ~

TITLE

LDA CLOCK/RAM
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(1 CLOCK CALIBRATION PROCEOURE FOR tDA:

SETUP:
- 1. ~reduencycounter should be allowed t o warm up (approximately
IS ain.) and l e f t on a l l day, Cl- board. t o - b e calibrated
should be allowed t o warn up also.
. ..
2. Frequenly counter used should&.jhe..#-P 53158 universal Counter
with "OPTION 001" st- on b a a of i n s t r m n t .
....-
3. With ci5nnector in place on'the clodc board, t h e red lead of t h e
counter should go t o PIN .I. the bl@ lead t o PIN 2, and PINS 3 & 4
jumpered together;
4- The TREQ A' button on t h e counter should be i n (with the t e s t
lead connected t o "INPIIT Am]; Counter should be s e t t o t r i g g e e r
on the positive edge of t h e pulse. The t r i g g e r button should be .
i n (sensitivity). The YXNSITIVIW control and 'GATE TIME DELAY"
control should be set a t the halfway point..
.. .

CALIBRATION:
1. Adjust variable capacitor..so.that:counter reads 1.0240000
* .000001.

Robert L. Jenkins
March 4 , 1983
 7 -< r
AL~J J j T ':LRIPBLE CAP
FOR 1.0240000 .00000l
il; READING ON HP FREO METER.
(SEE PROCEDURE FOR METER SETUP)
u
INPUT A

VARIABLE CAP JUMPER 1\

- r-"l
BATTERY RAM

LDA CLOCK/BATT. RAM

020-0304

LDA C L O C K CALIBRATION
 v 1

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION REVISIONS

-
I
-

CARDCAGE B U S CONNECTION FOR J1

2. +5voltS
4. +5vo1ts
6. tl5~0ltS
8. A15
1 0 . A13
12. A l l
1 4 . A9
1 6 . A7
1 8 . A5
2 0 . A3
22. A 1
24. - 1 5 ~ 0 l t S
25. IRQ 26. NMI
27. VMA 2 8 . VMA
.29. RESET 3 0 . R/W
31. D6 3 2 . D7
33. D4 3 4 . D5
35. D2 3 6 . D3
37. DO 38. D l
39. ANALOG G N D 4 0 . ANALOG GND
41. DIGITAL GND. 4 2 . DIGITAL GND.
43. DIGITAL G N D . 4 4 . DIGITAL GND..

- -
NOTES:

1. F o r S c h e m a t i c , see 612,-3040
2. F o r A s s e m H y ; see 023-0304
 LDA CLOCK/BATTERY R A M PCB

-
NO
f CONNECTION
I
...
.(
rm

THIS PCB PLUGS INT0,THE IGM'S CARDCAGE BACKPLANE PCB.

THROUGH THIS CONNECTION THE CLOCKIBATTERY RAM PC6
ACCESSES THE AOOAESS BUS. DATA BUS. CONTROL BUS. AN0
+ 5 VOLT POWER SUPPLY.
From the absolute m l u e half of U4, t h e irrpxllse signal is routed t o
the q l e / h o l d , U9. U9 w i l l track (sample) the iryxlt siqral u n t i l a
hold signal (X-N peak detect m n t r o l signal) is received fmm the LDA
logic hplse board v i a I?-2 (reference drawing 020-0306). A part of
the absolute value (X impulse pi&) is routed to the s a g / s q e PCB
v i a P-3 (reference d r a m 020-0306) f o r conversion by the A/D
residing there to d i g i t a l form. The remaining portion is compared
with the absolute value of the ingnilse diredcly in U l l .

U 1 1 is a tracking comparator whose i.npks are comp3sed of 2 signals:

the absolute value of the samplefiold U9, ard the actual absolute
value of the signal, U4. As the inpiise reaches a peak and begins t o
re- to z e m , the U11 irplrts w i l l d i f f e r slightly, causing the
Cprrprt of Ul1 to t r i p indiot5ng a "peak detectDr ampaator signal".
'Ibis peak inaicating signal is muted t o the logic i.m&nlseboard v i a
P-1 (reference drawing 020-0306) to be used as a control signal.

lhis circuit will provide anplibide measurements of the naxhnn

auplitude inpxilse to t h e micr&~ocessordurhg the sample interval.
If an inpxilse has k e n measlred and a sucessive W s e with greater
auplitude arrives within t h e 8 u6ec sample time, the measuranent of
this larger m
inpxilse, m u s
se w i l l be made. UIl detects t h i s greater amplitude
e olrtput frnm U9 the S/H (in the hold We) holds the
peak of the previous maxinarm ; :&a
U11. The semnd hpt of UIl c n n the
this is routed t o one input of
~ current inpxiLse amplitude.
-
T J l l ccanpares these .two inpxllse a p l i t u d e s inaicating that an biplse
w i t h a greater peak has arrived an3. this siw is muted to t h e
inpxllse logic board via Pl (reference d r a w h g 020-0306) where a new
impllse duration measurement is initiated for the new greater
amplitude impulse.

I n surmnazy, the analog hqdse board functiolls as follows:

Inpnilse buffered by follower Ul.
lnnxiLsestrippeafm~byU2-U3.
I u p l s e reinverted in l/2 U4.
Impilse passed through U5, analog switch.
-AMicg s w i t c h controll& by comparators U6-W.
1/2 U4 provides absolute value of i q d s e .
U6-W p r w i d e s S/S signal to U8.
U9 samples and holds absolute value of irrpxllse rraximum.
U 1 1 detects inpniLse peak.
U8, U9, U 1 1 provide control signals f o r logic W se board.
DESCFUFTION:
The pr* plrpme of the LDA inipilse assembly is to imnitor both
kpt (phase to phase) and outpR (phase to neutral) A.C. voltage f o r
high voltage irpdses (spikes) *ch are atme a f a m r y o r customer
t h e s b l d . There are two LDA bq~.lseassemblies per LDA System: one
m n i t o r s inprt voltage (assanbly #lC17423Gl); and t h e second mnitors
outprt voltage (assembly #lC17423G2). Each LDA hplke assembly is
constructed fm 2 PCB assanblies: one, an U X analcq inplilse PCB
assembly (assembly #020-0306) ; the seconl, an LDA. logic PCB assembly
(assembly #020-0307). 'Ihese two PCBs are ha?&mx p ~ q ' r a m dto form
either an inp& o r outph assembly. me LDA kpke assanbly
captures the i q d s e qlitude (to 4000 v o l t s ) a& duration ( t o 2.089
n6ec). inforimtion is scaled on the I@¶ interface board by a
resistor divider su& that a 4 KV -se riding on a 480 A.C.
linewill ke seen as an 1 4 . 2 2 v o l t b p t t o t h e I D A i r p l s e
assembly. me LDA pncesses this i n f o m t i o n and sends it to the
Liebert S i t e m s b r f o r a printed event report. The follwing pages
w i l l d e t a i l the operation of t h e LEA lcgic PCB assembly.

Part Identification by Location

74L204 H e x Inverter
74L508 Quaa and Gate
74L.504 Hex Inverter
7 4 x 7 4 IM D Ty-pe F l i p Flop
74L527 Triple 3 I n p t NOR Gate
7 4 x 1 2 3 mid Monostable Multivibrator
74L.5393 IM 4 B i t Binary Counter
7 4 x 3 7 4 Octdl D Flip Flop
5 ~ 3 State Buffer
7 4 ~ 5 3 6 Hex
74IS138 3-8 M e r
74LS174 Hex Latch D ?ype
Not Used
SameasU2
Same as U2
Same a s u4-us
S a m as U4-US
Not Used
S a m as U7
Same as U7
Same as U8-U9
Same as U8-U9
Same as U9-U10
Same as U9-U10
IrrqxiLse Logic Board
Page 2

NOTE: T h i s discussion w i l l describe @rase 1 of a 3 phase system w i t h

t h e logic board amfigured as an irqXrt board. 'Ihe two m i n i n g
phases are identical in -tion. Table 2 irdicates a ccanp3nent
listins by phase.

Pulse [xlration Counter 114 ~ 2 , 1/4 Ul8, 1/4 U19,

U8, U9 U27, U28 U29, U30

ozmlt~xReset L%' U25 U26

nata Latch UlO-Ull U31in2 ~331134

Mimp~ccessorcontrol UI, ~ 1 2 ~, 1 3 ~ n U, ~ Z ~, 1 3 ~ l ~, 1 2 ,U13

& Dxcde U14, U15, U16 U14, Ul5, U16 U14, U15, U16

The hpdse logic board pmvides pulse duration (width) measurements

of any deteded bpalse on the i n p l s e analog board. Tnis
infomation (piLse width of the ingulse abwe the factory o r axstomr
threshold) is latclaed f o r use by t h e microp~~cessor.Both
asyndmlxxls logic (i.e. gating and reset c-w), ard -nonous
lcgic (i.e. t n i ~ controlled
~ r latches, deccders, and drivers)
reside on the logic board.

Pulse width measurements a r e made by counting the duration, in

micrc6ewnds, fmm a start signal received from U8 on the h@-se
a n a l q board v i a PI. The stop signal is also received from U8 on the
h p u l s e - d g board v i a P1 (reference drawing 020-0307).

When the stop signal is received, inverter U3 ard gate U2 clodc f l i p

flop (FF) U4. FF U4 w i l l clcck latches U101111 storing t h e pulse
width count. A t the same time the stop signal arrives a t U2 on the
l q i c board, a peak detect: comparator signdL arrives from U11 (analcg
board) v i a P1. This peak d e t e d comparator signal clodcs 1/2 of FF
U4 t o provide on enable f o r U2 control gate. The peak de-
comparator together w i t h a 8tmimprmessorpeak detect valid irnpuLse
reset signalt1 f o r phase 1 (received from the microprowsor via latch
U16) provides a peak detect control siwl used t o place the S/H (U9)
on the analcg board in a hold mcde. Tnis control signal is sent t o
the S/H v i a P1 (reference drawing 020-0306). The S / H now holds the
 Wse rogic Board
Page 3

ampliWe of the ii'qdse; the l a W e s UlWll on t h e logic board

contain p l s e width information f o r the same iqmlse.
When t h e stop signal is received, it clocks U6 - a three i n p t NOR
gate. Tnis gate clccks 1/2 U7 one shot rrmltivibrator. The one shot
is tined using C6 and rrNl-2 to be approximately 15.68 US=. The Q
c u t p t fm this half of U7 clocks the second half of U7, set to the
-
saw period by Q FNl-7. ?he Q outplt of this half of U7 sends a
15.68 u s e clear plse to t h e counters; the Q not clears f l i p f l q s
in U4-U5.
W i t h f l i p f l c p U4-U5 cleared, the camt portion of the logic hxrd
is reset, ready to aunt the next impilse duration. Dying the
sample interml t h e rnicmproce550r sends a phase 1 e ~ b l s
e iw v i a
U14 t o la- U l W to read pllse duration of the irrpxilse.

If a pllse w i t h a greater amplitxde arrives before the miaoprccessor

reads t h e b@se width data i n stored latches U10-U11, ocrmparator
U 1 1 on t h e irrpxilse analog board t r i p s clocking U4 so that a new pulse
width camt initiates. T h i s results in t h e micnzprocessor r eam .
only an -se w i t h greatest amplitude/duration since the previc~ls
reading-

C v se a m p l i w / w i d t h m3asurements are not made during a

r r u c r o p ~ read
r sequence bxause the micropm~e550rresets
counters U8-U9 thraqh U6 control g a t e ard one shot U7 (both
halves). Any count o r anplilude signals are locked cut during this
interval (app&tely 31.36 uSec).

Contml an3 data signals are passed freely betvieen t h e logic an3
analq boards, as these boards comprise the LDA impulse assembly, arid
are electrically connect& v i a P-1 and P-2 (reference d r a w i n g 1C17423
and &wing 020-0306 f o r detailed signal lines). Control signals
received fmm the analog m se bcard are: Start/Stop and peak-
comparator detect. Tbe logic impiLse board sends a peak control
d e t e d to the analcy board f o r S/H control. The mimprocessor sends
enable, clock, address, and control sigals to t h e logic bard.

I r c l u d e w i t h this description is a timing diagram. ?he diagram

describes the sequence of signals and t h e i r results commencing from a
start signal. Ihe h p l s e shown a t the top of the diagram is f o r
reference only; no microprocessor control signals are shown, o d y
asynduroncus control signals.
!me p r h a q purpose of the LDA h p l s e assembly is to monitor both
inpt (phase to phase) ard output (phase t o neutrdl) A.C. voltage for
hi@ voltage inpxilses (spikes) w h i c h are above a factory o r cllstomer
threshold. .mere are two LDA inpxiLse assemblies per IDA system: one
mnitors inpt voltage (assembly #lC17423Gl); and the secord monitors
mtpit voltage (assanbly #lCl7423G2). Each IDA impilse assembly is
-oc frcan 2 PCB assemblies: one, an LEA a ~ l c yimpilse PCB
assembly (assembly #020-0306) ; the secord, an LDA logic PCB assembly
(assembly #020-0307). two R=Bs are hanTware p e t0 forill
either an inprt o r cutput assanbly. 'Ihe IDA h@.Se a s a r b l y
c a w the h p l s e amplitude (to 4000 volts) and duration (to 2.089
usec). I u y l s e infonuation is scaled on the IQ? interface board by a
resistor divider such that a 4 KV irrpxiLse riding on a 480 A.C. p e r
linewill be seen as an 14.22 volt input to the IDA impllse
m l y . Ihe U X processes t h i s information and sends it to the
Liebert Si
- for a printed event report. The following pages
will detail the operation of the LEA logic PCB assembly.

TABLE 1

Part Identification by Location

74U04 Hex Inverter

74-08 CNad and Gate
74-04 Hex Inverter
74-74 IM D Typ= Flip Flop
74-27 Triple 3 I n p t NOR Gate
7415123 md mrcstable M t i v i b r a t o r
74-393 md 4 B i t Binary Counter
74~5374Octal D ~ y Flip
p Flop
74IS365A Hex 3 State Buffer
74-138 3-8 Lkuder
74-174 Hex Iat~hD ?ype
Not Used
SameasU2
Same as U2
Same as u4-U5
Same as U4-35
Not Used
Same as U7
~ a m eas U7
Same as U8-U9
Same as U8-U9
Same as U9-U10
Same as U9-U10
B p l s e Logic Board
Page 2

NYTE: ?his *ion w i l l describe phase 1 of a 3 phase system with

the logic board configured as an input board. ?he two remaining
phases are identical. in operation. W l e 2 irdicates a component
listing by phase-

Pulse IXlration Counter 1/4 U2, 1/4 U18, 1/4 U19,

U8, U9 U27, U28 U29, U30

rogic Clock & Latch 1/4U2,U3, 1/4U18,U3, 1/4Ul9,U3,

U4, UID-UIl u2.0, U31-U32 U22, U33-4

Counter Reset U7 U25 U26

Tne hipulse l o g i c board pmvides pike duration (width) masmmmts

of any detected inpulse on the inplse analog board. ?Xis
i n f o m t i o n (Nsew i d t h of the irrpxllse above the f a d o r y o r customer
threshold) is latched for use by the minop~~cessor. Both
asynchm~ logic ( i - e . gating and reset circuitry), and synchro-
l o g i c ( i.e. micmp~oce~sor controlled latches, decoders, and drivers)
reside on the l o g i c board.

Pulse width measureuents are made by m t i n g the duration, in

micrcsemnds, from a start signal m i v e d frcw U8 on t h e iny?dse
analog board v i a pl. me stop signal is also received fmm U8 on the
hpulse-andcq board v i a P1 (reference drawing 020-0307) .
When the stop signal i s received, inverter U3 and gate U2 clock f l i p
flop (FF) U4. FF U4 w i l l clock latches UlO-Ull s t o r i n g the pulse
width count. At the same time the stop signal a r r i v e s a t U2 on the
l o g i c board, a peak d e t e c t comparator s i g n a l a r r i v e s from U 1 1 (analog
board) v i a Pl. !Ibis peak d e t e d camparator sigml c1cd-s 1/2 of F'F
U4 t o prwide on enable f o r U2 control gate. m e peak detect
c ~ n p a r a t o rtogether with a nmicroprccessor peak d e t e c t valid w se
reset signal" f o r phase 1 (received from the microprocessor via l a t c h
U16) provides a peak detect control signal used t o place the S/H (U9)
on the analog board in a hold mode. This control signal is sent t o
t h e S f l via P1 (reference drawing 020-0306). The S/H n m holds the
 rrq.ulse lpgic Board
P\ Page 3

anpliwe of the i q u l s e ; t h e latches U10-U11 on t h e l q i c board

contain pllse iridth information f o r the same bpiLse.

When the stop signal is received, it clocks U6 - a three input NOR

gate. 33.k gate clocks 1/2 U7 one shot m l t i v i b r a t o r . The one shot
is timed using C6 and RN1-2 to be approximately 15.68 Sec. 'Ihe Q
output frwt this half of U7 clocks the second half of U7, set to t h e
s a r e period by C3 - RN1-7. The Q output of this half of U7 sends a
15.68 uSec clear plse to t h e a l t e r s ; the Q not clears f l i p flops
in u 4 a .

With f l i p flop U4-U5 cleared, the camt portion of the logic board
is reset, ready to count the next irtpxiLse duration. IXuring the
sample interval the micmproce~sorsends a phase 1 enable signal via
U14 to latches U1O-KI.l to read pllse duration of the irrpxilse.

If a pulse w i t h a greater amplitude arrives before the m i c r o p ~ ~ = e ~ ~ ~ r

reads the inpulse width data in stored latches UlO-Ull, ccanparator
Ul1 on the irrpxiLse andlog board trips c1cd~i.W U4 so that a new pulse
width carnt initiates. 'Ibis results in the minop10oe550r reading
only an inpxiLse w i t h greatest amplitude/duration s h e t h e previous
reading.
W se amplitude/width nwsuaents are not made &ing a
micxcpro~e550rread sequene because the microprooeS5or resets
counters US-U9 through U6 mnbml g a t e and one shot U7 (both
halves). Any count o r amplitude signdls are locked cut this
in- (approximately 31.36 Usec).
Control and data signals are passed freely betwea-~the lcgic and
analog boards, as these boazds ccarrprise t h e LDA mse m l y , and
are el.edriwJ.1~ connected via P1 and P 2 (referencedraw- 1C17423
and dmwing 020-0306 f o r detailed signal lines). Control signdls
received fm the analog impulse board are: Start/stop and peak
compara.tor detect. me logic m se board sends a peak control
detect t o the analog board f o r S p control. The mic~op~ocessor sends
enable, clock, address, and control signals t o the l c g i c board.

lncludedwiizh this description is a timing diagram. The diagram

describes the sequence of signals and t h e i r results ccxmencing from a
start signal. Ihe impulse sham a t t h e top of the diagram is f o r
reference only; no microprocessor control signals are s h m , only
asynchronous control signals.
 ~ - -

OUTPUI LOGIC K B . I I JUYPCR OM- U' '. ' . ''

INPUT LffilC P C B . IT JUMPER O W I T
. -

P4 CONNECTOR PIN OUT

PIN U 1 OUTPUT
- - ASSY. 1 INPUT ASSY.
~

1 I NIC I NIC
LDA IMPULSE ASSEMBLY 2 N /C NIC
(2 ASSEMBLIES PER LDA SYSTEM)
(1 INPUT AND 1 OUTPUT )
3
4
X S/S
Y SIS
ASIS
BSIS
I
1
5 ZSlS I CSIS
IMP. X IMP. A
IMP. Y IMP. B
8 IMP. C
9 1 NIC NIC

P3 CONNECTOR PIN OUT

PIN A I OUTPUT ASSY. I INPUT ASSY.
1 SIS X
2 SIS Y
3 SIS Z SIS C
4 X IMP. PEAK A IMP. PEAK
THIS ASSEMBLY PLUGS INTO THE IGM'S CARDCAGE BACK- 5 Y IMP. PEAK B IMP. PEAK
PLANE PCB. THROUGH THlS CONNECTION THE IMPULSE PCB 6 Z IMP. PEAK C IMP. PEAK
ASSEMBLY ACCESSES THE ADDRESS BUS. DATA BUS, CONTROL 7 NIC NIC
BUS. + 5 AND 5 1 5 VOLT POWER SUPPLIES. 8 NIC
9 NI C
10 NIC

- -
-I &Lieberf
4mo macan h
m r P O B o x A185 Cdumrr auo r m
LDA IMPULSE ASSEMBLY
CONTAINS: (1) IMPULSE/ANALOQ PCB PART NO. 02C-0JW
(1) LOOlC PCB PART NO. 02W307 1
DESCRIPrIoN:
?he purpose of the sag/surge PCB assembly is to detect sags and
surges on the input voltage (phase to phase) or output voltage (phase
to neutral) of the Liebert power unit in which the Line Disturbance
Analyzer (m)is installed. Each El% assembly has 2 sag/surge
assemblies, the first to monitor the input voltage, and the second to
monitor the output voltage. Sag/surge events are reported on the
Liebert Sitemaster monitor printwt. Either factory setpoints (+7%,
-10% of mdnal line voltage) or user setpoints (set via the Liebert
service temninal) are used for caparison to obtain the sag/surge

&p Identification bv Function

cp ~ m OP
p 420- Phase 1 Amplifier
INXOIAM Instrumentation Amplifier
cp Amp OP 420- Precision Filter, Phase 1
A/D Converter HI-5712
op ~ m OP
p 4 2 0 4 Phase 2 Amplifier
DRIOIAM Instrumentation Amplifier
op Amp OP 4 2 0 4 Precision Filter, Phase 2
MJX 508-7 Multiplexer
74x138 Demder for U8
C p Amp OP 4 2 0 4 Phase 3 Anplifier
INlOlAM Instrumentation Amplifier
op Amp OP 420- Precision Filter, Phase 3
74x174 Latch for Channel Selection
74x130 Channel Decoder for U9
C p Amp R4I 5135 Euffer

?HEORY OF OPERATION:
KITE: % description considers only a single input phase.
R e m i n i n g phases are mirror images of the first. Table 2 shows
circuitry associated with each phase.

Precision -
t Gain Set &
LW?& Redifier A Filter
Line voltage informtion is received from t h e IGl interface board v i a
PI. ?his input voltage is isolated by buffer/follmer (1/4 U1) and
precision r e c t i f i e d by 1/4 U 1 and U2. Following the U2 stage, gain
is controlled for t h e %sel filter by 1/4 U1. ?he f i l t e r is a loth
order Bessel f i l t e r comprised of 5 sections (1/4 U 1 and 4/4 U3) t o
provide a "brick wall" f o r any transients. Outpvt of the f i l t e r is
muted t o the multiplexer, U8. ?he multiplexer, using control
information provided thrcqh the U13 latch by demdezs U14 and U9,
sends the ar'alcy sag/surge voltage information throqh the U15 buffer
t o the A/D converter, U4. Control signals f o r U4 are: Start, high
byte enable, and l o w byte enable. These signals are received from
U9. ou-t frcw U4, A/D is mted to the microprocessor data bus.

Analog iripulse amplitude information received from t h e andlog inpulse

M is also routed to multiplexer Ua v i a Pl. Frmn the multiplexer,
this impulse d o g information is muted through U15 buffer and A/D,
U4, as indicated abwe f o r sag/surge data.
 _------

CIiW'EL SELECT
CIRCUITRY
PPRECISION
RECSIOIN
FECTlFlER
INSTRUHENTATION
WLIFIER
IOTH [Y(OER
BESSEL
U9,U13,U14
FILTER

-
- L - -PHASE
- . - - . -2 - - -

PRECISION
ECTlFlER
INSTRINENTRTION
PNnlFlER
lOTH
BESSEL
I
FILTER
PHASE 3 - --I
SAG/SURGE LDA
BLOCK DIAGRAM
 DIP SWITCH PROGRAMMING

OUTPUT
SAGISURGE (10 88UJ
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 Fig.A- ,
\
[ .means this side pushed down]

(008800 1 ,,, B i
1
INPUT
SAGISURGE
6 5 4 3 2 1

JUMPER DIP SWITCH

OUTPUT J1 Fig. A
SAGISURGE
-

SAG/SURGE PCB
INPUT
SAGISURGE I J2
I
1
Fig. B

(2 PCB's PER LDA SYSTEM)

(1 INPUT AND 1 OUTPUT)
SAGISURGE CONNECTOR

JUMPER PROGRAMMING
FOR INPUT OR OUTPUT
SAGISURGE PCB.
J1 1 J 2

ZSIS CSlS
Y SIS R SlS
10 X SIS A SIS

THlS PCB PLUGS INTO THE IGM'S CARDCAGE BACKPLANE PCB.

THROUGH THlS CONNECTION THE SAGISURGE PCB ACCESSES
THE ADDRESS BUS, DATA BUS. CONTROL BUS. + 5 A N 0 +15
VOLT POWER SUPPLIES. .
E>RCJ"I Pcsiticn - LDA

Micro-Processor Bd
r

L Batfcry Barked
~ ! o c k . / ~ k lEd
.$ r-
The primary purpme of the ID+ i n p l s e a s s a b l y is to monitor bath
irrput (phase to phase) and outp-lt ((phase to neutral) A.C. voltage for
hi$ voltage inplses (spikes) w h i c h are above a fadory or customer
threshold. There are two LDA i n p l s e assemblies per LDA systw: one
mnitors bpt v o l t a g e (assembly #1C17423G1) ; a d the secord monitors
~ t v o l t a g e(assembly #1C17423G2). Each IDA impulse assembly is
mnstruckd fnan 2 FG3 assemblies: one, an LDA d q impllse
assembly (assembly #020-0306) ; the second, an IDA logic PCB assembly
(assembly #020-0307). T h e s e PCBs are p- to
either an irgut o r output assembly. The IDA inpxiLse assembly
captures the irrpxiLse q l i t u d e (to 4000 volts) and duration (to 2.089
mSec). Inpulse information is scaled on the IG24 interface board by a
resistor divider suh that a 4 I(V impilse riw on a 480 A.C. pder
line w i l l be seen as an 14.22 volt in@ to the IDA W s e
assembly. Ihe IDA p m this infomation and semk it t o the
Liebert Sitatlaster for a printed event report. The following pages
w i l l detail the operation of the IDA logic PCB aserrbly.

ampxent DesiqnationfFcmdion Table

ul OP - 16 Voltage Foil-
U2 TI-082 op Amp
U3 AD507 Op Amp
u4 Op Amp
U5 HI1 A n a l o g Switch
U6-7 CMW~EZCwrparator
U8 74I532 Logic Gate
U9 HA2425-5 Sample/Hold
ulo Not U s e d
U11 m 2 Conpmtor
U12 Sameasul
u13 D i p shunt
U14 SameasU2
U15 SameasU3
U16 Same as u4
Same as U6-7
74LS04 mic Control
Same as u9
Not U s e d
Same as ul1
Sameasul
Sameasm
Same as u3
Same as u4
Same as u5
Same as U6-7
Same as U9
Not used
Same as u11
 %is description considers only a single phase (of a three
NOTE:
phase syutw) i n m -=signal.
. .
~ernauungphasesaremirror
inages of the f i r s t . Table 2 lists individual circuitry associated
w i t h each phase.
TABLE 2

Phase 0 1 Phase 02 Phase 03

-Ccarplonerrt
Eqmlse separator . . . .' . . . . . U2-U3 . . . Ul4-15 . . U24-25
Table Absolute Value & . . . . . U4, U5 . . Ul6, U17 . . U26, U27
Switch & StarystOp U6, U7 Ul8, U27 U28, U29

Start/stOp Signal ......... US . . . . . Zrs . . . . U8

signdls are m v e d from the IGM (Interface PCB Assembly)

via -4 (reference drawing 020-0306). on the I a (Interface PCB
s l y ) board, h@se voltages a r e scaled by a voltage divider
network sxh that a 4000 volt spike riding on a 480 vo1tA.C. line
w i l l p-ce a maxinnrm pulse of 14.22 volts. This result is fed via
P-4 to the analog impilse. A t f o l l m Ul the signal is buffered.
F r C H L U 1 t h e i n p x i l s e p ~ ~ i n p x i l s e s e p a r a t o lr /, 2 m - U 3 -
1/2 U2. A t the f i r s t half of 0 2 , the irput o r c u t p t configuration
isdeterminadby Dip ShuntUU. meOpAnpU3 is ccanpensatedto
eliminate tratsients, i.e. impulses. his result is cambined in the
second -@lfof U2, wfiich elhimates the amanon signdl and f i l t e r s out
any l m frequency, e.g. 50 or 60 HZ, passing only the m s e . Tne
f i r s t half of U4 provides the inversion of the irrplilse signal for
absolute value amversion.

Cirnzitry consisting of comparator U6, referenced to +0.238 volts and

1 comparator U7, referenced to -0.238 volts prwides appropriate
1 control signals to switch U5 such that only the inverted absolute
value of the bplse is passed to the sears3 h a l f of U4 which
I reinverts the signal providing true absolute value. IW1 (F2 and P3)
I ,-- provides pill up resistors t o clamp outprt of U6 ard U7 to 'FIX
\
l
j levels; this result controls U19 which contnsls operation of U5,
I anal- switch. O & p t from U6 and u7 dLso provide a start/stop ( S / S )
I
I signal t o U8. 'Ihis start/stop signal is muted to the LDA logic
board via F2 for capturing the associated inpulse duration.
'
N m :
ASSY HARNESS- SKC-03088 2
WIRING DVK.RM-SKD-081382
P
S Y S T E M NCL
SIT
Awa~N u u s f a r rRr GWEN
TO P E F f I I E Y C E ,OUT AM0
-OUT. T H I S U A T f - Y - L O C
ALSO COYTAIU: COHWEC-
TlOYS TO AUALOC COYYOI
INO*I5VOLTS,HOT
SHOWN HERE FC4 C U R I T V

SITESCAY
SERVICE
CONYECTOR
T E RAT
MIN
I CAYL

S P L ~ L *a x -
3 5 " Faom dame Fcr
~ O ~ S C L *Y- D

Y C Y P ::I*-.," I
PAYEL
C"0
65
LIEBERT POWER PRODUCTS

SCHEMATICS 870-00-0001

SECTION 10

I1-DRAWINGS
 X

8 ,
I > 1 . 2 I.?:> ,.?.'2 . -,*,m
(PI

lSsY m lSM

IXH
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIEG)

IXL 1. ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 1%

.-.-. --
IY H

IY L

IZH

IZL

IGH

IGL I I INTERFACE "

INH

INL